diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 5337.txt | 16428 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 5337.zip | bin | 0 -> 293565 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
5 files changed, 16444 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/5337.txt b/5337.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ac90ee --- /dev/null +++ b/5337.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16428 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Thirty-One Years on the Plains and In the Mountains +by William F. Drannan + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: Thirty-One Years on the Plains and In the Mountains + +Author: William F. Drannan + +Release Date: March, 2004 [EBook #5337] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on July 2, 2002] +[Date last updated: July 5, 2006] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THIRTY-ONE YEARS ON THE PLAINS AND IN THE MOUNTAINS *** + + + + +Robert Rowe, Charles Franks and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + +THIRTY-ONE YEARS ON THE +PLAINS AND IN THE MOUNTAINS + +OR, + +THE LAST VOICE FROM THE PLAINS. +AN AUTHENTIC RECORD OF A LIFE TIME OF HUNTING, +TRAPPING, SCOUTING AND INDIAN FIGHTING IN THE FAR WEST + +BY + +CAPT. WILLIAM F. DRANNAN, + +WHO WENT ON TO THE PLAINS WHEN FIFTEEN YEARS OLD. + + + + + + +PREFACE. + +In writing this preface I do so with the full knowledge that the +preface of a book is rarely read, comparatively speaking, but I +shall write this one just the same. + +In writing this work the author has made no attempt at romance, or +a great literary production, but has narrated in his own plain, +blunt way, the incidents of his life as they actually occurred. + +There have been so many books put upon the market, purporting to +be the lives of noted frontiersmen which are only fiction, that I +am moved to ask the reader to consider well before condemning this +book as such. + +The author starts out with the most notable events of his boyhood +days, among them his troubles with an old negro virago, wherein he +gets his revenge by throwing a nest of lively hornets under her +feet. Then come his flight and a trip, to St. Louis, hundreds of +miles on foot, his accidental meeting with that most eminent man +of his class, Kit Carson, who takes the lad into his care and +treats him as a kind father would a son. He then proceeds to give +a minute description of his first trip on the plains, where he +meets and associates with such noted plainsmen as Gen. John +Charles Fremont, James Beckwith, Jim Bridger and others, and gives +incidents of his association with them in scouting, trapping, +hunting big game, Indian fighting, etc. + +The author also gives brief sketches of the springing into +existence of many of the noted cities of the West, and the +incidents connected therewith that have never been written before. +There is also a faithful recital of his many years of scouting for +such famous Indian fighters as Gen. Crook, Gen. Connor, Col. +Elliott, Gen. Wheaton and others, all of which will be of more +than passing interest to those who can be entertained by the early +history of the western part of our great republic. + +This work also gives an insight into the lives of the hardy +pioneers of the far West, and the many trials and hardships they +had to undergo in blazing the trail and hewing the way to one of +the grandest and most healthful regions of the United States. +W. F. D. + + CHICAGO, August 1st, 1899. + + + + +CONTENTS. + +CHAPTER 1. A Boy Escapes a Tyrant and Pays a Debt with a Hornet's +Nest--Meets Kit Carson and Becomes the Owner of a Pony and a Gun + +CHAPTER 2. Beginning of an Adventurous Life--First Wild Turkey-- +First Buffalo--First Feast as an Honored Guest of Indians--Dog +Meat + +CHAPTER 3. Hunting and Trapping in South Park, Where a Boy, +Unaided, Kills and Scalps Two Indians--Meeting with Fremont, the +"Path-finder" + +CHAPTER 4. A Winter in North Park--Running Fight with a Band of +Utes for More than a Hundred Miles, Ending Hand to Hand--Victory + +CHAPTER 5. On the Cache-la-Poudre--Visit from Gray Eagle, Chief of +the Arapahoes.--A Bear-hunter is Hunted by the Bear--Phil, the +Cannibal + +CHAPTER 6. Two Boys Ride to the City of Mexico--Eleven Hundred +Miles of Trial, Danger and Duty--A Gift Horse--The Wind River +Mountains + +CHAPTER 7. A Three Days' Battle Between the Comanches and the Utes +for the Possession of a "Hunter's Paradise"--An Unseasonable Bath. + +CHAPTER 8. Kit Carson Kills a Hudson Bay Company's Trapper, Who +Was Spoiling for a Fight--Social Good Time with a Train of +Emigrants + +CHAPTER 9. Marriage of Kit Carson--The Wedding Feast--Providing +Buffalo Meat, in the Original Package, for the Boarding-house at +Bent's Fort + +CHAPTER 10. Robber Gamblers of San Francisco--Engaged by Col. +Elliott as Indian Scout--Kills and Scalps Five Indians--Promoted +to Chief Scout + +CHAPTER 11. A Lively Battle with Pah-Utes--Pinned to Saddle with +an Arrow--Some Very Good Indians--Stuttering Captain--Beckwith +Opens His Pass + +CHAPTER 12--Col. Elliott Kills His First Deer, and Secures a Fine +Pair of Horns as Present for His Father--Beckwith's Tavern-- +Society + +CHAPTER 13--Something Worse than Fighting Indians Dance at Col. +Elliott's--Conspicuous Suit of Buckskin I Manage to Get Back to +Beckwith's + +CHAPTER 14. Drilling the Detailed Scouts---We Get Among the Utes-- +Four Scouts Have Not Reported Yet--Another Lively Fight--Beckwith +Makes a Raise + +CHAPTER 15. A Hunt on Petaluma Creek--Elk Fever Breaks Out--The +Expedition to Klamath Lake--A Lively Brush with Modoc Indians + +CHAPTER 16. More Fish than I Had Ever Seen at One Time--We +Surprise Some Indians, Who Also Surprise Us--The Camp at Klamath +Lake--I Get Another Wound and a Lot of Horses + +CHAPTER 17. Discovery of Indians with Stolen Horses--We Kill the +Indians and Return the Property to Its Owners--Meeting of Miners-- +In Society Again + +CHAPTER 18. Trapping on the Gila--The Pimas Impart a Secret-- +Rescue of a White Girl--A Young Indian Ages--Visit to Taos--Uncle +Kit Fails to Recognize Me + +CHAPTER 19. A Warm Time in a Cold Country--A Band of Bannocks +Chase Us Into a Storm that Saves Us--Kit Carson Slightly Wounded-- +Beckwith Makes a Century Run + +CHAPTER 20. Carson Quits the Trail--Buffalo Robes for Ten Cents-- +"Pike's Peak or Bust"--The New City of Denver--"Busted"--How the +News Started + +CHAPTER 21. A Fight With the Sioux--Hasa, the Mexican Boy, Killed +--Mixed Up With Emigrants Some More--Four New Graves--Successful +Trading With the Kiowas + +CHAPTER 22. A Trip to Fort Kearney--The General Endorses Us and We +Pilot an Emigrant Train to California--Woman Who Thought I Was "no +Gentleman"--A Camp Dance + +CHAPTER 23. Bridger and West Give Christmas a High Old Welcome in +Sacramento--California Gulch--Meeting with Buffalo Bill--Thirty- +three Scalps with One Knife + +CHAPTER 24. Face to Face with a Band of Apaches--The Death of +Pinto--The Closest Call I Ever Had--A Night Escape--Back at Fort +Douglas + +CHAPTER 25. Three Thousand Dead Indians--A Detective from Chicago +--He Goes Home with an Old Mormon's Youngest Wife and Gets into +Trouble--The Flight + +CHAPTER 26.--Through to Bannock--A Dance of Peace Fright of the +Negroes--A Freight Train Snowed in and a Trip on Snow-shoes--Some +Very Tough Road Agents + +CHAPTER 27. Organization of a Vigilance Committee--End of the +Notorious Slade--One Hundred Dollars for a "Crow-bait" Horse-- +Flour a Dollar a Pound. + +CHAPTER 28. Twenty-two Thousand Dollars in Gold Dust--A Stage +Robbery--Another Trip to California Meeting with Gen. Crook--Chief +of Scouts + +CHAPTER 29. Find Some Murdered Emigrants--We Bury the Dead and +Follow and Scalp the Indians--Gen. Crook Is Pleased with the +Outcome--A Mojave Blanket + +CHAPTER 30. A Wicked Little Battle--Capture of One Hundred and +Eighty-two Horses--Discovery of Black Canyon--Fort Yuma and the +Paymaster + +CHAPTER 31. To California for Horses--My Beautiful Mare, Black +Bess--We Get Sixty-six Scalps and Seventy-eight Horses--A Clean +Sweep + +CHAPTER 32. Some Men Who Were Anxious for a Fight and Got It--Gen. +Crook at Black Canyon--Bad Mistake of a Good Man--The Victims + +CHAPTER 33. The Massacre at Choke Cherry Canyon--Mike Maloney Gets +Into a Muss--Rescue of White Girls--Mike Gets Even with the +Apaches + +CHAPTER 34. Massacre of the Davis Family--A Hard Ride and Swift +Retribution--A Pitiful Story--Burial of the Dead--I am Sick of the +Business + +CHAPTER 35. Black Bess Becomes Popular in San Francisco--A Failure +as Rancher--Buying Horses in Oregon--The Klamath Marsh--Captain +Jack the Modoc + +CHAPTER 36. The Modoc War--Gen. Wheaton Is Held Off by the +Indians--Gen. Canby Takes Command and Gets It Worse-Massacre of +the Peace Commission + +CHAPTER 37-The Cry of a Babe--Capture of a Bevy of Squaws-- +Treachery of Gen. Ross' Men in Killing Prisoners--Capture of the +Modoc Chief + +CHAPTER 38. Story of the Captured Braves--Why Captain Jack +Deserted--Loathsome Condition of the Indian Stronghold--End of the +War--Some Comments + +CHAPTER 39. An Interested Boy--Execution of the Modoc Leaders-- +Newspaper Messengers--A Very Sudden Deputy Sheriff--A Bad Man +Wound Up + +CHAPTER 40. In Society Some More--A Very Tight Place--Ten Pairs of +Yankee Ears--Black Bess Shakes Herself at the Right Time--Solemn +Compact. + +CHAPTER 41. We Locate a Small Band of Red Butchers and Send them +to the Happy Hunting Grounds--Emigrants Mistake Us for Indians-- +George Jones Wounded + +CHAPTER 42. "We Are All Surrounded"--A Bold Dash and a Bad Wound-- +Mrs. Davis Shows Her Gratitude--Most of My Work Now Done on +Crutches + +CHAPTER 43. Poor Jones Makes His Last Fight--He Died Among a Lot +of the Devils He Had Slain--End of Thirty-one Years of Hunting, +Trapping and Scouting + +CHAPTER 44. A Grizzley Hunts the Hunter--Shooting Seals in Alaskan +Waters--I Become a Seattle Hotel Keeper and the Big Fire Closes Me +Out--Some Rest--The Old Scout's Lament + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A BOY ESCAPES A TYRANT AND PAYS A DEBT WITH A HORNET'S NEST--MEETS +KIT CARSON AND BECOMES THE OWNER OF A PONY AND A GUN. + +The old saying that truth is stranger than fiction is emphasized +in the life of every man whose career has been one of adventure +and danger in the pursuit of a livelihood. Knowing nothing of the +art of fiction and but little of any sort of literature; having +been brought up in the severe school of nature, which is all +truth, and having had as instructor in my calling a man who was +singularly and famously truthful, truth has been my inheritance +and in this book I bequeath it to my readers. + +My name is William F. Drannan, and I was born on the Atlantic +ocean January 30, 1832, while my parents were emigrating from +France to the United States. + +They settled in Tennessee, near Nashville, and lived upon a farm +until I was about four years old. An epidemic of cholera prevailed +in that region for some months during that time and my parents +died of the dread disease, leaving myself and a little sister, +seven months old, orphans. + +I have never known what became of my sister, nor do I know how I +came to fall into the hands of a man named Drake, having been too +young at that time to remember now the causes of happenings then. +However, I remained with this man, Drake, on his plantation near +The Hermitage, the home of Gen. Andrew Jackson, until I was +fifteen. + +Drake was a bachelor who owned a large number of negro slaves, and +I was brought up to the age mentioned among the negro children of +the place, without schooling, but cuffed and knocked about more +like a worthless puppy than as if I were a human child. I never +saw the inside of a school-house, nor was I taught at home +anything of value. Drake never even undertook to teach me the +difference between good and evil, and my only associates were the +little negro boys that belonged to Drake, or the neighbors. The +only person who offered to control or correct me was an old negro +woman, who so far from being the revered and beloved "Black +Mammy," remembered with deep affection by many southern men and +women, was simply a hideous black tyrant. She abused me +shamefully, and I was punished by her not only for my own +performances that displeased her, but for all the meanness done by +the negro boys under her jurisdiction. + +Naturally these negro boys quickly learned that they could escape +punishment by falsely imputing to me all of their mischief and I +was their scape-goat. + +Often Drake's negro boys went over to General Jackson's plantation +to play with the negro boys over there and I frequently +accompanied them. One day the old General asked me why I did not +go to school. But I could not tell him. I did not know why. I have +known since that I was not told to go and anyone knows that a boy +just growing up loose, as I was, is not likely to go to school of +his own accord. + +I do not propose to convey to the reader the idea that I was +naturally better than other boys, on the contrary, I frequently +deserved the rod when I did not get it, but more frequently +received a cruel drubbing when I did not deserve it, that, too, at +the hands of the old negro crone who was exceedingly violent as +well as unjust. This, of course, cultivated in me a hatred against +the vile creature which was little short of murderous. + +However, I stayed on and bore up under my troubles as there was +nothing else to do, so far as I knew then, but "grin and bear it." +This until I was fifteen years old. + +At this time, however ignorant, illiterate, wild as I was, a faint +idea of the need of education dawned upon me. I saw other white +boys going to school; I saw the difference between them and myself +that education was rapidly making and I realized that I was +growing up as ignorant and uncultured as the slave boys who were +my only attainable companions. + +Somehow I had heard of a great city called St. Louis, and little +by little the determination grew upon me to reach that wonderful +place in some way. + +I got a few odd jobs of work, now and then, from the neighbors and +in a little while I had accumulated four dollars, which seemed a +great deal of money to me, and I thought I would buy about half of +St. Louis, if I could only get there. And yet I decided that it +would be just as well to have a few more dollars and would not +leave my present home, which, bad it was, was the only one I had, +until I had acquired a little more money. But coming home from +work one evening I found the old negress in an unusually bad +humor, even for her. She gave me a cruel thrashing just to give +vent to her feelings, and that decided me to leave at once, +without waiting to further improve my financial condition. I was +getting to be too big a boy to be beaten around by that old +wretch, and having no ties of friendship, and no one being at all +interested in me, I was determined to get away before my tormentor +could get another chance at me. + +I would go to St. Louis, but I must get even with the old hag +before starting. I did not wish to leave in debt to anyone in the +neighborhood and so I cudgeled my brain to devise a means for +settling old scores with my self-constituted governess. + +Toward evening I wandered into a small pasture, doing my best to +think how I could best pay off the black termagant with safety to +myself, when with great good luck I suddenly beheld a huge +hornet's nest, hanging in a bunch of shrubbery. My plan instantly +and fully developed. Quickly I returned to the house and hastily +gathered what little clothing I owned into a bundle, done up in my +one handkerchief, an imitation of bandanna, of very loud pattern. +This bundle I secreted in the barn and then hied me to the +hornet's nest. Approaching the swinging home of the hornets very +softly, so as not to disturb the inmates, I stuffed the entrance +to the hornet castle with sassafras leaves, and taking the great +sphere in my arms I bore it to a back window of the kitchen where +the black beldame was vigorously at work within and contentedly +droning a negro hymn. + +Dark was coming on and a drizzly rain was falling. It was the +spring of the year, the day had been warm and the kitchen window +was open. I stole up to the open window. The woman's back was +toward me. I removed the plug of sassafras leaves and hurled the +hornet's nest so that it landed under the hag's skirts. + +I watched the proceedings for one short moment, and then, as it +was getting late, I concluded I had better be off for St. Louis. +So I went away from there at the best gait I could command. + +I could hear my arch-enemy screaming, and it was music to my ears +that even thrills me yet, sometimes. It was a better supper than +she would have given me. + +I saw the negroes running from the quarters, and elsewhere, toward +the kitchen, and I must beg the reader to endeavor to imagine the +scene in that culinary department, as I am unable to describe it, +not having waited to see it out. + +But I slid for the barn, secured my bundle and started for the +ancient city far away. + +All night, on foot and alone, I trudged the turnpike that ran +through Nashville. I arrived in that city about daylight, tired +and hungry, but was too timid to stop for something to eat, +notwithstanding I had my four dollars safe in my pocket, and had +not eaten since noon, the day before. + +I plodded along through the town and crossed the Cumberland river +on a ferry-boat, and then pulled out in a northerly direction for +about an hour, when I came to a farm-house. In the road in front +of the house I met the proprietor who was going from his garden, +opposite the house, to his breakfast. + +He waited until I came up, and as I was about to pass on, he said: +"Hello! my boy, where are you going so early this morning?" + +I told him I was on my way to St. Louis. + +"St. Louis?" he said. "I never heard of that place before. Where +is it?" + +I told him I thought it was in Missouri, but was not certain. + +"Are you going all the way on foot, and alone?" + +I answered that I was, and that I had no other way to go. With +that I started on. + +"Hold on," he said. "If you are going to walk that long way you +had better come in and have some breakfast." + +You may rest assured that I did not wait for a second invitation, +for about that time I was as hungry as I had ever been in my life. + +While we were eating breakfast the farmer turned to his oldest +daughter and said: + +"Martha, where is St. Louis?" + +She told him it was in Missouri, and one of the largest towns in +the South or West. "Our geography tells lots about it," she said. + +I thought this was about the best meal I had ever eaten in my +life, and after it was over I offered to pay for it, but the kind- +hearted old man refused to take anything, saying: "Keep your +money, my boy. You may need it before you get back. And on your +return, stop and stay with me all night, and tell us all about St. +Louis." + +After thanking them, I took my little bundle, bade them good-bye, +and was on my journey again. I have always regretted that I did +not learn this good man's name, but I was in something of a hurry +just then, for I feared that Mr. Drake might get on my trail and +follow me and take me back, and I had no pressing inclination to +meet old Hulda again. + +I plodded along for many days, now and then looking back for Mr. +Drake, but not anxious to see him; rather the reverse. + +It is not necessary to lumber up this story with my trip to St. +Louis. I was about six weeks on the road, the greater part of the +time in Kentucky, and I had no use for my money. I could stay at +almost any farm-house all night, wherever I stopped, and have a +good bed and be well fed, but no one would take pay for these +accommodations. When I got to Owensboro, Ky., I became acquainted +by accident with the mate of a steamboat that was going to St. +Louis and he allowed me to go on the boat and work my way. + +The first person that I met in St Louis, that I dared to speak +with, was a boy somewhat younger than myself. I asked him his +name, and in broken English he replied that his name was Henry +Becket. + +Seeing that he was French, I began to talk to him in his own +language, which was my mother tongue, and so we were quickly +friends. I told him that my parents were both dead and that I had +no home, and he being of a kind-hearted, sympathetic nature, +invited me to go home with him, which invitation I immediately +accepted. + +Henry Becket's mother was a widow and they were very poor, but +they were lovingly kind to me. + +I told Mrs. Becket of my troubles with Mr. Drake's old negro +woman; how much abuse I had suffered at her hands and the widow +sympathized with me deeply. She also told me that I was welcome to +stay with them until such time as I was able to get employment. So +I remained with the Beckets three days, during all of which time I +tried hard to get work, but without success. + +On the morning of the fourth day she asked me if I had tried any +of the hotels for work. I told her that I had not, so she advised +me to go to some of them in my rounds. + +It had not occurred to me that a boy could find anything to do +about a hotel, but I took Mrs. Becket's advice, and that morning +called at the American hotel, which was the first one I came to. + +Quite boldly, for a green boy, I approached the person whom I was +told was the proprietor and asked him if he had any work for a +boy, whereupon he looked at me in what seemed a most scornful way +and said very tartly: + +"What kind of work do you think you could do?" + +I told him I could do most anything in the way of common labor. + +He gave me another half-scornful smile and said: + +"I think you had better go home to your parents and go to school. +That's the best place for you." + +This was discouraging, but instead of explaining my position, I +turned to go, and in spite of all that I could do the tears came +to my eyes. Not that I cared so much for being refused employment, +but for the manner in which the hotel man had spoken to me. I did +not propose to give up at that, but started away, more than ever +determined to find employment. I did not want to impose on the +Beckets, notwithstanding that they still assured me of welcome, +and moreover I wished to do something to help them, even more than +myself. + +I had nearly reached the door when a man who had been reading a +newspaper, but was now observing me, called out: + +"My boy! come here." + +I went over to the corner where he was sitting and I was trying at +the same time to dry away my tears. + +This man asked my name, which I gave him. He then asked where my +parents lived, and I told him that they died when I was four years +old. + +Other questions from him brought out the story of my boy-life; +Drake, Gen. Jackson, the negro boys and the brutal negress; then +my trip to St. Louis--but I omitted the hornet's-nest incident. I +also told this kindly stranger that I had started out to make a +living for myself and intended to succeed. + +Then he asked me where I was staying, and I told him of the +Beckets. + +Seeing that this man was taking quite an interest in me, gave me +courage to ask his name. He told me that his name was Kit Carson, +and that by calling he was a hunter and trapper, and asked me how +I would like to learn his trade. + +I assured him that I was willing to do anything honorable for a +living and that I thought I would very much like to be a hunter +and trapper. He said he would take me with him and I was entirely +delighted. Often I had wished to own a gun, but had never thought +of shooting anything larger than a squirrel or rabbit. I was ready +to start at once, and asked him when he would go. + +Smilingly he told me not to be in a hurry, and asked me where Mrs. +Becket lived. I told him as nearly as I could, and again asked +when he thought we would leave St. Louis. I was fearful that he +would change his mind about taking me with him. I didn't know him +then so well as afterward. I came to learn that his slightest word +was his bond. + +But visions of Mr. Drake, an old negro woman and a hornet's nest, +still haunted me and made me overanxious. I wanted to get as far +out of their reach as possible and still remain on the earth. + +Mr. Carson laughed in a quiet and yet much amused way and said: + +"You must learn to not do anything until you are good and ready, +and there are heaps of things to do before we can start out. Now +let's go and see Mrs. Becket." + +So I piloted him to the widow's home, which, as near as I can +remember, was about four blocks from the hotel. Mr. Carson being +able to speak French first-rate, had a talk with Mrs. Becket +concerning me. The story she told him, corresponding with that +which I had told him, he concluded that I had given him nothing +but truth, and then he asked Mrs. Becket what my bill was. She +replied that she had just taken me in because I was a poor boy, +until such time as I could find employment, and that her charges +were nothing. He then asked her how long I had been with her, and +being told that it was four days, he begged her to take five +dollars, which she finally accepted. + +I took my little budget of clothes and tearfully bidding Mrs. +Becket and Henry good-bye, started back to the hotel with my new +guardian, and I was the happiest boy in the world, from that on, +so long as I was a boy. + +On the way back to the hotel Mr. Carson stopped with me at a store +and he bought me a new suit of clothes, a hat and a pair of boots, +for I was barefooted and almost bareheaded. Thus dressed I could +hardly realize that I was the Will Drannan of a few hours before. + +That was the first pair of boots I had ever owned. Perhaps, dear +reader, you do not know what that means to a healthy boy of +fifteen. + +It means more than has ever been written, or ever will be. + +I was now very ready to start out hunting, and on our way to the +hotel I asked Mr. Carson if he did not think we could get away by +morning, but he told me that to hunt I would probably need a gun, +and we must wait until he could have one made for me, of proper +size for a boy. + +The next day we went to a gun factory and Mr. Carson gave orders +concerning the weapon, after which we returned to the hotel. We +remained in St. Louis about three weeks and every day seemed like +an age to me. At our room in the hotel Mr. Carson would tell me +stories about hunting and trapping, and notwithstanding the +intense interest of the stories the days were longer, because I so +much wished to be among the scenes he talked of, and my dreams at +night were filled with all sorts of wonderful animals, my fancy's +creation from what Mr. Carson talked about. I had never fired a +gun in my life and I was unbearably impatient to get my hands on +the one that was being made for me. + +During the wait at St. Louis, Henry Becket was with me nearly all +the time, and when we were not haunting the gun factory, we were, +as much as possible, in Mr. Carson's room at the hotel, listening +to stories of adventure on the plains and among the mountains. + +I became, at once, very much attached to Mr. Carson and I thought +there was not another man in the United States equal to him--and +there never has been, in his line. Besides, since the death of my +mother he was the only one who had taken the slightest interest in +me, or treated me like a human being, barring, of course, the +Beckets and those persons who had helped me on my long walk from +Nashville to St. Louis. + +Finally Mr. Carson--whom I had now learned to address as Uncle +Kit--said to me, one morning, that as my gun was about completed +we would make preparations to start West. So we went out to a +farm, about two miles from St. Louis, to get the horses from where +Uncle Kit had left them to be cared for during the winter. + +We went on foot, taking a rope, or riatta, as it is called by +frontiersmen, and on the way to the farm I could think or talk of +nothing but my new rifle, and the buffalo, deer, antelope and +other game that I would kill when I reached the plains. Uncle Kit +remarked that he had forgotten to get me a saddle, but that we +would not have to wait to get one made, as there were plenty of +saddles that would fit me already made, and that he would buy me +one when he got back to town. + +When we reached the farm where the horses were, Uncle Kit pointed +out a little bay pony that had both his ears cropped off at the +tips, and he said: + +"Now Willie, there is your pony. Catch him and climb on," at the +same time handing me the riatta. + +The pony being gentle I caught and mounted him at once, and by the +time we had got back to town money could not have bought that +little crop-eared horse from me. As will be seen, later on, I kept +that pony and he was a faithful friend and servant until his +tragic death, years afterward. + +In two days we had a pack-train of twenty horses rigged for the +trip. The cargo was mostly tobacco, blankets and beads, which +Carson was taking out to trade to the Indians for robes and furs. +Of course all this was novel to me as I had never seen a pack- +saddle or anything associated with one. + +A man named Hughes, of whom you will see much in this narrative, +accompanied and assisted Uncle Kit on this trip, as he had done +the season before, for besides his experience as a packer, he was +a good trapper, and Uncle Kit employed him. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +BEGINNING OF AN ADVENTUROUS LIFE.--FIRST WILD TURKEY.--FIRST +BUFFALO.--FIRST FEAST AS AN HONORED GUEST OF INDIANS.--DOG MEAT. + + +It was on the morning of May 3, 1847, that we rounded up the +horses and Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes began packing them. + +It being the first trip of the season some of the pack-ponies were +a little frisky and would try to lie down when the packs were put +on them. So it became my business to look after them and keep them +on their feet until all were packed. + +Everything being in readiness, I shook hands, good-bye, with my +much-esteemed friend, Henry Becket, who had been helping me with +the pack-horses, and who also coveted my crop-eared pony, very +naturally for a boy. Then we were off for a country unknown to me, +except for what Uncle Kit had told me of it. + +My happiness seemed to increase, if that were possible. I was +unspeakably glad to get away from St. Louis before Mr. Drake had +learned of my whereabouts, and up to the time of this writing I +have never been back to St. Louis, or Tennessee, nor have I heard +anything of Mr. Drake or my ancient enemy, the angel of Erebus. + +From St. Louis we struck out westward, heading for Ft. Scott, +which place is now a thriving little city in southeastern Kansas, +but then the extreme out-edge of settlement. + +The first day out we traveled until about 2 o'clock in the +afternoon, when we came to a fine camping place with abundance of +grass, wood and water. + +Uncle Kit, thinking we had traveled far enough for the first day, +said: + +"I reckon the lad is gittin' tired, Hughes, 's well as the horses, +an' I think we'd better pull up for the day." + +I was glad to hear this, for I had done more riding chat day than +in any one day in my life, before. + +Uncle Kit told me it would be my job, on the trip as soon as my +horse was unsaddled, to gather wood and start a fire, while he and +Mr. Hughes unpacked the animals. So I unsaddled my horse, and by +the time they had the horses unpacked I had a good fire going and +plenty of water at hand for all purposes. Mr. Hughes, meantime, +got out the coffee-pot and frying-pan, and soon we had a meal that +I greatly enjoyed and which was the first one for me by a camp- +fire. + +After we had eaten, and smoked and lounged for a while, Uncle Kit +asked me if I did not wish to try my rifle. + +Of course I did. + +So taking a piece of wood and sharpening one end that it might be +driven into the ground, he took a piece of charcoal and made on +the flat side of the wood a mark for me to shoot at. + +"Now Willie," said Uncle Kit, "if you ever expect to be a good +hunter you must learn to be a good shot, and you can't begin +practicin' too soon." + +I had never fired a gun, but I had made up my mind to be a mighty +hunter and so started in for shooting practice with much zeal. +Uncle Kit gave me few instructions about How to hold the gun, and +I raised the rifle to my face and fired the first shot of my life. + +I do not know how close my bullet came to that mark, nor how far +it missed, for the wood was untouched. But I tried it again and +with much better success, for this time I struck the stick about +eight inches below the mark. This was great encouragement and from +that on I could scarcely take time to eat meals in camp, in my +anxiety to practice, and I was further encouraged by Uncle Kit's +approval of my desire to practice. + +One evening I overheard Uncle Kit say to Mr. Hughes, "That boy is +going to make a dead shot afterwhile." + +This gave me great faith in my future as a hunter and Uncle Kit +and Mr. Hughes seemed to take great delight in teaching me all the +tricks of rifle marksmanship. + +After we had traveled about two days we came to a belt of country +where there were wild turkeys in great numbers, and on the morning +of the third day out, Uncle Kit called me early, saying: + +"Come Willie, jump up now, an' le's go an' see if we can't git a +wild turkey for breakfast." He had heard the turkeys that morning +and knew which direction to go to find them. + +I rolled out and was quickly dressed and ready. + +When near the turkey haunt Uncle Kit took a quill from his pocket +and by a peculiar noise on the quill called the turkeys up near to +him, then took aim at one, fired and killed it. + +"Now Willie," he said, "do you think you can do that to-morrow +morning?" + +I told him that I thought if I could get close enough, and the +turkeys would stand right still, I believed I could fetch one. And +I desired to know if it was certain that there would be turkeys +where we were to camp that night. + +"Oh, yes;" said he, "thar'll be plenty of 'em for some days yit." + +Early the next morning Uncle Kit called me as usual, and said, +"Git up now, an' see what you can do for a turkey breakfast." + +Instantly I was on my feet, Uncle Kit showed me the direction to +go, loaned me his turkey-call quill, which, by the way, he had +been teaching me how to use as we rode the day before. + +I shouldered my rifle and had not gone far when I heard the +turkeys, up the river. Then I took the quill and started my turkey +tune. Directly a big old gobbler came strutting towards me and I +called him up as near to me as he would come, for I wanted to make +sure of him. + +Uncle Kit had told me about the "buck-ague" and I knew I had it +when I tried to draw a bead on that big gobbler. I had never shot +at a living thing, and when I leveled my rifle it was impossible +to control my nerves. + +The turkey seemed to jump up and down, and appeared to me to be as +big as a pony, when I looked at him along the rifle. Two or three +times I tried to hold the bead on him, but could not. Now I +wouldn't have missed killing him for anything, in reason, for I +feared that Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes would laugh at me. + +At last, however, the sights of my gun steadied long enough for me +to pull the trigger, and to my great delight--and I may as well +admit, surprise--Mr. Gobbler tumbled over dead when I fired, and +he was so heavy as to be a good load for me to carry to camp. + +Now I was filled with confidence in myself, and became eager for a +shot at bigger game; antelope, deer or buffalo. + +In a few days we passed Ft. Scott and then we were entirely beyond +the bounds of civilization. + +From that on, until we reached our destination, the only living +things we saw were jack-rabbits, prairie-dogs, antelope, deer, +buffalo, sage-hens and Indians, barring, of course, insects, +reptiles and the like, and the little owls that live with the +prairie-dogs and sit upon the mounds of the dog villages, eyeing +affairs with seeming dignity and wisdom. + +The owls seem to turn their heads while watching you, their bodies +remaining stationary, until, it has been said, you may wring their +heads off by walking around them a few times. I would not have my +young friends believe, however, that this is true. It is only a +very old joke of the plains. + +The first herd of buffalo we saw was along a stream known as Cow +Creek and which is a tributary to the Arkansas river. We could see +the herd feeding along the hills in the distance. + +Here was good camping ground and it was time to halt for the +night. So as soon as we had decided on the spot to pitch camp, +Uncle Kit directed me to go and kill a buffalo, so that we might +have fresh meat for supper. + +That suited me, exactly, for I was eager to get a shot at such big +game. + +Uncle Kit told me to follow up the ravine until opposite the herd +and then climb the hill, but to be careful and not let the buffalo +see me. + +I followed his instructions to the dot, for I had come to believe +that what Kit Carson said was law and gospel, and what he didn't +know would not fill a book as large as Ayer's Almanac. I was +right, too, so far as plainscraft was concerned. + +Uncle Kit had also directed me to select a small buffalo to shoot +at, and to surely kill it, for we were out of meat. + +It so happened that when I got to the top of the hill and in sight +of the herd again the first animal that seemed to present an +advantageous shot was a two-year-old heifer. + +I dropped flat on the ground and crawled toward her, like a snake. +Once she raised her head, but the wind being in my favor, she did +not discern me, but put her head down and went on feeding. I +succeeded in crawling quite close enough to her, drew a bead on +her and fired. At the crack of the rifle she came to the ground, +"as dead as a door-nail," much to the surprise of Uncle Kit and +Mr. Hughes, who were watching me from a distance. + +When the animal fell, I threw my hat in the air and gave a yell +that would have done credit to an Apache warrior. + +Uncle Kit and I dressed the buffalo and carried the meat into camp +while Mr. Hughes gathered wood for the night-fires. + +I could scarcely sleep that night for thinking of my buffalo, and +could I have seen Henry Becket that night I would almost have +stunned him with my stories of frontier life. + +The novice is ever enthusiastic. + +The following morning we woke up early, and off, still heading up +the Arkansas river for Bent's Fort, and from here on the buffalo +were numerous, and we had that sort of fresh meat until we got +good and tired of it. + +The second day out from Cow Creek, in the afternoon, we saw about +twenty Indians coming towards us. At the word, "Indians," I could +feel my hair raise on end, and many an Indian has tried to raise +it since. + +This was my first sight of the red man. He looked to me to be more +of a black man. + +Uncle Kit asked Mr. Hughes what Indians he thought they were. The +reply was that he thought them to be Kiowas, and on coming up to +them the surmise proved to be correct. + +They were Black Buffalo, the chief of the Kiowas, and his +daughter, accompanied by twenty warriors. + +Black Buffalo, and indeed all the Kiowa tribe, were well +acquainted with Uncle Kit and had great respect for him. So a +general hand-shaking and pow-wow followed. + +Carson spoke their language as well as they could, and +consequently had no difficulty conversing with them. + +In those days very few Indians knew a word of English, +consequently all conversation with them had to be carried on in +the several tribal languages or dialects, or in the jargon. + +This latter was a short language composed of Indian, French and +English words, and was called "Chinook." It originated with the +fur traders of Astoria, Ore., and its growth was assisted by +missionaries, until it became the means of communication between +the whites and the Indians of the coast and interior of the vast +Northwest, and even between Indians whose dialects were unknown to +each other. In short it was a sort of Indian "Volapuk," and was +very easily mastered. There has been a dictionary of it printed, +and I have known a bright man to acquire the vocabulary in two or +three days. + +Black Buffalo and his little band shortly turned about and rode +back to their village, which was only two miles away. But they +first invited us to visit them, which we did, as not to have done +so would have been a violent breach of plains etiquette, that +might cause a disruption of friendship. + +In the Indian village, after our horses had been unpacked and +turned out to graze, Uncle Kit and Black Buffalo strolled about +among the lodges or wick-i-ups, of which there were something like +fifteen hundred. I followed very closely for I was mortally afraid +to get fifteen feet away from Uncle Kit, in that sort of company. + +Black Buffalo did us the honor, that evening, to take us to his +own private wick-i-up for supper. It was a custom with this, and +many other tribes of Indians, that conveyed great distinction to +visitors, to kill and cook for them a nice fat dog. However, I was +not then aware that I was so distinguished a guest, as indeed +neither I nor Mr. Hughes would have been had we not been in the +company of Kit Carson. With him we shone by reflected greatness. + +While we were out on our walk about the village, Black Buffalo's +cook was preparing this distinguishing feast for us. + +I had kept unusually quiet all the time we were among the Indians, +not even asking one question, which was very remarkable in me. For +I presume that on the journey I had asked more questions to the +lineal mile than any boy ever had before. + +But I ate the dog in silence and liked it. Of course I had no idea +what the meat was. So, Uncle Kit observing the gusto with which I +was devouring dog, asked me if I knew what the meat was. I told +him that I did not, but supposed it to be antelope, or buffalo. He +informed me that it was neither, but good, healthy dog. + +I thought he was joking, and simply replied that it was mighty +good meat, even if it was dog, and gave the matter no further +reflection, at the time. + +The next day, when Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes assured me that it was +really dog meat, we had eaten the night before, I felt very much +like throwing up everything I had eaten at the village, but it was +too late then. + +After supper, that night in the Indian village, we had what was +called a "peace smoke." The Chief selected about a dozen of his +braves, and all being seated in a circle, two of our party on one +side of the Chief, and Uncle Kit at his right, a pipe was lit and +the Chief took one whiff, the smoke of which he blew up into the +air. He then took another whiff, and turning to his chief guest, +handed him the pipe, who blew a whiff into the air and the second +one into the face of the host. This performance having been gone +through with for each guest, the Chief then handed the pipe to the +first Indian on his right, and thus it went around the circle, +each Indian blowing a whiff into the air. + +It was considered a great breach of etiquette to speak, or even +smile, during this ceremony. + +This Indian village was situated at Pawnee Rock, on the Arkansas +river, in a beautiful valley, in what is now the southwest corner +of Benton Co., Kan. The wick-i-ups were made of poles set on ends, +gathered together at the top, and covered with buffalo skins from +which the hair had been removed. + +The Kiowas were, at that time, the most numerous tribe of Indians +in the United States. + +Early the next morning after our dog-feast and peace-smoke, our +party was up and off, and I was particularly glad to get away, +feeling that I would rather camp out and feed on buffalo, +antelope, jack-rabbits and wild turkey than dwell in the lodges of +Kiowas and be "honored" with banquets of the nicest dogs in all +that region. + +We took the Santa Fe trail and the buffalo were so numerous along +the way that we had to take some pains to avoid them, as when they +were traveling or on a stampede, nothing could turn or stop them +and we would be in danger of being ground to atoms beneath their +thousands of hoofs. + +In two days more of travel we reached another Indian village, on +another beautiful plain, in what is now Pawnee Co., Kan. Here the +country was so level that one could see for miles in any +direction, and the sun rising or setting, seemed to come up or go +down, as a great golden disk, out of or into the earth. We could +see many bands of wild horses feeding on the luxuriant grasses, +and little did I think, then, that I would live to see the day +when that broad and unfenced plain would be converted into homes +for hundreds of the pale-faced race. + +We were met on the outskirts of the village by White Horse, Chief +of the Comanches, who, being an intimate friend of Uncle Kit, +shook hands with us and conducted us to his own wick-i-up. There +we unpacked the animals and piled up our goods, and White Horse +detailed an Indian to guard the packs day and night. + +After our horses had been picketed out to grass, the Chief took us +into his lodge to dine with him, and here again we had boiled dog +and the peace smoke. + +White Horse insisted upon our being his guests until morning, it +being about noon when we arrived, and as our horses were much +jaded we decided to give them the advantage of such a rest. + +The Comanche Chief was most exceedingly hospitable, in his way, +and would not allow us to eat of our own provisions, but insisted +upon our eating with him, and "trotted" out the best "grub" he +had. + +After breakfast the next morning our horses were brought in by the +Indians, who also helped us to pack, and we struck the trail +again, accompanied by White Horse and his daughter, who traveled +with us all that day and camped with us at night. + +That evening Uncle Kit killed a fine buffalo calf, and I thought +it the best meat I had ever eaten--even better than dog. + +The following morning the Chief and his daughter returned to the +village, and we proceeded on our journey. + +That day, riding along on my crop-eared pony, about fifty yards +behind my companions, I chanced to look behind me and I saw what I +thought to be a man, walking on a hill towards us, and he appeared +to be at least twenty feet high. As he got further down the hill +he appeared to grow shorter, until, I thought, he went down a +ravine and out of sight. + +I put spurs to Croppy and galloped up to Uncle Kit, and told him I +had seen the tallest man on earth, declaring that the man was at +least twenty feet high. + +"An' you saw a man that high?" said Uncle Kit + +"Indeed I did," I replied. + +"Sure you saw him?" he asked. + +"Yes, sir; and if you will watch you will see him come up out of +the ravine, directly." + +Uncle Kit, laughing, said: "It was not a man you saw, my boy, but +a mirage," and he explained to me the phenomena, which I became +familiar with in the years that followed. + +Sometimes the mirages present to the vision what appear to be men, +at other times bodies of water surrounded by trees, and often +houses and whole towns. They appear before you on the dryest +plains and then disappear as if the earth opened and swallowed +them. + +Early in June we reached Bent's Fort and met there Col. Bent and +his son, Mr. Roubidoux and his son, and a man named James Bridger, +of whom you will see a great deal, later on in this narrative. +These men were all traders, buying furs and buffalo robes from +Indians, white hunters and trappers. + +We remained at Bent's Fort six weeks, and often during that time +some one of the many hunters, trappers and traders, that made this +place their headquarters, would ask Uncle Kit what he was going to +do with that boy--meaning me. To all of which Carson would reply +"I'm goin' to make a hunter and trapper of him." + +During the six weeks at the fort I was out nearly every day with +some of the men, and to me they gave the name of "Young Kit." + +By the time we were ready to leave Bent's Fort, Young Kit became +quite a rider, and Uncle Kit had been training me in the dexterous +use of the rifle, shooting from my knee, lying on my back, resting +the gun on my toes, lying flat on my belly, resting the gun on my +hat, and in various other positions. + +Having disposed of all our blankets, beads and all of the tobacco, +except what was reserved for home consumption, we left Bent's +Fort, crossed the Arkansas river and followed up Apishapa creek +three days, when we came to the Rocky Mountains, among which we +were during four days, passing Trinkara Peak then turning south +toward a little Mexican village called Taos, where Uncle Kit made +his home, he having a house of his own in that village. + +On the morning after our arrival at Taos, Uncle Kit said to me at +breakfast: + +"Willie, there are a lot of Mexican boys here who would like to +play with you." + +Some of them were standing near in a group, gazing at me in much +wonderment. + +"But," continued Uncle Kit, "you will have to learn to speak their +language in order to have much fun. Go with them if you wish, and +tell me to-night how many words you have learned." + +Then he spoke to the group of boys in their own tongue and told +them I wished to play with them but couldn't speak their language, +and wanted to learn. + +We had a jolly time that day in many boyish games that I had never +seen, and when I came home Uncle Kit asked me how many words I had +learned. + +"Three," I replied. + +"Splendid!" he exclaimed. "'Twont be long fo' you are a fus'-class +Mexican." + +One evening, after we had been in Taos about two weeks, Uncle Kit +told me to put on my best suit and he would take me to a fandango. +I was not sure what a fandango was but was willing to experience +one, just the same, and, togged out in our best, we went to the +fandango, which was simply a Mexican dance. Sort of a public ball. + +I looked on that night with much interest, but declined to +participate further than that. I learned better in a little while, +and the fandango, with the tinkle of guitars and mandolins, the +clink of the cavalleros' spurs, and the laugh and beauty of the +Mexican senoritas, became a great pleasure to me. + +Thus began our life at the little Mexican town of Taos, the home +of that great hero of the West, Kit Carson. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +HUNTING AND TRAPPING IN SOUTH PARK, WHERE A BOY, UNAIDED, KILLS +AND SCALPS TWO INDIANS--MEETING WITH FREMONT, THE "PATH-FINDER." + + +One evening in October as I was getting ready to retire for the +night, Uncle Kit said to me: + +"Now Willie, to-morrow you must put in the day moulding bullets, +for we must begin making preparations to go trapping." + +This was pleasant news to me, for I had laid around so long with +nothing to do but skylark with those Mexican boys, that life was +getting to be monotonous. + +The reader will understand that in those early days we had only +muzzle-loading guns, and for every one of those we had to have a +pair of bullet-moulds the size of the rifle, and before starting +out on an expedition it was necessary to mould enough bullets to +last several weeks, if not the entire trip, and when you realize +that almost any time we were liable to get into a "scrap" with the +Indians, you can understand that it required a great number of +these little leaden missiles to accommodate the red brethren, as +well as to meet other uses. + +That evening after I had gone to bed, Mr. Hughes said: + +"Kit, what are you going to do with that boy?" + +"What boy?" asked Uncle Kit, as if he were astonished. + +"Why, Willie. What are you going to do with him while we are away +trapping?" + +"Why, take him along to help us, of course." + +"Thunderation!" exclaimed Hughes; "he will only be a bother to us +in the mountains." + +I had been with Kit Carson three months, and this was the first +time I had seen him, apparently, out of humor. But at Hughes' last +remark, he said in a decidedly angry tone: + +"Jim Hughes, I want you to understand that wherever I go that boy +can go, too, if he likes." + +Hughes seeing that Carson did not like what he had said about +"that boy," turned the matter off by saying that he had only made +the remark to tease the boy. + +Next morning Uncle Kit started a Mexican lad out to round up the +horses, and the next two days were spent in fixing up our pack- +saddles preparatory for the trip. + +Our horses were as fat as seals, as there was no end to the range +for them in this part of the country. + +All being in readiness we pulled out from Taos, four of us, Uncle +Kit, Mr. Hughes, myself and a Mexican boy named Juan. The latter +went along to bring our horses back home. + +We crossed back over that spur of the Rocky Mountains that we had +came in through, and struck the Arkansas river near where Pueblo, +Colo., now stands, and from here we polled for the headwaters of +that river, carefully examining every stream we came to for beaver +sign. + +We saw abundance of game on the trip, such as antelope, deer and +buffalo. + +When we had traveled up the river about two days, Uncle Kit +thought it was not best to take the horses any further as the +country was now too rough for them, so we spent the next two days +caching our cargo. + +As some may not know what a cache is, I will explain. + +Cache is French for "hide." A hole is dug in the ground and the +things to be hidden are put in there and covered with brush, then +with dirt, then more brush and more dirt, and the whole is covered +with turf, to make the surface look as natural as possible, so +that it is not likely to be discovered by Indians at a distance. + +We having about a thousand pounds of stores to cache, it was no +small job. + +On the morning of the third day in this camp, we all started out +to kill some game for Juan to take back home. Mr. Hughes started +out in one direction and Uncle Kit and I in the opposite. We had +gone but a short distance, when, looking across a canyon, I saw a +herd of some kind of animals and asked Uncle Kit what they were. +He told me they were bison, and complimented me on having such +good eyes. + +Bison, by the way, is the distinctive name in that region for +mountain buffalo, all buffalo belonging to the bison family. + +We then started on a round-about way to try and get in gunshot of +the herd, in which we were successful. When we had got in gunshot +of them and he had pointed out the one for me to shoot at, he +said: + +"Now take a rest on that big rock, and when I count three, pull +the trigger, and be sure that you break its neck." + +The guns went off so near together that I turned and asked Uncle +Kit why he didn't shoot, too, for I did not think that he had +fired; but as soon as the smoke from our guns had cleared away, I +saw two bison kicking their last. + +After dressing the animals we returned to camp and learned that +Mr. Hughes had killed two deer, which, with the two bisons, were +enough to load the pack-horses. + +We were now in the extreme south end of South Park, which was +mostly a prairie country, except along the streams, and more or +less pine trees were scattered here and there along the hillsides. + +Next morning we loaded the pack-horses with the game and Juan +started back home, alone, with the horses. + +After we had seen him off, we rolled up our blankets and taking +enough provisions to last several days, we "packed up our packs" +and pulled out up the Arkansas again. + +This, to me, was like breaking a colt to the saddle, only I didn't +buck. + +Notwithstanding I had a light pack, for I was a light subject, it +was hard work for me. Mr. Hughes had been out the year before, and +being a grown man, it did not worry him as it did me. However, we +traveled very slowly, looking well all the time for beaver sign. + +In the afternoon of the second day we came to where there was +plenty of beaver sign. In fact the trees they had gnawed down were +so thick that we could not travel along the river, but had to take +to the hillsides. + +We camped that night at the mouth of a little stream that empties +into the Arkansas, and the following morning, after looking over +the trapping ground, the two men selected a place to build our +winter quarters, and we went to work. They worked at the cabin +while I killed the game for our meat and did the cooking, my +outfit being a frying-pan, a coffee-pot and a tin cup for each of +us. + +They were about two weeks getting our cabin, or dugout, completed. +It was made by first digging out a place in the hillside, about +twelve feet square, and building up the front with logs, then +brush and pine boughs, and then the whole with dirt, the door was +made of hewed logs, fastened together with crossed pieces by means +of wooden pins, and it was hung on heavy wooden hinges. + +Our winter quarters being thus completed, Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes +set out one morning for the cache, intending to return that same +evening. Before starting they told me to go out some time during +the day and kill a small deer, that I would be able to carry to +camp, and have a good lot of it cooked for supper, as they would +be very hungry when they returned that night. They started +sometime before daylight, and I stayed around the cabin, clearing +things up and cutting wood, until about ten o'clock, then cleaned +up my rifle and started out to kill the deer. It was an easy +matter to find one, for they were as thick in that country as +sheep on a mutton farm. But, boy-like, I wandered off up the +canyon about two miles before I found a deer that just suited me, +and I wanted to see the country, anyway. + +At last I found a little deer that I thought about the right thing +and I killed and dressed it--or rather undressed it--threw it on +my shoulder and pulled for camp. + +Instead of going the way I had come, I climbed out on the ridge to +avoid the down timber, that was so thick in the creek bottom. When +I was near the top of the ridge, I looked off a short distance and +saw three Indians, on foot, going down the ridge in the direction +of our dug-out. + +I had often heard Uncle Kit tell how the Indians robbed the camps +of trappers and that they invariably burned the cabins. + +As soon as I got sight of the Indians, I dropped back over the +ridge, for, luckily, they had not got sight of me. In a few +seconds I did some powerful thinking, and I came to the conclusion +that it would never do to let them find our dug-out, for while it +would hardly burn, they might carry off our bedding, or destroy +it. So I crawled up to a log, took good aim at the leader and +fired, striking him just under the arm, bringing him down. The +other two dropped to their knees, and looked all around, and I +suppose the only thing that saved me was the wind was coming from +them to me and blew the smoke from my gun down the canyon, so that +they did not see where the shot came from. + +I heard Uncle Kit tell of lying on his back and loading his rifle, +when in a close place, so I did likewise and crawled up to my log +again. The remaining two Indians, having looked all around and +seeing no one, had got on their feet again, and were standing with +bow and arrow in hand, each having a quiver full of arrows on his +back, and if they had got sight of me that would have been the +last of Young Kit. But I took aim at one of them and fired, with +the same result as before. As my second Indian fell, the third one +started back up the ridge, in the direction from which they had +come, and if I ever saw an Indian do tall sprinting, that one did. +I watched him until he was out of sight, and then loaded my gun, +shouldered my deer and went to where the two Indians were lying. +They were both as dead as dried herring. + +I had never seen an Indian scalped, but had often heard how it was +done, so I pulled my hunting-knife and took their top-nots, and +again started for the dug-out, a great hunter and Indian fighter, +in my own estimation. + +I hung the scalps up inside the dug-out, directly in front of the +door, so that Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes would see them the first +thing on entering the cabin. Then I set about getting supper, all +the while thinking what a mighty deed I had done in saving our +cabin, which was probably true. + +The two men did not return until after dark and they were very +tired and hungry, having walked forty miles that day, carrying on +the return trip a hundred pounds each. That is a heavy load for a +man to carry twenty miles, but they did it, and it was no uncommon +thing for the hardy frontiersmen of that day to perform like feats +of strength and endurance. + +When they pushed open the heavy log door, the scalps were almost +in their faces. + +"Who did this?" said Uncle Kit, as he threw his heavy pack on the +dirt floor. + +I told him and he was very much astonished. + +"How was it, Willie?" he asked, and I told him the whole story. + +While I was telling him the story, as briefly as I could, he +showed more agitation than I had ever seen him exhibit. + +During all the time I had been with him, he had never spoken a +harsh word to me, up to this time. But while we were at supper he +said to me: + +"My boy, don't let me ever hear of you taking such chances again. +Not that I care for you killin' the Injuns, but you took great +chances for losing your own hair, for had them redskins got sight +of you, by the time they had got through with you, your hide +wouldn't have held corn shucks. And it's a mystery to me that they +didn't see you." + +The following morning after breakfast we all took a trip up the +canyon, where I had gone the morning before, and we took with us +twelve beaver traps that they had brought up from the cache, and +these we set at different places along the stream. + +After they were set Uncle Kit asked me if I thought I could find +all of them again, and I said I thought I could. + +"All right then," he said. "It will be your job to tend these +traps, until Jim and me get the balance of the stuff packed up +from the cache. Now le's go and see your Injuns." + +I took them to where I had shot the two Indians, and Uncle Kit, as +soon as he saw them, said: + +"They are Utes, and the wust hoss-thieves on the waters of the +Colorado. Willie, I'm dog-goned glad you killed 'em. I would a +give the best hoss I've got to a been here with you, for I think +Old Black Leg would a caught the other feller, afore he got to the +top o' the mountain." + +"Black Leg" was Uncle Kit's pet name for his rifle. + +That night, before going to bed, Uncle Kit said we must be up +early next morning, as he and Hughes would have to make another +trip to the cache, and that I must tend to the traps and keep a +sharp lookout for Indians "But whatever happens," he said, "don't +ever be taken prisoner." + +They started very early the next morning, and as soon as it was +light I struck out to examine the traps. From the twelve I took +nine beaver, skinned them, reset the traps, returned to the dug- +out and stretched the skins. + +The stretching is done by making a bow of a small willow or other +pliant wood, for each hide, and then pulling the hide over it. The +hides are thus left until they are dry, when the bows are taken +out and the hides are packed in a frame made for that purpose, +fifty in a bale. + +All of this kind of work I had learned at Bent's Fort, while +there, from the many trappers there. Besides, Uncle Kit had given +me other lessons in the work. + +Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes made a trip to the cache every other day +until the stuff was all packed up to our winter quarters. + +I had my hands full attending to the traps, as the men brought +more of them on the second trip, and they set enough of them to +make double work for me. One dozen traps is called a "string," and +it is considered one man's work, ordinarily, to "tend a string." + +The two men brought all the stuff up from the cache in five trips. +On the day the last trip was made, I went out early, as usual, to +attend to the traps, of which we had thirty-six. That morning I +took twenty-three beaver, and seeing that it would be impossible +for me to skin them all, I set about to carry them to the dug-out. +If ever a boy worked, I did that day, and had just got through +carrying them in when Uncle Kit and Mr. Hughes returned. + +After we had got caught up with our work and rested a few days, +Uncle Kit said one morning that we must be out early next day and +get our work done so that we could go and kill some elk. "For," +said he, "we have got to have meat for the winter and we must have +some hides for beds." + +In those days the trappers made their beds by first constructing a +frame or rough bedstand, over which they stretched a green elk +hide, securing that by thongs or strings cut from a green deer +skin. By lying on these at once, before they are dry, they get +shaped to the body and they make a first-class bed for comfort. + +We were out early to the traps next morning, and the catch being +somewhat smaller than usual, we got through by 11 o'clock, and +after eating a "snack"--a lunch--we started on the elk hunt. + +After going about four miles we jumped up a band of fifty elk, +which was considered a small herd then. But we didn't get close +enough to shoot any of them. + +"Let 'em go," said Uncle Kit; "no doubt they will go to the +quaking-asp grove, and we can git 'em to-morrow." So we returned +to camp without any elk. But the next morning we went to the +quaking-asp thicket, and there, sure enough, we found the same +band of elk, and succeeded in killing five of them. Thus we had +enough meat to last a year, if we had wanted that much, and we had +skins enough for our beds and moccasins for the winter. + +Now we were in no danger of starving, and from now on we could +devote our whole attention to the traps. + +I had to work very hard that winter, but I was much better +contented than when I was with Drake and in the grasp of that old +"nigger wench." + +Not until now did I tell Uncle Kit of the prank I played on the +black tyrant. I also told him why I was so anxious to get away +from St. Louis. That it was I feared Drake would discover me and +take me back to his farm and the society of his slaves. + +Mr. Hughes here interrupted me to say: "Well Willie, you are safe +enough from Drake and the wench, but I think by the time you get +out o' here in the spring, you would much rather be with them." + +I assured him, however, that he was mistaken, and that I was bent +on being a hunter and trapper. + +"And an Indian fighter?" he added. + +"Yes, and an Indian fighter, too, if you like;" I replied. + +Well, we remained at this camp all winter, not seeing a person +outside of our own crowd, and to take it on the whole, it was one +of the most enjoyable winters of my life. It being my first winter +in the mountains, I was learning something new every day, and +whenever I found the track of any wild animal that I was not +acquainted with, I would report to Uncle Kit, and he would go +miles with me to see the sign, and would take great pains to tell +me what sort of an animal it was and all about its nature and +habits. + +This was one of the most successful winter's trapping he had ever +had, as we were on entirely new ground, where trapping had not +been done before, and, moreover, the weather was particularly +favorable. + +Winter began to break up about a month earlier than usual, it +being toward the last days of March when the snow commenced going +off. We then took a pair of blankets each, and enough provisions +to last us on our trip, and started for Taos, the only kind of +provisions we had left being dried elk and venison. It was an easy +matter to cure meat in this style in that country, for the air is +so light that meat stuck upon the top of a pole eight or ten feet +high, will quickly become dried, or "jerked." Trappers seldom take +enough flour and coffee to last all winter, as it made too much +bulk and weight to pack so far. Sugar was almost unknown in a +trapper camp. + +The second day after leaving the dug-out we met Juan, the Mexican +boy. He was not bringing our horses, but was carrying a letter for +Uncle Kit, from Col. John C. Fremont, asking him to come to Taos, +as he wished to employ him as guide for his expedition to +California. + +That evening, after reading the letter, Uncle Kit said: "Willie, I +have got to go to California in the summer to pilot Col. Fremont +through. Do you want to go along?" + +I said I was perfectly willing to go anywhere that he went. + +He said: "We will pass through some mighty rough country, and also +through the country of the Utes. If you go, you will, no doubt, +have plenty of chances to try your hand at shootin' Injuns, for +them Utes are tough nuts." + +That didn't scare me a bit, for I was now sixteen years' old, had +killed and scalped two Indians, and had already begun to consider +myself a hunter and Indian fighter from away back. Besides, when +the story of my killing the two Indians got out, I came to be +generally called "the boy scalper." But Uncle Kit never spoke of +me in that way, for he always respected me as a father would his +own son. + +Now Uncle Kit was anxious to reach Taos and meet Col. Fremont, so +we pushed on with all possible speed until the third day from +where we met Juan with the letter, we met Col. Fremont at the +crossing of the Arkansas river. He had became over-anxious and had +started out to meet us. + +It was late in the afternoon, so we went into camp and had supper, +which consisted of dried venison and water, but for breakfast we +had a change of diet, which was dried elk and water. + +We learned that Col. Fremont had been detailed the summer before +by the government to command an exploring expedition across the +continent, and, if possible, find a better route from the "States" +to California. + +It leaked out that some of the trappers who did not like to have +him in the neighborhood of Bent's Fort, for their own selfish +motives, had misinformed him that first summer out, as to the lay +of the country, hoping thereby to mislead him and his company into +the mountains, where they would get snowed in and die of +starvation. + +Fremont and his party, consisting of twenty-eight men, had started +up the Black Canyon, and they did get snowed in and had to stop +for the winter. + +They ran out of provisions and killed and ate some of their +horses, but the other horses died of starvation and six of the men +died of scurvy. + +It being late when the Fremont party got into the mountains, and +the snow-fall being very deep, the game went early to the lowlands +and the men were forced to live on salt bacon and horse-flesh. +Even that became scarce and the entire company came near perishing +before spring. + +In the camp with Col. Fremont that evening Uncle Kit and he made +their bargain. Carson was to furnish all the horses and was to +have the right to take as many extra men and horses as he liked, +also the right to trade for furs and send his men and their horses +back whenever he desired to do so. + +After eating heartily of the dried venison and hearing Col. +Fremont's story of the dreadful experiences of his party in the +Black Canyon, it was bedtime, and each man rolled himself in his +blankets and soon all were sleeping, as tired men can, out on the +plains. + +We had an early breakfast, each man's hunk of dried meat being +handy, so there was really no preparation to be made, except to +wash. No compulsion, however, as to that. But having distinguished +company, all hands washed this morning before squatting for +breakfast. + +While we were eating, Fremont asked whose boy I was. Uncle Kit +replied that I was his boy, and "a first-class hunter and trapper, +and he shoots Injuns purty well, too." He then related the +incident of my killing the two Utes. + +All arrangements having been made, Uncle Kit agreeing to meet Col. +Fremont at Bent's Fort in three weeks, they separated and we +pushed on for Taos. On arriving there Uncle Kit hired two Mexicans +to go back with Mr. Hughes to our beaver camp and get the furs, +and he gave instructions to take the furs to Santa Fe and dispose +of them. Uncle Kit then employed Juan and a Texan boy named John +West to assist us in fitting up for our California trip. So at the +end of three weeks we met Fremont at Bent's Fort as per agreement. + +Fremont's company consisted of twenty-two men, and they were, +beyond doubt, the worst looking set of men I ever saw. Many of +them were scarcely able to walk from the effects of scurvy and +they were generally knocked out. + +We had taken with us from Taos a pack-train loaded with +vegetables, such as potatoes, onions and the like, and after +Freemont's men had associated with those vegetables for a few +days, they came out fresh and smiling and were able to travel. + +It was about the Middle of May, 1848, that we left Bent's Fort to +hunt a new route to the golden shores of California. + +The first night out we camped at Fountain Qui Bouille--pronounced +Koh-boo-yah--and here a little incident occurred that created much +fun for all the party except one--that was me. + +As soon as we went into camp, Carson told Johnnie West and me to +let Juan take our horses and for us to go out and kill some meat. + +We started out in opposite directions, and I had not gone more +than a quarter of a mile when I saw a small deer, which I shot, +threw on my shoulder and pulled for camp. Only a few rods on the +way I came to a little mound of rock about three feet high, and from it +flowed a spring of the nicest looking, sparkling water I thought I had +ever seen. Being very thirsty, I made a cup of my hat by pinching the +rim together, dipped up some of the water and gulped it down, not +waiting to see whether it was hot or cold, wet or dry. But a +sudden change came over me. I felt a forthwith swelling under the +waistband of my buckskin breeches, and I seemed to have an +internal and infernal hurricane of gas, which in a second more +came rushing through my mouth and nostrils like an eruption from +Cotopaxi or Popocatapel. To say that I was frightened would be +putting it mild. I rushed down the hill like mad, and fairly flew +to camp and up to Uncle Kit, exclaiming as best I could, "I'm +poisoned!" + +"Pizened?" said Uncle Kit. + +"Yes, poisoned;" and just then another rush of gas came through my +nostrils. + +When the men saw me running so fast they grabbed their guns, +thinking the Indians were after me, and quickly surrounded me to +hear what was the matter. + +Uncle Kit asked me how I got poisoned, and I told him of the +spring water I had drank, and asked him if he could do anything to +save my life. Then there was another eruption. + +Uncle Kit laughed harder than I had ever seen him, but he told me, +as fast as he could, that I had drank from a soda spring and that +it would not hurt me. Everybody laughed and then all went to the +spring to get some of the "poisoned water," which was very good +when taken in reasonable quantities and in a reasonable way. + +My gun, deer and hat were all lying near the spring, and I secured +them, but it was many a day before I heard the last of the "pizen- +spring." + +Johnnie West came in soon after, having missed all the fun, and +Juan and I went with him, taking each a horse, and packed the game +into camp. + +I was anxious to get away from camp on that little packing trip, +hoping the crowd would forget all about the soda-spring before I +returned, but I hoped in vain, for when I returned they laughed at +and joked me more than ever. + +We traveled up the Arkansas river nearly a hundred miles, and as +we neared the snow-line the deer and elk were more plentiful and +we never went hungry for meat. + +At Jimmie's Fork we turned to the left and followed that stream to +its head, then crossed over to the Blue river, which is a +tributary of the Colorado. Now we were in the Ute country, and had +to keep a sharp lookout for Indians. Every evening, after making +camp, Uncle Kit would climb to the top of the highest hill near us +to look for Indian camps, as it was an easy matter late in the +evening to discover their camps by the smoke from their fires. He +used to take me along with him, and he would point out different +landmarks in the country and would tell me to make close +observations, as I would have to return, without him, over the +same route and if I were not careful I might lose my way. + +On the third day after crossing the divide, we met Tawson, chief +of the Apache tribes. Tawson had never met Carson but knew him by +reputation; but a number of the warriors were personally +acquainted with him. + +The Indians all turned about and rode back with us to their +village, which was only a short distance away. + +Uncle Kit being able to speak Spanish, as were all the Indians in +that country, he had quite a talk with the old chief, and in the +meantime he had bought all the furs the Indians had to sell. + +When we were ready to start from the village, Carson said in +Spanish: + +"Now, Tawson, I have always been a friend to your tribe and I will +tell you what I'm going to do. In about one moon I will start this +boy back through your country, with the horses and two other boys- +-referring to Juan and West--and if anything happens to them while +passing through your country I will hold you personally +responsible." + +The chief having heard a great deal of Carson, knew he meant just +what he said. + +The third day after leaving the Apache village we reached the +Colorado river, and we had a hard time finding a suitable place to +cross. Finally we decided to build a raft of logs and ferry our +stuff on that, and swim the horses. This we did successfully, and +also cached the furs to keep them safe until my return. + +As soon as we crossed the river we began to see signs of the Ute +Indians, and Uncle Kit told me to keep my rifle in trim as I might +need it soon. + +The second day after crossing the river, about 4 o'clock in the +afternoon, and just as we had gone into camp, a band of about +forty Indians made a dash for our horses. This was the first time +I had ever heard the war-whoop, and it fairly made my hair stand +on end. Some of our crowd had seen the Indians while yet a +distance off, and when the men yelled "Indians! boys, Indians!" I +made a bee-line for Croppy, who had by this time fed himself away +about fifty yards from camp. When Col. Fremont saw me start on the +run, he asked me where I was going. I told him that I was going +for my pony as I didn't intend that the Utes should get him. + +By the time I got to Croppy I could see the Indians coming, full +tilt, and some of the men had already fired upon them. I got back +to camp as fast as I could get Croppy to go, and when in a few +yards of the camp, I took a rest off of his back and fired, but I +missed my Indian. I reloaded as quickly as possible and laid my +gun on Croppy's back again, for another shot, and just then it +struck me that the reason I missed the first time was because I +didn't take good aim. + +Uncle Kit had always taught me that it was not the fastest +shooting in an Indian fight that did the most execution, and that +it was better to fire one shot with good aim than four at random. + +When I went to shoot the second time, Uncle Kit was near me, and +he said: + +"Take good aim, Willie, before you fire." + +I did take good aim and had the satisfaction of seeing the Indian +tumble to the ground. But whether I killed him or some one else +did, I could not say, for an absolute certainty, but I have always +thought he belonged to my list. + +The Indians were no match for Col. Fremont's men, being only armed +with bows and arrows, and they beat a hasty retreat, closely +followed for a distance by the soldiers, who, however, did not get +any Indians on the run. + +When the men returned to camp, and, as usual, after a scrap with +Indians, were telling how many red-skins they had killed, Uncle +Kit turned to me and asked how many I had got. I said, "one." + +"Are you sure?" he asked. + +"Well," I said, "I took a rest off of Croppy's back; with a good +aim, at the crack of my rifle, the Indian came down." + +The crowd went with me to where I had seen the Indian fall, and +there he was, as useless for Indian work as Powhattan is. + +Col. Fremont then asked the soldiers where were their dead +Indians, and Uncle Kit said: + +"I reckon Willie is the only one that got his man. Didn't I tell +you, Colonel, that he could shoot Injuns?" + +However, after looking around awhile, he found five more dead +Indians, and, doubtless, more were killed but were carried away by +their companions. + +The only harm the Indians did our party was to wound two of +Fremont's men, slightly. + +This was the last trouble we had with the Utes on the trip. + +The second day from this little brush we struck a village of +Goshoot Indians, and there Uncle Kit bought enough furs to make +out his cargo. + +We went into camp here for the night, but Uncle Kit and I did not +sleep much, as we were up very late as we did not expect to meet +again until the next spring, and he had a great deal to tell me +before we parted. + +The following morning Johnnie West, Juan and I loaded up and +started for Santa Fe, and Uncle Kit went on to Los Angeles with +Col. Fremont, as guide. + +Before I left camp that morning, Col. Fremont, unbeknown to Uncle +Kit, came to me and said: + +"Willie, in about a year from now I will be on my way back to St. +Louis, and I will take you home with me if you would like to go. I +will send you to school and make a man of you. You are too good a +boy to spend your life here, in this wild country." + +But I told him I was perfectly satisfied to remain with Kit +Carson. + +Had Uncle Kit known of that conversation I think he would have +been very much displeased, and it might have caused serious +trouble. Therefore I kept my own counsel and did not mention the +matter to Carson. + +Us boys were four weeks making the return trip to Santa Fe, and we +did not see a hostile Indian on the way. I wondered much at that, +but a year or two afterward Uncle Kit told me that the Apaches saw +us every day and were protecting us, for he had seen Tawson on his +return and the chief told him that we had gone through safe. + +We arrived at Santa Fe about the first of October, and there I met +Jim Hughes, who was waiting our arrival, and I was very glad to +see him. I gave him a letter that Uncle Kit had sent him +concerning our trapping for the coming winter. + +Mr. Hughes said that he was glad that we had got back so early, +for it was time we were getting into the mountains for our winter +work. + +I asked him if we would trap in the same place as the winter +before, and he said we would not, as he had brought all the traps +out to Taos, and we would go the next winter up to North Park, as +he had just returned from there and knew we could put in a good +winter's work, as it was new trapping ground that had not been +worked, and it was a fine country, too. + +Soon as we had got rid of our furs, which Mr. Hughes had sold +before our arrival, we pulled out for Taos and begun operations +for going to North Park. + +All being in readiness in a few days thereafter, Mr. Hughes, Johnnie +West and I had started for the new trapping ground, taking Juan +along, again, to fetch our horses home. We had to travel over some +rough country on the way, but found the North Park a fine region, +with scattering pine timber on the hills and quaking-asp and +willows along the streams. I have been told that this park is now +owned by sheep men, and it is an excellent region for their +business. + +After looking around over our trapping field Mr. Hughes selected a +suitable place for our winter cabin, and we fell to work building +it. This time we built entirely above ground with pine logs, an +unusual thing for trappers to do. + +As soon as our cabin was built, Juan returned to Taos with the +horses and we set into our winter's employment. + +In those days hunters never wore boots or shoes, but moccasins +from the tanned hides of elk. This winter we made enough gloves +and moccasins to last us for two years, and each made himself a +buckskin suit, out and out. + +Game was very plentiful in that country, such as moose, elk and +deer, and early in the winter a few mountain buffalo. + +We were successful this winter, our beaver catch being nearly +eight hundred. The winter was also an unusually long one, lasting +until far into April. + +After the snow had gone off so that we could travel, Jim Hughes, +who had been our foreman, in the absence of Carson, asked me if I +thought I could find the way back to Taos, which I said I could. +He said that one of us would have to go and get our horses to pack +the furs in on. + +It was now the spring of 1849 and I was seventeen years old, but +it looked to me to be a big undertaking for a boy of my age, a +trip of three hundred miles, a foot and alone, with my rifle and +blankets; but some one had to go, and I agreed to tackle the trip. + +This was on Saturday, and as we never worked on Sundays, except to +tend the traps, Mr. Hughes and Johnnie West talked the matter over +and decided that before I started away we had better cache the +furs and such traps as they would not use in my absence. This was +done, so that in the event of their being killed by the Indians, I +could find the furs on my return. It was a wise conclusion, as +will be seen later on. + +It was the custom of the Utes to cross over the mountains in small +squads every spring and kill all the trappers they could find and +take their traps and furs. + +On Monday morning we all set about to cache the furs and traps +that would not be used, and it took two days hard work to +accomplish the task. Then I made preparations to start on my +journey to Taos. + +Mr. Hughes thought that as it would be a long and tedious trip, I +had better rest up a day or two before starting, but I thought +that as I had to make the trip I might as well begin first as +last, so Wednesday morning was set as the time for my start. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +A WINTER IN NORTH PARK--RUNNING FIGHT WITH A BAND OF UTES FOR MOKE +THAN A HUNDRED MILES, ENDING HAND TO HAND--VICTORY. + + +On the day set for my departure, having had our breakfast, Mr. +Hughes stepped outside of the cabin, and I was just rolling up try +blankets and a piece of dried venison, and Johnnie West was +sympathizing with me over the long and lonesome trip that was +before me, when all of a sudden Mr. Hughes came bounding into the +cabin and exclaimed. + +"Get your guns and knives, boys. The Indians are upon us and we +must run for our lives." + +Each man sprang for his gun, and by this time the Indians were in +sight of the cabin and had raised the war-whoop, which, again, +raised the hair on the head of your humble servant. + +We made for the top of the hill, which was about one hundred and +fifty yards from the cabin, and slopped The Indians were by this +time at the cabin. Johnnie West counted them and said there were +twenty-seven all told. + +We each fired a shot among them, but could not tell whether we +killed any of them or not. We then started on the run, loading our +guns as we ran, the Indians in hot pursuit of us. + +After running about two miles, Johnnie West proposed that we make a +stand. We stopped on a little ridge, and did not have to wait long +until the Indians were in gun-shot of us. + +"Now, Willie," said Mr. Hughes, "don't get excited and shoot too +quick, but take good aim and be sure that you get your Indian." + +As they came up, each of us selected our Indian, fired and each +got his man. In a moment the smoke from our guns had cleared away, +and the whole band being in sight, Mr. Hughes said: + +"Let's run for our lives. There are too many of them for us." And +run we did, loading as we flew. + +We ran about five miles and made another stand, but not with the +same success as before, for we only got one Indian. + +We had a running fight all that day and made three or four stands, +but could not tell how many Indians we killed, for we would fire +at them and then load our guns on the run. They having nothing but +loose arrows and tomahawks, we could easily keep out of danger. +But they figured on running us down. + +That evening near sundown, Mr. Hughes asked me, as I was a little +faster on foot than the rest, to drop back far enough to count +them, which I did, and found there were eleven of them still in +pursuit of us. + +When they saw me behind the other two they started the war-whoop +and did their best to overtake me, no doubt thinking I was tired +out and that the other two had left me. But they were disappointed +when I ran on and overtook my friends. + +We were now in sight of a large body of timber, and Mr. Hughes +thought that if we could reach that by dark we might be able to +dodge the Indians and get away from them. + +We reached the timber just at dark and tried very hard to dodge +our pursuers, but it seemed as though they could scent us like +blood-hounds, for we would no more than get stopped and lie down +to rest, when they would be upon us. + +A number of times during the night we would build up a fire and +then go a hundred yards or so from it and lie down to rest, but +the redskinned devils kept close to us, and, consequently, we got +but little rest during the night. + +The following morning we left the timber and took to the prairie. +After running some four miles we looked back and saw four Indians +very near to us and gaining at every step. Johnnie West proposed +that we stop and accommodate them, saying that he felt hungry and +tired enough to fight any two Indians in the band. So each man +selected his Indian and fired, and we succeeded in killing two of +them; the remaining two hid behind some big rocks until the others +came up and, again we were compelled to flee. + +We ran for about two hours, when we stopped and made another fight +and killed two more Indians. This was kept up until late in the +afternoon, which made two days and one night that we had been +chased by these savages, with not a bite to eat during the whole +time, and we were getting so tired that we could scarcely raise +the trot. + +We were now running down a long slope, when I looked at Mr. Hughes +and could see a change in his countenance. There was an expression +different from that which I had ever seen on his face before. Just +about a half mile ahead of on down a little flat, was a wash-out, +and Mr. Hughes said: + +"Right down there by that little bunch of willows, at that wash- +out, is where I intend to make my last fight. Now you boys can do +as you please, but I am exhausted and can go no further." + +Before we got to the wash-out, Johnnie West told Mr. Hughes to run +straight for the patch of willows, also telling me to turn to the +right, while he took to the left, and as soon as we were in the +wash-out for me to run to where Mr. Hughes was. This was to be +done to cause the Indians to scatter so they would not all be on +us at once, there now being seven of them in the gang. + +Johnnie West told me to take a bandy-shanked-fellow on the left +and he would take one who had two feathers in his hair. + +"All right," said Mr. Hughes, "and I'll take the leader." + +We all took good aim and each of us brought down his Indian, but +we did not have time to load before the others were upon us, and +it ended in a hand-to-hand fight, besides it got to where each man +had to look out for himself. + +One of the Indians came straight for me and dealt me a desperate +blow with his tomahawk, but I threw up my left hand and received a +severe cut in my wrist--the mark of which I carry to this day--at +the same time I struck him with my knife and almost cut him in two +As he was falling he threw his tomahawk at me with all the +vengeance in him, but missed my head and struck a rock just behind +me. I sprang at once and picked it up. + +Mr. Hughes was fighting one of the Indians; the other two had +attacked Johnnie West, who was on his back with his head against +the bank of the wash-out, and they were trying to get a chance to +deal him a blow, but he was kicking at them with both feet and was +striking so fast with his knife that they had not yet been able to +get a lick in on him. + +They were so busily engaged with Johnnie that I sprang at once, +unseen by them, and buried the tomahawk so deep in the head of one +of them that I was unable, for the moment, to recover it. As soon +as my Indian was out of the way, Johnnie was on his feet, quick as +the twinkling of an eye, and stabbed the remaining one through the +heart with his hunting-knife. + +In the meantime Mr. Hughes was having a hard fight with his +Indian. He succeeded in killing the red fiend but got badly used +up. He had a severe wound in the shoulder, also one in the thigh. +I received a cut in the wrist, and Johnnie West did not get a +severe wound, in fact but little more than a scratch. + +The fight and flight being now ended, we went a few rods to a +little clump of pine trees, where Mr. Hughes dropped down and +said: "Boys, there's no use of talking, I can't go any further; I +think I have done my last trappin' and Injun fightin'." + +I gathered some limbs and chunks and started a fire, while Johnnie +pulled Mr. Hughes' moccasins off and bathed his feet and legs with +cold water. They were swollen almost to twice their usual size. + +The fire being started, Johnnie proposed that we lie down and take +a nap and a rest before starting out to hunt for meat, saying it +was impossible for him to stand on his feet any longer. "My legs," +said he, "are swollen clear to my body." I was too hungry to +sleep, so I proposed that Johnnie stay and care for Mr. Hughes and +I would take my gun and go out and kill some game, which was +plentiful in this part of the country. I had not gone more than a +quarter of a mile when I looked up the ridge and saw a small deer +coming down almost in the direction of where I stood, and never +before in my life had I cast my eyes on a living animal that +pleased me so much as did that one I waited until he was in +gunshot and fired. It ran about one hundred yards in the direction +of camp and fell dead I dressed it, cut off its head and carried +it to camp, and it was all I could do to get along with it in my +half-famished condition. + +I found Hughes and West both sound asleep by the fire It was not +long before I had some of the venison cooked, and I had it +fashionably rare, at that. After I had wakened my companions and +we had broiled and eaten venison for a time, Johnnie and I rolled +some logs together and gathered pine knots and made a good fire. +Then we broiled more venison and ate again, until we got sleepy +and fell over by the side of the fire, lost to ourselves and +Indians. During the night we all woke up again, cooked and ate as +long as we could keep our eyes open, and by sun-up next morning +there was not enough of that little deer left to feed a cat. + +We found ourselves very sore and stiff from the effects of our +run, but Mr. Hughes thought we were about one hundred miles nearer +Taos than when we started, as we had been running most of the time +in that direction, and this was some consolation. + +We remained here and rested two days, and as game was plentiful we +did not have to go far from the camp to get all the meat we +wanted. + +On the morning of the third day we started for Taos, which was +about two hundred miles away, but all being so badly worn out and +Mr. Hughes having such severe wounds, we had to travel slowly, it +taking us about two weeks to make the trip. But we had no more +trouble with the Indians. + +At Taos we met Uncle Kit Carson, who had been waiting our arrival +for two weeks. After resting up for a few days, Uncle Kit, Johnnie +West and myself started for North Park to pack out the furs. Mr. +Hughes stayed at Taos, as he was too badly wounded to accompany us +on the trip. + +On our arrival at North Park we found everything just as we had +left it, except that the traps, which we had not cached with the +furs, had been stolen. + +On our return trip we camped one evening in a beautiful little +valley where the grass was knee high, and along the little stream +were green quaking-asp, alder and willows, with scattering pine +trees here and there on the hills and in the valley. About sundown +that evening the horses commenced to show signs of uneasiness and +occasionally they would raise their heads and look in the +direction of a little pine grove near by, and snort. Johnnie West, +being the first to notice it, said: "Kit, what is the matter with +the horses? I believe there are Indians around." + +"I don't think so," said Carson, "for I haven't seen any sign of +Injuns today." + +Shortly after dark that night Uncle Kit went out about fifty yards +from camp in the direction of the horses, taking with him neither +his gun or his pistol, which was a rare thing for him to do. Just +as he was passing around a pine tree a panther sprang at him from +the tree. On hearing the rustle in the limbs, Carson jumped back +from the tree as far as he could and thus avoided the full force +of the blow from the panther. As he jumped back he drew his knife +and had a hand-to-hand fight with the huge feline and succeeded in +killing it. + +Johnnie and I sat at the camp-fire, knowing nothing of the affair +until Uncle Kit came in, covered with blood from head to foot, and +his heavy buckskin shirt, which had no doubt been the means of +saving his life, was torn almost into strings. When he told us he +had been engaged in a fight with some kind of a wild animal, +Johnnie asked why he did not call for help, and his reply was that +he did not have time to call as he had his hands full with the +"varmint." + +After we had dressed his wounds as best we could, we took a torch +and went to the foot of the pine tree, and there lay the panther, +dead. He had stabbed it to the heart. + +Uncle Kit had a very bad wound in one thigh, also in one arm, so +we did not move camp next day, but the day after we proceeded on +our journey. We took our furs to Santa Fe, where we disposed of +them at a good price, furs being higher that season than usual. + +Our furs being disposed of we returned to Taos and rested for +about two weeks. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +ON THE CACHE-LA-POUDRE.--VISIT FROM GRAY EAGLE, CHIEF OF THE +ARAPAHOES.--A BEAR-HUNTER IS HUNTED BY THE BEAR.--PHIL, THE +CANNIBAL. + + +Uncle Kit, having made quite a sum of money, concluded that he +would take a trip over to the headwaters of the Cache-la-Poudre to +look for a new field where he could trap the coming winter on a +large scale, and wanted Johnnie and I to accompany him, which we +did. + +Each taking a saddle-horse and one pack animal, we started on the +trip, taking a new route to Uncle Kit, as well as to Johnnie and +myself. + +Carson took the lead, for, like a deer, he could find his way +anywhere he wished to go. + +We crossed the Arkansas river above Bent's Fort, and from here we +traveled along the foothills of the Rocky Mountains, striking the +Platte at the mouth of Cherry creek, which is now the center of +Denver City, Colo. Here we met Mountain Phil--of whom you will +hear more in this narrative. He was living in a wick-i-up and had +a squaw for a wife. Uncle Kit and I, being acquainted with him, +stopped and had a chat with him while our horses were feeding. +Uncle Kit asked him what he intended to do the coming winter, and +he replied: + +"I will trap for you if you like, but you will have to furnish me +with an outfit, for I have none of my own." + +"All right, Phil," said Carson, "I will give you a job, but you +will have to stop alone, for none of my men will live with you." + +"All right," said Phil, "me and Klooch will be enough to stop in +one cabin, anyway." + +These things being understood we rode off, Mountain Phil agreeing +to meet us at Taos about two months from that time. + +After we rode away I asked Uncle Kit why no one would live with +Mountain Phil. His reply was, "Phil is a very bad man, and I yet +have to hear the first man speak a good word for him." + +Late that afternoon we saw a little band of Indians--ten in +number--coming toward us, and when near them we saw that they were +Arapahoes and Gray Eagle, the chief, was with them. Uncle Kit +being well acquainted, all shook hands, and the chief insisted on +our going to their camp and staying all night with them. Uncle Kit +knowing the nature of the Indians, and knowing that Gray Eagle +would take it as an insult if we should refuse to visit him, +turned about and went home with him. He sent two of his men ahead +to the village, and we were met by about five hundred warriors +with all the women and children of the village. Just at the outer +edge of the village we were honored with what they considered a +great reception. + +Gray Eagle took us to his own wick-i-up, his men taking charge of +our horses and packs. I had learned to speak the Arapahoe language +fairly well and could understand anything they said. When supper +time came, Gray Eagle came to Uncle Kit and said: "I have a great +feast for you; my men have killed a very fat dog; supper is ready, +come in and eat." + +I remarked to Uncle Kit as we were going to supper, that I was +very glad we came home with Gray Eagle, for it had been a long +time since I had had a good meal of dog. + +Supper being over, the chief got his pipe and selected six men +from his tribe and we had a peace-smoke, and he and Uncle Kit +smoked and talked nearly all night. During their conversation that +night he said that Mountain Phil was a very bad man, and that he +would often steal their horses and sell them to the Comanches. + +Next morning after breakfast our horses were brought in, saddled +up and we were off on our journey again to Cache-la-Poudre. + +It might be of interest to our readers to know how this stream +acquired its name. There was a Frenchman by the name of Virees +Roubidoux camped on the stream spoken of, with a little squad of +men; they were attacked by a band of Indians, and the first word +uttered by Roubidoux was "Cache-la-poudre," which means in +English, "hide the powder," and from that time on the stream has +been so called. + +We arrived at our proposed trapping field, and after looking over +the country we found plenty of beaver sign along the streams and +game in abundance, and Uncle Kit decided that there was room +enough for four camps. + +We returned by the way of Bent's Fort, as Uncle Kit wished to +employ the best men he could get to trap for him the coming +winter. On our way to the fort, which was four hundred miles from +the proposed trapping ground, Uncle Kit told me that he would have +to leave me in charge the coming winter, as he was going to the +City of Mexico on business, but said that he would come out and +get the camps established and return to Taos with the horses +before going there. + +We found plenty of men at Bent's Fort, and, as usual, they were +all broke, having squandered the money earned the winter before +for whiskey and card playing. Uncle Kit experienced no trouble in +getting all the men he wanted, but had to furnish them with traps +and provisions--which took considerable money--he to have half of +the furs caught by each of them. Everything being understood we +returned to Taos, the men agreeing to meet us there two weeks +later. They were all on hand at the appointed time, but there +being a large party to outfit it took some weeks to make +preparations for the trip, there being eleven in the crowd. It was +about the last of October when we arrived at the trapping-ground +ready to begin work. + +There was a man in the crowd named Charlie Jones, who was an old +friend of Johnnie West, and they and I lived in the same cabin +that winter. One morning after we had got fixed up comfortably in +our winter quarters and Uncle Kit had returned to Taos with the +horses, Charlie Jones waked us up very early, saying that there +was a light snow and he thought we would be able to get a bear if +we got out early. We rolled out, got breakfast and were off as +soon as it was light enough to see. + +There were three small ridges, all pointing to our cabin; Johnnie +West took up the right-hand ridge, Charlie Jones the left and I +the middle one. The ridges were open, with scattering pine trees +here and there, but along the creek was heavy timber and a dense +growth of underbrush. While walking along up the ridge, keeping a +sharp lookout for bear, I came in sight of Johnnie West, who +beckoned me to cross over to where he was, saying that in the +thicket, which covered about an acre of ground, there was a small +bear. I proposed calling Charlie Jones over before entering the +thicket, but Johnnie said no, as it was such a small bear that +Charlie would get mad and would not speak to either of us for a +week if we should call him over for such a little bear, "and if we +cannot kill that bear," he continued, "we had better quit the +mountains." + +We both cocked our guns and started into the brush side by side. +When near the center of the thicket I saw the bear raise on its +haunches. The snow was falling from the bushes so thickly that it +was almost impossible to get a bead on him, but I fired, anyway, +and hit too low, thus failing to bring him down. + +He made a rush for us, but Johnnie had saved his charge in case I +failed to kill, but the snow was falling from the bushes so fast +and thick that he could not get a shot at the bear as he rushed +for us, so we were both compelled to flee for our lives, Johnnie +to the hillside, while I took down the canyon, jumping the small +logs and falling over the large ones and riding down the brush, +while I could almost feel the bear's breath on my posterior at +every jump, and had it not been that West had saved his charge, +you would now be reading some other book--certainly not this one, +as it would never have been written. + +Just as we crossed a little opening, Johnnie fired, the ball +cutting Bear's jugular vein and also his windpipe, but the bear +still seemed to have a "hankering" after me and kept coming for +several yards. + +After its windpipe was severed, the bear made a louder noise than +ever, but not knowing the cause, I thought he was nearer me and I +strained every nerve and fibre of my body to widen the distance +between us, as I almost imagined his teeth clashing down on me, +while Johnnie West was yelling: "Run, Willie; run for your life!" + +Well I rather think I was running some about that time, for just +then I came to a big log, and I jumped, climbed and fell over it, +in fact, I never knew exactly how I did get over it; however, I +fell on one side of the log, utterly exhausted, and the bear, not +being able to get over, fell on the other side and died. + +Of all the hunting and Indian fighting I have ever done, I never +had anything to scare me as did that little, insignificant bear. + +Charlie Jones, hearing the two shots and Johnnie yelling for me to +run, came to the scene and had no little fun with me for running +from so small a bear, saying: "If a little bear like that were to +come at me, I would take it by the tail and beat its brains out +against a tree." + +By the time the boys got the bear dressed, I had recovered +sufficiently from my run and excitement to help carry the meat to +the cabin, which was only a few rods away, as in our foot-race we +had been running in direction of the camp. The boys had a great +deal of sport at my expense, and many times during the winter I +was reminded of the bear hunt, in which the bear hunted me. + +After we had got everything nicely fixed up in our new quarters, +Johnnie West one evening got down his sachel, took out a book and +sat and read till bed time. The following evening when he took the +book up again, I asked him what he was reading, and he said, +"Robinson Crusoe." I asked him why he did not read aloud so the +rest of us could hear, and he did read aloud until bed time. I +told him I would give anything if I could read as he did. So he +said if I would try to learn, he would teach me to read that +winter as good as he could. I assured him there would be nothing +lacking on my part, so the next night I took my first lesson. At +that time I did not know all the letters, but I was determined to +learn to read. In a very short time I had learned all my letters, +and being possessed of a great memory, I learned very fast, and +Johnnie, seeing I was so determined in the matter, spared no pains +in teaching me, and by the next spring I could read Robinson +Crusoe myself. Having a start, I could learn of my own accord, and +to Johnnie West I am greatly indebted for the limited education I +now possess; and were he now living I could not express to him my +gratitude for his labors as my tutor in that lonely wilderness, +hundreds of miles from any white man's habitation. And, although +my education is quite limited, yet what little I do possess has +been of great value to me through life. + +We had good success trapping this winter, until about the first of +January, when we had an unusual heavy fall of snow in the +mountains which drove all the game to the lowlands, nothing being +left that was fit for meat except a few mountain sheep, and the +snow made it very inconvenient getting around to attend to the +traps. In the latter part of February I asked Charlie Jones one +day to go down to Mountain Phil's camp and see if there was +anything that he wanted, as we had kept all the extra supplies at +our camp. Mountain Phil and his Klooch--that being the name he +called his squaw, which is also the Arapahoe name for wife--were +staying alone about ten miles further down the country from where +we were located. + +On Charlie Jones' return, he said: "It seems that Mountain Phil +has been faring better than any of us, for he has been able to +kill his meat at camp, thereby saving him the trouble of having to +get out and hunt for it." + +Johnnie and I did not understand what he meant by this. So, after +hesitating a moment, Jones said: "Boys, if I should tell you what +I know about Mountain Phil, you would not believe it, but as sure +as you live he has killed his squaw and eaten most of her, and he +has left his camp." + +We insisted that he must be mistaken, but he declared that he was +not, saying he had seen the bones in the cabin, and further +investigation had developed the fact that he had beyond any doubt +killed and eaten his Indian wife. + +From that time on, Mountain Phil went by the name of the American +Cannibal until his death, which was--if my memory serves me +right--in 1863 or '64, at Virginia City, Mont. + +After the snow had settled so that a person could travel on top of +it, I took my gun and stole out one day to see if I could not kill +a mountain sheep. As I clambered up the mountain I looked about +one hundred yards or so ahead of me on a cliff of rock, and saw a +panther, which I supposed was looking out for the same kind of +game that I was. I fired and killed her the first shot and started +to skin her, when I heard the kittens, or young panthers, crying +up in the rocks near where I had shot the old one. My first +thought then was what a nice pet I would have if I could only get +hold of those young panthers. I was afraid to crawl into the cave +for fear the other old panther might come in on me, so I cut a +forked stick and twisted in their fur and in that way managed to +pull them out, all the time keeping a sharp lookout for the other +old one. I took the two young panthers to the cabin and made pets +of them. They grew to be very watchful; nothing could move without +their knowing it. The female grew to be very tame, and a more +affectionate creature I never saw. But it was different with the +male. When he was six months old he got to be very cross, and I +had to keep him tied up. One day I went out to feed them and he +drew back and slapped me, and I shot him on the spot with my +pistol. The female I kept until she was considerably over a year +old, when I sold her for one hundred dollars to an Englishman +named Mace, and had I only known it, that panther was worth five +hundred dollars. I had taught her many tricks. + +She could count ten, by putting her paw on the ground ten times, +and would do various other tricks, but when asked by any other +person than her master to perform, she would shake her head and +would not allow any one else to touch her. I always tied her up +when going out for a hunt, and when I would return she would cry +and scream so shrill that it would almost raise the hat on a man's +head until I would untie her. She never was contented until she +could get to lick my face, and I never saw a dog more watchful +than she. + +It was in the month of April that Uncle Kit came in with a pack- +train for the furs, the snowfall having been so heavy that he +could not get in earlier. Our catch had been light, as we had more +snow that winter than has ever been known before or since in the +history of that country. Uncle Kit was, however, very well +satisfied with our work, with the exception of Mountain Phil, whom +he had furnished for the winter, and who had not caught a beaver. +We soon had our traps and furs together, loaded up and were on our +way to New Mexico. + +The third day about noon we reached the Cache-la-Poudre, where we +again ran on to the American Cannibal. We stopped here to let our +horses feed and to partake of some refreshments ourselves. Uncle +Kit, after giving Mountain Phil a lecture for his past conduct, +said: + +"Phil, if ever you and I are out together in the mountains and run +short of provisions, I will shoot you down as I would a wolf, +before you get hungry." + +Phil asked him why he would do so, and Carson replied: "Because I +wouldn't take the chances of being killed and eaten up by a +cannibal like you." + +It might be well to give a brief description of this cannibal. He +was a large, raw-boned man, who would weigh about two hundred and +fifty pounds, though he was not very fleshy. He always wore his +hair long and never combed it, also wore his beard long and never +sheared or combed that. His hair grew down on his forehead almost +to his eyes. In fact he looked more like an animal than a human +being. + +Three days' travel brought us to South Platte, where we crossed +the river and made camp on a little stream called Sand Creek. It +was our custom to stake our saddle horses out at night as near +camp as good grass could be found. The following morning Johnnie +West and myself had been out after the pack animals, and on our +return when within about a quarter of a mile from camp, we heard a +rumbling noise that sounded like a band of buffalo in a stampede. +We looked off to our right and saw a large herd of horses, driven +by seven Ute Indians, who were pushing them at the greatest +possible speed. We urged our horses in the direction of camp as +fast as possible. As soon as we were in sight of camp, we gave the +alarm and every man sprang to his gun, mounted his horse and was +ready to receive them. The Indians did not see us until they had +run the herd of horses almost into our camp. Our saddle horses +being fresh, we succeeded in killing the seven Indians before they +got far away, and captured the herd of horses, which proved to be +a herd they had stolen from the Arapahoe Indians the night +before, and in less than an hour, Gray Eagle, the Arapahoe chief, +came along in pursuit, accompanied by fifty of his select +warriors. When Uncle Kit showed him the dead Utes, he walked up to +one of them, gave him a kick and said: "Lo-mis-mo-cay-o-te," which +means, "All the same as cayote." + +Gray Eagle gave us each a horse, thanked us very kindly and +returned to his village with his animals. + +We proceeded on our journey to Santa Fe, which took us twelve +days. Here we met our old friend, Joe Favor, who we had sold our +furs to the year before, and who bought them again this season. + +Furs being still higher this year, notwithstanding our small +catch, Uncle Kit did fairly well out of his winter's trapping. + +After settling up with Uncle Kit, Mr. Favor called me into the +store and presented me with a single-shot, silver-mounted pistol, +also a knife that weighed two and one-fourth pounds, that had been +manufactured in St. Louis. We stopped at Santa Fe and rested two +days, after which time Uncle Kit, Johnnie West, myself and my pet +panther returned home to Taos, which was a distance of ninety +miles from Santa Fe. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +TWO BOYS RIDE TO THE CITY OF MEXICO. ELEVEN HUNDRED MILES OF +TRIAL, DANGER AND DUTY---A GIFT HORSE.--THE WIND RIVER MOUNTAINS. + + +It was now the spring of 1850. I was eighteen years old and +beginning to think myself a man. Uncle Kit asked me to go to the +City of Mexico, saying that he owed a man there two hundred and +fifty dollars, and wished to pay him. He also told me that he +would have Juan, the Mexican boy, accompany me on the journey, but +cautioned me not to let any one know that I had money. "For," said +he, "them Mexican guerrillas would kill you if they knew you had +money about you." + +The reader can fancy two boys at the age of eighteen, starting out +on a trip of eleven hundred miles, over a wild country, with no +settlement except hostile Indians and Mexicans, who are worse than +Indians if they know a person has money about him. At that time +there were no roads across the country in that direction; nothing +but a trail--a part of the way not even that--and the whole +country full of Mexican guerrillas--or, as we would term them, +Mexican robbers--who made it a business to murder people whom they +suspected of having money, and who would even massacre whole trains +of emigrants, take what money they might have, their provisions +and clothing, burn their wagons and drive their stock away. The +fact is that many of the depredations committed in those days, for +which the Indians were blamed, were done by those fiendish +Mexicans. + +When the time arrived for starting and we were mounted, Uncle Kit, +Johnnie West and Mr. Hughes came out to bid us good-bye. + +Johnnie West said: "Well, I am afraid I shall never see you again, +for those Mexican guerrillas are worse than Indians, especially +when they think a traveler has money about him." + +All this helped to put me on my guard, and I didn't even tell Juan +that I had money with me. + +We started on our journey with two saddled horses and one pack- +horse each. We met numerous little bands of Navajoe Indians, but +they being on good terms with the whites, gave us no trouble, +whatever. We also met numerous little squads of Mexican +guerrillas, but they not suspecting two boys as young as we were +with having money, did not disturb us. Uncle Kit had sent the +shabbiest looking horses along that he had, in order to deceive +them. Every band of Mexicans that we met on our trip would ask us +where we were from, where we were going and our business. I always +told them that I was from Taos, and was going to the City of +Mexico to see a friend, and they would pass on. + +The first river we came to, Juan asked me if I could swim. I told +him that I did not know, as I had never had a trial. We stripped +down, tied our clothing about our shoulders and mounted our horses +again. + +I wanted Juan to take the lead and let me drive the horses after +him, but he thought we had best ride side by side and let the +pack-animals follow, so in case of accident we could help each +other. We made it across safe, and from this time on we never +hesitated at a stream. + +We were thirty-one days making the trip to the City of Mexico. + +I found Mr. Reed at his residence and paid the two hundred and +fifty dollars to him. He was much astonished at Uncle Kit sending +two boys eleven hundred miles to pay so small a debt, and said +that he had not expected to get the money until such time as +Carson might be coming that way on other business, for it was so +far that he would not have gone after it and taken the chances of +crossing the country between the City of Mexico and Taos, as we +had done, for the two hundred and fifty dollars. + +But Uncle Kit owed this money and had agreed to pay it at a +certain time, and he, like many other frontiersman, valued his +word more than he did his gold. + +We laid over two days at the City of Mexico in order to let our +horses rest. The day before we were to start, Mr. Reed, who had +invited us to his residence to board while in the City, went out +to where our horses were, and seeing that one of the horses had a +sore back, told me that he would make me a present of a horse +that, if I took good care of, would be able to carry me the entire +trip. + +I named this horse Mexico, and as will be seen later, he proved to +be a noble saddle-horse, which I kept and rode for seven years. + +We made the trip home somewhat quicker than we did on our way out, +being better acquainted with the country, and so could make better +time. + +We were just two months making the round trip, arriving at Taos +two weeks sooner than Uncle Kit had expected us. Johnnie West and +Mr. Hughes were glad to see us return, for it was more than they +expected. + +By the time my panther had grown to be quite large, and was glad +to see me. + +On my return to Taos I learned that Uncle Kit and Jim Bridger had +formed a co-partnership, for the purpose of trapping the coming +winter in the Wind River mountains, which were about seven hundred +miles from Taos, and had employed Johnnie West, Charlie Jones and +Jake Harrington to trap for them, and in a few days after my +return from the City of Mexico we made the start with thirty-two +pack-animals, besides our saddle-horses. + +Nothing happening worthy of note on our way out, we arrived at our +proposed trapping ground, and found plenty of beaver and plenty of +fresh Indian sign as well, but the Indians were not apt to give us +any trouble at this season of the year, more than to run our +horses off, as they would prefer to let trappers alone until +spring and then kill them and take their furs. + +We established our two camps about four miles apart, and kept our +horses in the valley between the two camps; there was an abundance +of grass, plenty of game and no end to the beaver. In fact, to +take it on the whole, it seemed that this was going to be the +loveliest place to spend the winter that we had ever struck, and +the boys were all highly elated over their new winter quarters. We +had only been in our trapping field about two weeks when Uncle Kit +went out one morning to kill a deer and to look after the horses. +He had not gone far when he looked across the little valley and +saw an Indian driving off our horses. Being in gunshot of the +Indian, he fired at him and brought him to the ground. When +Uncle Kit returned to camp, he said: + +"Boys, I am afraid we have made a mistake in coming here to trap +this winter; we must be near the Blackfoot Indians, for I just +killed one that was driving our horses off, and I just happened to +see him in time to catch him with old Blackleg." At that time the +Blackfoot Indians were considered worst tribe in the entire +Northwest. + +I went at once to the other camp to notify Jim Bridger and his +crowd that they might be on their guard. Bridger said he had been +expecting it, as he had seen fresh Indian sign out on the ridges +some days before, but thought it was getting so late now that they +would not give us any more trouble this winter, but that we would +have to get out early the next spring. + +We stayed here and trapped all winter, with splendid success. Jim +Bridger took twelve beaver from his string of traps every twenty- +four hours for seven successive days, being the greatest catch I +ever knew from one string of traps. + +About the last of March we commenced making preparations to leave +the mountains, for fear the Indians might come and clean us out. + +The day before we were to start there came a heavy fall of snow, +and we were not able to move until the first of April, when we +made another start for Santa Fe, going via Sweetwater, and we had +enough furs to load our entire train. + +The second day after leaving camp we were attacked, about noon, by +twenty Indians of the Blackfoot tribe, who entertained us for +about an hour. + +We huddled our horses and used them for breast-works, and killed +seven Indians without one of our men being wounded, but we lost +two horses. + +It might be well to describe the manner in which trappers traveled +those days while passing through a country where there were +hostile Indians. + +Each man would take the number of horses he was to lead and +string them out and fasten them together by tying each horse to +the tail of the horse ahead of him and the head horse of the +string he would tie to the tail of his saddle-horse. This had to +be done to prevent a stampede when attacked, and the horses, too, +were a great protection to the men, for when they were attacked by +Indians the men would ride to the center and use the horses for +breastworks in time of battle. + +After the fight was over the boys all felt jubilant over their +victory. We had no more trouble with Indians for four days, when +we reached Rock Creek, a beautiful little mountain stream that +pays tribute to the North Platte river. Here was a nice place to +camp; plenty of wood and an abundance of grass, and the finest +water in the land. Here was a lovely valley, and just off to the +northwest was a little hill or ridge, only a short distance from +which we made our camp. Some of the men went to getting wood and +building a fire, while others were unpacking, not thinking of +Indians, and just as the packs were off we were aroused by the +war-whoop of a little squad of Indians who were coming over the +ridge spoken of. We had a hot little fight, but it only lasted a +few minutes, when the Indians withdrew, and Uncle Kit gave orders +to follow them, which we did, and had a running fight for about +five miles. We captured five horses from the redskins, and in the +affair did not lose a man, nor even a horse. + +This ended our trouble with the Indians for this trip. + +On arriving at Santa Fe, Uncle Kit and Jim Bridger sold their furs +to Joe Favor and Mr. Roubidoux for a good price. + +Here we met an Englishman, who lived in London, England, and had +come that spring from St. Louis, in company with Mr. Roubidoux and +Joe Favor. + +I had my pet panther with me, and the Englishman took a fancy to +her and asked my price for her. I told him that she was not for +sale. He offered me a hundred dollars for her. I hated to part +with her, but a hundred dollars was more money than I had ever had +before at one time, and looked like a big lot to me, so I accepted +his offer, and in less than twenty-four hours I was very sorry, +for during the time I stayed in Santa Fe, every time that I would +pass in sight of her she would cry as pitifully as any child ever +heard. Five hundred dollars would not have bought her from Mr. +Mace, as he had purchased her with the intention of taking her to +England. + +Mr. Roubidoux and Joe Favor employed Uncle Kit to go out and trade +for buffalo robes with the Comanche and Kiowa Indians. I +accompanied him on this trip, and we were out two months, during +which time we did not see a white man. + +This was the first shipment of buffalo robes that had ever been +made from this region, consequently we were able to get them +almost at our own price. + +As soon as Uncle Kit got out there with his little stock of goods +that had been furnished him to trade on, and which consisted of +beads and rings and a very few blankets, and the Indians had +learned that he would trade for robes, the squaws all fell to +dressing them. Among the Indians it was considered disgraceful for +men to do such work. + +In a very short time there were plenty of dressed buffalo robes, +and some very nice ones, and I have seen Uncle Kit trade a string +of beads a foot and a half long for a first-class robe, and for a +red blanket he could get almost as many robes as he had a mind to +ask. + +As fast as the robes were bought they were baled, and by the time +Uncle Kit pretty well bought up all that were for sale, the wagon- +train came and hauled them away. + +There were twenty wagon loads of robes and the goods Uncle Kit +traded for them would not have cost to exceed seventy-five +dollars. + +Our work being done, we started for Taos, for it was now almost +time to start out for the winter's trapping. On our arrival at +Taos we found Johnnie West, who had been loafing around for two +months, and who was anxious to get at work again. Uncle Kit hired +him to go with us to South Park to trap the coming winter, that +being the place he had decided upon for the season's work. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +BATTLING THREE DAYS' BATTLE BETWEEN THE COMANCHES AND THE UTES FOR +THE POSSESSION OF A "HUNTER'S PARADISE."--AN UNSEASONABLE BATH. + + +All being ready, Uncle Kit, Johnnie West and myself pulled out for +South Park. We passed over a high range of mountains, struck the +Park on the east side, and a more beautiful sight I never saw than +the region was at that time. Coming in from the direction +mentioned, one could overlook the entire park, which was almost +surrounded by snow-capped mountains, and the valley, several miles +below, which was about eighty miles long and from ten to twenty +miles wide, was as green as a wheatfield in June. When we were +near the valley we could see elk in bands of a hundred or more, +with small herds of bison scattered here and there in the valley, +and antelope by the hundred. + +I had often heard of a hunter's paradise, and when I got sight of +this lovely valley, with its thousands of wild animals of almost +every description known to the continent, I made up my mind that +if there ever was such a place as a hunter's paradise, I had +surely found it. The high mountains with scattering pine trees on +the sides; the snowy white peaks above the timber line, and the +many little mountain streams and rills that paid tribute to the +main stream that coursed this beautiful valley, all combined to +form a scene of magnificent grandeur. The quaking-asp, balm and +various other kinds of small timber that grew along the streams +all helped to add to the beauty of the scene. + +We crossed over to the west side to a cove that ran back some +twelve miles from the main valley; here, we decided, was the best +place to establish our winter quarters. Every little mountain +stream in the valley was alive with beaver, and Uncle Kit thought +it so late that we would not be bothered by the Indians that fall, +but, that we would have to get out early the following spring. +Feeling perfectly safe, we built our cabin this winter entirely on +top of the ground, consequently we were not long in getting our +winter quarters completed and were soon ready to start in +trapping. We had excellent success this winter; very little snow +to contend with, making it much better getting around than usual +and an easier task to look after strings of traps. + +In those cases each man had his string of traps, and it was his +business to go to each trap every day, take the beaver out, skin +them, set the traps, carry the skins home and stretch them. +Sometimes we would trap as far as seven miles from camp, that +being the outside limit. After we had trapped here about three +weeks there came a light fall of snow which drove most of the game +to the valley, and we experienced no trouble in getting all the +meat we wanted close to camp, in fact we could often kill deer and +antelope from our cabin door. + +The second morning after the snowfall, Uncle Kit, Johnnie West and +myself all started down the valley to took after our traps. We +went about a mile together, I left the other two, my traps being +the farthest away, some three miles down the valley. After leaving +the other two I struck out down the valley on a turkey trot, that +being my usual gait when alone. I had not gone far when I heard +two gun shots. Thinking that Uncle Kit and Johnnie had been +attacked by the Indians, I turned in the direction that I heard +the shooting, and ran back much faster than I had come, but had +not gone far when I saw ahead of me, up the narrow valley, a band +of about twenty bison coming direct for me. I thought by shooting +the leader it might check their speed and perhaps cause them to +change their course. So I brought my gun to my face and dropped +the leader, but it neither caused the others to halt or change +their course, and they were making a bee line for me, and there +was not a tree in reach large enough for me to climb nor a place +of any kind that I could hide. + +Now I was not long in making up my mind that I had a first-class +foot-race on my hands--as an Irishman might say--and after running +some distance I looked back and saw the bison were on me at every +jump. Had I only known the nature of bison, which I learned +afterward were not so vicious as buffalo, I could have turned to +the right or left and they would have passed on; but thinking that +they were after me, I got out like a quarter-horse, putting in my +best licks to try to reach a wash-out that I knew of ahead of me. +Thinking that if I only could reach that ditch I might have some +possible show for my life, I lost no time in getting there, but +got right down to business and did the prettiest running I have +ever done in my life. Every time I looked back I saw that the +rushing herd was closer upon me, until they were within a few +feet, and by the time I reached the ditch I fancied that I could +feel the breath from the nostrils of a half dozen bison on the +rear base of my buckskin trousers. Then into the ditch I went, +head-long and into about four feet of water. It seemed to me that +those buffalo were half an hour crossing that ditch, but I stood +perfectly quiet in the water up to my waist until they had all +passed over. + +The ditch being deep and the banks perpendicular, I had to wade +the water for some distance up the ditch before I could find a +place where I could climb out. I had just scrambled up the bank +and shaken myself, when up came Uncle Kit and Johnnie, who had +heard the report of my gun and had come to see whether or not I +had killed anything. + +"Rather cold to go bathing," said Uncle Kit. "When I go bathin' I +allus pull off my buckskin suit." + +But I told them I considered myself lucky to be able to find a +suitable place to go swimming just at that time, and congratulated +myself on being all there. + +Aside from my race with the bison, I put in a very pleasant +winter, and Uncle Kit said he had never spent as pleasant a time +in the mountains as he did that winter in South Park. "In fact," +said he, "it was more like a pleasure trip than anything else." + +Our camp at this time was near where the town of Tarryall has +since been built, and we ranged our horses in the extreme south +end of the park, where they had the best kind of grazing the +entire winter. + +It was in the latter part of March--this now being the spring of +1852--when Uncle Kit made a trip to the south end of the park to +get our horses, thinking we had stayed there about as long as it +was safe. + +During his absence Johnnie West and I were busily engaged in +making preparations to start for Bent's Fort, as soon as Carson +should get back with the horses. On his return he informed us that +he would not leave the park until about the first of May, which +was a surprise and disappointment to us both, as we had made all +calculations on getting started the following day. We asked what +was up that we were to be detained so long. + +"On my trip for the horses," said Carson, "I saw some Injuns of +the Comanche tribe, and they told me that them and the Utes war +goin' to have a battle as soon as the Utes can cross the +mountains, and the place for the battle decided on is in the south +end of the park." He also said that with all the Indian fighting +he had been mixed up in he had never before had an opportunity to +see two tribes come together, and that he would not miss seeing it +for any consideration. + +In those days each tribe of Indians had their own scope of hunting +and trapping ground, and if one tribe was caught intruding upon +the rights of another tribe it was apt to cause trouble. + +As I have said before, South Park was a hunter's paradise in the +winter, and added to this, in the summer almost the entire valley +was covered with wild strawberries. Along the many little mountain +streams were abundance of wild gooseberries, blackberries and wild +currants, while on the hillsides were acres of wild raspberries. +In fact almost every variety of berries that there grew west of +the Missouri river could be found in South Park; while the streams +were full of the finest quality of mountain trout as well as many +other kinds of fish. + +The two tribes of Indians mentioned had been in dispute for a +number of years as to their boundary line, each claiming South +Park, and this battle had been arranged the fall before by the +chiefs, also the place decided upon for the battle, which was to +be on a little stream in the extreme south end of the park, that +has since gone by the name of Battle Creek. + +Battle Creek heads in the Pike's Peak range of mountains, and runs +almost due west. The particular spot selected for this battle was +on this creek, about two miles from where it empties into the +stream that runs through the park. + +No better place could have been selected for the fight. There were +scattering pines here and there, with not a bush of any kind to +interfere with their wild charges, and a gentle slope from each +side to the stream which we might call the dead line. + +The Comanches were to occupy the south side, while the Utes were +on the north. + +As this battle was to settle for all time the long-disputed right +of these two powerful tribes, it was likely to be no tame affair. + +This was what might be called a civil war between two tribes of +Indians. They had quarreled so long over this portion of the +country that the two chiefs had met and decided to have it settled +for, and the conditions of the battle were as follows: In the +event of the Comanches being victorious they were to have South +Park; the summit of the Rocky Mountains to be the boundary line. +And in the event of the Utes being victorious, the boundary line +was to be at the foot of the Rocky Mountains on the eastern slope, +the country in dispute comprising all of the territory between the +Arkansas river and South Platte, including South Park. + +About two weeks before the time set for the battle, the Comanche +warriors began to arrive. Some brought their families while others +did not. + +Uncle Kit, being well acquainted with the Comanche chief, as well +as the most of his warriors, loaded up all his furs and we moved +over near the Comanches' quarters a few days before the battle was +to take place. + +As the Comanches came in they would pitch their wick-i-ups back on +the hill about a quarter of a mile south of the little stream, +which was to be their line of battle. They were all on hand before +any of the Utes came across the mountains. + +About two days from the time the last of the Comanches came to the +ground, there was a little squad of Utes came in and pitched their +camp about the same distance from the little stream as the +Comanches, only on the opposite side. + +This little squad of Indians came on ahead to ascertain whether +they would be able to cross the mountains, and if they did not +return in so many days the others would take it for granted that +all was clear and would follow, which they did, and a few days +later the entire Ute nation was there. + +The battle did not begin for two or three days after all the Utes +were on the ground, thereby giving both sides ample time to kill +plenty of game to last them through the war. + +During the time they were preparing for battle, neither tribe +seemed to make any attempt to molest their enemy in any way +whatever, but apparently looked upon it as a matter of business +and proposed to fight it out on the square. + +During the time we were awaiting the battle, Kiwatchee, chief of +the Comanches, who was a very intelligent Indian in his way, and +could speak French fairly well, and who was also an intimate +friend of Kit Carson, came to Uncle Kit and said: + +"I know you are a great chief and I want to hire you and your men +to help me whip the Utes. + +"If you help me fight the Utes I will give you five ponies each." + +Kit Carson declined by telling Kiwatchee that he did not come to +fight, but as he had never witnessed a war between two tribes of +Indians, he had come merely to look on, and as the war was for the +purpose of settling a dispute between the two tribes, he did not +think it would be right for him to interfere. Kiwatchee insisted +on our entering into the battle and asked how many horses we would +take to help him fight the Utes. But Uncle Kit told him he would +take no hand in the affair. + +We were camped on the hill near the Comanches, where we could +overlook the entire battle-ground, as well as the Ute camp. We +dared not go near the Utes, for they were not at all friendly +toward the pale-faces, and in case the Utes were victorious we +would have to flee with the Comanches. + +The day before the battle was to take place, Kiwatchee came and +said to us: + +"To-morrow we will fight." + +We asked him how long he thought the battle would last. Kiwatchee +said he thought he could whip the Utes in one day. + +The following morning about sunrise, just as we were eating +breakfast, the two chiefs commenced beating their war-drums, which +was a signal to call their men together. The war-drum, or what the +Comanches call a "tum-tum," was made of a piece of hollow log +about eight inches long, with a piece of untanned deerskin +stretched over one end. This the war chief would take under one +arm and beat on it with a stick. When the tum-tums sounded the +first morning there was great commotion among the Indians. At the +first tap the war-whoop could be heard, and in a few moments both +tribes of Indians were down at the little stream, each formed in +line on his own side. + +On arriving at the stream the tum-tums ceased and were not heard +again till the Indians were formed in line of battle and each war- +chief passed down in front of his men, after which they again +commenced beating on the tum-tums, and at that the arrows began +flying. + +Now the fun had commenced in earnest, and of all the war-whoops I +ever heard they were there, and the more noise the Indians made +the harder they would fight. + +After they had fought for about two hours they seemed to get more +cautious than at the start, and would look for some advantage to +take of the enemy. + +They fought hard all day; sometimes the Comanches would cross over +to the same side with the Utes, and I saw many hand-to-hand fights +with tomahawks and knives. At other times the Utes would cross +over on the Comanche side of the stream, but would soon retreat +again, and each side would resume their old position for a time. +About sunset both tribes withdrew, apparently by mutual agreement, +each side returning to camp for supper. + +I did not learn how many Comanches were killed that day, but there +were some twenty odd wounded, and some of them fatally. The night +was made hideous by the shrieks and cries of the squaws and +children of the warriors who had been killed or wounded during the +day. + +Neither tribe put out picket guards during the night. + +The next morning about sunrise the war-chiefs were out beating on +the tum-tums. The warriors did not hasten around so briskly as the +morning before, however, they were soon at the spot and ready for +battle. + +After going through the same manoeuvres as the morning before, the +war-woops rang out loud and shrill, and again the arrows began to +fly. The contestants fought hard all day again, without ceasing. +About the middle of the afternoon the Comanches made a desperate +charge on the Utes, crossing the creek and fighting them at close +quarters. Among the Comanches was one Indian in particular that I +was acquainted with, that I saw engaged in a number of hand-to- +hand fights, and always came out victorious, but he got badly used +up during the day. This Indian went by the name of White Bird, and +he was beyond doubt the worst disfigured piece of humanity I ever +saw, but he fought on, and he seemed to say by his actions: + +"I am slightly disfigured, but still in the ring." + +About sundown the two armies again withdrew for refreshments and +repairs. + +That evening after eating my supper! went over to White Bird's +wick-i-up and found him sitting there, bloody from head to foot, +with a huge cut on one cheek, another on one side of the head, and +numerous other wounds, making him the most horrible specimen of +humanity that I had ever seen living. He had not even washed the +blood from his face or hands, but was sitting there telling his +squaw and children how many Utes he had killed during the day, +apparently as cool and unconcerned as though nothing had happened +him. But he was not able for duty the next day, and died about ten +o'clock. + +We never learned where the Indians buried their dead, for they +took them away during the night and disposed of them in some +manner. + +There were more Indians killed and wounded the second day than the +first, and that night the Comanches had a big war-dance over the +scalps they had taken. + +The morning of the third day each tribe marched down at about the +usual hour and resumed their positions in the line of battle, and +that morning they fought more cautiously than before, until about +ten o'clock, when the Utes made their first big charge on the +Comanches, and they had a hard fight, which resulted in the death +of many Indians, and the Utes retreated with considerably the +worst of it. + +In this charge we counted over forty Utes that were killed and +scalped. + +After the Comanches had driven the Utes back, Johnnie West and I +went down within about fifty yards and sat there until the war was +ended. About the middle of the afternoon of the third day, the old +war-chief of the Comanches rushed up and commenced to shout, "Co- +chah! Co-chah!" which meant to go ahead, or, in other words, to +charge. Johnnie West, who understood the language, turned to me +and said: + +"The Comanches are going to make another charge." + +Sure enough, they did; crossing the creek and made a desperate +rush for the Utes, but the Utes could not stand the pressure and +retreated, the Comanches following them to the top of the hill +where the Utes were camped, it being understood between the two +chiefs that, when either army or tribe was driven back to the top +of the hill, they had lost the battle. + +The Comanches now returned, singing and shouting at the top of +their voices, and in a short time a little squad of Comanches came +in with about one hundred head of Ute horses. We never learned +whether they had captured the horses or whether they had won them +in the battle. + +That night the Comanches had another big war-dance, and while the +unfortunate squaws and children were weeping over the loss of +their fathers and husbands, the victorious warriors were dancing, +singing and shouting, and while dancing, each warrior would try to +show as near as he could the manner in which he killed and +scalped his enemy, and of all the silly maneuvers a white man ever +witnessed, it was there at that war-dance. + +The next morning there was not a Ute to be seen, all having left +during the night. + +The day following, the Comanches broke camp and started back for +their main village on the Arkansas river. We broke camp and +started out ahead of them, and in four days reached Bent's Fort, +where Uncle Kit sold his furs to Colonel Bent and Mr. Roubidoux. + +These two kept a boarding-house at the Fort, and this being the +general loafing place during the summer season for most of the +trappers in this part of the country, they also kept whiskey, and +after the trappers had sold their furs, many of them would stop +around the Fort and pay board for about three or four months +during each summer, and by the time they were ready to start +trapping again, Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux would have all of +their money back for grub and whiskey, and, in fact, many of them +would be in debt to them. + +There being so much stock around the Fort the game was driven back +so far that it became necessary to go considerable distance to get +any. Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux proposed to hire Johnnie West and +I to hunt for them for two months, saying that they had not had +fresh meat half of the time the past spring. We agreed to work for +them for two months, they being willing to pay us fifty dollars +each per month, with the understanding that in case we kept them +in meat all summer they would pay us extra wages. They now having +some thirty odd boarders, it took a great deal of meat, and having +to go some distance for game we had to pack it on pack-horses. We +hunted for them two months, and at the end of that time we had +kept them in meat and had enough ahead to last them one month +longer. + +It now being time to start out to look for trapping ground for the +coming winter, we went to Col. Bent for a settlement, and after he +had counted out our hundred dollars each he asked us how much +extra wages we thought we should have. I told him I was perfectly +willing to leave it to Mr. Roubidoux, and Johnnie being willing to +do that also, Mr. Roubidoux told the Colonel to pay us twenty +dollars each, extra, all of which was agreeable to us, and they +engaged us to hunt for them the next summer at seventy-five +dollars per month. + +We returned now to Taos to prepare for the winter's trapping. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +KIT CARSON KILLS A HUDSON BAY COMPANY'S TRAPPER, WHO WAS SPOILING +FOR A FIGHT.--SOCIAL GOOD TIME WITH A TRAIN OF EMIGRANTS. + + +Arriving at Taos I learned that Uncle Kit had his trapping company +already organized for the coming winter, consisting of himself, +Jim Bridger, Jim Beckwith, Jake Harrington, Johnnie West and +myself, six in all. + +Early in the fall of 1852 we pulled out for the head of Green +river, which was a long and tedious journey, being more than eight +hundred miles from Taos and over a rough country. We took the +trail along the foot of the Rocky Mountains, running north until +after crossing North Platte. Here we struck across the Bad Lands, +and I thought that if there ever was a place rightly named, it +surely was this section of country. We were three days crossing +this God-forsaken country; and we would often travel a half day +without seeing a living thing of any description. From there we +struck across the main divide of the Rocky Mountains, and were +three days crossing over to the headwaters of Green river, and +were somewhat disappointed when we learned that Green river had +been trapped over by the Hudson Bay Company the year before. +However, we were there, and it was too late to look up another +trapping-ground, so we occupied some of the old cabins that had +been erected by the Hudson Bay Company and went to trapping. + +Notwithstanding the country had all been trapped over, we had fair +success, or, at least, much better than we expected. We stayed +there and trapped until some time in February, when we pulled up +and moved down Green river nearly twenty miles and there we +trapped for two weeks, but not with as good success as we had had +at the old camp. + +We again moved camp down to what was known as Hell's Hole. There +we found about forty French Canadians trapping for the Hudson Bay +Company, who, by the way, had plenty of bad whiskey. They were not +very friendly toward the new arrivals. + +Among the party was a big fellow by the name of Shewman, that +seemed to think himself a very bad man; he did not appear to have +any love or respect for any American trapper, which was the case +with the general run of those French Canadians who were in the +employ of the Hudson Bay Company. + +This man Shewman seemed to have a great antipathy toward Kit +Carson. + +If the reader will pardon me, I would like to say just here, that +while Kit Carson was the last man to offer an insult, yet, at the +same time, if challenged, he would fight any man living rather +than be called a coward, and in those days the character of men +concerning whom this work is written quarreled but very little. If +a man insulted another, ten chances to one he would be challenged +to fight a duel; and in such a case he would either have to fight +or be branded as a coward, and the sooner he left the crowd the +better it would be for him, for he could see no peace while +remaining with them. + +The third day we arrived at the place spoken of, this man Shewman +got pretty well ginned up and started out to look for Uncle Kit, +saying that he had heard a great deal of Kit Carson and of his +fighting proclivities, and that he would lick him on sight. One of +Shewman's friends, knowing Kit Carson by reputation, tried to +induce him to let Kit alone and have nothing to do with him, but +the more they said to him the madder he got, until finally he was +raging with anger. + +It happened that while he was in his rage, Uncle Kit, Jake +Harrington and I, knowing nothing of Shewman's mad fit, started +out to look after our horses and had to pass near their camp. Just +as we were passing by their cabin, Shewman said: + +"There goes the d--d white-faced American now. Look at him, he +looks just like a coward, and he is a d--d cowardly cur, just like +all the rest of the Americans." + +Uncle Kit stopped and addressed him in the following manner: + +"I am an American and I feel proud of the name, but I would have +you understand that I am no coward. I will fight you any way that +you wish." + +Shewman said: "If you want me to kill you, get your horse and I +will get mine, and we will get one hundred yards apart and start +at the word. After we start, each fire when we please." + +This Uncle Kit agreed to, saying: "There is my horse, I will be +ready in three minutes. Get ready as soon as you please; as you +seem to want to fight, I will accommodate you." + +I had been with Uncle Kit now since 1847, and this was the first +time I had ever seen him in any serious trouble, and I was +surprised at the cool and unexcited manner in which he talked to +Shewman. He was apparently as cool as though he was just in the +act of starting out buffalo hunting. There was a smile on his +countenance when he was talking to Shewman about the fight that +was to take place, in which one of them was to lose his life. + +I had been with Kit Carson long enough to know better than to say +anything to him, but Jake Harrington followed him out to where his +horse was, and started in to try to talk him out of the notion by +telling him that Shewman was drinking. He turned to Harrington and +said: "Jake, I thought you were an American, and would fight for +the name." Harrington, seeing that Uncle Kit was determined in the +matter, said no more. + +Carson went out to where his saddle-horse was feeding, caught him +and took a half-hitch around his nose with the riatta, jumped on +him without any saddle, and by this time Shewman was on his horse +also, with his rifle in hand. + +Up to this time I had not said a word to Uncle Kit, but as I came +up I asked him if he was not going to get his gun. + +"No," said he, "this is all the gun I want;" and he took out his +pistol and rode away a few rods, so that Jake Harrington and I +would not be in range of the bullets from Shewman's gun, and +stopped to wait for Shewman to give the word. A number of +Shewman's friends tried to persuade him not to start, but their +talk only seemed to add to his rage. After they had exhausted all +their persuasive powers, and seeing that he was so determined in +the matter, they let him go. + +He cried out in French that he was ready, and at that moment they +both started their horses at full speed toward each other. When +within thirty yards, Shewman fired, and at the crack of his gun, +Jake Harrington clapped his hands and shouted: "Good! good! Uncle +Kit is safe." + +We could not see any sign of his being hit, and when a few yards +nearer each other, Uncle Kit fired, and Shewman fell to the ground +mortally wounded, the bullet passing through his body just above +the heart. + +Shewman lived until Uncle Kit got to him, then he acknowledged +that it was all his own fault, and that it was good enough for +him. + +As soon as the fight was ended, Jake Harrington and I ran into +camp to notify the rest of our crowd, thinking that we would have +to fight the entire Canadian outfit of trappers, but we found it +quite different, for after the fight they were more friendly +toward us than before. We stayed two days and helped to bury +Shewman. + +This was the first white man that I had ever seen buried in the +Rocky Mountains. + +We rolled him up in a blanket, laid him in the grave and covered +him with dirt. The funeral being over, our party started for +Bent's Fort. + +The third day's travel brought us to Sweetwater, where we came to +the top of a hill, from which we could overlook the entire valley, +which was covered with wagons and tents. This was a large train of +emigrants from various portions of the East who had started the +year before and had wintered on Platte river, the edge of +settlement, and when spring opened they had resumed their journey. + +After supper that evening, Uncle Kit suggested that we visit the +emigrant camp and see the ladies, which did not altogether meet +with my approval, but rather than be called bashful, I went along +with the crowd. I was now twenty-one years of age, and this was +the first time I had got sight of a white woman since I was +fifteen, this now being the year of 1853. + +I had been out in the mountains a long time, and had not had my +hair cut during that time, but took excellent care of it. I always +kept it rolled up in a piece of buckskin, and when unrolled it +would hang down to my waist. + +There was a number of young ladies in the train, and they were not +long in learning that I was the most bashful person in the crowd, +and they commenced trying to interest me in conversation. At that +time I only owned two horses, and would have given them both, as +free as the water that runs in the brook, if I could only have +been away from there at that moment. Seeing that I had long hair, +each of them wanted a lock. By this time I had managed to muster +courage enough to begin to talk to them. + +I told them that if they would sing a song, they might have a lock +of my hair. + +A little, fat Missouri girl, spoke up and said: "Will you let any +one that sings have a lock of your hair?" + +I assured her that I would. + +"And each of us that sing?" interrupted another young lady. + +I said each one that would sing could have a lock, provided there +was enough to go around. + +I now had the ice broken, and could begin to talk to the ladies +and crack a few jokes with them. + +The little, fat, chubby young lady, that first started the +conversation, sang a song entitled "The Californian's Lament," +which was as follows: + + Now pay attention unto me, + All you that remain at home, + And think upon your friends + Who have to California gone; + And while in meditation + It fills our hearts with pain, + That many so near and dear to us + We ne'er shall see again. + + While in this bad condition, + With sore and troubled minds, + Thinking of our many friends + And those we left behind, + With our hearts sunk low in trouble + Our feelings we cannot tell, + Although so far away from you, + Again we say, farewell. + + With patience we submitted + Our trials to endure, + And on our weary journey + The mountains to explore. + But the fame of California + Has begun to lose its hue-- + When the soul and body is parting + What good can money do? + + The fame of California + Has passed away and gone; + And many a poor miner + Will never see his home. + They are falling in the mountains high, + And in the valleys, too; + They are sinking in the briny deep, + No more to rise to view. + +This I thought the prettiest song I had ever heard in my life. +Environment so colors things. In other words, "circumstances alter +cases." + +The lady at once demanded a lock of my hair as compensation for +services rendered, and I removed the buckskin wrap and told her to +take a lock, but cautioned her not to take too large a bunch, for +fear there might not be enough to go around. The young lady, +seeing that I was very bashful, had considerable trouble in +finding a lock that suited her. A number of the young ladies sang +together, after which several of them took the scissors and cut a +lock of hair from the head of the young trapper. + +I wondered at the time why it was that all the young ladies had a +pick at me, for there was Johnnie West, a fine looking young man, +who was continually trying to engage some of them in conversation, +but they did not want to talk to any one but me, and it amused +Uncle Kit not a little to see the sport the young ladies were +having at my expense. + +Before leaving, I told the young lady who sang the first song that +I thought it was the prettiest song I had ever heard, and +requested her to sing it again. She replied that she would if I +wished, and she did. + +The next day about ten o'clock as we rode along, feeling drowsy +from the warm sun, Jake Harrington turned around in his saddle, +yawned and said: "Well, Will, can't you sing the song for us that +you learned from those little Missouri gals last night?" + +I told him I thought I could, and commenced clearing up my throat, +at which the entire crowd smiled above a whisper; but I surprised +the crowd by starting in and singing the song just as I heard the +young lady sing it the evening before. Every man in the crowd took +off his hat, and they gave me three cheers. + +On arriving at Bent's Fort we learned that furs were high, and +notwithstanding our catch was light, Uncle Kit did fairly well. + +He sold his furs again to Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux. + +After Uncle Kit had settled up with all the other boys, he called +me into the tent and said: + +"Willie, I have settled with all the men now but you; how much am +I owing you?" + +Up to this time I had never received any wages from Uncle Kit, nor +had I expected any, for I did not think that I had done enough for +him to pay for my raising. I had always felt under obligations to +him for picking me up when I was without a home and almost +penniless, and had, as I considered made a man of me. + +Uncle Kit told me that I was old enough now to do a man's work, +and that I was able to fill a man's place in every respect. He +took his purse from his pocket, counted me out one hundred and +fifty dollars in gold; and not until then had I known that he had +ordered me a fifty dollar suit of buckskin made at Taos, the fall +before; and not until then had he told me that he was to be +married on the tenth of July, and wanted Johnnie West and I to be +there without fail. I asked him who he was going to be married to. +He said her name was Rosita Cavirovious. She was a Mexican girl +who lived in Taos. I did not know the lady but was acquainted with +some of her brothers. I told Uncle Kit that I would surely be +there. + +Uncle Kit and Jim Beckwith now started for Taos, and Johnnie West +and I began making preparations to start in hunting for Col. Bent +and Mr. Roubidoux, as per contract nearly one year before. + +Col. Bent said that he was very glad that we were ready to start +in hunting, as they had been out of fresh meat at least half of +the time that spring. + +In that country bacon was high, being worth from twenty-five to +thirty cents per pound, and early in the spring higher even than +that. + +This spring, as usual, there were some thirty trappers congregated +at Bent's Fort, apparently to eat and drink up what money they had +earned during the winter. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +MARRIAGE OF KIT CARSON.--THE WEDDING FEAST.--PROVIDING BUFFALO +MEAT, IN THE ORIGINAL PACKAGE, FOR THE BOARDING-HOUSE AT BENT'S +FORT. + + +Johnnie West and I started with a saddle-horse each and four pack- +mules for a buffalo hunt; I still riding Croppy, the pony Uncle +Kit had given me at St. Louis, but he was getting old and somewhat +stiffened up in his shoulders. + +We traveled up the Arkansas river to the mouth of the Purgatoire-- +pronounced in that country Picket Wire--which was about thirty +miles from Bent's Fort. Seeing a small band of buffalo some +distance away, we took the pack-saddles off of the mules and +turned them out to graze, mounted our saddle-horses and were off +for the herd; but the wily beasts got wind of us and started off +before we got within gunshot of them. After running them about a +mile we overhauled them, both fired and each killed a yearling +calf while on the run. I fastened my rifle to the pommel of the +saddle, drew my pistol, and there being a very fine heifer that +had dropped back to the rear, I spurred up by the side of her and +was just in the act of firing, when old Croppy stepped into a +prairie-dog hole and fell with me. + +Johnnie West had just fired his second shot and killed a fine +three-year-old heifer, when he looked and saw old Croppy lying +there, and I stretched out beside him, apparently dead. The first +thing I knew after the fall, Johnnie West was sitting by my side +slapping me in the face with his hand. + +I was badly bruised but no bones were broken, and as soon as I +recovered sufficiently to know for a certainty that I was not +dead, an examination of old Croppy developed the fact that his +left shoulder was badly broken. I being too chicken-hearted to +shoot him, got Johnnie West to put him out of his misery, and now +I was left afoot and thirty miles from home. Johnnie West went +back and got our pack-mules. We dressed our buffalo and had plenty +of meat to load all of our mules, and some to leave there for the +hungry cayotes. That night while we were cooking some of the meat +for supper, the cayotes raised a howl and it seemed as though they +would take possession of our camp in spite of us; but by firing a +shot among them once in a while, we were able to keep them at bay. + +In those days hunters never took along anything to eat, for a man +that could not kill what he could eat was considered worthless. + +The following morning we loaded our meat on the mules, lashed my +saddle on top of one of the packs and started for Bent's Fort. I +being bruised and crippled up from the effects of my fall, Johnnie +let me ride his horse and he walked almost the entire way home. + +Mr. Roubidoux on learning that I had left old Croppy dead on the +prairie, said: "I have got the best buffalo horse on the plains, +and I will make you a present of him;" and turning to his herder, +he said, "go and bring Pinto in." + +When the spotted horse was brought in, Mr. Roubidoux said: "Now, +Will, I am going to make you a present of this horse, and I want +you to keep him to remember me by." + +I thought this the prettiest horse I had ever laid eyes on, and he +proved to be as good a buffalo horse as Mr. Roubidoux had +represented him to be. + +On the third day of July, Johnnie West and I having enough meat +ahead to last several days, we pulled out for Taos to attend the +wedding of Kit Carson. Arriving there, Uncle Kit took us to his +house. + +He brought my new buckskin suit, and I know it was the handsomest +of the kind I had ever seen. On the front of the trousers was the +finest of bead work, representing horses, Indians, buffalo, deer +and various other animals; and on the coat the same, except they +were worked with beads and porcupine quills. + +I was now twenty-one years old, and had never attended a wedding. +The ladies present all being of Catholic faith, Uncle Kit and his +bride were married in the Catholic church by the priest. + +There were at that time about five hundred inhabitants in Taos, +and every man, woman and child attended the wedding of Kit Carson. + +After the ceremony was over all marched down about three blocks to +where there had been a whole bullock roasted, also three sheep. +The tables used were made of rude boards split out with a froe. +There were no table-cloths, no tea or coffee, but plenty of wine +and an abundance of meat, that all might "eat, drink and be +merry." + +While we were at the supper table Uncle Kit happened to get sight +of Johnnie West and I, and, taking each of us by the hand, he led +us over and gave us an introduction to his wife, and this was the +first time I had ever been introduced to a lady. Uncle Kit +introduced me as his Willie. Mrs. Carson turned to me and said: + +"Ge-lem-a mo cass-a la-mis-mo ta-casso tades vases; +meaning, Willie, my house shall be your home at any and all +times." + +As I do not write Spanish, I simply give the sound of her words as +she spoke them-or as I would. + +I was highly pleased with the manner in which Mrs. Carson +addressed me, for no lady had ever spoken so kindly to me before, +and I had supposed that after Uncle Kit was married I would have +to hunt another home. + +Supper being over, all repaired to the dance hall and enjoyed +themselves dancing until sunrise the next morning, when they +returned to the tables for breakfast. This time they had coffee +and tea, but during the entire feast they did not have a bite of +bread on the table. + +Here I met Jim Beckwith, of whom there will be much more said at +intervals later on. + +Jim wanted me to accompany him to California the following spring, +saying that he knew of a pass through the Sierra Nevada Mountains, +which, if we could manage to get the tide of emigration turned +that way, we could establish a toll road and make a fortune out of +it. I said I would not promise him now, but would give him an +answer later on. + +The wedding being over, Johnnie West and I, after bidding Uncle +Kit and his wife good-bye, started for Bent's Fort. Col. Bent and +Mr. Roubidoux wanted to employ us to hunt for them the coming +winter. Johnnie thought he could do better trapping, but I hired +to them to hunt until the following spring. + +Col. Bent always had from six to twenty boarders, having six men +of his own, and I kept them in meat all winter, alone. + +About the first of April--this being in 1854--I settled up with +the Colonel, and having written Jim Beckwith the fall before that +I would be on hand to go with him to California, I now pulled out +for Taos. + +I visited with Uncle Kit and his wife while at Taos, and found +that what Mrs. Carson had said at the feast was true, for I was as +welcome at their home as though I was one of the family. + +Jim Beckwith had everything in readiness for our trip across the +Sierra Nevada Mountains. + +The day before starting, Uncle Kit asked us what route we would +take. Jim said that we would go around by the headwaters of the +Gila river, this being a tributary to the Colorado. On this trip +we would cross that part of the country which is now Arizona. +Uncle Kit said this was a good route, and that he had gone over it +twice in company with Col. Fremont. He drew a diagram of the +country, showing the route by streams, mountains and valleys; +telling us also what tribes of Indians inhabited each section of +the country that we would pass through. Among the different tribes +spoken of was the Pimas, whom he said were friendly toward the +whites, and insisted on our calling on that tribe, provided we +went that way. + +He had been at their village in 1845, and at that time they had +told him he was the third white man they had ever seen. + +The reader will understand that all the Indians in that section of +the country at that time could speak Spanish, having learned it +from the Aztecs, a tribe that lived in Old Mexico and were of +Montezuma's race. They often came out into that country to trade +with the other Indians. + +All being ready we bade Uncle Kit and his wife good-bye, and were +off for California. We crossed the Rocky Mountains up the Arkansas +river and took the trail made by Col. Fremont in 1848 to the +summit of the Rocky Mountains. We then crossed over the mountains +onto the headwaters of the south fork of Grand river, and from +here we headed almost south, passing through a country that had +all been burned over. We could look ahead for miles and see +nothing but burnt hills. Game was so scarce that we could barely +kill enough to supply us with food, until we struck the north fork +of Gila river. Here we found plenty of game. We traveled down the +Gila three days, which brought us to the Pima--or as was sometimes +then called Peone--village. This village was situated in a lovely +valley about twenty miles long and ten wide. The soil was very +fertile. The surrounding mountains were very high and covered with +fine timber, while the foothills were luxuriant in the finest +quality of bunchgrass, and along the little mountain streams were +cottonwood and willows. + +The Indians here were fairly well civilized, a fact worthy of +note, as they had never had a missionary or priest among them. +They also had a different mode of worship from the tribes of the +Northwest. Their place of worship was what might be called a large +shed constructed by setting posts in the ground and covered with +poles, brush and the leaves of the century plant, these leaves +being from three to five feet long and from six to ten inches +wide. Their houses were also covered with these leaves. + +I never saw but two of these plants in bloom. One was about fifty +miles north of Sacramento and the other in Golden Gate Park, near +San Francisco. It was said they held their flowers four months. +These flowers are very beautiful, being four inches across and +look as though they were made of wax. + +But to return to my story. These Indians had three days of +worship, also three days of feasting. On assembling at their place +of worship, the chief chose four men from the audience, whom we +would term preachers, but which they called abblers. They never +pray, but the abblers stand up and talk to the audience, during +which time the Indians preserve the very best order. The abblers +tell them what they must do and what they must not do. When ready +to break up, all join in singing, but never sing before preaching. +Just how they learned this mode of worship was a mystery to me, +and is yet, for that matter. We attended service while in the +village and after preaching was over many of them invited us home +with them. + +There were about five hundred men in this tribe, all of whom were +apparently very industrious, raising corn, melons, red pepper and +other vegetables in abundance. They raised some very large melons, +which were not excellent in flavor, however. + +The Pimas were very kind to us while we were with them, often +taking us out to their truck patches and pulling nice, large +melons for us. I asked a very aged Indian where they got their +seed corn, but he did not know, saying they had raised it ever +since he could remember. They did their plowing with wooden plows, +which they made themselves, being pulled by oxen that were hitched +to the plows by a strong stick in front of their horns. For +harrows they used brush, and they had shovels made of wood to dig +with. + +Notwithstanding they were in one sense uncivilized, they showed us +more hospitality during the time we were with them than most white +people would have shown to strangers. + +These Indians keep their age by taking a piece of horn, pressing +it out flat and punching a hole in the center. When a child is a +certain age he has one of these tied about his neck, and every +year the child is supposed to cut a notch in the piece of horn. I +did not learn how old they had to be before they were supposed to +keep their own age. + +We found the chief of the tribe to be very obliging. He told us +the Apaches were bad Indians, and that they had killed many white +people--men, women and children. + +When we were ready to leave the village, the chief came out and +bade us good-bye, and gave us a cordial invitation to call on him +when passing through the country. + +We crossed the Gila river near where Colville now stands. Here was +a tribe of very indolent Indians, that during this season of the +year did not wear a stitch of clothing of any kind whatever. They +were known as the Yumas. + +We both emptied our rifles before crossing the river, knowing that +they would get wet in crossing. I fired at a bird across the river +and it fell to the ground. + +At the crack of my rifle the Indians ran a few paces from me, +dropped down and stuck their fingers in their ears. They told us +in Spanish that they had never seen a wah-hootus before, meaning a +gun with a loud report. + +When Jim Beckwith went to fire his gun off, the squaws all ran +away, but the bucks, being more brave, stayed, but held their +hands over their ears. This tribe lived principally on fish. + +The reader will remember that I had traveled over this same +country in the year 1849 in company with Kit Carson and Col. +Fremont, when on our trip to California. + +After traveling about five miles we crossed a little sage-brush +valley that was almost covered with jack-rabbits, and they were +dying by the thousand. We could see twenty at one time lying dead +in the sage-brush. + +That night we camped on what has since been known as Beaver creek, +and here we had to strike across the San Antonio desert, and +having been across the desert I knew it would be eighty miles to +water. Having two parafleshes with us for such emergencies, we +filled them with water to use in crossing this desert. + +A paraflesh is made of rawhide expressly to carry water in, and +are frequently used to peddle milk by the Mexicans. + +The second day from Beaver creek we reached a little stream near +the Goshoot village, this being the place where Uncle Kit finished +buying furs to load his pack-train in 1848. + +The next morning we reached the village. I had not seen any of +these Indians for five years. Then I was a mere boy and now a +grown man, but every one of the Goshoots knew me and were glad to +meet me. We stopped that day and visited with them, and bought +some venison and frigoles, or beans. + +The next morning we resumed our journey to Los Angeles, crossing +the extreme northeast part of Death Valley. From here on the +country was all new to me, and had it not been for the kindness of +the Goshoot Indians, we would have perished for the want of water. + +When I told a good Indian in that village where we were going, he +sat down and with his finger marked a diagram in the dust, showing +the lay of the country that we must pass ever, every little blind +spring near the trail, the different mountains and valleys, and +made it so plain that we could scarcely have made a mistake on the +trip. + +On arriving at Los Angeles we found only one white man in the +place, and he was the only person in the whole town that could +speak the English language. He had arrived there some years +before, married a Mexican woman and had got to be very wealthy. He +tried to induce us to go farther up the coast, telling us if we +started for San Francisco the country was full of Mexicans, and +that they despised all Americans and would be sure to murder us on +our way; but as we had started for San Francisco, we were +determined to see that city if possible. After laying over one day +with the old American we resumed our journey. + +The next place we struck was Monterey, where is now the famous +Hotel del Monte, about two hundred miles from Los Angeles. Here we +did not find a man who could speak a word of English, and we found +the Mexicans still more selfish than in Los Angeles. + +We began to think that the old white man had told the truth, for +we would not have been surprised at any time to have been attacked +by a band of Mexicans. + +While here I saw two persons that I thought to be curiosities. +They were of Indian parentage, light complexion and had eyes of a +pink color. One was a boy about twenty years old and the other a +girl of sixteen, and were brother and sister. It was claimed that +they could see well after night, but could not see their way on a +bright, sunny day. + +These Indians were said to be of the Mojave tribe, that inhabited +a portion of the country some six hundred miles east of Monterey, +near the Mojave desert. I have since learned that such freaks are +called albinos. + +The reader will no doubt wonder why we came this round-about away +to get to San Francisco. The reason is that in coming a more +direct course we would have passed through a country that was +infested with wild tribes of Indians; that is, tribes hostile to +the whites. There being only two of us the chances were it would +have proved a very unhealthy trip for us at that time. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +ROBBER GAMBLERS OF SAN FRANCISCO.--ENGAGED BY COL. ELLIOTT AS +INDIAN SCOUT.--KILLS AND SCALPS FIVE INDIANS.--PROMOTED TO CHIEF +SCOUT. + + +Arriving at San Francisco we found things very lively, this being +about the time of the greatest gold excitement in California. Here +was the first city of note that I had been in since leaving St. +Louis; here also was the first time I had seen gambling going on +on a large scale. There were all kinds of games and all kinds of +traps to catch the honest miner and rob him of his money that he +had labored hard to dig out of the ground. + +That night Jim Beckwith and I took in the sights of the city. We +went to the different gambling houses and had just finished our +tour and were on our way back to the What Cheer house--that being +the hotel at which we put up--the leading hotel in the city then. +We were just passing one of the gambling dens, when we saw two men +coming out of the door leading a man between them who was crying +like a child, and exclaiming: "I am ruined! I am ruined!" + +We learned from the two men that he had come to the city that day +with eight hundred dollars in gold, had bought a ticket for New +York, and it was his intention to sail for that city the following +morning. But he had gone out that night to have a farewell spree +with his friends, got too much booze, started in gambling, +thinking he might double his money by morning; but like thousands +of other miners in those days, he "played out of luck," as they +termed it, and had lost every cent he had. We walked on down to +the hotel, and in a few minutes the three came into the hotel +also, the one still crying like a baby. The proprietor only +laughed and said it was a common occurrence for men to come to the +city with even twenty thousand dollars, gamble it off in less than +a week and then return to the mines to make another stake. But he +said he had never seen a man before that took it as hard as this +one did. + +It was all new to me, and a little of it went a long ways. + +That night after Jim Beckwith and I had retired, I told him that I +had seen all of San Francisco that I cared to, and was ready to +leave. However, we stayed two days longer, after which we pulled +out for the Sierra Nevadas, by the way of Hangtown, a little +mining camp situated at the American Fork. Here we crossed over a +pass that Jim had told me of more than a year previous, which led +us to the headwaters of the Carson river. + +I proposed we give it the name of Beckwith Pass; and from that day +to this it has been known by that name, and since has been made a +splendid stage road. + +After traveling down the Carson river some distance, we met a +party of miners who informed us that a few days previous a band of +Indians down on the Humboldt had made an attack on an emigrant +train, cut off a portion of the train, stampeded the teams, killed +all the people of that part of the train and burned the wagons. + +They also informed us that Col. Elliott was down on what was known +as Truckee Meadows with a company of soldiers, but, so far, was +having very poor success killing Indians. + +Col. Elliott had been sent out there with four companies of +cavalry to protect the emigrants against the Pah-Ute or Piute +Indians, which were very numerous down on the Humboldt, and around +the sink of the Carson and as far up the mountains as Lake Tahoe. + +Jim being very well acquainted with Col. Elliott, proposed we go +around that way, thinking that the Colonel might be able to assist +materially in turning the tide of emigration through his pass, his +object being to get as much travel that way this fall as possible, +and the following spring he would establish a toll road through +that pass. + +Col. Elliott was pleased at meeting Jim, and in the conversation +said: "Beckwith, I am very glad, indeed, to see you. You are just +the man I have been wanting this long time, for I haven't a scout +in my entire command that is worth a cent to scout for Indians. I +don't believe there is one of them that would dare to leave +headquarters fifteen miles alone, and I want to employ you as +chief of scouts." + +Jim thanked the Colonel kindly for the honor, but told him he +could not accept the offer as he had another matter he wished to +attend to, and told him of the scheme he had on hand. But, he +said, he had a young man with him that he could recommend highly +for that position, and he gave me a great send off as a scout. + +The Colonel insisted on our going with him to his private quarters +for supper, which we did, and after having a pleasant visit with +him, we returned to our own camp for the night. + +When we were ready to take our departure for the evening, Col. +Elliott said: "Mr. Drannan, can I see you privately to-morrow +morning at nine o'clock?" + +I told him that I would call at his quarters at that hour. + +After Jim and I had reached our camp I asked him why he had +misrepresented me to Col. Elliott in the way he had, when he knew +I had never scouted a day in my life, knew nothing of scouting and +had done very little Indian fighting. + +Jim said: "You are a young man and have been among the Indians long +enough to be pretty well acquainted with their habits. There is +not a single fellow in Elliott's outfit knows as much about +scouting as my black horse, and if you ever intend starting in, +now is your chance. That is the reason I gave you such a send off +to the Colonel." + +After thinking the matter over, I concluded that Jim was right in +regard to it, and now was a good time to make a start. + +After breakfast the next morning I met Col. Elliott at his +quarters at the time appointed. He invited me in and set out a +bottle of whiskey and a glass. I thanked him, but declined to +drink. + +"Where were you raised," said the Colonel, "that you do not drink +whiskey? I thought you grew up in the Rocky Mountains." + +I told him that I did, but was not raised to drink whiskey. I also +told him that I had been brought up, since a boy fifteen years +old, by Kit Carson. + +The Colonel asked me many questions about Indians, their habits, +my idea of fighting them and so on, after which he asked me if I +would like a position as scout. I told him I would, provided there +was enough in it to justify me. + +The Colonel made me a proposition of one hundred dollars a month +and rations, I to furnish my own horses. I could also turn my +extra horses in with the Government horses and it would cost me +nothing to have them herded. I accepted his proposition, agreeing +to start in on the following morning. I also had an agreement with +him that when I did not suit him, he was to pay me off and I would +quit. Also, when he did not suit me, I was to have the privilege +of quitting at any time, all of which was satisfactory to him, and +I started in on the following morning as per agreement. + +That evening about sunset three of Col. Elliott's scouts came in, +and he gave me an introduction to them, telling them that I was +going to be a brother scout. After supper I had a long talk with +one of them, in which he posted me somewhat as to the different +watering places, grass, etc. + +From him I learned that they had not seen an Indian for three +days, but had seen any amount of sign, every day, which was +evidence that there were plenty of Indians in the country. + +The following morning when I went for my orders I was much +surprised at the Colonel saying: "Oh, damn it! I don't care. Go +any way you please and as far as you please. The other boys say +there is not an Indian in fifty miles of here, and if you find any +you will do better than any man I have sent out, so far." + +When I went to order my lunch, and told the negro cook to put up +enough to last me until the next night, he looked at me and said: +"Whar you going, boss?" Jim told him I was going out to get some +cayote scalps. I now mounted Mexico--the horse that Mr. Reed had +given me at the City of Mexico--and started off on my first +scouting trip, taking an easterly direction until I had struck the +old emigrant road. + +After I had left camp the other scouts were talking among +themselves, and none of them thought I would ever return. One of +the scouts told Jim that I was the biggest fool that he had ever +seen, to start out scouting in a strange region and not ask +anything about the country, grass, water, Indians, or anything +else. + +"Don't be alarmed about that boy," said Jim, "he'll take care of +himself in any man's country." + +I had been taught by Uncle Kit that when I attempted to do a thing +to carry it out at all hazards, if it was in my power to do so. + +After I had ridden about twelve miles or so, and was just entering +the mouth of a little ravine, on looking up the same ravine I saw +three Indians who had just hove in sight over the hill. I dropped +back from their view as quick as I could, which only took about +two or three jumps of my horse. + +The Indians having their backs toward me, I was confident they had +not seen me. They were heading for the emigrant trail, that being +what we called the wagon road across the plains in those days. + +I rode around the point of a hill and tied my horse in a washout +where he would be hid from view, climbed up the top of the hill +and saw five warriors, riding direct for the trail. After watching +them for a short time I hurried back to my horse, mounted him and +rode as fast as Mexico could conveniently carry me over this +sagebrush country--about a quarter of a mile in an opposite +direction to which the Indians were traveling. Riding up to the +head of a little ravine, where I could tie my horse in a place +where he would not be discovered by the redskins, I dismounted, +tied my horse and crawled up through the sagebrush to the top of +the hill, where I could watch the movements of the Indians. + +This was a rolling country, low hills covered with a heavy growth +of sagebrush, and not a tree of any description to be seen +anywhere. + +I had discovered my game, but how to capture it was what puzzled +me. + +The reader can have a faint idea of the situation of a young man +in a strange country and a sandy, sagebrush plain, who did not +know where to find either water or grass. If I returned to +headquarters they would escape me, and this being my first time +out in the scouting business, I could not afford to let them get +away. So, after holding a private council with myself, I decided +these Indians were spies, who were scouting for a large party of +Indians that were somewhere in this part of the country, and that +they were looking for emigrants, and in case they did not see any +such that day, they would no doubt go to water that night. + +I laid there on the hill watching their movements and trying to +devise some plan by which I could capture them then. + +Could I only have had Jim with me, how easy it would have been to +follow them to their camp that night, kill and scalp them and +capture their horses. + +In those days an independent scout was entitled to all the stock +captured of the enemy by him. + +I watched the Indians until they got to the emigrant trail, where +they stopped and held a council, apparently in doubt as to which +way they should go. After parleying for some five minutes they +struck out on the trail. I watched them for about two miles, then +they passed over a low range of hills and were out of sight. + +I now mounted Mexico and rode as fast as I could, not directly +after them, but as near as I could to keep out of their sight; and +at the same time I felt confident that should they discover me, +that there was not an Indian pony in that whole country that could +catch Mexico, either in a short or long distance. + +After riding some five miles or so, I dismounted and tied my horse +to a sagebrush, and climbed to the top of the highest hill between +me and where I supposed them to be. I discovered them about a mile +away, and they were just leaving the trail, riding up a ravine +that led to the north. They dismounted and put their ponies out to +grass. There also appeared to be a little meadow where they +stopped, and I concluded there must be water there, too. I took in +the situation at a glance and could see that I would have to ride +a long distance to get near them. Just immediately beyond them was +a little hill that sloped off down to the meadow on which they +were camped, but in any other direction a person could not ride +without being discovered. + +I went back to my horse, mounted and took a circuit of about ten +miles, having to travel that distance in order to keep out of +their sight. Coming in from the north, I rode almost to the top of +the hill; here I dismounted, tied my horse, crawled to the top of +the hill, and on looking down could see them almost under me, the +hill was so small and steep. They were busily engaged in skinning +a jack-rabbit, and about that time I felt as though I could eat a +hind quarter of it myself if it had been cooked; for I had been +too busily engaged that day to stop and eat a lunch. + +Here I lay in the sagebrush trying to devise some plan by which I +could do away with them and capture their horses. + +It was now about four o'clock in the afternoon, and this being +about twenty miles from headquarters, I would not have time to +ride there and return with soldiers before they wold break camp in +the morning. + +For me to attack them alone looked like a big undertaking. + +There being a little grass for their horses, I now concluded they +would remain until morning. So I crept back to where my horse was +tied, took out my lunch and sat down and ate it, at the same time +debating in my mind the best course to pursue. + +I remembered what Col. Elliott had told Jim, that he did not have +a scout that dared go fifteen miles from camp and now if I should +return to camp and report what I had seen, he would start soldiers +out, and by the time they could reach the ground the Indians would +be gone, and there would be nothing accomplished, consequently I +would, no doubt, be classed with the balance of the scouts in the +opinion of the Colonel. While on the other hand, should I be +successful in laying a plan by which I could do away with the +Indians and take their scalps to headquarters as evidence of my +work, it would give me a reputation as a scout. + +I was confident they had not seen me that day, and knowing, too, +the Pah-Utes had not been disturbed by Col. Elliott's scouts, they +would no doubt lie down when night came, and I might steal a march +on them and amid their slumbers accomplish the desired deed. + +Having been brought up by one of the bravest frontiersmen that +traversed the plains at that time, and who always taught me to +respect a brave man and hate a coward, I made up my mind to make +the attack alone, provided the Indians did not put out guards that +night. + +After I had finished my lunch I examined both my single-shot +pistols--I still having the one presented to me by my old friend +Joe Favor, three years before at Bent's Fort, also the knife, +which the reader will remember weighed two and one-fourth pounds-- +and creeping back to the top of the hill I watched them cook and +eat the jack-rabbit. As it grew dark I drew nearer, and when it +was about as dark as it was likely to be that night, I crept up to +within a few yards of them. They had a little fire made of +sagebrush and did not lie down until very late. + +I was so near that I could hear them talking, but I could not +understand their language, as I had never been among them, but I +was confident they were Pah-Utes, because I was in their country. + +After they had smoked and talked matters over, which I supposed +was in regard to the next day's scouting, they commenced to make +preparations to sleep. In the crowd, apparently, were three +middle-aged warriors and two young ones, not yet grown. The three +older ones laid down together, while the two young ones made their +beds about fifteen feet away from the other three. + +After they had become quiet I commenced crawling closer, as there +was some fire yet and I wanted to get their exact location before +I made the attack. + +I felt confident that I could kill one of them the first blow with +my knife, and then I could kill the other two with my pistols. But +this would still leave two to one and I with nothing but a knife; +however, after going this far I was determined to make the attack +at all hazards. + +When I had crawled up within a few feet of their bed, one turned +over and muttered something in his own tongue, which I could not +understand. I made sure I was not detected, and after lying still +for some time I concluded they were all asleep, and I soon made up +my mind that I had better make the attack at once and have the +matter settled one way or the other. After taking in the entire +situation I decided to make the attack with my knife. I took the +pistol from my right holster in my left hand, thereby giving me a +better chance after emptying the one pistol to easily grasp the +other one with my left hand. + +I knew that if I could get a fair lick at one of them with my big +knife, which I always kept as sharp as a razor, that he would make +little, if any, noise. My plan of attack being completed, I +crawled up near their heads, and all appeared to be sound asleep. + +I decided to take the one on my right first, so that in case the +other two should attempt to arise I would be in a position to +shoot the one on my left and at the same time cut the other one +down with my heavy knife. But it was my intention to kill all +three of them with my knife, if possible, in order to save both +pistols for the two young ones, as I expected a hard fight with +them, for I felt sure they would be on to me by the time I got +through with the other three, at the very best I could do. + +I now raised up on to my feet and aimed to strike the one on my +right about the middle of the neck. I came down with all my might +and killed him almost instantly. I served the second one the same +way, but by this time the third one had raised to a sitting +position, and I struck him in the shoulder and had to make a +second lick to kill him. By this time the other two had been +aroused, and, as near as I could tell in the darkness, one of them +was crawling in the opposite direction on his hands and knees, +while the other one was coming at me on all fours. I shot him with +the pistol that I held in my left hand, and I then thought I was +almost safe. Just at that moment the other young buck was on his +feet, with bow in hand but no arrows. He dealt me a blow on the +side of the head, which staggered me but did not knock me down, +and before I had time to recover, he dealt me a second blow, but +it did not stagger me so much as the first, but it brought the +blood quite freely from my nose, at the same time I made a side +stroke at him, but struck too low. I then drew my other pistol +from the holster and fired, shooting him through the chest, and +though he fell mortally wounded, he again raised to his feet and +dealt me another blow, which was a great surprise to me, but just +one stroke of my big knife severed his jugular and he yielded up +the ghost. + +Now my task was done. At the risk of my life I had accomplished +the desired end, and my reputation as a scout would be +established. + +I knew the other scouts were having some sport at my expense while +I was away, for I had overheard two of them in a conversation that +morning make some remarks about Col. Elliott's tenderfoot scout. + +I had said nothing to them, but this made me all the more +determined in the undertaking, and now I had turned the joke on +them, and, as the old saying goes, "he who laughs last laughs +best." + +I could see by the light in the east that the moon would be up in +a short time, so I went and got my saddle-horse from where I had +tied him, and who, by this time was very thirsty and hungry, as he +had had nothing to eat and no water since morning. I watered him, +then picketed him out for about two hours on the little meadow, by +which time the moon had risen. + +I then scalped the five Indians and tied their scalps to my belt. +They would be good evidence of my day's work when I should meet +the Colonel at his quarters. This being done, I tied the five +Indian horses together and started for headquarters, arriving +there about noon the next day. + +Just as I had put the horses in the corral and before I had time +to dismount, Col. Elliott's orderly came on the dead run, saying: +"Col. Elliott wishes to see you at his quarters at once." + +I turned about and rode over to the Colonel's tent, and when I had +saluted him, he said: "Sir, whose horses are those you just turned +into that corral?" + +I said: "Sir, those are my horses, as I understand that any stock +captured from the Indians by an independent scout, he is entitled +to." + +"Mr. Drannan, do you tell me that you captured those horses from +an Indian?" + +I said: "Col. Elliott, yes, sir; and here is something more I +captured with them." At that I threw down the five scalps at his +feet. + +He looked amazed as he gazed at the scalps, but said nothing for a +few moments. + +About this time the orderly announced Jim Beckwith at the door. +The Colonel said let him come in, and just as he entered the door, +Col. Elliott said: + +"Beckwith, where do you suppose this scout got those scalps?" + +Jim picked up the scalps, examined them thoroughly, and said: +"I'll bet my black horse that he took them from the heads of five +Pah-Ute Indians." + +The Colonel smiled and said: "Drannan, if you will tell us all +about the whole affair, I will treat." + +I related the adventure in brief. Dinner being ready, the Colonel +set out the whiskey and cigars and told me to call on him that +afternoon, as he wished to have a private conversation with me. + +I picked up the five scalps and started to dinner, and as I passed +by the kitchen I threw them under the negro cook's feet and told +him to cook them for dinner for my friend and me--referring to Jim +Beckwith. When he saw the scalps he exclaimed: "Laws a massa, +boss! whar you git dem skelps? Marse Meyers said dey wasn't an +Injun in fifty miles o' hyar." + +While we were eating dinner, Jim said to me: "Don't you know them +fellers didn't think you'd ever come back?" + +I asked him what fellows, and he said: "Why, those scouts. One of +them told me you was the d--est fool he ever saw in his life, to +go out scouting alone in a strange country, and that the Pah-Utes +would get you, sure." + +I said I did not think it worth while to ask those scouts anything +about Indians or anything else, for I didn't think they had been +far enough from camp to learn anything themselves. + +That afternoon when I was announced at the Colonel's tent, I was +met in a somewhat different manner by him to what I had been that +noon, for he raised the front of the tent and said: "Come right in +Drannan, why do you hesitate?" + +After having a social chat with him and rehearsing to some extent +the fight which took place the night before between myself and the +five Pah-Utes, he proposed to make me chief of his scouts. He +said: "Now, Drannan, I will tell you what I wished to see you +about. I have five scouts besides you, and I am going to make you +chief of all my scouts, and you can handle them to suit yourself." + +I told the Colonel that I did not desire any promotion whatever, +for in the first place I would not be doing my self justice, and +that it would not be doing justice to the other scouts, and I +thought it would be of more benefit to both him and his other +scouts, to go alone, as I had started out. + +He asked me why I would prefer going alone. My reply was that a +person in that business could not be too cautious, and I did not +know what kind of men he had, and just one careless move would +spoil the plans of the best scout in the world. + +The Colonel admitted that I was right, but insisted on selecting +one man from his five scouts to assist me, saying: "If he don't +suit you, after trying him two or three days, report to me, and +you may select any one from my scouts that you like." And to this +I consented. I told him that I would be ready to start out the +following morning, and if he had any orders to give me to give +them now, as I would start very early. He said that he had no +orders to give, but that he had selected Charlie Meyers to +accompany me; and he proved to be a good man and a good scout. + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +A LIVELY BATTLE WITH PAH-UTES.--PINNED TO SADDLE WITH AN ARROW.-- +SOME VERY GOOD INDIANS.--A STUTTERING CAPTAIN.--BECKWITH OPENS HIS +PASS. + + +The next morning I ordered three days' rations for two men, and +Charlie Meyers desired to know if I was going to Salt Lake City or +New York. I told him I was going out hunting, and if I struck +fresh signs of game I proposed tracking it to wherever it went. + +That day we took the divide between Carson and Humboldt, south of +the emigrant trail, making a ride of forty miles that day, and +then a dry camp--a camp without water. The following morning we +rode about five miles, and came on to a big Indian trail that had +been made the evening before. We pushed on as fast as we could, +all the time keeping a sharp lookout, for we were now in the heart +of the Pah-Ute country, and could not be too careful. About half +past three o'clock we came to where the Indians had camped the +night before, on a tributary of the Humboldt. At this camp three +antelope had been devoured, so we knew that there had been a large +band of the redskins at that feast. It was also evident that they +were not very far ahead of us, as their fires had not entirely +died out. + +Continuing the pursuit we were now getting close to the emigrant +trail, and it was plain that the Indians had headed west, which +convinced me that they were looking for emigrants, and if so they +would not go far before they would either go into camp or leave +the trail. It proved that after following the emigrant train a +short distance they had taken to the hills. The country was a sea +of sagebrush, and frequently we would start a jack-rabbit or +antelope that we would have been pleased to roast for supper, but +dared not shoot. + +When near the top of a hill I would dismount, and leaving my horse +with Meyers, would crawl to the summit of the hill and peep over +in order to discover whether or not the Indians were in sight, and +then return, mount my horse and ride at a rapid gait until near +the top of another hill, when the same maneuver would be repeated. + +At last we came to a sharp ridge and I dismounted. I remarked that +if we did not find those Indians soon we would have to make +another dry camp that night. It was now nearly sunset, and on +crawling to the top of the ridge and looking down on a nice little +valley not more than a half-mile distant, I saw that they had just +gone into camp and had not yet got all their ponies unpacked. + +I had a good chance to make a rough estimate of their number, +which I thought to be about two hundred warriors. + +I rushed back to Meyers and told him that I had located them, and +that one of us would have to ride back to headquarters that night +and report, and asked him whether he would rather go or stay and +watch the Indians. + +"Why not both go," he asked. + +I told him that by the time the cavalry could get there the +Indians might be gone, and one of us must stay and see where they +went to. + +We were now, as near as we could tell, about thirty-five miles +from camp, as that afternoon we had been traveling west, in the +direction of headquarters. + +After thinking the matter over, Meyers concluded that he would +rather make the ride than stay. I told him to be off at once, but +before starting, he said to me: "Suppose the Indians should +discover you while I am away?" + +I replied that I would like very much to have them discover me, +when I knew the soldiers were in sight or within ten miles, for I +would like to run them into such a trap, and that I was not afraid +of any horse in their band catching Mexico in any distance. + +I instructed Meyers not to spare horseflesh on the way, and to +tell Col. Elliott to start two companies of cavalry as soon as +possible. + +We shook hands and he started, and that was once that he made good +time. It being after seven o'clock when he started, he reached +camp at fifteen minutes after eleven that night. + +When he had gone I started in to lay my plans for the night. + +It was yet so light that I could get a good view of the +surrounding country, and about three miles from the Indians' camp +I could see the highest hill anywhere around. I decided at once +that if I were on that high hill I could see every move of the +Indians, besides I could look up the Humboldt and see the +soldiers, or at least the dust raised by them, while they were yet +a long way off. + +This peak lay north of the trail, and the trail ran east and west. + +As soon as it was dark I mounted my horse and rode to the peak and +tied him to a sagebrush in a sinkhole, that looked as though it +might have been put there on purpose, for my horse was hidden from +every direction. + +I now went to the top of the hill, and there being a dense growth +of sagebrush, I was perfectly safe from discovery when daylight +should come. + +I did not have to wait long after daylight, for just as the sun +was creeping up over the hill and shedding its rays on the little +valley where the two hundred braves had had such a pleasant +night's rest, dreaming, perhaps, of emigrants, horses, provisions +and other stuff that they would probably capture the following +day, I looked up the Humboldt and saw the two companies of cavalry +coming. + +The Indians seemed in no hurry to leave, and were perhaps waiting +for the five scouts to return and report, never thinking that they +had been killed and scalped, and that the same paleface who did +the deed was then watching their every movement and laying plans +for their destruction. + +I got my horse in about a minute, mounted and rode across the +country to meet the cavalry, taking a route so that I would not be +seen by the Indians. + +I met the soldiers--who were commanded by Capt. Mills and Lieut. +Harding--about four miles from the Indian camp, and they came to a +halt. + +I told them about the number I thought there were in the Indian +band and the lay of the country, as nearly as I could. The Captain +and Lieutenant stepped to one side and held a council, and after +talking the matter over they called me and said they had about +decided to attack the enemy from both above and below at the same +time, and, as I had seen the ground, they asked my opinion in the +matter. I told them I thought it an excellent plan, and then Capt. +Mills turned to Lieut. Harding and said: "Which do you prefer, to +make the upper or lower attack? Take your choice." + +He then asked me if they could get to the head of the ravine that +the Indians were camped on and not be seen by them. I told him +that I could show them a ravine that led from the emigrant trail +to the head of the valley on which they were camped, and marked +out a plat of the country in the dust, showing the course each +company would have to take, telling them that the company making +the upper attack would have to travel about a mile farther than +the one making the attack from below. He then asked me if the +companies could see each other before the Indians could see them. +I informed him that they could not, but that I could show him a +hill where he could station a man and he would be able to see both +companies, but the Indians could not see him, and when the company +from above should reach the top of the hill that man could signal +to the other company to charge. + +At that time Lieut. Harding turned to Capt. Mills and said: "If +the boy scout will go with me I will make the upper attack, as he +has been over the country and knows the lay of the ground." + +Of course I consented, and we marched to the mouth of the ravine +just mentioned. + +I pointed out the hill referred to, and the Lieutenant placed a +man on top of it, and we proceeded. + +Just before we reached the top of the other hill, Lieut. Harding +halted and formed his men in line, placing them about ten feet +apart, saying: "I have only a hundred soldiers, but I want it to +appear that I have a thousand." + +When we first came in sight of the Indians, some were lying +stretched out in the sun, some were sitting down, while a few were +out looking after their horses, everything indicating that they +had just had their breakfast and were lounging around, not having +the slightest idea of an enemy in twenty miles of them, and we +took them wholly unawares. + +When the Lieutenant formed his men in line before raising the top +of the hill, he asked me to take charge of his left wing and he +would take charge of his right. As soon as we came in sight of the +Indians, he gave the order to charge. + +This was the first thing of the kind I had ever witnessed, and +when I cast my eyes down the line of soldiers I thought it the +grandest sight I had ever seen. This was also the first engagement +for either of the companies. + +In all the scrimmages I had been in with the redskins, the one +that made the most noise was the best Indian fighter; so when the +Lieutenant gave the order to charge, I raised a yell, as I thought +this to be one of the essential points of a charge, and wondered +why the rest of the boys did not do the same. However, after +hearing a few of my whoops they picked it up, and each began +yelling at the top of his voice, and by this time we were among +the Indians. + +The two companies had about the same distance to run after +sounding the charge, but Lieut. Harding was at the scene of +conflict a few moments ahead of Capt. Mills, thereby giving the +Indians time to scatter. This was attributed to the fact that +Capt. Mills had to charge up grade while Lieut. Harding had down +grade, which they had not thought of before making the +arrangement, and the ground being mostly sand made a great +difference in the speed of the horses. + +Meyers and I made a rush for the Indians' horses, but the soldiers +all stuck together, and seeing that a number of Indians were at +their horses already and mounted, we abandoned the idea at once. +Had one platoon made a dash for the horses and stampeded them, we +would no doubt have got more Indians. + +After emptying both of my single-shot pistols I drew my knife, and +just at that moment an Indian shot Meyers through the arm with an +arrow and he sang out to me that he was wounded. Another Indian +then made a dash at Meyers with his bow and arrow in hand, so I +charged after him and made a slash at him with my knife, but he +saw me in time to slide off on the opposite side of his horse. I +could not stop the blow so I struck his horse in the back and +brought him to the ground, and the Indian ran for dear life. + +About this time a soldier came riding along, and I knew from his +actions that his pistol was empty (the soldiers had no firearms in +this engagement except pistols), and I asked him why he did not +draw his sabre and cut them down. He said he had no orders to do +so. + +To that I did not reply, but I thought this a queer way of +fighting Indians, when a soldier had to stop in the midst of a +battle, fold his arms and stand there to be shot down while +waiting orders to draw his sabre. A moment later they received +orders to use their sabres, and they went to hewing the Indians +down. + +I saw an Indian with two or three feathers in his hair, and I took +him to be the war chief. He was coming direct for me with bow and +arrow in hand, and I made a desperate rush for him and made a +strike at him with my knife, but he threw up his arm and knocked +off my lick, at the same time a measly redskin shot me through the +calf of my leg, pinning me to the mochila of my saddle. + +The mochila is a large covering for a saddle made of very heavy +leather and comes low on the horse's side, thereby affording great +protection to horses in cases like this. This shield is of Spanish +origin, but they were used by all mountaineers as well as +Mexicans. + +I was leaning over when the arrow struck me and pinned me to the +saddle, so that I could not straighten up, for I was almost on the +side of the horse when I received the arrow. + +Capt. Mills, seeing the predicament I was in, came to my rescue +and cut the war chief down with his sabre, just in time to save me +from getting another arrow. + +The Captain pulled the arrow out of my leg, which had a very large +spear made of hoop iron, and it tore a bad hole in my leg when he +pulled it out. By this time the redskins were scattering in all +directions, some on foot and some on horseback. + +As soon as I was free I saw a band of about fifty horses not far +away, and asked the Captain to detail some of his men to assist me +in running them off. The Captain dashed off to his orderly who he +told to take a platoon of men and go with the boy scout to take +charge of those horses. + +In this charge we got fifty-two horses and killed four Indians. We +drove the horses out on the hill where they would be out of the +way and where the Indians would not get them, and the Sergeant +left his men to guard them until further orders. + +As I rode back to the scene of battle I looked up the road and saw +four wagons coming. I asked the Sergeant where those wagons were +going, and he said they were ambulances, coming to haul the +wounded to headquarters, saying they had started at the same time +the cavalry did but could not keep up, consequently they did not +arrive until after the battle was over. + +About the time I returned to the battlefield the bugle sounded +calling the soldiers in from the chase, and on looking over the +ground, four dead soldiers and twenty-seven wounded were +discovered. There were sixty-three dead Indians in sight, and +more, no doubt, were scattered around in the sagebrush. + +The battle being over we had our breakfast. I also had my horse +put out to grass, as he was very hungry, not having had anything +to eat since noon the day before, and not much then. + +After breakfast was over the soldiers buried their four dead +comrades and loaded the wounded into the ambulances and started +for headquarters, arriving there about nine o'clock that night. +Charlie Meyers had a wound in his arm that laid him up all summer, +and I was not able to ride for two weeks; although I had the best +of care. + +From that time on I was known as the boy scout, and the next day +after our return, Col. Elliott appointed me chief of scouts with +rank and pay of captain, which was one hundred and twenty-five +dollars per month. He also provided me with private quarters, my +tent being pitched near his own, and notwithstanding that I was +only a mere boy the other scouts all came to me for orders and +counsel, and I often wondered why men who knew nothing of scouting +nor the nature of Indians would stick themselves up as scouts. + +Two weeks from the time I got wounded the Colonel asked me if I +thought I was able to ride, saying that the news had just come to +him that the Indians had attacked a train of emigrants, killed +some of them and driven off their stock. This depredation he said +had been committed in the Goose Creek mountain country about one +hundred and twenty miles east of us. Col. Elliott said that he was +going to send out a company of soldiers there, and if I felt able +I might accompany them, which I did. + +All being in readiness, I selected two scouts to assist me, and we +pulled out, taking with us a pack-train with one month's +provisions. + +We had a rough and tedious trip, as not one of the entire crowd +had been over the country and did not know a single watering +place, so we had to go it blind, hit or miss. I had not gone far +when I found that I had made a sad mistake, as notwithstanding my +leg appeared quite well when I started out, yet, after one or two +days' riding, it got quite sore and pained me severely, and the +longer I rode the worse it got. + +Five days' ride and we were at the place where the emigrants were +camped. Another small train had pulled in with them as they were +afraid to cross the desert alone. + +That night Capt. Mills called the men of the train together to +ascertain whether or not they wished to look after their stock, +but they did not seem to know themselves what to do. They were +quite sure that the Indians had driven the stock south, as they +had tracked them some distance in that direction. Capt. Mills +asked me what I thought of finding the stock, and I told him that +if it was driven south, of which the emigrants seemed quite sure, +it was more than likely that the Indians and stock were several +hundred miles away, and that it would be next to impossible to get +any trace of them, and in my opinion it would be like trying to +find a needle in a haystack. + +After considering the matter the emigrants concluded that I was +right. + +Those of them who had lost all their stock were a pitiful sight +indeed, women and children were weeping, and particularly those +who had lost their husbands and fathers in the fight with the +Indians. + +There were no women and children killed, as the Indians did not +attack the train, being apparently only bent on capturing the +horses and cattle. They had killed the guards and also the men +that ran out to protect the stock. + +One who has never witnessed a like affair can scarcely comprehend +the situation of a widow left out there with three or four +children in this desolate region, utterly destitute. It was a +gloomy situation, indeed, and a sight that would cause the +hardest-hearted man to shed tears. + +Those who had lost their stock made some kind of arrangements to +ride with those that had come later. + +The day before starting the emigrants rolled all their wagons +together that they did not have teams to haul, also the harness, +and in fact everything they could not haul, and burned them, so +that the Indians would not derive any benefit from them. + +I merely note a few of these facts to give the reader a faint idea +of the trials, troubles and hardships that the early settlers of +the "wild West" had to pass through, not only in crossing the +plains, but, as will be shown later in this book, in many +instances after settling in different parts of this western +country. + +The day before starting, Capt. Mills suggested that as my wound +was giving me so much trouble, I should return to headquarters in +company with the train of emigrants, and asked how many men I +wanted to guard them through. I told him that I would not feel +safe with less than twenty men. The Captain thought that twenty +would not be sufficient, so he made a detail of twenty-five men +and issued rations to last us eight days. + +Capt. Mills and the men he had reserved remained in this section +of country to guard emigrants that might be traveling westward, as +the Indians were now working in this part of the country since our +battle with them on the Humboldt. + +Having completed all arrangements we pulled out with one hundred +and twenty-five wagons, all told, in the train, but as some of the +oxen were very tender footed we had to travel very slowly. I +divided my men into squads of twelve each, and changed guards at +morning, noon, evening and midnight. + +I also started six guards ahead every morning, with instructions +to keep from one to three miles from the train on either side, +according to the lay of the country. The second day one of the +scouts returned from the south and reported having seen six +Indians southwest of the train; this was about ten o'clock in the +forenoon. I turned and rode off with the scout, saying nothing to +anyone in the train. He piloted me to where he had seen the +Indians, and sure enough there were the tracks of their ponies in +the sand. The scout returned to the train and I followed the trail +of the Indian all day, but never got sight of an Indian. When dark +came I turned about and rode to camp, arriving there at twelve +o'clock that night. + +The people in the train were very much pleased to see me return, +for they had felt much uneasiness as to my safety, fearing that I +might have fallen into the hands of the Pah-Utes. This ride, +however, laid me up for two weeks, and I had to go the balance of +the way in an emigrant wagon. + +The captain of this train had a jaw breaking name that I never +heard before or since. It was Sam Molujean, and I know he was the +most excitable man that I ever saw. When Capt. Molujean got +excited he could not talk at all for stuttering, so one day the +guards concluded to have a little sport at the expense of the +Captain. We were now nearly opposite where about a month previous +a battle with the Pah-Utes had been fought, and the advance guards +were riding back to the train--it now being time to corrall for +dinner. They met Capt. Molujean, who asked if they had seen any +Indians. + +One of the guards informed him that there were sixty-odd up the +ravine. This set the Captain wild. He wheeled around and rode back +to where I was in the wagon and started in to tell me what the +guard had said, but he could not utter a word. + +After listening to him a minute or so I told him if he would get +some one to tell what he wanted I would answer his question. I +suppose I was somewhat impatient, as I was suffering from my +wound. At this one of the guards rode up with a smile on his face, +and I asked him if he could tell me what Capt. Molujean was trying +to say to me. He related to me what they had told him in regard to +the sixty-odd Indians up the ravine, referring to the Indians that +had been killed in battle between the soldiers and Pah-Utes. + +We had a good laugh at the Captain's expense, after which I told +him the Indians the guard had reference to were all good Indians. + +"Oh! is that so?" he exclaimed, and these were the first words he +had been able to utter. "But," he continued, "I did not know there +were any good Indians in this country; I thought all of them were +savage." I told the Captain that those Indians were dead, and that +all dead Indians were good ones. This was a stunner for the +Captain, and I do not think that the joke has ever penetrated his +massive skull. + +We did not see any more Indians or any sign of them on the trip. + +On reaching headquarters we found Jim Beckwith awaiting our +arrival. He had been out with three other men whom he had hired to +help him blaze a road across the mountains through his new pass. +He had finished his work on the road and returned to Col. +Elliott's camp, knowing that if he could get one train to go his +way it would be a great help toward getting the tide of +immigration turned in that direction the following season. + +Here Beckwith took charge of the train, Col. Elliott recommending +him very highly, and telling the emigrants that if they would only +obey his orders he would pilot them through in safety. + +Before starting, Jim asked me to come over and spend the winter +with him, saying that he was going to build a cabin on the other +side of the mountains, lay in a big supply of provisions, and as +after that he was going to do nothing, he wanted me to help him. + +I promised to go and winter with him if it was possible for me to +do so, as at this time I did not know but what I might have to go +to San Francisco to have my leg treated the coming winter. + +From here the emigrants were to pay Jim to pilot them across the +mountains to a little mining camp called Hangtown, which was about +one hundred and twenty miles east of Sacramento. They made the +trip without any trouble. I saw one of the emigrants the next +spring and they spoke in very high terms of Jim Beckwith. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +COL. ELLIOTT KILLS HIS FIRST DEER, AND SECURES A FINE PAIR OF +HORNS AS A PRESENT FOR HIS FATHER.--BECKWITH'S TAVERN.--SOCIETY. + + +Two weeks after the incidents related in the previous chapter, +Capt. Mills came in with another train of emigrants, not having +seen an Indian on the trip, and from this time on there was no +danger of such trains going from that region through Beckwith +Pass, and as the road was now broken by the other train, these +emigrants could cross the Sierra Nevadas without a guide. + +About this time four men with pack animals came along who claimed +to be from Salt Lake. They reported that they had seen Indians one +day traveling east of headquarters. I took two men and started out +and was gone about a week, but did not see an Indian, or a track +or sign of one, and when we returned the Colonel concluded that he +had been misled by the packers. + +Col. Elliott now ordered me to take fifty men, with two weeks' +provisions, and go as far as we could with that amount of rations, +or until we should meet some emigrants. We were gone about three +weeks, but did not see either Indians or emigrants. The fact is, +that it was getting so late in the fall that the Indians had all +gone south, and the emigrants were not moving on the desert at +that season. + +On our return the Colonel had everything ready and we pulled out +for San Francisco. We camped the first night at Steamboat Springs, +a place that has since grown to be a famous health resort. On the +second day we passed over the country where now stands Carson +City, the capital of Nevada. At that time, this region, like all +of that country then, was a wild, unsettled, sagebrush desert, or +mountain wilderness. + +The morning we left Eagle Valley the Colonel rode in advance of +the column with me, and I saw there was something on his mind. In +a little while he said he would like to kill a deer with big +horns, so that he could send it--the horns--to his father in New +York, who had never seen a deer, and he added that notwithstanding +he--the Colonel--had been on the Pacific coast two years, he had +never killed a deer in his life. I told him that I would fix it +for him to get one the very next day, and he was as pleased as a +child. + +That night we camped by a big spring at the mouth of a great +canyon, and about the spring stood a number of large pine trees. +Many persons who had passed that way had carved their names in the +bark of the trees, and among the names were two that were quite +familiar to me. One of these was the name of Capt. Molujean--I +wondered how he had done it without stuttering--and the other was +the name of James Beckwith. On the same tree was written with lead +pencil: "Sixty miles to Beckwith's Hotel." + +On my favorite horse, Pinto, I rode out with the Colonel for a +deer hunt. While riding along the canyon about two miles from +where the command had camped, I saw a large doe crossing the +canyon and coming down the hill toward us. I signaled the Colonel +to halt and I shot the doe, breaking her neck, while sitting on my +horse. I then told the Colonel to secrete himself behind a tree +and he would soon see the male deer, and he would stand a good +show to get a fine pair of horns. In a few moments two deer came +tracking the one I had shot. + +"Be ready, now," said I, "and when he stops let him have it." So +when the deer were within about fifty yards I gave a keen whistle +and they stopped, stock still. The Colonel fired and brought the +big buck to the ground. The other, which was a small one, started +to run, but I sent a bullet after it that made more venison. + +We now had plenty of meat, and the Colonel was as proud over +killing that deer as I was over my first pair of boots. + +We stopped here until the command came up, dressed the venison and +went on our way rejoicing. + +Soon we were ascending the Sierra Nevada Mountains, and about +three o'clock we struck the snow-line. + +To one who has never gone from comparative summer in a few hours' +ride, to the depths of winter and a considerable depth of snow, +the sensation is a strange one. Of course, I had often done that +before. But having more leisure to think of it now, and having +more to do with the snow, I thought of its strangeness, and I am +reminded of a little girl whom I have become acquainted with long +since those days, and the effect that the first sight of snow had +upon her. She was born in San Francisco, and had not seen any snow +up to the time when she was three years old. Her parents were +coming east with her on a railroad train, which runs over about +the same ground that we were on at the time I was there with Col. +Elliott. Awakening in the morning in a sleeping-car on top of the +Sierras, the little one looked out, and seeing the vast fields of +whiteness, she exclaimed: "Do look, mamma; the world is covered +with sugar." + +As we ascended the mountains the snow became so deep in a little +while that we were forced to camp. The next morning the herders +were directed to take the stock ahead in order to tramp down the +snow to make a trail, but in four miles it became so deep that it +was impossible to proceed further in that manner, and then the +Colonel detailed fifty men to shovel snow, but having only a few +shovels, wooden ones were made that answered the purpose, and +while we were shoveling, the horses were also frequently driven +back and forth over the trail, and in three days we had a passable +road for the wagons. + +At the end of the three days we reached the edge of the snow on +the opposite side of the mountains, and there being a beautiful +camping ground and the first night out of the snow for some time, +the luxury of it was fully appreciated by all hands. + +On a pine tree here I again saw signs of my old friend, Jim +Beckwith, for there was written: "Twenty miles to Beckwith's +Hotel." So you see that even in that faraway country, and at that +early day, even the pioneer had learned the uses of out-door +advertising. + +The next morning we took an early start and traveled hard all day, +anticipating with much pleasure that at night we should enjoy all +the luxuries of the season at Beckwith's Hotel. And we did, to the +extent that this region and the markets of San Francisco could +afford. + +We reached [Transcriber's note: unreadable text] about sunset that +evening, and the command went into camp and I went to Jim's new +log house. He had built one and had started in to build the second, +having two carpenters at work finishing them up. + +After supper Col. Elliott and all his officers, both commissioned +and non-commissioned, came to Jim's house, where, after a social +chat and having cracked a few jokes, which latter was really a +part of the business connected with this life, Col. Elliott pulled +off his overcoat, laid it and his hat on a bed, stepped up near +the table and said: + +"Mr. Beckwith, I wish to say a few words to your friend, Mr. +Drannan, in behalf of myself and the other officers present." Jim +told him to go ahead, which he did, telling how faithful I had +been and what valuable services I had rendered both to him and the +emigrants. He went on and made quite a lengthy speech, in +conclusion of which he said: "Mr. Drannan, as a slight token of +our appreciation of your services while with us, I now present to +you this pair of glasses," whereupon he handed me a fine pair of +field glasses which he took from his overcoat pocket, "and here +are two navy revolvers that Capt. Mills and Lieut. Harding wish to +present to you as a token of their friendship." + +This took me wholly by surprise, as I had not expected anything of +the kind, and I was so dumbfounded that all I could say was to +thank them for the presents, the thought never having entered my +head that my services had been so highly appreciated by the +officers of those four companies. + +Col. Elliott said that in case he should go out on the plains the +following summer, which in all probability he would, he wanted me +to go with him without fail. I promised him that I would, provided +I was in the country when he started out. + +After Col. Elliott had closed his remarks and taken his seat, Jim +Beckwith arose and made quite a speech in his plain, rude +language, addressing his remarks principally to Col. Elliott, in +which he said: "Colonel, I would not have recommended this boy to +you so highly if I had not been with him long enough to know that +when he starts in to do a thing he goes at it for all there is in +him, and, as I told you, he has been with Kit Carson ever since he +was a boy, and I knowed that if he didn't have the everlasting +grit in him, Kit Carson wouldn't have kept him around so long. I +am very glad indeed, Colonel, that he has filled the bill, and now +the Injun fightin' is all over for this season and 'twill be some +time before we all meet again, if we ever do. I have nothing of +value to present to you, but such as I have is as free as the +water in the brook." + +At this he produced a gallon jug of whiskey, set it on the table, +gave us some glasses and told us all to help ourselves. This wound +up the evening's exercises, and after each had tipped the glass +about three times we broke up the lodge and each went on his way +rejoicing. + +Before the Colonel left that night he told me that we would divide +the captured horses the next morning. I told him that all I wanted +was the five horses that I had captured from the five Indian +scouts when I first started in to scout for him, but the next +morning [Transcriber's note: unreadable text] out when the horses +were brought in and made the division. There were sixty-three of +them, and he left fifteen to my share. + +I stayed at Jim Beckwith's for about two weeks, and his carpenters +having the houses completed, we saddled up four horses and took +them to Hangtown. It was a distance of twenty miles to Hangtown, +which at that time was one of the loveliest mining towns in +California. There were between four and five thousand inhabitants +in and around the place. During the day it appeared dead, as there +was scarcely a person to be seen on the streets; but at night it +would be full of miners, who, it seemed, came to town for no other +purpose than to spend the money they had earned during the day. + +This winter passed off, apparently, very slowly, being the most +lonesome winter I had put in since I struck the mountains. + +Along about the middle of February our groceries were running +short and Jim went to Hangtown for supplies. On his return he +brought me a letter from Col. Elliott, asking me to come to San +Francisco at once. + +I asked him what he thought of it, and he told me by all means to +go. + +I told him I would have to stop in San Francisco and buy me a suit +of clothes before going out to the fort to see Col. Elliott. He +thought this was useless, saying: "Your buckskin suit that Kit +Carson gave you is just what you want for a trip like that." + +I thought that if I wore such a suit in civilization the people +would make light of me, and I hated the idea of being the laughing +stock for other people. + +Jim said: "It is Col. Elliott you are going to see, and he would +rather have you come that way than any other." + +I took my suit down and looked at it, and it was a fine one of the +kind. I had never worn it since Uncle Kit's wedding, so it was +practically new. I decided to wear it, and the next morning I +started for San Francisco, Jim accompanying me to Hangtown to take +the horses back to his ranche. + +At Hangtown I took the stage for Sacramento, which, by the way, +was the first time I had ever ridden in a stage-coach. + +We started from Hangtown at five o'clock in the morning and at +twelve o'clock that night the driver drew rein at the American +Exchange Hotel in Sacramento. The coach was loaded down to its +utmost capacity, there being nine passengers aboard. The roads +were very rough at this season of the year--being the latter part +of February--and I would rather have ridden on the hurricane deck +of the worst bucking mustang in California than in that coach. + +This hotel was kept at that time by a man named Lamb. + +That night when the proprietor assigned the passengers to their +respective rooms he asked us if we wished to take the boat for San +Francisco the next morning. I told him that I did, whereupon he +asked me if I wanted my breakfast. I told him that I did, saying +that I didn't want to go from there to San Francisco without +anything to eat. This caused quite a laugh among the bystanders; +but I did not see the point, for at that time I did not know that +one could get a meal on a steamboat, for I had never been near +one. + +Just as I stepped on the boat next morning, a man rushed up to me +with a "Hello there! how are you?" as he grasped me by the hand. +Seeing that I did not recognize him, he said: "I don't believe you +know me." I told him that he had one the best of me. He said: "You +are the boy scout that was with Capt. Mill last summer, and you +rode in my wagon." Then I recognized him. His name was Healey, and +at the time was running a restaurant in San Francisco, and he +insisted on my going to his place when I got to the city, which +invitation I accepted. His establishment was known as the Miners' +Restaurant. + +Mrs. Healey and her little daughter, eleven years old, knew me as +soon as I entered the door, and were apparently as glad to see me +as though I had been a relative of the family. + +The next morning when I offered to settle my bill they would not +take a cent, but requested me while in the city to make my home +with them. + +That day I went out to the Fort, which was three miles from the +city, and on arriving there the first man I met was Lieut. +Harding, who at once conducted me to Col. Elliott's quarters. + +That afternoon we made the rounds of the Fort, and Col. Elliott, +when introducing me, would say: "This is the 'boy scout,' who was +out with us last summer, and whom you have heard me speak of so +often." + +I made my home with Col. Elliott and his wife during my stay at +the Fort, which was two weeks. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +SOMETHING WORSE THAN FIGHTING INDIANS.--DANCE AT COL. ELLIOTT'S.-- +CONSPICUOUS SUIT OF BUCKSKIN.--I MANAGE TO GET BACK TO BECKWITH'S. + + +That night Mrs. Elliott had every lady that belonged around the +Fort at her house, and she took the "boy scout" along the line and +introduced him to every one of the ladies. This was something new +to me, for it was the first time in my life that I had struck +society, and I would have given all of my previous summer's wages +to have been away from there. I did not know how to conduct +myself, and every time I made a blunder--which seemed to me every +time I made a move--I would attempt to smooth it over, and always +made a bad matter worse. + +Next morning at the breakfast table I told the Colonel and his +wife that I was going back into the mountains as fast as I could +get there. I knew I could track Indians, and fight them if +necessary, but I did not know how to entertain ladies, especially +when my best clothes were only Indian-tailored buckskin. + +Mrs. Elliott assured me that she would not have had me come there +dressed differently, had it been in her power to prevent it. +"Dressed otherwise than you are," she said, "you would not be the +same 'boy scout' that my husband has told us so much concerning." + +Of course this was encouraging, and I concluded that I might not +have been so painfully ridiculous as I had supposed. For, be it +known, I had been scarcely able to sleep the night before for +thinking of what an outlandish figure I had cut that night before +all those high-toned ladies, and of the sport my presence among +them must have created. + +However, I felt much better after the pleasant way in which Mrs. +Elliott declared she looked at it, and with renewed self- +complacence proceeded to discuss with the Colonel his plans for +the next summer's campaign. + +He informed me that he intended to go out with four companies of +soldiers, and would locate a short distance east of last year's +quarters, at a place where the town of Wadsworth has since been +built. Plenty of good water and an abundance of grass were there, +and with two companies he would make his headquarters there. The +other two companies he would send about one hundred miles further +east, to the vicinity of Steen's Mountain, and it was his wish +that I should take charge of the scouts and operate between the +two camps. + +Notwithstanding I had a good home with Col. Elliott and his wife +as long as I wished to remain, it seemed to me that this was the +longest and lonesomest week I had ever experienced. Everything +being so different from my customary way of living, I could not +content myself. + +The day before I was to start back home it was arranged that I +should return to Jim Beckwith's ranche and keep the Colonel posted +by letter in regard to the snow in the mountains, and when he +would be able to cross. Then I was to join him at Beckwith's. + +The following evening Mrs. Elliott gave a party, which was +attended by all the ladies and gentlemen of the garrison. There +was to be a general good time, perhaps the last party of the +season, as it was approaching the time for preparations for the +next campaign against the Indians. + +When all the guests had arrived and the spacious house was a blaze +of light and happiness--fair women smiling and their musical +voices fairly making a delightful hub-bub of light conversation, +and the gentlemen, superb in their gold-trimmed uniforms, or +impressive in full evening dress--the manager of the dance sang +out for all to take partners for some sort of a bowing and +scraping drill that is a mystery to me to this day. I had seen the +fandango in Taos, and elsewhere in the Mexican parts of the +southwest, but this was the first time I had seen Americans dance, +and it was all appallingly new to me. + +I sat in a corner like a homely girl at a kissing-bee, and had +nothing to say. + +After the crowd had danced about two hours, the floor-manager sang +out, "Ladies' choice!" or something that meant the same thing, and +to my surprise and terror, Mrs. Elliott made a bee-line for me and +asked me to assist her in dancing a quadrille. I had no more idea +of a quadrille than I had of something that was invented +yesterday, and I begged her to excuse me, telling her that I knew +nothing whatever of dancing. She declared, however, that I had +looked on long enough to learn and that I would go through all +right. I hung back like a balky horse at the foot of a slippery +hill, but between Mrs. Elliott and the prompter I was almost +dragged out on the floor. + +The reader may be able to conceive a faint idea of my situation. I +was now twenty-three years old, and this was the first time I had +been in civilization since I had left St. Louis, a boy of fifteen. +Here I was, among those swell people, gorgeous in "purple and fine +linen," so to speak; ladies in silks, ruffles and quirlymacues, +gentlemen in broadcloth, gold lace and importance, and I in only +buckskin from head to foot. I would have freely given everything I +possessed to have been out of that, but my excuses failed utterly, +and finally I went into it as I would an Indian fight, put on a +bold front and worked for dear life. + +I found it quite different to what I had expected Instead of +making light of me, as I feared they would, each lady in the set +tried to assist me all she could. + +When on the floor it seemed to me that every man, woman and child +were looking at me, as indeed they were, or rather at my suit of +buckskin, that, worked full of beads and porcupine quills, was the +most beautiful suit of its kind I have ever seen. But it was so +different from the dress of the others that it made me decidedly +conspicuous. When on the floor and straightened up I felt as if I +were about nine feet high, and that my feet were about twenty +inches long and weighed near fifty pounds each. + +The prompter called out, "Balance all!" and I forgot to dance +until all the others were most through balancing, then I turned +loose on the double-shuffle, this being, the only step I knew, and +I hadn't practiced that very much. About the time I would get +started in on this step the prompter would call something else, +and thus being caught between two hurries I would have to run to +catch up with the other dancers. However, with the assistance of +Mrs. Elliott, the other good ladies, the prompter, and anybody +else in reach, I managed to get through, but I had never gone into +an Indian fight with half the dread that I went into that dance, +and never escaped from one with more thankfulness. + +The following morning, after bidding Col. Elliott, his wife and +all the other of my new-found friends good-bye, I started on my +return to Beckwith's ranche, perfectly willing to resign my high- +life surroundings to go back to the open and congenial fields of +nature and an indescribable freedom. + +I found Beckwith suffering severely from an old arrow wound that +he had received in a fight with the Utes near Fort Hall in 1848. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +DRILLING THE DETAILED SCOUTS.--WE GET AMONG THE UTES.--FOUR SCOUTS +HAVE NOT REPORTED YET.--ANOTHER LIVELY FIGHT.--BECKWITH MAKES A +RAISE. + + +It was late spring when the snow began to melt, but it went away +very fast when it once started. About the first of June I wrote to +Col. Elliott that by the tenth of the month he could cross the +mountains. He did not arrive until the 20th of June, then I joined +him and we started across the mountains. + +By direction of the Colonel each of the captains detailed four men +from their respective companies to be my assistants, and at my +suggestion young men were chosen, such as myself, who could ride +forty-eight hours, if necessary, without stopping, and I asked for +men who were not afraid to go alone, not afraid to fight, and, +above all, men that would never allow themselves to be taken +prisoner. + +The command having been drawn up for dress parade, the orderly +sergeants called their rolls, and whenever a man's name was called +whom the captains wished to de-tail, he was directed to stand +aside. Up to this time the men did not know and were wondering +what was up. Col. Elliott informed them after the drill was over, +and said to them: + +"Soldiers, this man, Capt. Drannan, is now your chief, and you +will act according to his orders at any and all times. He will +instruct you when to meet him at his private quarters." + +The next three days were spent in drilling the scouts to mount and +dismount quickly, to shoot at some object when on the dead run, to +lie on the side of the horse and shoot at an object on the +opposite side while running at full speed, and a great deal of +other work of that kind. + +Three days later we started east, Capt. Mills and Lieut. Harding +with their companies, expecting to go about one hundred miles +before locating permanently for the summer. I started out in +advance of the command with my entire force of scouts. We traveled +about fifteen miles together, when we separated, four taking the +north side of the emigrant trail, with instructions to keep from +four to five miles from it; four keeping the trail and four, with +myself, south of the trail. I gave the men north instructions in +case they should find an Indian trail to follow it until they were +sure the Indians were making for the emigrant trail, and then +dispatch one man to notify the men on the trail, the other three +follow the Indians, and at the end of three days all were to meet +at a certain point on the trail where, we expected to meet the +soldiers. + +The second day out we struck an Indian trail south of the road, +but it being an old one we did not follow it but made a note of +the number we thought there were in the band, an that night we +pulled for the emigrant trail, expecting to meet the soldiers +there. + +We did not meet the soldiers, but met the four scouts who had +traveled on the emigrant trail. + +We got no word that night from the men north, but according to +agreement we went to a hill near by and built two fires of +sagebrush, that they might know where we were, and if in need of +assistance they could dispatch, but did not see nor hear anything +of them. + +The next morning I kept the emigrant trail myself, sending the +other squad of men south, with instructions to meet me at Humboldt +Wells, telling them about the distance it was from where we were +then camped, and describing the place to them. There we would wait +until the command came up, as we were now running short of +rations. That day the party south struck the same trail that we +had seen the day before; two of them followed it and the other two +came to camp to report. The party that had started out north of +the trail got into camp just at dusk, tired and hungry, and the +following morning at daylight the other two from the south came +into camp. From what I could learn from them the band of Indians +they had been following were traveling along almost parallel with +the emigrant trail, looking for emigrants, as it was now getting +time that the emigrants were beginning to string along across the +plains en-route for the gold fields of California. + +Our provisions had run out, so we sat up late that night awaiting +the arrival of the command, but we looked in vain. + +The following morning, just as I could begin to see that it was +getting a little light in the east, myself and one assistant scout +crawled out quietly, without disturbing the other boys, to kill +some game. We had not gone far from camp when we saw nine +antelope; we both fired and both shot the same antelope. We +dressed the game and took it to camp, arriving there just as the +other two scouts came in from the south. The boys were all up in +camp, and considerable excitement prevailed among them, they +having heard two shots, and thought the Indians had attacked us. +They were all hungry as wolves, so we broiled and ate antelope +almost as long as there was any to eat. + +Almost the entire scout force were from New York, and were new +recruits who had never known what it was to rough it, and they +said this was the first meal they had ever made on meat alone. +After breakfast was over, it now being understood that we would +lie over until the supply train should come up, my first assistant +scout and two others took a trip to a mountain some two miles from +camp, which was the highest mountain near us, taking my glasses +along to look for the supply train. In about two hours one of the +scouts returned to camp in great haste and somewhat excited, +saying that about fifteen or twenty miles distant they had seen a +band of Indians who were traveling in the direction of camp. We +all saddled our horses, left a note at camp informing Capt. Mills +where we had gone and for what purpose. We started for what has +ever since been known as Look-out Mountain--of course not the +famous Lookout Mountain of Tennessee--and there joined the other +three scouts. From the top of this mountain we could get a good +view of the Indians through the field glasses. We watched them +until about one o'clock, when they went into camp in the head of a +little ravine some five miles distant--This convinced us that +there was water and that they had stopped for the night. We +located them as well as we could, and the entire scout force, +being thirteen all told, started across the country for their +camp. + +Seven of this number of scouts had never seen a wild Indian and +were over anxious to have a little sport with the redskins. The +Indians, being in a little ravine, we were able to get within a +half a mile of them before they could see us. After advancing as +far as we thought prudent, one of the scouts and myself dismounted +and crept through the sagebrush within three hundred yards of +them. Their fire was yet burning and the Indians were lounging +around, everything indicating that they had just cooked and eaten +their dinner. I counted them and made out twenty-one, my assistant +scout made twenty-three, and instead of being Pah-Utes, as we +expected, they were Utes. The boys all being anxious to try their +hand, I decided to make the attack at once. Returning to where I +had left the other scouts, I told them my plan of attack, telling +them to bear in mind that one shot well calculated was worth three +or four at random. I also told them as soon as I gave the war- +whoop for each of them to make all the noise he could. + +Now we all mounted, and by riding up a little ravine we were able +to get within fifty rods of them before they could see us. + +Before making the charge I told the boys to draw their pistols, +and when the pistols were emptied to draw sabres and cut the +savages down before they could get to their horses. We rode slowly +and cautiously until almost in sight of the Indians, when I gave +the word "Charge!" and all put spurs to their horses, raised the +yell, and one minute later we were in their midst, arrows and +bullets flying in all directions. I received an arrow wound in the +calf of my right leg, the man immediately on my right got shot +through the left or bridle arm, and one of the raw recruits got +his horse shot from under him. + +He did not wait for orders, but drew his sabre and went to work +cutting them down as he came to them. When we first made the +charge some of the Indians made a desperate attempt to get their +horses, but the scouts shot and cut them down, not allowing one of +them to mount. The Indians, much to my surprise, fought as long as +there was one of them left standing. The battle lasted about +fifteen minutes, and when it was over we counted the dead Indians +and found the number to be nineteen, but there were twenty-one +horses, so we were confident that two Indians either escaped or +fell in the sagebrush where we could not find them. + +We gathered up the horses and ropes that belonged to the Indians. +The man that had his horse killed in the battle, caught the best +horse in the band, threw the saddle on him and started for camp, +considering we had done a good day's work. As we rode down the +ravine in the direction of the emigrant trail some of the boys +looked in that direction and saw the smoke curling up from a camp- +fire. + +"The command has arrived!" shouted one of the boys. + +I proposed that we give the Captain a surprise. We all dismounted, +and each fastened a scalp to the browband of his bridle, and when +the Captain saw us coming and saw that each had a scalp, he said: +"Boys, let's give them three cheers." At that the valley rang out +with the yells. + +This pleased the new recruits that had been engaged in the battle, +and I can truthfully say that I never saw the same number of green +men equal them in the first engagement, for every one of them +fought like heroes. + +We dismounted, turned our horses over to the herder and called for +supper. This was the first square meal that it had been our +pleasure to sit down to for four days, and this was where none of +us shrunk from duty, in the least. + +By this time the wound in my leg was beginning to pain me, and +gave me more trouble than I anticipated. The next morning it was +badly swollen, and I was not able to ride horseback for several +days. + +That morning we pulled for Steen's Mountain, which we supposed to +be about forty miles from where we were camped. + +Not being able to ride horseback, I rode in one of the ambulances. + +From here we kept guards out on each side of the trail, with +orders to keep from five to six miles from the train, and if any +Indians were seen to report at once. + +The second day in the afternoon Capt. Mills established his +headquarters about one mile from the trail, in a beautiful spot; +plenty of water, an abundance of good grass, and a few pine trees +scattered here and there, making it an unusually pleasant place +for quarters that summer. + +Not being able to ride, I stayed in camp, but sent all the other +scouts out. The second day my first assistant returned and +reported having found the trail, as he thought, of about fifty +Indians, traveling west, and about parallel with the emigrant +trail. + +The next morning I started my assistant and three scouts after the +Indians, with orders to report as soon as they had the redskins +located. + +They were gone four days and no word came from them. I began to be +very uneasy, as well as Capt. Mills, thinking something must have +happened them or they would have returned, as they only took three +days' rations with them. I took four other scouts and went on +their trail. + +The reader will understand that in this country the soil is +somewhat sandy, and a horse is easily tracked. Our horses being +shod, it was easy to distinguish their tracks from that of the +Indians' horses. My wound gave me much trouble, but we followed +the trail of the other scouts for some distance after striking the +trail of the Indians, and their horses being shod, we could easily +track them, but finally they became so obliterated that we could +see no more trace of the shod horses. We sought in vain to get +some sign of them, and came to the conclusion that while the +scouts were trailing the Indians another band had stolen up behind +them and either killed or taken them all prisoners, for we could +get no trace of them, nor have they ever been heard of since. As +soon as I returned to quarters, by the consent of Capt. Mills, I +detailed two men of my scout force to carry a dispatch to Col. +Elliott. As the Indians were now too far west for Capt. Mills to +attempt to follow them, I sent the two best men I had to bear the +message to the Colonel. They made the trip in two nights, riding +at night and lying over in the daytime. The next day after the +Colonel received the dispatch his scouts discovered the same band +of Indians, and Col. Elliott sent one company of soldiers out at +once after them. The soldiers overhauled them at Clover Valley, +which was about forty miles south of the emigrant trail, and +attacked the redskins, but they were too much for the soldiers. In +the engagement the loss to the command was sixteen men killed, and +I never knew just how many were wounded or how many Indians were +killed. The soldiers had to retreat. All I ever learned from this +battle I learned from the dispatch bearers, as they stayed at Col. +Elliott's quarters until after the soldiers had returned from the +engagement. + +From this on I kept scouts out south of the trail continually. + +One evening one of the scouts came in and reported having seen a +little band of Indians some twelve or fifteen miles south of the +trail. The other three scouts that were out with him remained to +watch the Indians while he came to report. The scout was not able +to tell just the number, as they were some distance away. The +other three scouts secreted their horses, crawled to the top of +the highest hill near by and lay there in the sagebrush and with +glasses watched the Indians, who were traveling almost in the +direction where the scouts lay, bearing a little south, so that +the scouts did not have to change their hiding place. I mounted my +horse for the first time since I had been laid up, and in company +with five other scouts, including the one who had brought the +message to me, started to investigate the matter. + +We rode to where the other three scouts had been left, and they +were awaiting our arrival. They had lain on the hill and watched +the Indians go into camp and then returned to where the dispatch +bearer had left them. + +After holding a council for about five minutes we all mounted and +rode as near the Indians as we considered safe, and dismounted. +Taking another scout who had been watching them, I crawled as near +as we dared to their camp to try to ascertain their number. We +decided that there were about fifty. It was perilous to get very +close for the reason that the Indians had a number of dogs, and +when we would get too near the dogs would begin to bark, and three +or four Indians would raise up and look about and every Indian in +the band would listen. When we returned to where we had left the +other scouts they were all prepared for an attack, but I told them +there were too many for us to tackle alone. Besides, they were +Utes, the worst Indians in the whole country to fight. + +We were now about fifteen miles from headquarters, so I dispatched +two men at once to Capt. Mills in all haste, requesting him to be +there by daybreak, if it were within the bounds of possibility. +This being a sandy, sagebrush country, one could not ride at full +speed, but the scouts made good time, nevertheless, and Capt. +Mills and his command were with us before daylight. We met him +about a mile from where the Indians were camped, and I told him +how the ground lay and the general surroundings as best I could, +and I suggested that as on account of the dogs I had not been able +to locate the horses of the Indians, it would be advisable to wait +until daylight to make the attack. + +We waited about an hour, when the Captain said he thought it was +light enough to kill Indians. He gave orders to mount, drew his +men up in line and rode back and forth, up and down the line, +instructing them how to proceed, saying: + +"When I give the word, 'charge!' every man draw his pistol, and +when within fifty yards, begin to fire. Don't fire at random, but +take good aim, and when your pistols are empty draw your sabres +and cut them down. Don't let one escape. Don't wait for further +orders; you have them, now carry them out." + +Capt. Mills rode to the left wing and asked me to take the right. +I told him I thought it best that myself and the scout force +should make a dash for the Indian horses as soon as he made the +charge, for if we could succeed in getting the horses we need not +let one Indian escape. + +It was now so light that we could see their ponies on the hill +just beyond their camp. All being ready, and I having instructed +my assistants, the Captain ordered them to charge. I made a dash +to the right with my entire scout force. This was a great surprise +to the redskins. They were nearly all abed yet, except a few of +the earliest risers. Those who were up made a desperate rush for +their horses, but unavailingly. We got there first and stampeded +the herd. Some of the horses were picketed, but we cut the ropes +as fast as we came to them, and before any of the Indians could +get to their horses we had them on the dead run. + +Taking a circuitous route we drove the horses around between the +scene of battle and head-quarters. When about a mile distant my +first assistant and myself returned to the battle ground leaving +the other scouts to guard the horses. We arrived at the scene just +in time to see the last Indian fall. When it was good light the +Indians could be seen lying around in every direction. The orderly +sergeant and two privates were looking around in the sagebrush, +thinking there might be some of them hiding there, and all of a +sudden two young bucks started up and began to run, and for about +three hundred yards they had what I thought to be the prettiest +race I had ever witnessed. The two Indians on foot and the +soldiers on horseback, running through the sagebrush and every man +in the crowd, from the Captain down, yelling at the top of his +voice. Here I did the poorest shooting that I had ever done in my +life, emptying one of my revolvers and not touching an Indian. But +the soldiers finally got them. + +We counted the dead braves and found them to be forty-eight in +number. + +In this engagement Capt. Mills did not lose a man, and only one +was wounded. This was the result of making the attack so early in +the morning. Had it been later, after the Indians were all up, +they would have made a harder fight. + +The battle being over we all started for headquarters, feeling +jubilant over the victory. + +We reached headquarters at ten o'clock in the morning, after which +Capt. Mills told us we had done enough for one day, and that all +could take it easy for the rest of the day. The next morning I +struck out east on the emigrant trail, sending one man north and +one south of the trail, each taking three days' rations, our +object being to meet emigrants, if there were any, and guard them +through to Capt. Mills' quarters, as it was now time for the +emigrants to come stringing along; a time that heretofore among +the Indians had been considered a harvest in this section of the +country. + +The first day in the afternoon I rode to a high hill, took my +glasses, and looking east I saw a train of emigrants stringing +along. This was the first train of the season. The scout from the +north and also the one from the south had got sight of them, and +were pulling for the trail. We pushed on and met the train just as +it was pulling into camp. I called for the captain and he came +forth. I told him we were scouts for Capt. Mills, and were out for +the purpose of protecting emigrants. The captain, as well as the +people in the train, were very much pleased to know that they were +going to have protection after that through the hostile country. +They had been troubled more or less by Indians all the way through +Utah, having a great deal of stock, both horses and cattle, stolen +by the Indians, as they supposed, but among men who were better +informed it was the supposition that they were stolen by white +men, for in those days there was a set of white men in Utah much +worse than Indians. + +On learning that I had been in California they had many questions +to ask about the gold fields of that noted country. They were +expecting to find gold by the bushel when once there. + +This was a large train, there being one hundred and twenty wagons +all told. The next morning I sent out one of my scouts north of +the train, the other one ahead, with instructions to keep from one +to two miles in front, and I went south of the trail that day. +This was done so that if the scouts should see a large band of +Indians they could notify the emigrants and give them a chance to +prepare for the battle, but we experienced no trouble on this +trip. + +We were two days traveling from where we met the train to Capt. +Mills' quarters, and from here the Captain sent a sergeant and +twenty men to guide the emigrants through to Col. Elliott's +headquarters. + +This kind of work was kept up for about a month, every week, and +sometimes two or three trains of emigrants would pass by, but we +experienced no serious trouble the remainder of the season with +Indians. + +During this summer the officers in looking through their glasses +from different high points around, discovered a beautiful valley, +which we afterwards learned was named Thousand Springs Valley. +Capt. Mills came to the conclusion that this valley at this time +of the year was headquarters for the Utes, and not thinking the +distance was so great sent another scout and myself to +investigate. + +It may be well to mention the fact here, that in these regions the +air is so rarified and clear that distances are very deceptive, +objects appearing to be much closer than they really are. + +We started with three days' rations, and on the third day in the +afternoon we struck the valley, just at its mouth on the desert, +but the water was warm, and we traveled some distance up the +valley, finding the springs numerous, but all warm. We also found +an abundance of grass and plenty of Indian sign, but not fresh. It +appeared that a large number of Indians had wintered there. After +looking the valley over we returned to camp, but by a different +route from the one we came. We saw no Indians or fresh sign of +them until the second day of the return trip, but about two +o'clock we came in sight of four Indians traveling eastward. We +tried to attack them, but our horses being much jaded, the Indians +outrode us, so we had to give up the chase. We were of the opinion +that the four Indians were scouts for a big band making its way to +winter quarters. + +A short distance north we secreted our horses in a ravine, and +watched for the Indians from the top of a high hill until noon the +next day, but all in vain, for we did not see an Indian. We +returned to camp, our horses worn out and half starved. The part +of country we passed over on this trip is now the most +northeastern portion of Nevada, and just what it is good for I +have never been able to learn. + +After lying around here watching for emigrants about two weeks +longer, and making two different trips east on the emigrant trail, +Capt. Mills now concluded that there would be no more emigrants +that fall, so we pulled up and moved to Col. Elliott's quarters. +We kept scouts out on the trip, but did not see an Indian or even +a fresh trail on the trip. On arriving at Col. Elliott's quarters +I could see that he was not pleased with the way things had gone +with his command during the summer. His men had had two +engagements during the season, and had got the worst of it both +times. + +He had lost twenty-six men, and not a scalp to show for them. + +Capt. Mills felt quite jubilant. He had over sixty Indian horses +that he had captured, over sixty scalps, and had not lost a man, +with the exception of the four scouts. Col. Elliott did not have +much to say, but the Lieutenant declared that the Colonel was very +jealous of Capt. Mills over the past summer's work. + +After remaining at headquarters about a week we pulled out across +the Sierra Nevada Mountains, along the same route that we had +taken the fall before, somewhat earlier, and winter not having yet +set in, we experienced no trouble in crossing. The first night we +camped at the head of Eagle Valley, and from there to Jim +Beckwith's ranche it was sixty miles. + +I being over-anxious to see Jim, saddled up my Pinto horse the +next morning and started for his place, making the ride in one +day. On my arrival I found Jim doing a rushing business in the +hotel line, but was just in the act of selling out his hotel to a +man from Sacramento. Beckwith had sold all my horses during the +summer at what I thought a good figure, having got fifty dollars +per head all around. + +The command came on two days later, pitched their tents and stayed +two days, having a red hot time. The men had plenty of money, and +Jim Beckwith, who was now running a saloon in connection with his +hotel, had plenty of bad whiskey. The Colonel put very little +restriction on his men while they remained there, allowing them to +have a general spree, for they had been where there was no chance +to spend their money, and the little they had was burning their +pockets. + +Jim Beckwith made a handsome little clean-up during the two days +they were camped there. + +When the Colonel was ready to pull out for San Francisco he came +to me and invited me to come to the Fort and spend a few months +during the winter. I told him I did not know where I would winter, +but preferred to seek quarters where I could hunt for a +livelihood. I told him I did not wish to put in another winter +lounging around as I did the last one. The Colonel made me a +proposition to come to the Fort after I had visited my friend, Jim +Beckwith, saying that he would organize a hunting party among the +officers and take a trip north of San Francisco on the Russian +river. + +The country to which we wished to go is now Sonoma County, Cal., +of which Santa Rosa is the county seat. In fact the region is now +called Santa Rosa Valley, and it is well named, for it is a great +garden of roses and other beautiful flowers that grow indigenously +and in luxurious profusion. At the head of the valley are the +famous geysers of California. + +The Colonel, after dividing the horses with me, started for the +Fort, I agreeing to join him there in a few weeks for the hunt. + +After remaining at Jim Beckwith's for a few days, he and a +gentleman from Sacramento came to a trade, Jim selling out "slick +and clean." + +Jim had too much money to stay in the mountains. I saw $12,000 +weighed out to him in gold-dust, and I don't know how much coin he +had, but there were several thousand dollars of it. + +"Now we will go to San Francisco for the winter," said he, "and +will have a good time. You stay with me this winter, and it shan't +cost you a cent." + +We took our horses and started for Sacramento, making the trip in +four days Here we boarded a boat for the bay. + +In those days persons speaking of going to San Francisco, always +spoke of it as "going to the bay." + +The second morning after our arrival, I found at the feed-yard, +where my horses were, a gentleman awaiting my arrival, who wanted +to buy my stock. + +I sold all of the horses to him except Mexico and Pinto--they were +not for sale at any figure. + +I stayed around the city for two weeks, until it became +monotonous. Jim Beckwith had lots of money, and it looked to me as +though he wanted to get rid of it--as soon as possible. He would +get just so full every day, and when he was full of whiskey his +tongue appeared to be loose at both ends. It now being the first +of December, I saddled my horse and rode out to the Fort, and on +arriving there I found all anxious for the hunt. Col. Elliott had +been talking the matter up among them. It took about three days to +prepare for the trip, and I kept hurrying them up, all that was in +my power, for I did not want to fool around there until the good +ladies took it in their heads to have another dance, as it was not +a dance that I was hunting. I had had enough of that on my other +visit to satisfy me for some time to come. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A HUNT ON PETALUMA CREEK.--ELK FEVER BREAKS OUT.--THE EXPEDITION +TO KLAMATH LAKE.--A LIVELY BRUSH WITH MODOC INDIANS. + + +The hunting party made up at the Fort was ready early in December, +and we pulled out, promising to be home by New Year's day, at the +latest. + +At this time there were no steamers running across the bay in the +direction we wished to go, so we hired a tug to take us over to +the mouth of Petaluma creek, near which we proposed to pitch our +hunting camp. Here was live-oak timber, with now and then a +redwood, and in places the chapparal was thick, and there was no +end to deer sign. + +We had plenty of shelter in case of storm, having two good-sized +tents in the outfit and only six men, not counting the darkey +cook, who, however, always does count in an expedition like that. +In the party I was the only one who had ever hunted any. Three of +the others had never fired a shot at larger game than a jack- +rabbit. Col. Elliott had once killed a deer, of which I made +mention in a preceding chapter. + +The following morning after breakfast I told them to select their +course for the day's hunting, and I would go in an opposite +direction. + +"Why do you wish to go in an opposite direction?" Lieut. Harding +asked; "Why not all go together?" I replied that after we got out +in the woods I did not think they could tell a man from a deer, +and I did not want to be shot by a white man out here in this +country. + +Capt. Mills proposed that three go at a time, two officers and +myself, by so doing there would be no danger. + +This being satisfactory, Lieut. Harding, Capt. Mills and myself +took the first turn. Neither of them had ever hunted any, and both +were as ignorant in that line as I was when I started out from St +Louis in company with Uncle Kit Carson, which, by the way, I had +told them something about the night before, while sitting around +the campfire. + +When we were all ready for the hunt and had started to walk away +from the tent, Capt. Mills requested the Colonel to have the +horses in readiness to pack the deer in. We had not gone far until +I asked them if they could not walk without making so much noise. +Lieut. Harding said he did not see what difference it made how a +person walked, and I had to stop and explain matters by telling +them that a deer depended as much on his ears as he did on his +eyes, and if we did not walk easier the deer would hear us before +we could get sight of them, and it seemed to me that they had +stepped on every stick along our way and had rubbed against every +brush that we passed near. Having been trained to hunt since a boy +of fifteen years old, it became second nature for me to slide +along without making a particle of noise. + +After traveling a short distance we saw four deer coming toward +us, and I pointed out an opening and said: "When they get to that +place I will stop them; be ready, and when I count three, fire." +When the deer were all on the selected spot I gave a keen whistle, +which caused them to stop and throw up their heads. I counted +three and fired, but did not hear the report of the other guns. +Just as I turned to see what was the trouble, Capt. Mills fired, +but Lieut. Harding stood and held his gun at a "ready" and did not +fire at all. He said the sight was so pretty that he did not think +of his gun. I killed my deer, and the Captain wounded his by +breaking one fore leg. The other deer gave a few jumps and +stopped, and I took the Lieutenant's gun and shot it dead. We now +had two deer and were only about a mile from camp. I left the two +officers to dress the venison and I went back to camp after a +horse to pack it in. While I was away, and before they had got the +fallen game dressed, two other deer came along within gunshot of +them. The two officers fired at them and killed one deer, both +claiming the honor of the fatal shot. Now we had plenty of meat +for a start, and would, no doubt, get more before we consumed +that. + +After arriving at camp with the deer I directed Jake, the negro +cook, to get an early dinner, as I wanted to take a big hunt that +afternoon. + +While at the dinner table I suggested that as they could find deer +anywhere around there, for they were as thick as sheep and not +very wild, that they might kill that kind of game, while I would +mount Pinto and prospect for larger, for I thought there were elk +in that country, and if that was true we wanted some of them. + +After dinner I mounted my horse and was off for an elk hunt. After +riding up the river about three miles I could see any amount of +sign. Dismounting and tying my horse, I took an elk trail where a +band had just crossed the trail on which I was riding, and I did +not follow it very far until I came in sight of the elk. There +were eight in this band, and I had to take a roundabout course to +get in gunshot of them, but when I finally did get a shot at them +I killed an elk that carried the largest pair of horns I have ever +seen, with one exception. I unjointed his neck about a foot from +his head and dressed him, but left his hide on. The head and horns +were all I could lift as high as the horse's back. + +When I rode up to camp and the negro cook saw that head of horns +he exclaimed: "Hello, Marstah; what you got dar? You must hab +killed de debbil dis time, suah." + +From the negro I learned that the officers had all been out, and +had seen more or less deer and had done more or less shooting, but +had only killed one small doe. + +That night the elk fever raged high in camp, as that pair of horns +had set them all wild to go elk hunting the next day. That night +we ordered an early breakfast, so as to get an early start to our +hunting ground. + +After riding up the river the next morning, to where I had killed +the elk the day before, we all dismounted and tied our horses. I +asked them which they preferred, to go single or two together, and +they thought it the best plan to go in couples. + +Being somewhat acquainted with this kind of game, and knowing +where to find them at this time of day, I told them what ridges to +take to lead them to the main divide, also what our signals would +be to come together. + +Capt. Mills and I took up the center ridge, the two other couples +going on ridges each side of us, but not in sight. After going +about a mile or so we heard two gunshots to our left, and in a few +moments we could hear elk running. The underbrush was so thick +that it was difficult to get a shot at them on the run, so, seeing +an opening that they were sure to cross, provided that they did +not change their course, I had the Captain to stand by the side of +a big tree and level his gun at the opening, and when an elk +darkened the sight to fire, which he did, and got a fine elk. I +fired also, but did not get my elk. He was as proud over killing +that elk as I was over killing my first buffalo. + +We hunted until about four o'clock that afternoon, and several +shots were fired, but the Captain was the only one who got an elk +that day. So we loaded that one, and the one I had killed the day +previous, on to our horses and returned to camp with about all the +meat the horses were able to carry. + +The next morning I told the other men that as they now knew the +elk range and how to hunt them, and could get along without me as +well as not, that I would hunt for a grizzly bear, and if I could +only kill a grizzly I would be ready to go home. I spent the next +three days bear hunting, and saw any amount of sign, but only saw +one bear and did not get a shot at it. + +After being out about two weeks, and all having enough of hunting, +they thought, to last them a year--as they had killed more or less +deer, and one of them had killed an elk--and time being about up +for the tug to come after us, we pulled up camp and started for +the bay, arriving there on the 19th. The tug arrived on the 20th, +about noon. + +We reached San Francisco that evening, about dark, unloaded our +baggage and meat, hired a man to watch it that night and we +saddled up and rode out to the Fort. + +The following morning I returned to the city, hired a team and +took our baggage, as well as the meat we had killed, back to the +Fort. + +I was hailed several times while passing through the city by +parties who wished to buy my mammoth elk horns, but I would not +sell them, having already given them to Col. Elliott. + +I stayed around the city until the middle of February, not knowing +what to do to kill time, and loafing is the hardest work I ever +did. + +About this time Col. Elliott received orders to go out into +southeastern Oregon, as soon as the weather would permit, and +establish a fort at Klamath Lake. As soon as he received these +orders he came to the city and hunted me up, and wanted me to go +with him, at the same time insisting strongly on my joining his +command; saying: "If you will enlist I am sure I can bring enough +influence to bear to procure a Lieutenant's commission for you." + +I told him emphatically that I would not enlist, as I intended to +be a free man all the days of my life, "And when I scout for you," +I said, "if I fail to do my duty, or shirk in the least, all you +have to do is to say so, and I will quit then and there, and at +the same time if you ask anything that I consider unreasonable, I +will quit you cold." + +The Colonel, however, accepted me as an independent scout. + +I requested him to procure some one that was familiar with that +country to go along as guide, but he told me that I would be +around the city, and would have a better chance to find a suitable +person than he would, and requested me to find a man and he would +be satisfied with the selection. + +During my stay in the city I saw a great many men who claimed to +know all about that country, and who were anxious for the trip, +but when I would question them they did not know any more about +the country than I did, and I had never been in that region. + +Finally the time was set to start, which was the first of June. + +Before starting this time I had an understanding with Col. Elliott +regarding the stock that might be captured by the scouts; he +agreeing to let the scouts take the stock captured by them and +divide it equally among themselves. + +After having started, the Colonel was undecided as to where he +would cross the Sierra Nevada Mountains. At that time there was no +map of the country between California, Oregon and Nevada, but +finally he decided to cross over the Beckwith Pass. After we had +crossed the mountains we turned north, crossing the Truckee river +where Reno now stands. From here we traveled across the sagebrush +plain to Honey Lake. + +So far we had no trouble with Indians, and the command stopped to +let the horses rest a few days. + +While lying there Col. Elliott requested me to take four other +scouts and go north four days to prospect for water and grass, for +this was now a strange country to all of us. + +My companions were John Reilly, Fred Miller, John Boyd and George +Jones, of whom there will be more said later on, and who were my +companions the rest of the summer, or, as long as I was able to +scout. Altogether there were twelve scouts in my company. + +In the evening of the second day of our trip we camped at a nice +little spring. We got into camp just at sundown, and having seen +considerable Indian sign during the day, I had the boys stake +their horses near the camp, and I took a look around on the ridges +to see if there were any camp-fires in that part of the country. I +was gone for about three hours, and the boys got quite uneasy +while I was away. I only saw one Indian camp, which was northeast +of our camp, and not having discovered it until after dark I was +unable to tell just how far it was away. On my return I told the +boys that we would have to stand guard that night, each one taking +a turn of two hours, and as soon as supper was over we put the +fire out so as not to give the redskins any advantage in that way. +The next morning we got breakfast, and as soon as it was light +George Jones and I went to the nearest ridge to look for Indians. +I saw them just breaking camp, and they were about two miles away. +That day we had to travel very cautiously, being in an entirely +new country and knowing it to be full of hostile Indians. + +That night we camped on a small stream which afterwards we found +to be a tributary of McCloud's river. From what we had seen, there +appeared to be plenty of water and grass, and from the Indian sign +we had seen, they appeared to be in large bands, so we concluded +to return to the command. The first day on our return trip, just +about noon, as we were looking for a place to stop for lunch, we +were discovered by about twenty Indians. The red devils made for +us, and their war-whoops sounded as though they were bloodthirsty. +They came pell-mell over the hills and hollows in hot pursuit of +us, and I tell you things looked a little blue; only five of us +and at least twenty Indians, and no telling how many there would +be in a short time. + +I told the boys that we would give them a round, anyway; and I had +four men that were not afraid to face an Indian even in a hand-to- +hand fight, if necessary; and then one feels more brave when he +knows that he has got companions who will stay with him till the +last dog is hung. + +We rode to the top of the ridge, stopped and drew our revolvers, +and when they were close enough we fired two shots apiece in +succession and then put spurs to our horses and ran nearly a mile, +when, on looking back, we saw that we were outriding them. We rode +a mile further to the next ridge, just dropped over out of sight, +and stopped and reloaded the empty chambers of our revolvers. + +We knew now that we had the best horses, and the boys were all +anxious to give them another round; so we waited until they were +in pistol shot--as we felt more bold, knowing that if we could not +whip them we could outrun them--and taking good aim this time we +fired three shots each, making fifteen shots in all. + +We saw a number of Indians fall to the ground, but did not stay to +count them as we were just then in somewhat of a hurry. + +We rode on again, they continuing to follow us. When we were far +enough ahead again and in a suitable place, we stopped, reloaded +and waited for them to come up, but they seemed to have changed +their minds and didn't appear as anxious to ride in our company as +they had on the start, for now they kept out of pistol shot. One +of the boys dismounted and said: "I believe I can reach them from +here," and taking a rest over his horse's back, fired and killed a +horse. This caused a scattering among them, and if our horses had +been fresh we would have tried to kill the whole outfit. + +George Jones remarked that he guessed the red devils had enough of +it already, and we rode on. They made two circles around us, +keeping out of gunshot, and then rode away. + +We pushed on with all haste possible, expecting that they had gone +away to get reinforcements and follow us up, but that was the last +we saw of them. + +That night we made a dry camp, and did not build any fire for fear +that they might be on our trail, and the next morning we were off +very early. We rode until about ten o'clock, when we struck plenty +of grass and water. Here we stopped, and one man stood guard on +the hill while the others ate breakfast, and we were agreeably +surprised at not seeing any more Indians on the trip. + +We got back to the command the evening of the sixth day, and +informed Col. Elliott that there was plenty of water as far as we +went, and abundance of grass, also no end of Indian sign. + +The command made preparations to move on again, and two days after +our return we started, but moved slowly and cautiously, making +only from ten to fifteen miles a day. Now we had twelve scouts in +all, and it was our business to guard the command while traveling, +and, in fact, at all times when there was a possibility of an +attack, and we had to watch out north, south, east and west, lest +a large band of Indians should make an attack unawares and get the +better of the expedition. + +We traveled in this manner until reaching the little stream spoken +of, where the scouting party had turned back, not having met any +trouble. + +The Colonel thought it best for me to take a part of my scouts and +go ahead again and prospect the country for water and grass. + +After giving my other scouts particular orders to keep A sharp +lookout for Indians, and to scout the country thoroughly for eight +or ten miles in every direction daily, I took my same four men +that were out the trip previous, four days' rations, and started +out again. + +All my talking did not prevent a surprise, for the second day +after our departure the Indians made an attack on the herders, +captured twenty-two horses in broad daylight and killed one of the +herders. The same evening about sundown they made an attack on the +command, and after a hard fight for an hour or more, the Indians +retreated, leaving sixty dead Indians on the battlefield, there +being eleven soldiers killed and twenty wounded. + +On my return Col. Elliott told me not to leave the camp so far any +more, for, said he, "I am satisfied if you had been here we would +not have had the surprise." + +I told the Colonel what kind of country we would have for the next +seventy-five miles; plenty of water and grass, abundance of game +and the country full of hostile Indians. + +The reader will understand that this was the year 1856. The +Klamath Indians and the tribe afterwards known as the Modocs, of +whom mention will be made later on in this work, were one and the +same tribe; and up to this time they did not know what it was to +be whipped. Besides there had been but little travel through this +part of the country without experiencing a great deal of trouble +with those Indians. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +MORE FISH THAN I HAD EVER SEEN AT ONE TIME.--WE SURPRISE SOME +INDIANS, WHO ALSO SURPRISE US.--THE CAMP AT KLAMATH LAKE.--I GET +ANOTHER WOUND AND A LOT OF HORSES. + + +When we pulled out for Klamath Lake we traveled from five to ten +miles a day and kept scouts out in all directions. While riding +along one day with my four assistants, a few miles in advance of +the command, we came to a beautiful body of water which is now +known as Clear Lake, which is the head of Lost river. Here we +dismounted, and on looking into a brush shanty that stood on the +lake shore, I saw more fish than I had ever seen before at one +time. The little shanty was filled to its utmost capacity with +fish, hanging there to dry for winter use. Further on we found +numerous other similar shanties, all containing like quantities of +drying fish. These were the Indians' dry-houses. They had caught +the fish and hung them there to dry in the hot summer's sun. Such +was their food in winter when the land game was scarce. + +After our fill of admiring the beautiful lake and resting our +horses, we mounted and started back to the command. We had gone +only a short distance, when, all of a sudden, on reaching the top +of a little hill, we were met by twelve Indians, who had not seen +us, nor us them, until within a hundred yards of each other. + +There was only one thing to do and that was to fight, for they +were directly between us and the command, and the braver we were I +thought the better; so I gave orders to charge, but the Indians +did not stand fire. We got three of them that first round and in +another hundred yards we got three more, but their horses being +fresh and ours somewhat jaded, they outran us and got away. + +These were the first Klamath Indians I had got close enough to, to +see how their moccasins were made, and for a person engaged in the +business that I was then in, it was quite essential to be able to +tell the tribe an Indian belonged to by his track. And here I will +state that not any two tribes cut and make their moccasins alike +and at that time I could tell an Indian by his track, if he +belonged to any tribe that I was familiar with. + +Here we laid over three days to let our horses rest up a little. +While here we had all the fish that we wanted to eat, for the lake +was literally full of the finest in the land. + +In a southwesterly direction we could see, by looking through our +field glasses, a large valley, which Col. Elliott thought to be +the country which he was ordered to go to. + +The second day after leaving Clear Lake we struck another lake. We +did not name it, but it has since been known as Tule Lake, and is +the outlet of Lost river, but has no visible outlet itself. Here +we laid over two days, after which we pulled out up the valley. +Two days more and we were at Klamath Lake, and here Col. Elliott +established his headquarters and started in to fortify himself +against the Indians, which were very numerous in this country at +that time. + +John Riley, Fred Miller, John Boyd, George Jones and myself took +four days' rations and started out to investigate the surrounding +country north of headquarters. + +The next afternoon about three o'clock we saw a band of Indians +some distance away as they were passing over a somewhat uneven +country. We were not just able to tell the number in the band, but +thought there must be about twenty, and they were driving some +loose horses. + +We stopped to consider the matter as to what was best to be done. +George Jones said: "Boys, we have been out all summer and have not +got a single horse to pay for our trouble, and I think I could +fight like the devil if there was a good band of horses at stake." +The balance of the crowd seemed to think likewise, so we concluded +to follow up the Indians and give them a round. We started at +once, but before overtaking them they had pitched camp on the +shore of Lake Klamath. + +After it was quite dark, George Jones and I crawled around near +the camp and counted twenty Indians. + +Our intention had been to stampede the horses in stead of making +an attack on the Indians, as we thought the number too great to +tackle, but an investigation developed the fact that they had +turned their horses into a little peninsula that ran out into the +lake, and had pitched their tents so as to hold their horses in +there. Riley said there was only one of two things to do, and that +was to make the attack or crawfish. We were all well armed, the +other four having each a six-shooter and a sabre, and I had my big +knife, which was almost as good as a sabre, and two six-shooters. + +We laid and watched their movements until all turned in for the +night. + +They were badly scattered, making it worse for us than if they had +been in a bunch. We waited until about eleven o'clock, when we +thought they were all asleep, and having laid our plans of attack, +we all crawled up abreast to within a rod or so of where some of +them were lying, and each drew his pistol and sabre. + +Taking our pistols in our left hands and sabres in the right, we +made a rush for them, intending to cut the first ones down with +our sabres, and if we got into close quarters we could use both at +the same time. + +In such cases it is quite essential that a scout should be able to +use his pistol in his left hand, which had been part of their +drill duties before starting out scouting. + +As soon as the attack was made some of the Indians arose on their +feet, and we tried to cut them down as fast as they arose, but it +was so dark that it was difficult to distinguish our own men from +the Indians. + +The Indians fought us with their tomahawks, and it was not long +until we were all mixed up together, and a person had to look +close before striking, for fear of making a mistake. After +fighting some time I had two hand-to-hand encounters, but was +victorious in both of them. Just as I had finished the second one +I got a tremendous blow from behind that caught me on the +shoulder, and it knocked me as blind as a bat. When I tried to +rise I would stagger and fall like a drunken man. After making the +third attempt to get on my feet, and seeing it was no use and +being afraid my own men might mistake me for an Indian, I laid +down as still as I could until the fight was ended. + +About this time my shoulder commenced to pain me fearfully, and it +was a hard matter for me to lie still. I could then see a very +little, but to me everything was still. Just then I heard George +Jones' voice. He was asking where Will was. I did not hear any +reply, and a moment later he hallooed at the top of his voice. It +sounded to me as though he was a long ways off, but at the same +time he was within four rods of me. I made out that time to answer +so he could hear me, and in a moment they were all by my side. +Some one raised me up, while another ran to the lake and got his +hat full of water. They removed my clothing sufficiently to exam +me my wound, and found that my shoulder blade was broken in two +places. When I was able to talk, the boys asked what they had +better do, saying they had the last Indian killed. I said if you +are sure you have them all killed, build a fire and put out guards +until morning, and we will return to headquarters with the stock. + +George Jones, feeling much concerned about me on account of my +wound, proposed to ride to headquarters that night for the +surgeon, but I told him it was not necessary, that I would be able +to ride to headquarters the next day. + +I took a sup of brandy, which we were never without on a trip like +this, and drank a cup of coffee, after which I felt much better, +but could not move my left hand or shoulder without much pain. + +The next morning as soon as it was light enough to see to scalp an +Indian, the boys took twenty-one scalps, and we had fifty-two +horses, some of which were extraordinary good ones of that class. +That was ten horses each and two over. After having counted them, +George Jones said: "I think Will ought to have the two extra +horses, for he is the only one that got wounded in the fight." + +The boys were jubilant over their victory and the band of horses, +but were very sorry to have one of their comrades so badly used +up. After they had breakfast over, the saddle horses were brought +in, my horse was saddled for me and they assisted me in getting on +him, or rather put me on, for I was almost as helpless as a child. + +My shoulder they had tied up as best they could with two +handkerchiefs, and one of the boys leading my horse, we started +for headquarters. We were about twenty miles from the command, but +I never rode fifty miles that seemed as far as that twenty miles +did. When we arrived at camp my shoulder was badly swollen, and it +took the surgeon a long time to get it set just to his notion, or, +at least it seemed so to me, and when he did finally get it set he +gave me something to put me to sleep. + +However, I was not able to ride any more that summer. All that I +was able to do was to sit in camp, hear the reports of scouts as +they came in and give orders. + +It had been six weeks since I was hurt, and it was getting late in +the fall and the weather looking somewhat blustery, I told the +Colonel I thought I would go back to San Francisco and winter +there. + +Up to this time the surgeon had not allowed me to ride on +horseback, but I had come to the conclusion that I could now stand +it to ride without any serious difficulty, and I was anxious to +get back before winter set in. + +When I told the Colonel my intentions, he said: "How in the name +of God will you get to San Francisco? If you were well and able to +ride I could not spare an escort sufficient to guard you through." + +"It don't matter about the escort," I said, "when I get ready I +will go if I have to go alone." + +"Young man," said he, "you must be insane to even think of such a +thing." + +"Colonel," I said, "you may call it what you please, but I mean +just what I say; and I suppose that as you have been out all +summer, having no chance to either send or receive any mail, that +you would like to send out after that." + +Said he, "I have no one to send, that could make the trip without +asking a larger escort than I could spare." + +I told the Colonel that I could select two men from his command, +either of whom I could take and make the trip safely, or the two +would make it alone with perfect safety. + +The Colonel replied, "If I could only think so I certainly would +ask them to go;" and he asked who the parties were to whom I had +reference. I told him they were Messrs. Jones and Riley, who had +been my assistant scouts the past summer. + +The Colonel asked when they would be in camp. I told him they had +just returned a few minutes previous. He said: "Tell them I will +see them at your quarters at seven o'clock this evening." I +assured him that they would be there, but up to this time I had +not mentioned or even hinted at such a thing to them, but being +desirous of seeing them before the Colonel had a talk with them, I +set about to find them. I found them in their quarters and told +them of the proposed meeting and the object, and asked them what +they thought of it. + +George Jones said: "As far as I am concerned, I think I can make +the trip alone, for I can see an Indian just as far as he can see +me, and just as quick, and I am perfectly willing to take the +chances." + +"And how with you, Riley?" I asked. He replied: "I will go if I +can get permission." + +At seven o'clock, sharp, all hands met at my tent. The Colonel +opened the conversation by saying: "Gentlemen, our chief scout, +Mr. Drannan, has concluded to leave us and go to San Francisco to +spend the winter, and under the circumstances I don't want to see +him go alone. Do you men feel like accompanying him and bringing +our mail back on your return?" + +George Jones said: "I can only speak for myself. I will accompany +him alone and bring the mail back if no one else feels like +going." At this Riley said he was willing to accompany George on +the trip if necessary. + +Col. Elliott straightened up and said: "Boys, I don't believe you +realize the danger you will necessarily have to encounter in +making this trip. Think the matter over thoroughly until to-morrow +evening, by which time you will be able to give me a decided +answer;" and then the Colonel departed, requesting us all to meet +him in his quarters the following evening at seven o'clock, sharp. +After he had gone George Jones asked me how long I thought it +would take us to go to Sacramento. About fifteen days was my +estimate, and I was of the opinion that we would best go an +entirely different route to what we came. Before leaving my tent +they had made up their minds to tackle the trip anyway, let it go +as it might, and the time set to start was ten days from that. + +The following evening we all went to the Colonel's tent at the +hour agreed upon. He asked the boys as soon as they entered if +they had made up their minds to tackle the trip, and they both +told him they had. He then asked me when I would be ready to +start, and I told him in ten days. + +George Jones then asked the Colonel what length of time he would +give him and Riley to make the trip in. "I will give you a month +and a half," was the reply. + +Five of us had fifty-two horses that we had captured from the +Indians. I called the other four together and told them if they +would let me pick six horses from the band they might have the +remainder. This being agreeable, the day following the horses were +driven into the corral and I selected my six. Jones and Riley put +in a good portion of the day in saddling and riding them to see +whether they were broke or not, and we found them all to be fairly +well broken to ride. + +The next day I told the Colonel that I was ready to resign my +position as chief of scouts, for you will have to appoint another +man, and you had just as well do it first as last. + +"No," said the Colonel, "when you are ready to start, I will give +you a voucher for your pay up to that time, and when you get to +San Francisco you can get your money." + +We commenced making preparations to start, but did not let it be +generally known until the day before starting, and then everybody +wanted to write a letter to send out, and by the time we were +ready to start we had a pack-horse loaded with mail. + +The Colonel sent a long letter to his wife, and told me a lot of +stuff to tell the other officers, of which I did not remember one- +fourth. + +Finally we were rigged up and ready to start, but we had a hard +time to get away, for Dick Jones wanted me to tell Jim Johnson so +and so. Another had some word to send to a friend, whose name I +had never heard before, and never thought of after I was out of +sight. + +After shaking hands all around, and Col. Elliott telling me a lot +of stuff to tell his wife and numerous other ladies which he knew I +would not repeat the half of, for he knew that there was not +another man in San Francisco that hated to try to talk to ladies +as much as I did. If we had not jarred loose and rode off I +suppose we would have been there all day, and we would have had +enough word to carry in our heads, that had it been written, would +have made a book that Webster's Unabridged Dictionary would be +small compared with it, and again shaking hands we waved our hats +at the many soldiers standing around and rode away. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +DISCOVERY OF INDIANS WITH STOLEN HORSES.--WE KILL THE INDIANS AND +RETURN THE PROPERTY TO ITS OWNERS.--MEETING OF MINERS.--IN SOCIETY +AGAIN. + + +On our return trip we took the divide between the Klamath River +and Tule Lake. I had told Col. Elliott before starting that I +intended to pass west of the snowy butte instead of east of it, as +we did coming in. + +This butte has since been called Shasta Mountain, and it is one of +the grandest sights that ever the eye of man beheld. It flouts the +skies with its peaks of everlasting snow, gleaming like a vast +opal under the sunshine, or peeping out in rainbow-tinted glints, +from among the rifts of the clouds that rake along its sides. +Often long streams of glittering white stretch from its peaks, far +out into space, and these are called "snow-banners." + +My object in passing west of Shasta was to strike the headwaters +of the Sacramento and follow that river to the city of Sacramento. +Late in the evening of the fifth day we struck a beautiful region, +since known as the Shasta Valley. + +While we were looking ahead through our field glasses and laying +out our route for the next day, we discovered a great cloud of +dust, which seemed to be not more than five or six miles away, and +just beyond a low range of hills that we could overlook. We +secreted our horses and watched the dust, but we had not watched +long before about sixty horses came in sight, driven by five +Indians. We could note that there were a number of mules in the +band, and that two of the redskins carried rifles. + +We were not long in making up our minds that this was stolen +property, and that they had done murder and had taken the stock +and were getting away as fast as they could. Otherwise they would +not have those rifles. + +In those days Indians knew very little about using guns, and the +mules we knew did not belong to them, for they did not have any +mules, only as they could steal them from the emigrants. + +We watched them until they came to a nice little stream, where +they stopped, staked their saddle-horses out, and as it was almost +night, we were confident from their movements that they were going +into camp. Being not more than three miles from where we were, we +staked out horses on the grass, ate a cold lunch, and it now being +dark we started afoot for the Indian camp. + +We did not get in sight of the Indians any more until within a +quarter of a mile of their camp. + +They had a little fire of sagebrush and had not lain down yet, but +were watching the horses very closely. They stayed up until about +eleven o'clock, and every few minutes some of them would go out to +where the horses were feeding and look all around. + +The moon being full, it was a very bright night, and we could see +well. + +Finally the horses all got quiet, and the Indians, after building +up a little more fire, all laid down by it for a nap. + +After they had lain there some little time, I told the boys now +was our time, for as soon as one of them woke up he would go out +to the horses again. + +George Jones requested me not to take any hand in the fight for +fear I might get my shoulder hurt over again, as it was not well +by any means. I told him I would not unless I thought it really +necessary; but if it was I would give them a shot anyway, just for +luck. I gave George Jones one of my revolvers, so he took a +revolver in each hand, and Riley had a revolver in his left and +his sabre in his right hand. We now started to crawl up to where +the Indians were no doubt fast asleep. + +I crawled up with the balance, in case the boys got in close +quarters, thinking that a shot might help them, but George Jones +assured me that by taking one of my revolvers they would get three +the first shot and then they would have three more shots for the +other two, so that before any of them got to their feet we would +have them all. + +It being an unusually bright, moonlight night, we were able when +near them, by the aid also of the little fire which was yet +burning, to get their exact position, which was a great help in +making an attack. + +When within ten feet of the Indians, Jones and Riley both rose to +their feet and fired three shots, Jones firing both pistols at +once, and they killed two Indians as they lay and killed the third +one as he raised to his feet. + +The other two ran, not offering to fight at all, but Jones and +Riley got them before they had gone further than a few steps. + +This fight occurred about sixteen miles east of Yreka, near Little +Shasta. We rebuilt the fire by throwing some sagebrush on, and in +their outfit we found two scalps taken from white men, and which +looked to have been taken in the last twenty-four hours; two +rifles, but no ammunition, and I don't think they would have known +how to use them if they had had ammunition. They were armed with +bows and arrows, and some had knives. + +I stayed and looked after the captured horses while the other boys +went back after our own horses. On their return I laid down and +slept awhile, but the other boys did not lie down at all that +night, for there was not much night left by the time they got in +with our horses. + +The following morning, as soon as it was light enough to see, we +counted the horses and found there were fifty-five of them. + +After getting our breakfast we started back on the trail the +Indians had come, that being the course we wished to go. We +traveled hard all day, and just at night we came to a little +stream running across the valley, that we had looked at through +the glasses the evening before. Here we went into camp for the +night, and on looking across the valley on the opposite side of +the river we could see through the field glasses a number of +little wreaths of smoke curling up into the air, and they were +scattered along the foothills here and there for several miles. + +I knew at once they were not from Indian fires, for I could not +see a lodge, and they were too badly scattered to be an Indian +village. + +Just what it was we could not make out, but we stopped on the +little stream that night, which is now called Shasta river. I +slept but very little, as my broken shoulder was commencing to +bother me again from riding. I was up and down all night long, and +was around among the horses many times. + +The next morning we were up and had our breakfast and started very +early. We had not gone more than two miles, when, on looking +ahead, we saw twelve men coming on horseback. Through my glasses I +saw they were white men, and told the boys so. George Jones could +not believe they were white men until he looked through the glass, +when he said: "Well, I'll be d--d if they ain't white men." + +We altered our course so as to meet them, and less than a half +hour's ride brought us face to face. + +There was a man by the name of Wm. McConnell riding in the lead, +and on meeting us the first word uttered by any of the party was +by McConnell. He said: "Where in the name of God did you get those +horses?" While I was telling him where and how we came in +possession of them, George Jones took the five Indian scalps from +the pack and said: + +"And there is something else we got at the same time we got the +horses." + +Then he took the two white men's scalps from the pack, also the +two rifles, and they were also satisfied that the scalps were the +scalps of the two white men who had been herding this same band of +horses and mules, for the hair was similar in color to that of the +two herders. One of them had dark brown hair and the other one had +rather light hair. + +From this company of men we learned that near us there was a +mining camp, the stock belonged to the miners, and that the two +men killed had been herding the horses and mules about three miles +away from camp. This was a new camp called Greenhorn Gulch. + +The herders always brought the horses to camp every night, but the +last two nights they had failed to bring the stock in, and this +man McConnell had raised the crowd to hunt the stock, being +satisfied that the two herders were killed and the stock driven +away by the Indians. + +After giving them a brief outline of our little fight with the +Indians, our business there, etc., McConnell asked us how much the +miners would have to pay us for our trouble. I told him that we +did not make any charge, but that if the miners felt that it was +worth anything to them to have their horses brought back, they +could pay us just what they felt like giving. McConnell said for +us to ride back to camp with them and he would call a miners' +meeting that afternoon and state the case to the miners, and he +was satisfied they would do what was right. + +We drove the stock to where they were accustomed to being +corralled at night and corralled them, and made camp for the +night, for I was needing rest, very much, on account of my +shoulder. + +This man McConnell was erecting a store building about half way +between Greenhorn Gulch and a new discovery that had recently been +made, some two or three miles off. + +About two o'clock Mr. McConnell came to our camp and told us to +come along with him to a certain miner's cabin, and that the +miners would all be there and we would see what could be done. +When we got to the cabin, sure enough every miner was there. + +Mr. McConnell called the house to order, stated the object of the +meeting and made quite a little speech. He told the miners that we +had brought the stock home, told where and how we came in +possession of it, and that he, as well as eleven other men that +were present, had seen the five Indian scalps, also two scalps of +white men that he was confident were the scalps of the two +herders, and had also seen their two rifles. + +After Mr. McConnell had addressed the crowd in a very genteel +manner he set a hat on the newly constructed miners' table and +said: "Now, gentlemen, how much will each of you give? I will give +twenty dollars." At the same time he threw twenty dollars in for a +starter. The other miners followed suit, all contributing +liberally, and the amount raised reached three hundred and fifty +dollars. + +After the money was counted they asked us if we were satisfied +with that amount. + +We told them that we were, and that if they had not given us +anything it would have been all right, for we only considered that +we had done our duty, which we would expect any man to do for us +under like circumstances. + +The morning following, before starting out again, we obtained +information from Mr. McConnell concerning our trip down to +Sacramento that was of great value to us. He directed us by way of +Scott's Valley, and told us we need not have any fear of trouble +with the Indians, which was a great relief to us at that time. + +We found it a splendid trail, and made the trip from the mining +camp to Sacramento in nine days. Mr. McConnell thought it would +take us twelve days, but having plenty of horses along we could +change when we liked, and by doing so could make good time. + +The next day after arriving at Sacramento we got our horses on +pasture, and the following morning took the boat for San +Francisco. + +The next morning after arriving at San Francisco we went to the +Miners' Restaurant to see my old friend, Healey, and they were all +very glad to see us. + +After breakfast we hired a team and started to the Fort with our +baggage. + +They were all greatly astonished when we told them that we had +made the trip alone. + +As soon as I arrived at the Fort I went to see the surgeon, and he +told me that my shoulder was in a dangerous condition, and that I +would have to stay around the Fort so that he could see me at +least every other day for several weeks. + +There was a great commotion at the Fort when the news spread +abroad that we had arrived from Fort Klamath, for every one that +had a friend away with Col. Elliott's command expected a letter, +and we had to have a postmaster appointed to distribute the mail. + +During my stay at the Fort I made my home at Mrs. Elliott's. + +While I was away with Col. Elliott, Jim Beckwith had been at the +Fort a number of times, and each time had left a letter for me +requesting me to come to see him as soon as I got back. + +After resting a few days I started to the city to look Jim up, and +found him without any trouble. His money was about all gone, and +he was anxious for me to go to the mountains with him on a +trapping expedition the coming winter, saying he was tired of +laying around doing nothing but drink whiskey. + +We made arrangements to start in two or three weeks from that +time, provided my shoulder would permit. Jim agreed to go to +Sacramento when we were ready to start and get my horses, and I +returned to the Fort to have my broken shoulder taken care of. + +Now, as I have said before, I don't think there was ever a young +man that suffered from bashfulness as I did during what time I was +in the company of ladies. + +At that time I thought Mrs. Elliott was doing all she could to +tease me, but since I have grown older and learned a little more +about civilization, I am convinced that it was for my own good, +thinking that I might overcome my timidity to a certain extent by +having me go in society. Nearly every day while at the Fort she +would either ask me in the afternoon to go in company with her to +visit some lady friend, or would want me to stay at her house to +receive some lady company, and frequently I have accompanied her +to a neighbor's house where there were young ladies, and I would +have given every horse that I owned to have been away. But Mrs. +Elliott had been almost like a mother to me, and I could not +refuse to go with her when she requested me to do so. After I had +been at the Fort about two weeks Mrs. Elliott said she was going +to give another party, but I told her I had a lawful excuse this +time for not dancing, as the surgeon would not allow me to dance +on account of my shoulder. Among the balance of Mrs. Elliott's +lady friends was Lieut. Jackson's wife, who, by the way, was one +of the loveliest and best women I have ever met. Her husband had +been ordered the past summer out to Arizona, and was at that time +establishing a new fort, which was known afterwards as Fort Yuma. + +Mrs. Jackson was expecting to go soon to join her husband at Fort +Yuma, and as I was going on to the waters of the Gila, trapping, +she insisted on my waiting and going in company with them. +Finally, after stopping around the Fort three weeks, the surgeon +told me by a certain time, which was nearly a week, I might start +out, and if I was careful I would be perfectly safe. + +I went down to the city, and Jim Beckwith and I agreed on the time +to start, after which I returned to the Fort. + +The evening before I was to start, every army officer at the Fort, +there being twenty-eight in number, and every lady, married and +single, came to Mrs. Elliott's house. When I asked her what all +this meant, she said: "I suppose they have come to bid you good- +bye." But it was not long until I knew the object of the meeting, +for some one in the crowd sang out: "Choose partners for a +quadrille!" and in a jiffy there was a double set on the floor, +and the floor manager said: "All ready." + +The musicians took their seats, and the same prompter stood there +that prompted for them the time I attended that other party of +Mrs. Elliott's. + +The music started up, and I commenced to realize that I was +attending a party, or the party was attending me, one of the two. +They danced nearly all night, and had what they called a nice +time, while I sat back in one corner scared half to death for fear +they would call "ladies' choice;" and I knew Mrs. Elliott or some +other lady was sure to come for me, and as my shoulder was getting +most well, I was afraid that I could not get clear on the plea of +being a cripple. + +When the party broke up, Mrs. Jackson insisted on my paying them a +visit at Fort Yuma, as it would not be a great ways from where I +was going to trap the coming winter. + +The next morning when I rode off, and different ones were waving +me adieu, Mrs. Elliott told me to be sure and pay them a visit +when I came to the city. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +TRAPPING ON THE GILA.--THE PIMAS IMPART A SECRET.--RESCUE OF A +WHITE GIRL.--A YOUNG INDIAN AGENT.--VISIT TO TAOS.--UNCLE KIT +FAILS TO RECOGNIZE ME + + +The same day that I left the Fort, Jim Beckwith came down to the +boat bringing my horses, twelve in number, and after buying our +outfit for camping, provisions, and so on, we bought quite a lot +of beads, blankets, cheap rings and such goods as we could trade +to the Indians for furs. + +The following day we pulled for the trapping region, by way of the +old San Jose mission, and from there to the old mission of San +Gabriel, thence across the Mojave desert. From there we struck out +for the mouth of the Gila river, and crossed just where it empties +into the Colorado. We then traveled up what is known as Salt +river, some distance from where we crossed the Gila. This was +early in January, and we found plenty of beaver that were easy to +catch. + +No trapping had been done in that region for several years. +Besides, we thought at the time, and it so proved, that we were +entirely out of the way of hostile Indians. + +Here we put in two months trapping, with splendid success. Then, +as it was getting too late in the season to trap, Jim proposed +that we take our little stock of goods, or a portion of it, and +visit the Pima tribe of Indians, which we found to be not as great +a distance away as we had supposed, it being only about forty +miles to their village. + +They all knew us and were glad to see us. The chief and some other +of the head men were out on their annual hunt, and we did not get +to see them, as we only stayed two days, during which time they +treated us the very best they knew how. They had plenty of +vegetables such as turnips, onions, potatoes, sweet potatoes, etc. + +While on this visit a certain young Indian got to be a great +friend to me, but I am sorry to say that I have forgotten his +name. He had a sister whose name was Nawasa, who also got to be a +warm friend of mine, and I must say, that, although an Indian, she +was a lady in her way, and I thought, really, that she was the +best looking Indian I had ever seen. + +The evening that we were to start back to our camp, Nawasa came to +me and told me in Spanish that her brother wanted to see me, and +that he had something to tell me. I started off with her, and +after we had gone a short distance I asked her where her brother +was, and she pointed to a bunch of bushes, saying he was there. + +On my arrival at the spot I asked him what he wished to say to me. +I knew he had something private and important to say, otherwise he +would not have called me to an out-of-the-way place like that. + +He raised to his feet and looked around to see if there was any +one in sight, and said in Spanish:, "Sit down here, me and my +sister have something to tell you." + +He started in by saying that the Apaches were very bad Indians, +and that they had killed many of my friends; which showed that he +considered all white people my friends. + +"Six or seven years ago," he continued, "they killed a man, his +wife, and two boys, and took two girls prisoners. A long time ago +the smallest girl died and the big girl buried her." + +At this, Nawasa spoke and said: "Many times I have gone with her +to the village and heard her sing a pretty song, but I could not +understand a word of it." + +I asked if this girl was living yet. + +Nawasa said: "Yes, I see her every few days." + +I asked her what size the girl was, and from what I could learn +she was almost grown. + +I asked her if the girl was satisfied, and she thought she was +not, saying she was held a prisoner and had to do the work for the +Indian families, or lodges, as she termed them. She said the work +consisted of getting the wood and water, and whatever little +cooking was to be done. + +The reader will understand that while the Apaches were hostile +toward the whites, and the Pimas were not, yet the two tribes were +always on peaceable terms. But I could see at a glance that those +two Indians felt a deep interest in that white girl. I asked +Nawasa how far it was to where the white girl was. After studying +awhile, she said it was about six hours, meaning six hours' ride. + +I asked her when she would see the girl again, and she made me +understand that if it would please me, or be of any benefit to the +girl, she could see her most any day, saying that she went near +the village to gather huckleberries, this being the time of year +the red huckleberries are ripe in this country. + +I told them that I would come back in four days, and then I would +go with them to that place to gather huckleberries. + +I wanted to look over the ground before laying my plans for taking +the girl, provided she wished to leave the Indians. + +This ended the conversation, so we went back to camp, where I +found Jim Beckwith and a crowd of Indians joking, smoking and +having a good time generally, for, as I have said before, this was +the most sociable tribe of Indians that I ever saw. + +On our arrival at camp, Jim asked me in Spanish where I had been, +and when he saw the Indian girl, said: "Oh, I see; you have been +off courting;" and then he and the Indians had a laugh at my +expense. + +I did not say anything to Jim about what I had heard until the +next day. + +We started early in order to make the trip in one day. I told him +the story just as I had it from the two Indians, and told him that +I was going to try to get the girl away from the Apaches if she +wanted to leave them. + +I rode along some distance, apparently in a deep study, and he +finally turned to me and said: + +"I think you had better let that gal alone, for then. Apaches is +the wust Injuns in the hull country. If you make the attempt and +they ever git on your track, they'll run you down in spite o' +you." + +To the readers of this book I will say I never was more astonished +in my life, than I was to hear Jim Beckwith talk as he did. In all +the time that I had been with him, this was the first time I had +ever seen the slightest indication of his showing the white +feather, as we termed it. It seemed to me he had lost all his +nerve. + +I said: "Jim, my mind is made up; if that white girl is +dissatisfied and wants to leave the Indians, I am going to make +the attempt, and trust to luck for the balance." + +From that time until the day I was to go back to the village, he +tried in every way he could think of to persuade me not to make +the attempt, but I told him there was no use talking, that I +looked upon it as being my duty, knowing that the girl was a slave +to those Indians. + +On the day appointed I saddled Mexico and started for the Pima +village. I met the two young Indians about two miles from the +village, where they had come to meet me, and they were both riding +one horse, Nawasa riding behind her brother. When I met them she +jumped off from behind her brother and said she wanted to try my +horse to see how he rode, and she got on Mexico behind me and rode +to camp. + +I stayed at the village that night, and the next morning the three +of us started out to gather huckleberries. + +After we were on the ground and were busying ourselves gathering +berries, Nawasa said: + +"If you will go on that little hill"--pointing to a hill near by-- +"at noon to-morrow, I will bring the white girl here to this tree, +and you can see her for yourself." + +She made me promise her not to go any nearer the Apache camp at +this time, for, said she, "If they suspect anything wrong, the +white girl will be traded off to the Indians in Mexico for a +slave." + +After making arrangements to meet the next day, Nawasa rode off +toward the Apache town, and her brother and I rode back to the +Pima village. + +The following day I rode back in company with my young Indian +friend to within two or three miles of the berry-patch, where we +separated, and I rode out to the ridge that Nawasa had pointed out +to me the day previous. + +I saw them standing by the tree, as she had said. I put my glass +to my eyes and saw sure enough that it was a white girl with +Nawasa, and that she looked very sad. + +I then rode back to the Pima village. That same night the two +young Indians both came home, but they would not say a word while +at camp. It seemed that they would not under any consideration +have let any of the other Indians know what they were up to, so +the next morning when I started home they took their horses and +rode with me about two miles. + +After we had got away from the village some distance, I asked +Nawasa if the white girl still wanted to leave the Apaches, and +she said, "Yes, she would like very much to leave them, but was +afraid; as the Apaches had told her that if she ever tried to get +away and was caught, she would be sold to the Mexican Indians as a +slave, and there she would have to work in the fields, which would +be much harder work than she has to do where she is." + +I told Nawasa that if she would bring the white girl out on the +same ridge that I had rode on, I would give her five strings of +beads, and I would give her one string to give to the white girl. +She promised that she would try, and that she would do her best. + +I agreed to be back in eight days and see what arrangements had +been made, and to let her know when I would be ready to take the +girl. + +When I got back, Jim asked me what I would do with the girl if I +was successful in getting her away from the Indians. I told him I +would take her to Fort Yuma. + +"And what in the name of God will you do with her when you get to +Fort Yuma?" said Jim. + +I told him that if Mrs. Jackson was there, which I was confident +she was, that I would leave the girl with her, and that I had no +fears but that the girl would be taken care of in the very best +manner that Mrs. Jackson could provide for her. + +Jim said: "If the girl is satisfied with the Injuns, why don't you +let her alone? She don't know anything but Injun ways, and she +never will." + +I told him that my mind was thoroughly made up, and I would rescue +that girl from the Indians or lose my scalp in the attempt. And +now don't say any more about it, for it will do no good. + +He said: "Go ahead and do as you please, as you have always got to +have your own way about things, anyhow." + +I said: "Yes, Jim; when I know I am right, I propose to have my +own way." + +This ended the conversation, for the time being, at least, for Jim +saw that I was determined in the matter, and he said no more about +it. + +On the day appointed I took my two favorite saddle-horses and rode +over to the Pima village. I started very early and arrived at the +village about four o'clock in the afternoon. + +After knocking about the village for a little while, my two Indian +friends proposed that we take a ride. + +Of course I knew the horseback ride was only a ruse to get a +chance to tell me the plans laid by herself and the white girl for +her escape, although she said that she just wanted to try my Pinto +horse to see how he would ride. + +And here I will say that I don't believe there was another Indian +in that village who had any idea of the scheme that was being +worked up between myself and those two Indians, for they would +never say a word to me while within earshot of any of the tribe. + +The other Indians thought I was courting Nawasa, and it was always +the custom among those Indians for a young couple never to ride +out alone. + +It has always been a mystery to me why those young Pimas took such +a deep interest in the white girl, for they were merely untutored +Indians, having only a few years since seen the first white man, +and had not seen many since then. + +But those two young Indians seemed to be as kind-hearted persons +as I ever met, and were the most intelligent Indians I ever saw, +who were not educated, and I often regretted that I did not take +them to some school and have them educated, for it would have been +a great benefit to the people on the plains at that time. + +But to go on with my story. We took our ride, and as soon as we +were well away from the village Nawasa told me that she had seen +the white girl and completed plans for her escape. She said that +after making arrangements with the girl, she--Nawasa--had not gone +to the Apache village, but had met the girl at the huckleberry +patch most every day. + +She said: "The girl will come to the berry-patch every day until +we go there for her, provided the Indians with whom she lived +would let her go, that she might be there to-morrow, and she might +not come till the next day. The girl is willing to go with you, +and we will go to the berry-patch to-morrow and wait till she +comes." + +The next morning the three of us started out ostensibly to pick +berries. + +After we were out of sight of the village the young Indian man +took my Pinto horse and started in the direction of Fort Yuma, it +being understood that he was to stop about half way between Fort +Yuma and the place where we would meet the girl. He was to wait +there until the middle of the afternoon, and if we were not there +by that time he was to return to camp. + +Nawasa and I went on to the berry-patch, but the white girl was +not there. We had not waited long, however, until Nawasa looked up +and said in Spanish, "There she comes now." + +I looked and saw the girl running. She did not discover us until +she was within about fifty yards of us, and when she saw us she +stopped very suddenly and hung her head. + +I did not know at the time whether she was ashamed or whether she +had been with the Indians so long that she was really afraid of a +white person; but Nawasa was not long in getting to her, and the +girl would look at me and then look back, as though she had a +notion to go back to the Apache village. + +When I rode up to where she was, she dropped her head and would +not look up for some little time. + +I saw that her face was badly tattooed, but her body was not, and +as she stood there, apparently undecided what to do, she was to me +an object of pity, and her dejected countenance would, I think, +have appealed strongly to even Jim Bridger's heart. + +I told Nawasa to help her on behind me, for we must be off quick. +Nawasa said: "She don't want to go." I then spoke to the white +girl in Spanish, and said: "My dear girl, why do you hesitate? Get +up behind me and I will take you to your own people. Why do you +want to stay here and be a slave for those Indians?" + +I wish I could give in detail the persuasive language used by that +untutored but kind-hearted Indian girl, to get her to leave the +Apaches. She would tell her that if she would only go with me that +I would take her to her own people, and would tell her how happy +she would be with them. + +After a great deal of persuasion, as I sat on my horse I reached +down and took her by one arm and told the Indian girl to help her +up behind me. She took her by the foot and helped her on my horse, +and mounting her own horse we flew out of that section about as +fast as our horses were able to carry us. + +I was riding Mexico, and he was one of the swiftest horses in that +country, and he had great endurance, also. + +We rode some distance before I said anything to the girl, though +Nawasa had kept along at our side, talking to her all the time to +keep her spirits up. Finally I spoke to her in the English +language, but it was some time before I could get her to utter a +word; I don't know whether it was through fear or bashfulness. + +Four miles' ride brought us out of the timber into an open +prairie, with low hills covered with bunch-grass, and here and +there a bunch of prickly pears, so rank that one dared not attempt +to ride through them. There were little mountain streams running +through the country, with no kind of timber but willows, strewn +here and there along the banks. + +On we went, over the hills and across the valleys, putting our +horses down to what they could stand and at the same time keeping +a sharp lookout behind to see if the Indians were trailing us. + +Our course for the first twenty miles, to where we met the young +Indian, was a little north of west, and from there almost due +west. + +About two o'clock we arrived at the point where we were to meet +the young Indian, and found him there, waiting. + +We dismounted, and I was not long in changing my saddle from +Mexico to my Pinto horse. This horse would weigh nearly eleven +hundred pounds, and had good life and splendid bottom. + +By this time the white girl was beginning to talk some. + +After having my saddle changed and on my horse, the Indian girl +told her she would go no farther with us. She told Nawasa that she +was afraid to go with me, as she was afraid that I would take her +to Mexico and sell her for a slave, where she would have to work +in the fields. But Nawasa assured her there was no danger, saying: +"Esta umbra mooly ah-me-go," meaning, "This man is a great friend +of mine;" and she again told her not to be afraid, for I would +take her to her own people. + +This seemed to give her some encouragement. + +After the young Indian had shown me the direction to Fort Yuma, by +landmarks, etc., I asked him how far it was. + +He stepped out by the side of my horse, and after taking a good +look at him, said in Spanish: "About three hours, or perhaps three +and a half." I then told Nawasa to help the girl up again, and she +did so. + +When we were about to start, the two Indians came up to us and +said: "Adios anlyose," which means, "Good-bye, my friend;" at the +same time shaking hands with us both. + +After riding a short distance I commenced talking to her in our +own language. + +It seemed that she had almost forgotten English, and when she +would try to talk it she could not join the words together so as +to make much sense of it. It was hard to understand her, but +between English and Spanish together she could manage to talk so +that I was able to understand her. However, her English seemed to +improve by degrees, and I asked her if she would not be glad to +get back to her own people, so they could dress her up and make a +lady of her. + +I do not believe that the poor girl had really thought of or +realized her rude condition. + +She said: "No, I can never be a white girl," and at the same time +commenced crying, and said in broken English, "Now I remember +seeing my mother dressed all nice, and plenty more women all +dressed nice." It seemed after talking to her in her own language +a short time she could call back to memory things that she had +forgotten altogether. + +I asked her how long since she was taken by the Indians. She had +to study some time before she could answer, but finally in broken +English, intermingled with Spanish, she said she thought seven +years. + +I asked if she was taken alone. She said, no, she had a little +sister taken at the same time she was. I asked her where the +little sister was, and she replied that she had died, and she +thought she had been dead about three years. + +I asked her if the Indians had killed her father and mother. She +said: "Yes, and my little brother, too; and burned our wagon and +all that was in it." + +Then I said to her: "I don't see how you can love those Indians +who had killed your father, mother and brother." She replied that +she had no one else to love. + +I then said to her, "You will soon be among friends, for I am +taking you to a woman that will be as good to you as your own +mother was," and at that moment we hove in sight of the Fort. I +pointed to the Fort, and told her there was where the woman lived +that I was taking her to. + +We were now safe from an attack from the Apaches, and only a few +minutes later I drew rein at Fort Yuma. + +I first rode up to the guard, whose beat was in front of the +Commander's tent, and asked where Lieut. Jackson's quarters were. +He pointed to a tent not far from where we then were, saying: +"That is his tent, and his wife is there, too." + +As I rode to the Lieutenant's quarters, all eyes were turned in +our direction. Mrs. Jackson came to the door of the tent and +recognized me at once, and her first words were: "Chief, in the +name of common sense, where are you from, and who is this you have +with you?" + +I said: "Mrs. Jackson, this is a girl I rescued from the Indians. +She has no parents and no relatives, that she knows of, and I have +brought her to you, thinking you would be a friend to her." + +The reply of that noble woman was, "I will, with all my heart," +and at that she assisted the girl in getting off the horse and led +her into her own tent. + +By this time Lieut. Jackson and all the officers of the Fort were +there, and it seemed to me that the Lieutenant would never quit +shaking my hand, and when he went to introduce me to the other +officers who were present, laughingly said. + +"What shall I call you? I have known you as the 'Boy Scout,' also +as the 'Chief of Scouts.' I have known you when you were giving +lessons in hunting, and now you have come in from a hostile Indian +country with a white girl riding behind you. What shall I call +you?" + +I said: "Lieutenant, call me Will Drannan, the trapper, for I am +now engaged in that business." + +"Yes, I see you are," responded the Lieutenant with a hearty +laugh, "and I see you have had splendid success in your new +enterprise." He then asked me if I had trapped the girl. + +I told him that I did not trap her, but that I got her away just +the same. + +The Lieutenant then introduced me to the officers, and had the +orderly take charge of my horses. I was never kept more busy in my +life answering questions than I was for the next two hours, +relative to the girl and my plan of rescuing her. + +Among the officers was a captain by the name of Asa Moore, who had +heard all about this massacre only a short time after it occurred, +and he said he thought there were some of the relatives living +somewhere in California, but he did not know just what part of the +state. + +I had forgotten to say that on our way to the Fort I asked her +name. It seemed at first that she had forgotten it, but after +studying some little time she tried to speak the name, which at +that time I understood to be Otus, but I have learned since that +her name was Olive Oatman. She did not seem to remember her given +name. The Indians had a name for her, but I have forgotten what it +was. + +Lieut. Jackson invited us into his tent, but when we got to the +door it was barred. + +Mrs. Jackson asked us to wait a few minutes until she got some +clothes on Will's girl. + +A few minutes later, when we were called into supper, Mrs. Jackson +had washed the girl and had her dressed in calico. + +Mrs. Jackson told us that after she got her dressed, the girl sat +down and wept bitterly and said she did not know how to wear such +clothing. + +I remained at the Fort two days, and I must say that this girl +improved both in talking and in manners during the time I was +there far beyond our expectations. + +When she would appear down-hearted or discouraged Mrs. Jackson +would talk to her in such a kind and motherly manner that the girl +would cheer up at once and would be anxious to try to make +something of herself. + +After spending two days at the Fort, and knowing that Jim Beckwith +would be uneasy about me, I commenced making preparations to +return. + +Mrs. Jackson promised me that she would give the girl the very +best care possible while she remained with her, and if she could +hear of any of her relatives she would see that she got to them +safely. + +With this understanding I left the girl with Mrs. Jackson, but +before I was ready to start the Lieutenant came to me and asked if +I did not want a job of scouting. I told him that I did not at +present, that I was going to Santa Fe and did not know when I +would return again. + +He then handed me a letter of recommendation, saying, "If you ever +happen to want a position scouting, just show this letter and it +will be of some benefit to you," and he assured me that if at any +time he could assist me in any manner he would cheerfully do so. + +When I was ready to start, Miss Oatman asked Mrs. Jackson what she +should say to me. Mrs. Jackson told her to tell me good-bye, and +tell me that she was very thankful to me for all I had done for +her. But the poor girl could not remember it all. She could only +remember the words "Good-bye, I thank you," at the same time +shaking hands with me. + +This was the last I ever saw of the girl, but have heard various +reports concerning her since. I have been told that Mrs. Jackson +raised money at the Fort to send her to San Francisco to have the +tattoo marks removed from her face by the celebrated Dr. Fuller of +that city, but they having been formed with vegetable matter, he +was unable to remove them. I was also informed that she was +afterwards sent to New York for the same purpose, but with no +better success. + +Only a short time ago, since coming to Idaho, I heard that she had +really found some of her relatives somewhere in the state of +Oregon, where she remained and raised a family; while a still +later report is that she is married to a rich merchant and is +living somewhere in the state of New York. + +I have often thought of this poor girl since, and it has always +been a question in my mind whether I did right in taking her away +from the Indians after she had been with them so long; but if I +did do right, and she or any of her relatives should by chance see +this work and glance over its pages, I wish to say that to that +kind-hearted Indian girl of the Pima tribe, Nawasa by name, and +her brother belong the praise of rescuing Olive Oatman from +the Apache Indians. + +In the first place, had it not been for her and her brother, I +would never have known of the girl, and even after I knew she was +there, I could not have done anything without Nawasa's assistance, +for she could not have worked more faithfully and earnestly if +there had been a thousand dollars in the operation for her. + +On my return trip I rode the first day to the Pima village and +remained there that night. + +I hired my young Indian friend to go among the Apaches and trade +beads for furs, and he went home with me. + +Nawasa was very anxious to know how I got through with the girl, +but did not dare say anything while in camp; so the next morning +when her brother and I were leaving she caught a horse and rode +with us some distance. As soon as we were out of hearing of the +other Indians, she and her brother commenced asking all sorts of +questions concerning the girl; whether I thought she would be +happy with her own people or not. + +Those Indians had learned in some way that somewhere, a long +distance away, the white people had great villages, and Nawasa +asked if I thought the white girl would be taken to the large +cities. + +The young Indian and I arrived at our camp about four o'clock that +afternoon and found Jim Beckwith in a splendid humor, for he was +glad to see me. He had given up all hope of ever seeing me again, +for he thought the Apaches had followed me up and killed me. I +told him what I had brought the young Indian for, and he was well +pleased with the arrangement. + +We fitted him out with beads that cost us twenty dollars, and tin +pans and blankets, agreeing to come to his village in two weeks +for our furs. + +When the two weeks were up we took our pack-horses and went to the +village, and to our surprise he had traded off the beads and +blankets to much better advantage than we could have done +ourselves. + +For this favor we gave him in compensation two pairs of blankets, +four brass finger rings and four strings of beads; and the young +fellow thought he had been well treated for his trouble. + +It was now getting late in the season, and after buying all the +furs the Pima tribe had we commenced making preparations to pull +out for Taos, as we had about all the furs we could pack on our +horses to advantage, having fourteen pack-horses in all. + +We packed up and started, and made the trip without anything of +consequence happening on the way. We did not see any hostile +Indians and had very good success, only losing one pack and horse +while crossing a little stream, the name of which I have +forgotten; and arrived at Taos in the latter part of June. + +It was late in the afternoon when we rode up to Uncle Kit Carson's +home. He and his wife and little child were out on the porch, and +as soon as we rode up, both recognized Jim Beckwith, but neither +of them knew me, for when they had seen me last I was almost a +beardless boy, and now I had quite a crop of beard and was a man +of twenty-five years of age. + +"Hello, Jim!" were Uncle Kit's first words, and he and his wife +came out to the gate to shake hands with him. + +"Well, how are you, anyhow; and how have you been since you left, +and who is this you have with you?" said Uncle Kit, the last in a +low tone of voice. + +I had dismounted some yards distant, and on the opposite side of +the pack-horse from them. Jim told Uncle Kit that I was a +discouraged miner that he had picked up in California, saying: "He +don't amount to very much, but I needed some one for company and +to help me through with the pack-train, so I brought him along." + +By this time I had made my way through the bunch of pack-horses +and walked up to Uncle Kit and spoke to him, and I think I got the +worst shaking up that I had had for a long time, and I don't think +there ever was a father more pleased to see his son return than +Uncle Kit was to see me. + +Our horses were turned over to the hired man, who took care of +them, and the next two days were spent in visiting Uncle Kit and +his wife. Of course I had to tell them of the hardships I had +undergone during my absence from home; my adventures, narrow +escapes, etc. + +I learned that Mr. Hughes had died during my absence; I also +learned that Johnnie West was at Bent's Fort. + +After resting two days we packed up again and started for Bent's +Fort. Uncle Kit went along with us to assist in making a good sale +of our furs, and we arrived there just in time, as the last train +was going out for the season, and we sold them for a good price. + +Here I met Jim Bridger, Johnnie West and a number of other +acquaintances and friends who supposed I had been killed and +scalped by the Indians. I was sorry to learn that Johnnie West, +like the majority of the old frontiersmen, had fallen into the +habit of drinking up every dollar that he earned. + +While we were here, Uncle Kit made a proposition that himself, Jim +Beckwith, Jim Bridger and myself take a trip to the head of the +Missouri river and put in the winter trapping. + +He said he wanted to make this trip and then quit the business, +saying: "I have business enough at home to attend to, but I have +always had an anxiety to take a trip to the headwaters of the +Missouri river." + +The four of us returned to Taos, arriving there just in time to +celebrate the Fourth of July, arriving on the second, and now I +was home again in my fine buckskin suit. The night of the fourth +we all attended a big fandango, and had a huge time. I was +somewhat over my bashfulness by this time, and by the assistance +of Mrs. Carson and two or three other ladies present, I was +enabled to get through in pretty good shape. After that night's +dancing, I felt that if I were back at the Fort, where I tried to +dance my first set, I would show them how dancing first began. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +A WARM TIME IN A COLD COUNTRY.--A BAND OF BANNOCKS CHASE US INTO A +STORM THAT SAVES US.--KIT CARSON SLIGHTLY WOUNDED.--BECKWITH MAKES +A CENTURY RUN. + + +We remained at Taos until August first, then, all being ready for +our northern trip, each man taking his own saddle-horse and five +pack horses, we made the start for the headwaters of the Missouri +river. We crossed the Platte where it leaves the mountains, and +the next day we met a band of Arapahoes, who informed us that the +Sioux were on the war-path, and that Gen. Harney was stationed on +North Platte with a considerable body of soldiers. The day +following, after having crossed the Cache-la-Poudre, we reached +Gen. Harney's camp. The General, being a good friend of Uncle Kit +and Jim Bridger, insisted on our being his guests, so we took +supper with him and camped there for the night. + +While at the supper table, Jim Beckwith told the General who I was +and what I had been doing the last three years, following which I +took Lieut. Jackson's letter from my pocket and handed it to the +General. I had never seen the inside of the letter myself. The +General read the letter the second time, and looking up at me, he +said: + +"Yes, I'll give you a job; you can start in to-morrow if you +like." + +Before I had time to answer him, Uncle Kit spoke up, saying: +"General, I have employed him for the next six months and I cannot +get along without him." + +At this the General said: "Mr. Carson, your business is not urgent +and mine is, and I insist on the young man taking a position with +me for the remainder of the summer." + +I said: "General, I did not show you that letter with the +intention of asking you for employment, but simply to show you the +standing I have with the people where I have been." + +"Young man," he replied, "I don't wish to flatter you, but there +is not a man in my service that I could conscientiously give such +a letter." + +When he saw that we were determined to proceed, he tried to +persuade us that we could not make it through, "For," said he, +"the whole country is full of hostile Indians between here and +there, and they are killing emigrants every day." Which was true. + +The following morning we pulled out again, aiming to push through +and get into the bad lands as quickly as possible, knowing that +when once in there we would not be attacked by a large band of +Indians, there being no game in that region for them to live on. + +The second day out from Gen. Kearney's quarters, about the middle +of the afternoon, we were looking for a place to camp for the +night, when we saw eleven Indians coming for us full tilt. Jim +Bridger was riding in the lead, I being the hindmost one. Jim +being the first to see them, he turned as quick as a wink and we +all rode to the center. Each man having a saddle-horse and five +pack-horses, they made good breastworks for us, so we all +dismounted and awaited the impolite arrival. I drew my rifle down +across the back of one of the horses when the Indians were two +hundred yards away, and Uncle Kit said: "Don't fire yet. All wait +until they get near us, and I will give the word for all to fire +at once. Each man take good aim, and make sure of his Indian; use +your rifles first and then draw your pistols." + +He did not give the word until they were within about one hundred +yards of us, and when he did, we all fired. I saw my Indian fall +to the ground. We then drew our revolvers, and I got in two more +shots before the Indians could turn their ponies so as to get +away. + +At the first shot with my revolver I did not see the Indian fall, +but at the second shot I got my man. + +We killed seven from the little band, only leaving four. They +seemed to realize at once that they had bit off more than they +could chew, and in about three minutes they were out of sight, and +that was the last we saw of them. + +We did not get a man wounded, and only one horse hurt, and that +very slightly. + +This was our last trouble with Indians until we were across the +Yellowstone. + +The next day after crossing that river we saw on our right, about +a quarter of a mile away, twenty Crow Indians coming for us. They +gave us chase for five or six miles, until we struck suitable +ground. As soon as that was obtained we stopped to make a stand, +and as soon as they were in sight around the hill they were within +gunshot, and we all fired. I think I wounded my Indian in the leg, +and killed his horse. Jim Beckwith said he saw three Indians fall +to the ground. This, however, was the last trouble we had with the +Crow Indians on that trip. + +The next day we arrived at Fort Benton, on the Missouri river. +There we met a number of trappers in the employ of the Hudson Bay +Company, and not an independent trapper in the outfit. Strange, +but true, the trappers in the employ of that Company always hated +the sight of an independent trapper. + +Here we stayed over two days, trying to gather some information as +to our route, and, strange as it may seem, we could not find a man +who would give us any information as to the route we wished to go, +which was only about two hundred miles from there. + +Trapping had never been done in that region, and these men knew +that this was because of hostile Indians there. They were not men +of sufficient principle to even intimate to us that the Indians +were dangerous in that section, but let us go on to find it out +for ourselves, hoping, no doubt, that the Indians would kill us +and that there would be so many independent trappers out of the +way. From here we took the divide between the Missouri river and +the Yellowstone, aiming to keep on high land in order to steer +clear, as much as possible, of hostile Indians. + +Uncle Kit said he was satisfied that there was a large basin +somewhere in that country, but did not know just where or how to +find it. + +It was in the evening of the fifth day when we came upon a high +ridge, and almost due west of us and far below we could see a +great valley, since known as Gallatin Valley, where Bozeman, +Mont., now stands. + +When we came in sight of this beautiful region, Uncle Kit said: +"Boys, this is the country I have been looking for, and I'll +assure you if we can get in there and are not molested, we can +catch beaver by the hundred." + +We had not been bothered by Indians, nor had we seen any sign of +them since we left Fort Benton. + +We had been on high ground all of the way, and we thought now when +once in this valley we would be entirely out of the way of the +Crows, and the Bannocks and Blackfoot Indians would be the only +tribes to contend with. + +From where we first saw the valley, we started to go down the +mountain. The next day, as we got lower, we could see plenty of +Indian sign. Striking a canyon, that we thought would lead us down +to the valley, we gave it the name of Bridger's Pass, which name +it has to-day. As we neared the valley we saw more Indian sign, +and from the amount of it, it seemed that the country must be +alive with them. When within about five or six miles of the +valley, we saw a band of Indians to our right, on the ridge. + +Jim Bridger said: "Boys, they are Crows, and we are in for it." + +They did not come in reach of us, but kept along the ridge above +us. We could see by looking ahead that near the mouth of this +canyon there was a high cliff of rocks. + +We expected to be attacked from those rocks, and we had to be very +cautious in passing this point. But to our surprise they did not +make the attack. Here we began to see beaver sign in abundance. I +don't think that I ever in my life saw as much of it on the same +space of ground as I saw there, for every little stream that +emptied into that valley was full of beaver dams. + +The Indians kept in sight of us until we struck the valley, which +was just at sunset. We traveled until dark, when we stopped and +built up a big fire. As soon as our fire was burning good we +mounted our horses and rode about one mile on to open ground. +Dismounting, we loosened all our saddles, both pack and riding- +saddles, and picketed all our horses as close together as we +could. + +We made our bed in the center, keeping a guard out all night. Jim +Beckwith was the first man on duty, and my turn came second. By +the time I went to relieve Jim the moon was up, and he told me to +keep a keen lookout in the direction of the creek, "For," said he, +"I am almost sure I saw an Indian in that direction about half an +hour ago." + +Of course this put me on my guard, and I kept my eye peeled in +great shape. About my second trip around the horses I looked in +the direction of the creek and thought I saw an Indian coming on +all fours. + +He would only come a few steps and then stop. Being below me, I +could not get him between me and the moon, so I concluded I would +meet him half way. I got down on all fours and watched him, and +when he would start I would move ahead, keeping my eye on him, and +when he would stop I would stop also. + +This I did so that to move at the same time he did, he could not +hear the noise made by me. When I was close enough I laid flat on +the ground, shut my left hand, and placing it on the ground, +resting my gun on my fist, took good aim and I got him. + +At the crack of my gun the whole crowd were on their feet, and a +moment later were at the scene of war. We went to the place where +it lay, and beheld a very large white wolf lying there, "dead as a +door nail." + +This was the first time I had ever made such a mistake, and it was +some time before I heard the last of it. + +The next morning when we got up, instead of being one band of +Indians in sight, there were two. We made up our minds that we had +discovered the finest trapping ground in America, and had a poor +show to get away from it, but we went ahead and got our breakfast, +just as though there were no Indians in sight of us, but we +concluded we had better leave this part of the country, so we +pulled out southwest across the valley, having no trouble until we +struck the West Gallatin river. + +Here the beaver dams were so thick that it was difficult to find a +place to cross. After prospecting some little time, we struck on a +buffalo trail crossing the river, and we concluded to cross on +that trail. I was in the lead, but did not proceed far until we +saw the mud was so deep that we had to retrace our steps. When we +faced about to come back, of course I was thrown into the rear, +and just as we had turned the Indians made an attack on us from +the brush. I fired four shots at them at short range with my +revolver, the others firing at the same time. Just as we were out +of the brush, my favorite horse, Mexico, which was the hindmost +horse in my string, was shot down, having five or six arrows in +his body. I sprang from my saddle and the other boys halted until +I cut my dying horse loose from the others, which was only a +second's work, and we made a rush for the open ground, which was +reached in a few jumps. The Indians did not show themselves on the +open ground, but kept hid in the brush. We rode up and down the +stream for an hour and a half, but could not find a place that we +could cross for Indians and mud. Every place we would attempt to +cross, the Indians would attack us from the brush. + +This, however, was all an open country, excepting immediately +along the stream, where was an immense growth of underbrush. After +making several attempts to cross and being driven back, Jim +Beckwith proposed that we put spurs to our horses and ride as fast +as they could carry us for three or four miles up the river, that +we might be able to cross before the Indians would be able to get +there, "For," said he, "this brush seems to be full of redskins." + +This being agreed to, we all started at full speed up the river, +and after running some distance we saw a large buffalo trail +leading across the river. Jim Bridger being in the lead, said: +"Here is a big buffalo trail, let's try crossing on it." We were +about one-fourth of a mile from the river, and Uncle Kit, who from +some cause had dropped behind, sang out: "All right, let's hurry +and get across and out of the brush on the other side before them +redskins get here." + +At this we all made a rush for the river, and just as we were +going out on the other side the Indians attacked us from the +brush. They shot Uncle Kit's hindmost horse down before he was out +of the mud and water, and he had to get off in two feet of mud and +water to cut his dying horse loose from the string of horses. We +killed two Indians here. Uncle Kit, while he was down cutting his +horse loose, shot one who was just in the act of striking him with +a tomahawk. We made our way to open ground as quick as possible, +rode about a half a mile and then stopped and loaded our pistols. + +Uncle Kit said: "Boys, how in the world are we to get out of this? +The whole country is alive with Indians." + +Jim Bridger said: "Kit, you are the man that got us in here, and +we will look for you to get us out." + +"All right," said Kit, "mount your horses and let's be off." And +he gave orders to ride abreast when the ground would permit. + +By riding in this manner we could corral quicker. What is meant by +corralling is that each man has his string of horses as we have +before stated, and when attacked each man rides to the center, and +the horses are a great protection to the men in time of battle. We +traveled some four or five miles without seeing an Indian, but all +this time we were on open ground. + +Finally we came to a little stream, a tributary to the Madison +river, and when crossing this we were again attacked by the +Indians, who were secreted in the brush. + +This was a surprise, for we had not seen an Indian since we left +the West Gallatin. Here we had a fight that lasted full twenty +minutes. We were about the middle of the stream when they opened +fire on us. + +Uncle Kit said: "Come ahead, boys;" at the same we commenced +firing at the Indians, and every foot of that stream had to be +contested, from the middle, where they first opened fire on us, to +the shore. I saw two dead Indians in the water, and there might +have been more, but I did not have time to stop and look for +Indians, either dead or alive. I had seen the time that I was +hunting for Indians, but at this particular time I didn't feel as +though I had lost any. + +Uncle Kit was now in the lead and I was bringing up the rear. Just +as we were out of the water and he was removing the saddle from +his horse, he got two arrows through his buckskin hunting shirt, +and was very slightly hurt. + +We managed to stand them off until he removed the saddle from the +dying horse to another, after which we pulled for open ground, all +escaping unhurt, excepting the slight scratch Uncle Kit received +from the arrow. + +The redskins did not follow us away from the creek. + +As soon as we were on open ground we stopped and built a fire and +dried our clothing, for we were as wet as drowned rats. To build a +fire we had to pull small sagebrush that grew here and there in +the open prairie in that country. While we were drying our +clothing and eating a lunch, we had our horses feeding near us, +but did not dare let them scatter for fear of an attack, which we +were liable to experience at any moment. After we had our clothing +pretty well dried out and having had a little something in the way +of refreshments, on looking off to the northeast about two miles +distant, we saw a big band of buffalo and a lot of Indians after +them. + +We concluded that we had remained here long enough, so we mounted +and pulled out again. + +The balance of the day we kept on open ground, and saw numerous +little bands of Indians, but were not molested by them until late +in the afternoon. + +About sundown, while traveling down a little narrow valley, all of +a sudden about fifteen Indians, all well mounted, made a charge on +us. We corralled at once. By this time our horses had learned to +corral pretty quick, and when they were in gunshot we opened fire +on them. I fired at one with my rifle and got him, for I saw him +fall to the ground, and I got another with my pistol. I do not +know how many were killed, but they went away a much less number +than they came. We all escaped unhurt, but Uncle Kit lost another +horse, making in all four horses that day. + +We moved on again and traveled about five miles and made another +camp, but did not build a fire. Our horses were picketed near +camp, and that night we stood guard the same as the night before, +but I did not see any Indians crawling up on all fours. The +morning following we were off very early, and traveled some four +miles before we came to water. Coming to a nice little brook, we +stopped and took our breakfast. Here we had a chance to have +killed an antelope, but did not dare shoot. + +After taking something for the inner man, we proceeded on our way. +We did not have any more trouble with Indians, not even seeing any +until we got to what is known as Stinking Water or Alder creek, +near where Virginia City, Mont., now stands. In traveling down +this stream, which is quite crooked, and just as we were rounding +one of those points of the hill running down to the creek, riding +in the lead I saw two Indian wick-i-ups about half a mile ahead, +just in the edge of the brush. I at once gave the signal to turn +back, and we got out of sight without being discovered by the +Indians. + +We turned our course, somewhat, making a circuitous route, and +when we were just opposite the wick-i-ups, Jim Bridger and Uncle +Kit climbed to the top of the hill, taking my glasses with them, +and took in the situation. When they returned to where we were +they were feeling much more encouraged, saying: "Thank God we are +rid of the Blackfoots and Crows; those are the Bannocks. We are +now in their country, and they are not so numerous nor so hostile +as the Crows and Blackfoots." That night we camped on Stinking +Water, near Lone Butte, picketed our horses close around camp and +stood guard the same as the two nights previous. + +The next morning we were up early and off again, aiming to cross +the main divide and go over to Fort Hall, expecting to find there +a great many trappers and raise a crowd sufficient to come back +and trap on the Gallatin river this winter. + +At that time Fort Hall was a great rendezvous for trappers. + +Now we were beginning to feel more encouraged and to think our +chances were pretty good, but that evening, while traveling up +Beaver Canyon, which, I think the railroad runs up now, from +Pocatello, Idaho, to Butte City, Mont., the Bannocks attacked us +about fifty strong. + +They held us there for about an hour, and had it not been for a +thunder storm that came up, I don't think one of us would have got +out of that canyon, for they had us completely surrounded. They +killed two horses from Jim Bridger's string and wounded Uncle Kit +in one shoulder severely. + +When the thunder storm came up the Indians were gradually closing +in on us, and it commenced to thunder and lightning, and it +actually rained so hard that one person could not see another two +rods before him. + +While it was raining so hard, we mounted and rode out of the +canyon. + +I never saw it rain harder in my life than it did for a half hour. +When we were on open ground and it had quit raining, we stopped, +and Uncle Kit said: "Now who says the Almighty didn't save us this +time by sending that shower of rain just at the right time?" + +That night we camped near the summit of the Rocky Mountains, +dividing the waters that run into the Pacific and Atlantic oceans. +Uncle Kit suffered all that night from his arrow wound, the arrow +going under his shoulder blade, and when we examined the wound we +found it much deeper than we had any idea of. This was the last +trouble with Indians on that trip. + +The next morning we started very early, and were three days making +Fort Hall, having no trouble whatever on the way. On arriving at +the Fort we were very much disappointed in regard to raising our +crowd to go to the head of the Missouri river to trap the coming +winter. There were only about twenty trappers at Fort Hall at that +time, and they appeared to have no particular objections to living +a little while longer. Those of them who had never interviewed the +Blackfoot and Crow Indians personally were pretty well acquainted +with them by reputation, and they said they did not care to risk +their lives in that country. We remained here two weeks, after +which time--Uncle Kit's wound getting considerable better--Jim +Bridger, Uncle Kit and myself concluded to go on to the waters of +Green river and trap the coming winter. + +While here, Jim Beckwith fell in with a man by the name of Reese, +who said he had trapped on the headwaters of Snake river the +winter previous, and that trapping was good there. He induced +Beckwith to go to that section of the country, saying it was only +one hundred miles from Fort Hall. This trapping ground was +immediately across the divide of the Rockies and south of the +Gallatin, where the Blackfoot and Crow Indians were so bad, but +Reese thought they could get out the next spring before the +Indians could get across the mountains. + +So he and Beckwith started, and at the same time we pulled out for +the head of Green river. They went to the head of Snake river, and +I afterwards learned that they trapped there all winter with +splendid success, but trapping being so good they stayed too late +in the spring. One morning about the last days of April, after +they had just eaten their breakfast and were making preparations +to go to look after their traps, they were attacked by about one +hundred Blackfoot Indians. Reese was killed the first shot, and +Jim then saw that his only show was to run, which he did. It was +about sunrise when they made the attack. Jim Beckwith fled, with +the Indians in hot pursuit. It was claimed to be one hundred miles +from there to Fort Hall, and that same evening, before dark, he +was in Fort Hall, and he went all the way on foot. + +In this run Beckwith burst the veins in his legs in numerous +places, making him a cripple for life. The last time I saw him was +at his own home, near Denver, Colo., in 1863. At that time he was +so badly crippled that he had to walk with two canes, and after +telling me the condition he was in, he showed me a number of +running sores that were caused by the bursted veins. For Jim +Beckwith, now dead and gone, I will say, he was a hero in his day. +For bravery he was far above the average, and at the same time he +was honorable and upright. He was a man whose word was as good as +gold, and one who was possessed of great strength and had a +constitution equal to that of a mustang. The worst thing that +could be said of Jim Beckwith was that he was his own worst enemy, +for he would spend his money for whiskey as fast as he earned it. + +Uncle Kit, Jim Bridger and myself wintered on the waters of the +Green river and trapped, but had very poor success, this country +having been trapped over so much that the beaver were scarce and +hard to catch, and Uncle Kit's wound bothered him all winter, and +in fact as long as he lived. + +After winter had broken up we started for New Mexico, via North +Park. Our idea in taking that route was to avoid the hostile +Sioux. + +We were successful in getting through without having any trouble +with Indians, whatever, arriving at Bent's Fort about the first of +June. We sold our furs again to Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux. Joe +Favor having gone out of business, I engaged with Col. Bent and +Mr. Roubidoux to go among the Arapahoe Indians to trade for furs +and buffalo robes. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +CARSON QUITS THE TRAIL.--BUFFALO ROBES FOR TEN CENTS.--"PIKE'S +PEAK OR BUST."--THE NEW CITY OF DENVER.--"BUSTED."--HOW THE NEWS +GOT STARTED. + + +Uncle Kit Carson pulled out for home and when he was starting he +said he had done his last trapping and he was going home to his +sheep ranch and take things easy. "For," said he, "I had the wust +luck last winter that I ever had in my life, when I had 'lowed to +have the best. I'm gittin old enough to quit." + +Before he left he told me that whenever I felt like it he wanted +me to come to his place and make my home as long as I pleased. + +Col. Bent fitted me out with twenty-five pack animals and two +Mexican boys to assist me, and I started for the Arrapahoe +country, one hundred and twenty-five miles distant. I was supplied +with beads, blankets and rings to trade to the Indians for furs +and buffalo robes. + +On my arrival at the Arrapahoe village I learned that there were +not many furs on hand, as the Sioux had been so hostile the past +fall and winter that the Arrapahoes had not been able to trap or +hunt much, consequently we had to visit all the little hunting +parties belonging to that tribe, in order to get furs and robes +enough to load our pack train. + +After remaining about two weeks I got a fair load and started on +my return, making the round trip in little over one month, having +had no trouble whatever with Indians or otherwise. On my return to +Bent's Fort I found John West, who had been trapping in the +Windriver mountains in company with two other men I did not know. +They had been successful the past winter and had sold their furs +for a good price, and now Johnnie had plenty of money and was +having what he termed a glorious good time, spending from ten to +forty dollars a day. + +After I had settled up with Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux I went to +Taos with the determination that I would take it easy the balance +of this season. + +Col. Bent offered to bet me a horse that I would not stay in Taos +one month. He told me that if I would go to Taos and rest up a +month and return to the fort and hunt for them the balance of the +season he would make me a present of a better horse than the other +one he gave me, but I told him that he was mistaken, and that he +never owned a better horse than Pinto. I knew that Pinto was +getting old and had had many a hard day's ride, but I could get on +him to-morrow morning after breakfast, and be in Taos before +sundown, which was a distance of eighty miles. I made a bargain +with them to return to the fort in a month from that time and hunt +for them until something else turned up. + +On my arrival at Taos I found Jim Bridger stopping with Uncle Kit, +and he made me a proposition that we go and stop with the Kiowa +tribe that winter and buy furs and buffalo robes. I agreed to that +provided that Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux would agree to buy the +furs and robes of us. They were the only traders in that country +since Joe Favor had retired from business. + +In one month I returned to the fort as per contract and started in +hunting. + +There was so much stock around the fort that I had to go from ten +to twenty miles to find deer, and sometimes further to find +buffalo. + +After I had hunted about three weeks Jim Bridger came over to try +to make a bargain with the company in regard to buying furs and +buffalo robes. + +Up to this time the Kiowa had not traded any at this fort. In +fact, there had been but little trading done among them, yet they +were in the heart of the buffalo country in the fall of the year, +being located on the Arkansas river, one hundred miles west from +the Big Bend. We made a bargain to work for Bent and Roubidoux by +the month, they to furnish us. + +They thought the best plan would be to buy a load of robes and +return with it, and then go back again, for by so doing we would +not have to run chances of being robbed by other tribes as we +would by waiting until spring to pack over to the fort. + +We started about the first of November for the Kiowa village, with +thirty-two pack-horses and a Mexican boy to help us. This was just +the time of year that the buffalo were moving south for the +winter, and they travel much slower and are much harder to +frighten than in the spring when they are traveling the other way. +I attributed this to their being so much fatter in the fall of the +year, for in the fall one would never see a poor buffalo except it +was either an old male or one that had been crippled; and their +hides are much more valuable than those taken off in the spring. + +On arriving at the village we found that the Indians had a new +chief, whom neither of us were acquainted with. His name was +Blackbird. The old chief, Black Buffalo, who fed us on dog meat +when we were on our way from St. Louis to Taos, ten years before, +having died, Blackbird was appointed in his place, and we found +him to be a very intelligent Indian. He said his people were glad +to have us come among them and that they would be pleased to trade +with us. + +We stayed there about two weeks before offering to buy a hide or +fur of them, but would show our goods quite frequently in order to +make them anxious, and by doing so we would be able to make a +better bargain with them. + +After staying there about two weeks we told the chief that on a +certain day we would be ready to trade with his people, putting +the date off about one week. + +When the day arrived the Indians came in from all quarters to +trade furs and robes, bringing from one to one dozen robes to the +family. The squaws brought the robes, and the bucks came along to +do the trading, and we got many a first-class robe for one string +of beads, which in St. Louis would cost about ten cents. We traded +for enough furs in one day to load our entire pack-train of +thirty-two horses. + +The next morning we loaded up our furs and pulled out, telling the +chief that we would be back in one moon--meaning in their +language, one month--which would keep us busy, it being about four +hundred miles to Bent's Fort, and as we were heavily loaded we +would have to travel slow. The Mexican boy would ride ahead and +the pack horses would follow him, while Jim and I brought up the +rear. We experienced no trouble in getting all the buffalo meat we +wanted, for those beasts were quite tame at this season of the +year, and they would often come near our camp. So near, in fact, +that we could sit in camp and kill our meat. + +Upon our arrival at the fort Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux were well +pleased with the success of the trip, and we at once started back +after the second load. We found more furs and robes there awaiting +our arrival than we could load on our horses. In all we made four +trips that winter, and Col. Bent told me some time afterward that +they cleared a thousand dollars on each cargo. + +When spring came Jim Bridger and I went to Taos and visited Uncle +Kit for about a month. + +This was now the spring of 1859 and the excitement over the gold +mines around Pike's Peak was running high. We all knew where +Pike's Peak was, for any day when it was clear we could see it +very plainly from Bent's Fort or Taos, but we did not know just +where the mines were. Jim proposed that we take a trip out there +and see about the mines. So we talked the matter over until I was +finally attacked with that disease which was then known as "the +gold fever." + +About the first of June we made a break for the gold fields. We +crossed the Arkansas river near Fountain ca-booyah (or something +like that)--(Fountain qui Bouille, Boiling Fountain)--and did not +go far from there until we struck a wagon road, which showed there +had been much travel, and we could see that it had not been long +since a wagon passed. + +We were very much surprised at a wagon road in this portion of +country, but there it was just the same. We did not travel on this +road very far until we overtook a large train of emigrants, and on +making inquiry we learned that they were on their way to Pike's +Peak. + +Jim Bridger laughingly remarked: "If you are not careful you will +pass Pike's Peak before you go there, for there is the mountain," +pointing to the Peak, the foot of which we were just then passing. +At this another man said: "We are going to Cherry creek to the +mines. Do you know how far it is?" + +I told him it was twenty miles to the head of Cherry creek. He +then asked me how far it was to Denver. I told him I had never +heard of any creek or river by that name in this country. "But," +he said, "I mean Denver City." But Jim and I had never heard of +the place. He said Denver City was on Cherry creek in the gold +mines. + +We passed on, crossing the main divide between the Arkansas and +the Platte rivers, striking the head of Cherry creek, then +traveled down Cherry creek to the mouth, on a now well-beaten +wagon road, the dust in places being six inches deep or more. + +When we were within a mile of the mouth of Cherry creek I looked +ahead, and for the first time I saw Denver, there being then as I +supposed about fifty tents and campers' houses in the place. We +stopped to take a look around and saw people coming in, every hour +of the day, over the Platte and Arkansas river routes, and could +see all kind of conveyances from a hand cart to a six-horse team. +While there I saw a number of carts come in drawn by men alone, +all the way from two to eight men to the cart. + +After stopping around Denver two days and taking in the sights, we +pulled out for the mountains to a place called Gregory, about +forty miles from Denver, where it was reported they were mining. + +The mines were located on North Clear creek and there were only +two claims being worked. + +Gregory, the man that this little camp was named for, was working +a claim and said he was taking out some gold, and a man by the +name of Greene Russell was working another claim. + +They were both old Georgia miners. + +This man Russell told me how the excitement got started. He said +that himself, Gregory and Dr. Russell, a brother of his, and three +other men had come out there the fall before, and early that +season had discovered gold on Cherry creek, and also a little on +the mountain stream where they were then at work. Dr. Russell +being a man of family, concluded to return to his home that fall. +He and the rest of the crowd cautioned him to say nothing about +what they had struck, for they did not consider they had found +anything to warrant an excitement and a stampede, as it was termed +in mining parlance. The Doctor promised he would not mention it +even to his most intimate friends. But it seems he did not keep +his word, but commenced to spread the news as soon as he struck +the settlements, telling wonderful stories of the gold around +Pike's Peak, which set the people wild. They seemed to think there +had been another California struck which caused a repetition of +the stampede ten years before. During the winter the news spread +all over the State and they came from every quarter. + +Russell continued: "Now you can see the effect of it. If I had +known my brother would have told such outrageous stories I would +not have allowed him to go home." He said he thought there were a +few claims outside of the ones they were working that would pay, +but beyond that he did not think it would amount to anything. + +After remaining here one week we concluded we had gold mining +enough to last us some time, so we started back for the foot of +the mountains, and the first night we camped at the place where +Golden now stands, the place where South Clear creek flows from +the mountains. + +At this time there were at least five hundred wagons to be seen at +one sight, camped on this creek. We camped near the crossing of +Clear creek, and there was almost a constant stream of people +coming in. + +Late that evening four men came into camp with four yoke of oxen, +a wagon, and an outfit for mining and with a good suppy of grub-- +enough to last them a whole season. They camped that night a few +yards from us. On finding that we had just returned from the mines +they came over to learn what news we had. We told them what we had +seen and what Mr. Russell told us. + +After they had heard our story, one of them said. "Well, boys, I'm +a goin' back to Missouri. What are the balance of you goin' to +do?" + +They talked the matter over for some time and finally all +concluded that old Missouri was a pretty good country and they +would all start back in the morning. + +One of the crowd said: "What will we do with our provisions? We +can't haul it back for our cattle are so tender footed now that +they can hardly travel." Another said: "What we do not want +ourselves we will give to those hand-cart men over there." But +another one in the crowd who perhaps was more like the dog in the +manger that could not eat the hay himself nor would not let the +cows eat it, spoke up and said: "No, we will not do any such +thing! What we do not want to take along to eat on our way back we +will throw in the creek." + +The next morning after they had eaten breakfast two of them got up +into the wagon and selected what provisions they wanted to take +along with them, after which they threw the remainder out on the +ground and the other two carried it and threw it into the creek. +It consisted of flour, dried fruit, bacon, sugar, and I noticed +one ten gallon keg of molasses. + +I was told that this was an everyday occurrence. As we had seen +the elephant and had about all the mining we wanted, for awhile, +at least, we saddled up our horses and started for Taos, by the +way of Bent's Fort. + +Three days' ride took us to Bent's Fort, and we had a thousand and +one questions to answer, for this was the first news they had got +from the mines around Pike's Peak. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +A FIGHT WITH THE SIOUX.--HASA, THE MEXICAN BOY, KILLED.--MIXED UP +WITH EMIGRANTS SOME MORE.--FOUR NEW GRAVES.--SUCCESSFUL TRADING +WITH THE KIOWAS. + + +While at Fort Bent we bargained again to go and trade with the +Kiowas, on the same terms that we were employed upon the preceding +winter, and we could commence at any time we pleased. + +We then started for Taos, and when we got there found Uncle Kit +suffering very much with his last arrow wound. The doctor had told +him that it had never healed inside and that it might be the death +of him. + +We remained at Taos until time to go to the fort, doing nothing in +particular, but hunting a little and occasionally attending a +fandango. During this time, however, unbeknown to us and the +people at the fort, the Comanches and Sioux had been fighting +among themselves, having been so bold as to come on to the +Arkansas river and murder a number of white people. Had we known +this we should not have made the attempt to go over that country. +Or had Bent and Roubidoux known it they would not have asked us to +go. But, somehow, it seemed always my luck not to see trouble +until I was right in it. + +On our arrival at the fort they were anxious to get us fitted out +and started as soon as possible. Mr. Roubidoux said: "Last winter +you made four trips for us; now every extra trip you make this +winter we will give you fifty dollars extra, apiece," which we +thought a great layout. + +We started out with thirty-two pack animals and the same Mexican +boy as assistant that we had the previous winter. + +While passing through the Comanche country we met a young man of +that tribe with whom I was on good terms, having done him a favor +during the war between his tribe and the Utes, for which he felt +very grateful to me. After learning where we were going, he said: +"Look out for the Sioux, for they have killed lots of white people +this fall near Pawnee Rock." But he did not tell us that his tribe +and the Sioux were at war. + +When we had passed nearly through the Comanche country we thought +they were all west of us, for we saw where a large band of Indians +had crossed the road going South. This we did not exactly +understand, for we well knew that neither the Comanches nor Kiowas +had hunt-parties out this time of year, as the buffalo were moving +South, and the Indians could kill all they wanted near the +villages. + +It was about noon when we crossed the Indian trail and that was +the general topic of conversation the balance of the day. If they +had been on foot we could easily have told what tribe they +belonged to by their moccasin tracks, but they all being on +horseback left us to guess. + +We made an early camp so that if it became necessary we could move +that evening, but we built no fire. + +As soon as we had decided on our camping place and while Jim and +Hasa, the Mexican boy, were unpacking and arranging the camp, I +rode about two miles from camp to high ground to look for Indians. +When I was on the highest point I could find, I saw a little band +of Indians coming from the South, and making their way for the +river below us. They were about ten miles away and I could not +tell by looking through my glasses just the exact number, but I +could see them plain enough to tell they were not Comanches. + +On my return to camp I told Jim Bridger what I had seen and he at +once declared that they were Sioux, and said we were sure to have +trouble with them before long. + +We decided to remain there that night, and I agreed that I would +stand guard while Jim and Hasa slept. I stood guard until the +morning star rose, and I turned in, telling Jim to get an early +breakfast and call me, which he did. The boy brought in our +horses, saddled them and tied them near camp. The pack animals +were also feeding near camp. + +Just as we had finished our breakfast and it was getting good +daylight, I cast my eyes in the direction of our horses and saw +that a number of them had raised their heads and were looking off +down the river as though they had seen something. I sprang to my +feet and saw nine Indians coming up the river in the direction of +our camp, but they were apparently sneaking along slowly. I could +see at once by their movements that they did not think they were +discovered yet. I said to Jim: "The Sioux are on us," and he +sprang to his feet, saying, "Let us mount our horses and meet them +before they get among our pack horses," which we did, at the same +time telling Hasa to keep the horses together. + +We started to meet them on the dead run, and I wish to say here +now, that Jim Bridger, though a very brave man, was very +exciteable when in an Indian fight, and as we started I said to +him: "Now Jim, for God's sake keep cool this time and make every +shot count." + +When within about a hundred yards of the Indians, and our horses +doing their best, I raised my rifle and fired, killing the leader +dead. I then drew my pistol and raised the yell. About that time, +from some cause, Jim's horse shied off to the right, so when we +met the Indians he and I were about thirty or forty yards apart. +Jim claimed that his horse scared at something in the sage brush. + +Two of the Indians that seemed to be the best mounted made a break +for our horses, which I discovered after I had fired two shots +from my pistol. I wheeled my horse and made a rush for them, +leaving Jim to take care of the other three that we had not yet +killed. But the redskins had got too far the start of me, and +being on good animals they beat to the pack horses, and before I +got in gunshot of them they had killed both the boy and his horse. +Had the poor boy kept his presence of mind he might have saved +himself, but I think he got excited and did not try to get away. + +I got one of them, but the other having the fastest horse, outran +me and made his escape. I think he had the fastest horse I ever +saw under an Indian in my life. Jim Bridger killed one of the +remaining three, and the others got away. Three out of nine +escaped, and had it not been for Jim's horse getting scared I +don't think they would have killed our Mexican boy. + +We dug a grave and buried the poor fellow as best we could under +the circumstances, scalped the Indians, packed up and pulled out, +leaving the poor unfortunate lad to rest on the lonely banks of +the Arkansas river. The Indians we left a prey to the many wild +animals that roamed the hills and valleys. + +We traveled on with heavy hearts, expecting at any time to be +attacked again by another band of these "noble red men," fearing +that we might not be so successful the next time. + +In the afternoon we came to where the Indians had had another +fight with what we supposed, and which afterwards proved to have +been emigrants, returning from Pike's Peak. Here we saw four fresh +graves, and from the general appearance of things we concluded +that the fight had been in the morning, which also proved to be +the case. + +We were now satisfied that the big trail we had seen the day +before was made by Sioux, and that they had split up into small +bands to catch small trains of emigrants. + +Being satisfied that these emigrants were not far ahead of us, we +made up our minds to push on and try to overhaul them, as much for +our own protection as anything else. + +Jim Bridger told me to take the lead and ride as fast as I wished, +and he would make the pack animals keep up; also telling me when +on high ground to take my glasses and look for Indians. + +After traveling about two hours, putting in our best licks, we +came in sight of the train. We then pushed on with new courage and +overtook the emigrants just as they were going into camp for the +night. I rode up and asked if they had any objections to our +camping with them. "Certainly not," replied one of their crowd, +"and if you can fight Indians we will be pleased to have you camp +and travel with us also." + +We dismounted, unpacked and turned our pack animals loose with the +emigrants' stock, but picketed our saddle animals near camp. Those +people told us of their fight that morning with the Indians. Just +as they were hitched up and were in the act of pulling out, the +Indians attacked them, about forty strong. They only had twenty- +four men and the Indians killed four of their number, and theirs +were the graves we had seen that morning. + +They didn't have an Indian scalp, nor did they know whether or not +they had killed an Indian. + +Jim then told them about our fight with the nine Sioux and of +losing our Mexican boy. "But," said he, "to show that we got +revenge look as this collection of hair," and he produced the six +Indian scalps we had taken. + +Jim added that if his horse had not got scared upon making the +charge, we would have got them all before they could have reached +the boy. + +They offered to furnish two men to look after our pack-train if we +would scout for their train and travel with them as far as we were +to go their route, which was about one hundred and fifty miles. + +There were eight wagons in the train, composed of two and four +horse teams. + +When we were ready to start Jim told me to go ahead, saying: "You +have a pair of glasses and your eyes are better than mine, and I +will bring up the rear, so there will be no danger of a surprise +party." + +This being agreed to, I started ahead of the train and rode about +five miles in advance all the time, keeping my eyes peeled for +Indians. In the forenoon I saw a small band of the savages, but +they were a long way off and were traveling in the same direction +we were. I was sure they could not see us, for I could only see +them faintly through my glasses. + +That evening we made an early camp at a place we named Horse-shoe +Bend, and I am told that the place is mentioned yet by that name. +It is a big bend in the Arkansas river almost encircling two or +three hundred acres, and where we camped it was not more than a +hundred yards across from one turn of the river to the other. + +That night we drove all our horses into the bend and did not have +to guard them or keep out a camp guard. I remained out in the +hills, about three miles from camp, until dark, selecting a high +point and with my glasses watching all over the country for +Indians. The boys were all well pleased when I returned and told +them there were no red-skins anywhere near, and that they all +could lie down and sleep that night. They turned in early. + +The next morning we broke camp early, and about eleven o'clock +came on to four emigrant wagons returning from Pike's Peak. The +Indians had stolen the horses. + +There were sixteen men in the party and they had been there three +days and had not been two miles away from camp. They made some +kind of arrangement with the train we were with to haul their +things to St. Joe, Missouri, and left their four wagons standing +by the roadside. + +We had no more trouble while with this train, and everything moved +along nicely. + +When we were near Pawnee Rock, where we were to leave the train, +and some twenty miles from the Kiowa village, I met about thirty +Kiowa Indians going out to run the buffalo near there. Of course +they all knew me, and after shaking hands we stopped to await the +arrival of the train. When it came in sight and the men saw the +Indians all around me they thought I had been taken prisoner. They +at once corralled their wagons for a fight, and all the talking +Jim Bridger could do would not make them believe otherwise, until +he rode out to where we were. When he told me this I thought to +have a little sport with the boys before leaving the train, and I +proposed to Jim that we start to the wagons with the Indians +riding on either side of us, so as to make it appear they had +taken both of us prisoner. But Jim thought it would not do, as +they were so excited they would shoot at our Indians before we +were near the wagons. So we rode to the train and told the +emigrants that these Indians would not molest them, and that they +were my friends. + +When I told the Indians the cause of their corralling their wagons, +they all had a hearty laugh and called the men squaws. The Kiowas +said that their people would be glad to see us at their village, +and that they had plenty of robes to trade for beads, rings and +blankets. So here we bade the emigrants good-bye, they keeping the +Sante Fe trail east, while we turned due south, and in company +with the thirty Kiowas, rode that evening to their own village. +Chief Blackbird met us at the outer edge of the village and +invited us to his wick-i-up. We told him that we had come to trade +with his people, and that in four days we would be ready for +business. + +Jim Bridger and I had talked the matter over concerning this tribe +and the Sioux, for we well knew that if they and the Sioux were on +friendly terms we would get home safe, if not, we would have a +hard time of it. + +I proposed to Jim that we make Blackbird a present of something, +and while he was in the best of humor I would ask him the +question. Jim thought it a capital idea, and before supper I went +to our cargo and got three rings and three strings of beads. After +supper I gave one string of beads and one ring to Blackbird, one +to his wife and one to his eldest daughter, who was about grown. +We then sat down and had a social smoke and a friendly chat. By +this time Blackbird was beginning to think I was a pretty good +fellow, so I asked him if the Sioux were good Indians. He said: +"Yes, the Sioux are my friends." + +That was all I wanted to know, and I did not ask him any more +questions, nor did I tell him of our trouble with the nine Sioux. +I told him we wanted to hire four young men from his tribe to go +to the fort with us. He said: "All right, I'll see tomorrow." + +Our idea in wanting the young Kiowas along, after finding they +were on good terms with the Sioux, was that we knew when we were +in company with the Kiowas the Sioux would not give us any +trouble. + +The day following, in the afternoon, Blackbird came to us and told +us that there were four young men who wanted to go with us and +asked how long we would be gone. We told him we might be gone one +moon, perhaps not so long. He wanted to know what Indian country +we would pass through. I told him none but the Comanches, for they +were terribly afraid of Navajoes. We assured him that we would not +pass through their country. + +On the day appointed for the sale of our goods, the robes came in +by the hundreds. I never saw anything equal it. + +We conducted our sale something like an auction. I would hold up a +string of beads and show them to the crowd; an Indian would step +forward and offer a robe for two strings of beads. Another would +offer a robe for one string. This was our idea for appointing a +certain day for trading with them, for the more Indians present +the better prices we were able to get for our goods. + +We went there this time with about the amount of goods we had +always taken before to trade for a train load of robes, and we +sold our entire stock the first day. We could have traded ten +times that amount. Moreover, we got about one-half more than we +could pack at one trip. + +We knew before we started in to sell that there was a greater +number of robes in the village than at any time we had visited it +before, as we had been pretty well over the village, and I had +never seen the like of robes and dry buffalo meat before, nor have +I since. Every wick-i-up was hanging full. The Indians said it had +been the best season for buffalo they had seen for years. + +I never saw people more busy than the squaws were. All were +dressing buffalo hides, and every family had from three to one +dozen robes, and this was the best day's sale we ever had, as it +seemed that the Indians were crazy for the rings and beads. + +I just mention these facts to show the reader how the people took +advantage of those Indians, for at that time they did not know the +value of money and had no use for it except as ornaments. They +would pay a big price for a half dollar, but every one they got +hold of they would hammer out flat, punch two holes through it and +put it on a string; then the chief or some of his family would +wear them on their backs or fasten them to their hair and let them +hang down their backs. I have seen strings of flattened out half +dollars two feet long worn by the chief or some member of his +family. + +When we went to pack up we could only get two-thirds of our robes +on the animals so we left the remainder in charge of Blackbird, +and he agreed to look after them until we returned. I told him if +he would take good care of them I would bring him a big butcher +knife when I came back. + +So we started for Bent's Fort accompanied by four young Kiowas. We +had loaded our horses unusually heavy this trip, each animal +packing thirty robes. + +Two of the Indians rode in front of the pack-train with me and the +other two behind with Jim. Our idea in traveling that way was that +in case we should meet a band of Sioux, these young Indians would +tell them we were their friends, and no matter how bitter they +felt toward us they would pass on. + +We traveled three days before we saw any Sioux. It was our custom +to always stop and unpack and let our horses rest and feed about +an hour. + +That day we had just unpacked and turned our horses loose to feed +and were ready to eat a cold lunch, when we looked up the ridge +and saw twenty Sioux Indians coming down the ridge in the +direction of our camp. I told one of the Indians that we had +better go and meet them. He said he would go and for me to stay in +camp. I told him to tell them to come down to camp and get +something to eat. So he started off in a trot to meet them, and +when he came up to them he stood and talked with them for some +time, after which they turned and rode off in another direction. +When the Indian boy returned I asked him why they did not come +down to camp and have some dinner. He said they had plenty to eat +and were in a hurry. + +Jim Bridger said to me in our own language: "If we had not had +those young Kiowas with us by this time we would have been in a +hurry, too." These were the last Sioux we saw on the whole trip. + +When we returned to the fort and reported our troubles to Col. +Bent and Mr. Roubidoux, they felt very bad over the loss of the +Mexican boy, Hasa, but they complimented us on the way we had +managed. They asked me what I had agreed to pay the Indians. I +told them I had not made any bargain whatever, and that we had not +agreed to pay them anything, nor had they asked it. But we thought +that under the circumstances we did not consider it safe to +attempt to make another trip that fall or winter without an escort +of that kind, and we couldn't expect those Indians to make the +trips free of charge. Col. Bent told me to make my own bargain +with them, and he would pay the bill whatever it might be. + +This was the first time these young Indians had ever been in +civilization, so I took them around the place and took particular +pains to show them everything. When we had been all around and I +had showed them everything out doors, I took them into the kitchen +of the hotel. When they saw the cook getting supper on the stove +they said it was no good, for they could not see the fire and they +did not understand how cooking could be done without it. + +After they had seen all there was to be seen I took them in where +the two proprietors were, and after telling them that they would +hire them all winter, providing they did not ask too much, I asked +them what they were going to charge us for the trip they had +already made. + +The most intelligent one spoke up and said: "Give me one string of +beads and one butcher knife for the trip already made, and give me +one butcher knife for the next trip." I then asked the others if +they were satisfied with that, and they said they were; so I paid +them off by giving them a butcher knife that cost about fifty +cents in St. Louis and one string of beads that would perhaps cost +ten cents. They thought they had been well paid for their trouble, +and I could see that they had not expected so much. This was no +doubt their first experience in hiring out. + +The next morning Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux said to Jim and I: +"Now boys, we will make you a present," telling us that their +horses were in the corrall, and for us to go and pick out a saddle +horse apiece. They told us that all the horses in the corrall were +theirs, and we might take our choice, and that we could turn our +other horses into the herd for as long as we liked. + +I selected a black horse and saddled him, and he seemed to be +quiet and gentle. + +There were some trappers at the fort who were going to South Park +to trap the following winter. When I led the horse out to get on +him they asked if it was mine. "Yes," I said. They asked what +price I had set on him, and I said one hundred dollars. They said +they would give me that for him if I would wait for my money until +spring when they returned from South Park. I asked them if they +were going to trap for Col. Bent and Mr. Roubidoux, and they said +they were. We then walked into the store and I asked Col. Bent and +Mr. Roubidoux if they would go these men's security for one +hundred dollars. They said they would, and I told the trappers the +horse was theirs. Mr. Roubidoux asked me if it was the horse he +had given me. I told him it was and he said: "You did well, for I +bought that horse of an emigrant last summer and have never been +able to get any money out of him. I think you will have to take a +lot of my horses to sell on commission, for I see right now you +can beat me selling horses all hollow." + +We remained at the Fort three days this time, after which we +rigged up and started for the Kiowa nation again with more goods +to trade for buffalo robes. We made the trip in eleven days, being +the quickest we had yet made over the road. + +We found the chief in an excellent humor, and he was as well +pleased over his new butcher knife as a boy would be over his +first pair of red topped boots. + +We found the Indians anxious to trade robes for our trinkets and +we had no trouble in getting a load and more than we could pack +again. We made five trips that fall and winter with the very best +success, keeping those same four Indians with us all winter. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +A TRIP TO FORT KEARNEY--THE GENERAL ENDORSES US AND WE PILOT AN +EMIGRANT TRAIN TO CALIFORNIA.--WOMAN WHO THOUGHT I WAS "NO +GENTLEMAN."--A CAMP DANCE. + + +Jim Bridger proposed that he and I make a trip to Fort Kearney +together, and remain there until the emigrants began to come +along, thinking that perhaps the Sioux would be so bad on the +plains again that summer that we might get a layout scouting for +trains going to California. Both of us were well acquainted with a +greater part of the country to be traveled over, and there were +few other men as well posted as to where the Indians were likely +to make attacks, which was one of the most essential requirements +in scouting with a train. + +About the first of April we started, by the way of Denver City, +for Fort Kearney, and as it had been nearly a year since we had +seen the first named place we found quite a change there. Instead +of a tented town, of shreds and patches, we saw a thriving village +that had some quite comfortable wooden houses and an air of +distinct civilization. To-day Denver is probably the best built +city of its size in the world, but there was a time after this +present visit of mine and Bridger's when the place became almost +deserted. That was when the Union Pacific railroad was being +constructed to Cheyenne, leaving Denver one hundred and eight +miles due south. Then, all the people in Denver who could raise +any sort of a team, took their household goods and gods, and in +some cases the houses, and struck out for Cheyenne. Many who were +too poor to get away became enormously rich, afterward, from that +very fact, for they became possessed of the ground, and when the +Kansas Pacific railroad was projected, and afterward constructed, +Denver took on such a boom that real estate nearly went out of +sight in value. The poor ones became wealthy, and nearly all of +the Cheyenne stampeders returned. Following this, some years +afterward, the discovery of silver carbonates in California Gulch, +where Leadville now stands, gave Denver another boom that made the +place the Queen city of the Plains, for good and all. + +We reached Fort Kearney before the emigrants had got that far out, +and found Gen. Kearney in command. He was glad to see us, and told +us that if we needed any references to send the parties to him and +he would give us a send-off that would be likely to fix us all +right, and we knew that it would. + +"I predict more trouble," said he, "on the plains this summer than +there ever has been in any season previous to this, from the fact +that the northern Sioux are, even at this early date, breaking up +into little bands, and no doubt for the express purpose of +capturing small bands of emigrants crossing the plains the coming +summer." + +The first train that came along was from Illinois and Missouri. It +was on the way to California and was composed of sixty-four +wagons. The company was made up of men, women and children, nearly +all of the men having families. They camped about a mile from the +fort, and at near sundown Gen. Kearney proposed that we go over +and see the ladies. So we rode over--the General, Jim Bridger and +I. + +Arriving at the camp we were astonished at seeing that the +emigrants had no system whatever in forming their camp or +corralling their wagons and stock, all being scattered here and +there, hodge-podge. + +I remarked to Gen. Kearney that they had certainly not met with +any trouble from Indians so far, else they would have been more +careful. The General replied that they would learn before they got +much further. + +When we arrived at their camp quite a crowd gathered around us, +and among the balance was one man apparently forty years old, who +walked up to Gen. Kearney and said: "How are you, John?" that +being the General's first name. + +Gen. Kearney looked at him for a moment, then shook hands with him +and said: "You seem to know me, but you have the best of me. If I +ever saw you before I don't remember when or where." + +The gentleman then said: "When we used to go to school together +you were the only boy in my class that I could not throw down, but +I believe that I could to-day." + +They had been schoolmates in Ohio and this was the first time they +had met since they quit school. "Of course," said Gen. Kearney, +"you had the advantage of me, for you knew I was out here, while I +never dreamed of you being in this country." + +We soon learned that the emigrants had heard about the hostility +of the Sioux Indians, and were dreading them very much. + +After the General and his old schoolmate talked over by-gone days +for awhile they commenced asking him all sorts of questions +relative to the Indians on ahead. + +The General gave his views regarding the outlook for the coming +summer, and after having "said his say" about the noble red men, a +number of the emigrants thought they would turn back the next +morning. + +Gen. Kearney said to them: "Here are two as good mountaineers as +may be found west of the Missouri river and I believe that you +could hire them to go the entire trip with you at a reasonable +figure, and I feel sure they will be able to render you valuable +service, while passing through the Indian country, they being well +posted as to where the Indians would be most likely to make an +attack. They are also well informed as to water, wood and grass, +and the different drives to be made between camping places, &c." + +When we were just ready to mount our horses to return to the Fort +for supper, a number of the men came to Jim and me and asked how +much per month or per day we would take to go with them as scouts +through the Indian country. We told them to get their supper over +and call their men together, and we would go back to the Fort and +get our supper, after which we would come down to their camp again +and talk matters over and see if we could make a bargain. By this +time a number of ladies had gathered around, and among them was an +old lady who said: "You two gentlemen with buckskin coats on can +come and take supper with us in our tent." + +Gen. Kearney said: "You had better accept the lady's hospitality, +for you have a great deal to talk about." + +We thought this a capital idea and took supper with the emigrants, +and the General returned to his quarters But before going he gave +all, both ladies and gentlemen, a cordial invitation to come to +the Fort the next day and pay him a friendly visit. + +After all were through eating supper, Jim Bridger asked how many +men they had in their train, but no one was able to tell. When he +asked who their captain was a man replied that they did not know +they had to have a captain. Jim with an oath said: "What in the +name of God do you think those soldiers over there would do +without a captain, or at least an officer of some kind?" + +Then he told them they had better form in line and see how many +men they had, and elect five men to transact business with us. +They formed in line and counted and there were one hundred and +forty men in the train, and not one of them had ever been on the +plains before, and, of course, not one of them had ever seen a +hostile Indian. + +They then proceeded to elect the five men to transact the business +with us, after which Jim turned to me and said: "Now make your +proposition." I suggested that as he was the oldest, he should go +ahead and make the bargain, whereupon he said: "All right. +Gentlemen, I will make you an offer; if you see fit to accept it +all right, and if not there is no harm done. We will scout for you +for six dollars per day from here to the foot of the Sierra Nevada +Mountains, and you board us and herd our horses with yours. We +must have charge of the entire train, and we want at least two or +three days in which to organize and drill before leaving this +camp, and after the lapse of five days if this community is not +satisfied with our work, we will quit, and not charge you a cent +for what we shall have done at that time, and if our work is +satisfactory we will expect our money every Saturday night, for it +is the money we are after and not the glory. Now, gentlemen, take +the matter under consideration and give us an answer to-morrow +morning after breakfast." + +On the following morning one of the men from the train came to the +Fort very early to inform us that they had decided to accept our +proposition. + +We told him to go back to camp and have all the teams hitched up +and we would be down after breakfast and put in a few hours +drilling the teamsters. + +We numbered the wagons by putting the figures on the end-gates of +the wagons, telling each teamster to remember his number, and when +forming a corrall, no matter what the occasion might be, for the +even numbers to turn to the right and the odd numbers to the left, +forming a circle with the teams inside of the corrall or circle of +wagons. + +For the benefit of the reader who has not had the fortune--or +misfortune, whichever he deems it--to have traveled in an Indian +country where the corrals are necessary in order to protect the +traveler from the Indians, I will give a more detailed description +of how they are formed: + +By having each wagon numbered every man knew his place in the +train, and when it was necessary to corral, one-half of the teams +would turn to the right and the other half to the left. Each would +swing out a little distance from the road and the two front teams- +-numbers one and two--would drive up facing each other. All the +rest of the wagons would drive up forming a circle, with the teams +on the inside of the corrall, and the back or hind ends of the +wagons pointing outwards. The two hindmost teams would now swing +together as in the front, closing the rear gap in the circle. This +also served the purpose of a pen in which to run the stock in the +event of an attack, thus preventing the possibility of a stampede. + +Our object in drilling the teamsters was to teach them how to form +a corrall quickly in case of an attack while under way. + +After drilling a while we told the committee to select eight men +from their train to assist in scouting, we preferring young men +with horses of their own or such as could get horses, and those +men to be exempt from guard duty except in cases of emergency. +They proceeded at once to select the eight men for assistant +scouts, after which we told them to appoint a sergeant, or +whatever they chose to call him, to command, respectively, every +platoon of twenty men, the hundred and forty being organized in +such squads. + +This was the hardest task, apparently, for the committee, as no +one wanted to serve in that capacity, each one having some excuse +or other, but they finally completed the appointments and then Jim +said to me: + +"Now, Will, you take entire charge of the scouts, and I will take +charge of the balance of the men," telling me that in the day time +on the move he would assist me in scouting all he could, but after +the train was corralled to handle the scouts to suit myself. + +I told the newly appointed scouts to saddle their horses and we +would have a little exercise. I took a piece of pine board box +cover, sharpened it and stuck it into a prairie dog hole. This +board was about twelve inches wide and two or two and a half feet +long. I drew a mark about thirty feet from the board, telling them +to fire when they reached this mark. I had them all mount and +start about a hundred yards from the board, and when at this mark +to fire at the board while at full speed, each taking his turn. + +Out of eight shots only one hit the board, and that was made by +the last one that fired. + +I told them that such shooting would never do at all if they +expected to fight Indians, so I mounted my horse and asked them +which hand I should use my pistol in. All cried out: "Use your +left hand!" I said: "All right, I will shoot across my bridle +reins." I had one of the boys get on his horse and whip mine down +to a dead run, and with my pistol in my left hand I put two bullet +holes through the board while passing it. + +This was a surprise to all of them, as they had never seen +shooting done that way before, but they were all eager to learn. + +After practicing this feat awhile I started in to teach them to +mount quick. This was the hardest thing for them to learn, and all +of their horses were trained to stand perfectly still until they +straightened up in the saddle. + +And here I will say that in scouting it is very essential to have +a horse that is quick to start. + +The way we used to train our horses to start was by having some +one stand behind them with a whip and strike them just as we +jumped into the saddle. This taught both horse and rider to be +very agile, as we would have to get on our horses almost on the +dead run when in close quarters with the Indians. + +That evening near sunset another train drove up from Missouri. +There were twenty wagons and they were desirous of joining our +train. The committee came to us to see what they thought of +letting them in. We told the committee that we were willing to +take them in by their paying one dollar a day. This being +agreeable to the committee and newcomers agreeing to pay the per +diem we took them in. + +The morning of the third day, after organizing we pulled out, Jim +Bridger staying with the train all day. I dropped four of my men +behind the train, telling them to keep about half a mile from it +and at the first sight of Indians to get to the train as quick as +possible and report to Jim Bridger, who would signal me at once by +firing two shots in quick succession, otherwise there was to be no +shooting in the train during the time we were in a hostile +country. + +All went smoothly until the fifth day. We were then on the north +side of the South Platte and my new assistant scouts were +beginning by this time--or at least some of them were--to be +anxious for a little sport with the Indians. + +I had told them the day before that they might expect to see +Indians at any time now, as we were then in the Sioux country. + +The morning of the fifth day I started two scouts ahead of the +train, telling them to keep about two miles ahead of the wagons, +two to drop behind the train and two south, and to keep on the +highest ground they could find. Taking the other two with me I +struck out north of the road, this being where I most expected to +find Indians. After riding five or six miles we came up on to a +high point where I took out my glasses and made a survey of the +surrounding country. I saw a large band of Indians traveling +almost parallel with the wagon road and moving in the same +direction the train was going. I should judge them to have been +about ten miles away. Anyway, they were so far that I could not +tell their number, but I thought there were in the neighborhood of +one hundred and fifty in the band. + +I showed them to my associates by allowing them to look through my +glasses. I then showed them a route to take and designated a +certain point for them to go to and remain, until I should come to +them, and I started alone after the Indians to try to get closer +to them and also get their general course of travel so as to come +to some conclusion as to what their intentions were. I succeeded +in getting within about four miles of them and at getting a good +view of them as they were passing over a little ridge. I saw that +they had no squaws with them, and I knew then they were on the +war-path. + +After taking a good look at the redskins I got back to my two +scouts as quickly as possible. Shortly after joining them I saw +nine Indians coming toward the road, about three or four miles +away from us, we being between them and the road, making them +about eight miles from the road. + +I started one of my men to the train on a double quick to inform +Jim Bridger of what we had seen and also to bring at least four or +five good men and horses back with him, telling him where to meet +us on his return. + +I was thoroughly convinced that these nine Indians we had seen +were scouts for the large band ahead of us, and my object was to +capture them and not let one of them get back to the big band of +warriors that we had seen. + +The other scout and I secreted our horses and watched the nine +Indians on the sly, until the other man returned bringing three +men with him from the train. By this time the Indians were within +two miles of the train, and we had swung around so as to come in +behind them and were only about a half mile from them. We followed +them leisurely until they were passing over a little ridge near +the train, when we put spurs to our horses and rode at a lively +gait. I told my men to save their ammunition until they were near +them and take good aim so that every man would get his Indian the +first shot, and to not get excited or scared, for if all would +keep cool we would be able to get all of them without much +trouble. + +It so happened that just as we came on to the ridge that the +Indians had passed over a few minutes before, they came in sight +of the train, which was then not more than half a mile away. They +stopped and were looking at the train. + +Jim Bridger's quick eye had caught sight of them, and not knowing +but it was the big band coming, he had the wagons corralled to +prepare for an attack. + +When we came to the top of the ridge mentioned we were not more +than three hundred yards away from them and I immediately ordered +a charge. + +I was on Pinto, and he knowing what was up, was ready for a chase. +In fact, I could not have held him had I been so disposed. + +The warriors were so engrossed looking at the train, no doubt +thinking what a picnic they would have with them, that they did +not see us until I was almost ready to fire. I was somewhat in +advance of the rest, my horse being the fleeter, and when within +about a hundred yards I raised in my stirrups, brought my rifle to +my shoulder and fired, killing one Indian, and the boys claimed +that I killed a horse from under another one at the same time. +They were sure the same bullet killed both, for both fell at the +crack of my rifle. + +As soon as I had fired I drew my pistol and told them to do +likewise, also telling them to be sure and make every shot count. + +If ever I saw a horse that enjoyed that kind of sport--if I might +call it such--it was old Pinto. + +The Indians made an effort to turn to the north, but I was on the +left of my men and my horse was fleet enough to head them off. I +crowded them so close that they headed straight for the train; in +fact, I think they were so scared that they did not know where +they were going. + +At the first fire with our pistols three of the Indians fell, +leaving four yet mounted and one on foot--the one whose horse I +had shot at the first fire. I saw the Indian on foot making for +some sage brush near by and sang out to a man named Saunders, who +was on a fine grey horse, to run that Indian down, which he did, +killing him the second shot, so he said afterwards. + +About this time I saw Jim coming, with six or eight men following +him closely. Then we all commenced yelling at the top of our +voices, which excited the Indians still more. Whether they saw our +men coming or not I do not know, but two of them ran almost right +up to them and were shot down at a distance of thirty or forty +yards. + +We succeeded in getting the other two, not letting one escape to +tell the tale; thereby accomplishing just what I started to do +when I first got sight of them. + +After the last Indian had fallen, I rode to where Jim was and told +him of the big band of Indians I had seen that day, and suggested +that we had better go to Barrel Springs that night, which was +about four miles further on, as I thought that the best place to +be in camp in case we were attacked by the Indians. In this he +agreed with me. + +By this time my men were all on the battle-field, and most of the +men from the train, also a number of the women who had come out to +see the dead Indians. I asked one of the boys to go with me to +scalp the Indians, after which I would go to the train as I wanted +to change horses, but none of them knew how to scalp an Indian, so +Jim and I had to teach them how. + +One old man, who was looking on, said: "I would not mind shooting +an Indian, but I would not like to scalp one of them." + +After scalping the nine Indians we rode to the train and showed +the scalps to the women. One young lady said to me: + +"I always took you to be a gentleman until now." + +I said: "Miss, I claim to be only a plain plains gentleman, but +that at any and all times." + +She said: "I don't think a gentleman could be so barbarous as you +are." + +"My dear lady," I replied, "the taking of these scalps may be the +means of saving the train," and then I explained why we always +scalped the Indians when we killed them. I told her that the +Indians did not fear death, but hated the idea of being scalped. + +About this time Jim Bridger came up and gave a more through +explanation of the scalping business, and I did not hear anything +more of it at that time. But Jim often teased the young lady +spoken of, who had a lovely head of hair, by remarking what a fine +scalp it would make for the Indians. + +I changed saddle horses and then myself and two assistants rode +out north to watch the movements of the main band of Indians. + +Before starting out Jim gave us the password of the pickets, which +was "Buffalo." + +We rode until near sunset before we got sight of the big band of +Indians again, they having gone into camp about four miles west of +Barrel Springs, where our train was camped, and only about a half +mile from the trail or wagon road. + +I crawled up as near their camp as I dared to go, and watched them +until about nine o'clock that night, at which time a number of +them had turned in, apparently for the night, and a number were +around their horses all the time, giving us no opportunity +whatever, to stampede them, which was my intention, provided they +gave us the least show. I told my assistants there would be no +danger whatever, until daybreak the next morning, and we would +return to camp and sleep until near daylight. + +When we got to the train Jim had not gone to bed yet. I told him +where we had located the main band, and as near as I could the +number of the Indians--about one hundred and fifty--but that I did +not anticipate any trouble during the night. + +Jim said he would sit up until four o'clock the next morning. "At +which time," said he, "I will call you and you can take as many +scouts with you as you like and watch every move made by the +Indians, and if they start this way telegraph me at once and I +will have everything in readiness to receive them, and I think we +will be able to give them quite an interesting entertainment." + +What we meant by the term telegraphing was sending a messenger as +fast as he could ride, as there were no other means of +transmitting messages quickly. + +The next morning at four, sharp, Jim woke us up. He had our horses +there, ready to saddle. + +I sent three scouts north of the trail, three south and took the +other two with me to look after the Indians. + +We arrived at the place where we had been secreted the evening +before, just as the Indians were breaking camp. They started +toward the road, and I watched them till they struck the road and +headed toward the train. + +I then dispatched one of my assistants to the train, which was +nearly four miles distant, telling him to spare no horseflesh, but +make the trip as quick as his horse was able to carry him and +notify Jim of the Indians' movements. The other scout and I stayed +to watch the Indians. They traveled along the road at their +leisure until they got in sight of the train, but Jim had all in +readiness for them. He had raised the tongues of the two lead +wagons--which in forming a corrall always stood face to face-- +about six feet high and had the nine scalps we had taken the day +before, strung on a line and swung under the wagon tongues so as +to be readily seen by the Indians. As soon as the Indians came in +sight of the train he had all the men form in single line on the +outside of the corrall, while all the women and children and all +the stock were on the inside. + +They circled around the entire train, taking in the situation but +keeping out of gunshot. Seeing that the emigrants, much to their +surprise, were ready to receive them, and seeing no chance to +stampede their stock, they rode off on the hillside about half a +mile away and held a council for about half an hour, after which +they all mounted and rode away. They were not disposed to tackle a +greater number than they had, especially when their antagonists +were armed with guns, while they had only bows, and arrows, and +tomahawks. + +Our men were well armed with such hand-guns as were then in +existence. Some had squirrel rifles, others yager's, shotguns and +pistols. In fact, about all makes of firearms were represented in +that emigrant train. + +This was the first big band of hostile Indians that any of the +people had ever seen, and Jim said there was the "wust" hubbub +inside that corrall he had ever heard, notwithstanding he had +cautioned them to be quiet. + +The most nervous of the women, at sight of the Indians, commenced +crying and screaming, while those more brave tried to reconcile +those that were half frenzied from fright, and keep them quiet. +Some were afraid to have their husbands stand outside the corrall +for fear they would be killed by the redskins; but had it not been +for that line of men standing on the outside of the wagons, and +those scalps dangling from the wagon tongues all of which led the +Indians to believe that the pale-faces were anxious to entertain +them for awhile at least, they undoubtedly would have attacked +that train that morning. + +My assistants and I watched them all that day, and the train, +after the Indians had gone, moved on. The Indians went back and +took the trail of the nine scouts that they had sent out the +morning before, tracked them to where their dead bodies lay, and +taking four of the bodies with them, moved on eastward. We +selected a high point and watched them until they had gone about +ten miles, and then we turned and followed up the train, which +camped that night at the head of Rock Creek. When we arrived and +reported that the Indians had left the county they were the +happiest lot of people I ever saw. It seemed that they thought +this was the only band of Indians in the country. + +The next day being Sunday Jim proposed that we lay over and rest, +saying that he was about worn out himself and that he was +satisfied that the scouts were in the same condition. This was +satisfactory to all, so we did not move camp that day. + +Up to this time we had not killed any game, although we had seen +plenty, there being considerable buffalo in this part of the +country yet, but it had been contrary to orders to shoot while +traveling, and I want to say right here that the people of this +train were always obedient to our orders during our travels with +them. + +I told them I would go out and kill a buffalo that day provided I +could find one not too far from camp. A number of men in the train +wanted to go with me for a buffalo hunt. "The more the merrier," I +said, so we and started, six of us together. + +About two miles from camp we saw a band of fifteen that had not +yet seen us. We at once dropped back over the hill and taking a +circuitous route, we rode on the opposite side of them from camp, +and cautiously to within about a hundred and fifty yards, when +they raised their heads, took a good look at us and started off +toward the train. I told Saunders as he was on a fast horse to +take one side and I would take the other and let the other boys +bring up the rear, as by so doing we could drive them near camp +and save packing the meat so far. When we were in the valley just +below camp I told each man to select his buffalo and fire, which +they did, when within a quarter of a mile from camp. We then all +commenced yelling like Indians, and Jim Bridger said that he never +saw a crowd of men get to their guns as quick as the men in the +train did, for they actually thought we were Indians. + +We succeeded in killing four buffalo out of the band, the last one +being within a hundred yards of camp. We dressed them and all +hands volunteered to carry the meat to camp where it was turned +over to the committee to be distributed among the people of the +entire train. + +This was a great treat to them, for they had been living on bacon +for a long time, having no fresh meat whatever. + +It was twenty-five miles from here to the next place where we +could find water and a suitable camping place where we would also +have a good chance to protect ourselves from Indians. So we pulled +out early, I distributing my scouts as usual, only that I went +alone and had a hard ride for nothing. + +After I had gone quite a distance I saw what I supposed to be +Indians; but they were a long way off. The thought struck me that +it was the was the same band we had seen before and that they were +sneaking around intending to steal a march on us and attack the +train while traveling and stampede the stock, which was often done +when no scouts were kept out for their protection. I started to +follow them up and did not find out my mistake until I struck the +trail of my supposed band of Indians which to my surprise proved +to be a buffalo trail and instead of Indians I had been following +a band of buffalo all day. + +That night I laid out and the people in camp were very uneasy +about me, thinking I never would return, as they thought I must +have been killed by Indians. Jim told them not to be alarmed as I +would turn up all right the next day. + +On a trip of this kind I usually took a lunch along with me; but +not expecting to be out long this time I did not take anything to +eat, so I had to starve it out until I got back to the train, +which was the next day at noon. + +I did not see any fresh Indian sign on the entire trip; neither +did the other scouts see any sign of them, and we concluded that +if we did not have any trouble for three days, we would be out of +danger of the Sioux, for by that time we would be out in the +Bitter Creek country and there was no fear of Indians there. + +All went along smoothly and we did not see or hear of any more +Indians until we got to Fort Bridger. Here I met one of Gen. +Connor's men who told me that the Utes were very bad in the +vicinity of Fort Douglas near Salt Lake, that being the place +where Gen. Connor was stationed at that time. He said that they +had not been able to get a fight out of the Indians yet, although +they had followed them around a great deal. + +We decided to take Sublet's Cutoff, leaving Salt Lake City about +one hundred miles south, as Jim said he would rather fight Indians +than Mormons. + +Six days after leaving Fort Bridger I met two of Gen. Connor's +scouts in Cash valley, and they told us the Utes were very bad +farther West, and advised us to take the Goose Creek route to +avoid the Indians. We took their advice. + +Here was a scope of country that neither Jim nor I had ever been +over, it being a new road just made the year previous. + +After traveling four days on this road, late in the evening of the +fourth, I discovered a little band of Indians about six or eight +miles from the road on a stream that I have since heard called +Raft river, which is a tributary of the Snake. + +We watched the band until dark and then rode as near as we thought +safe. I then left my horse with my two assistants and crawled up +near the Indian camp and tried to get a count on them. When I got +near them I found that they were Bannocks and were not warriors, +but apparently a hunting and fishing party, and were an old men +and women. I went away without molesting or even allowing them to +know that I had been there. + +Four days' travel from here brought us into a section of country +where I had done my first scouting, on the waters of the Humboldt. +The first day after striking the Humboldt, three of my men and I +late in the afternoon, ran on to a small band of Utes, eleven in +number. I thought we had discovered them and got away without +being noticed, so I told the boys that by making a circuit of +about one and a half miles we would have the advantage of the +ground and would be on to them before they knew it. + +On arriving at the place where I expected to make the charge I was +disappointed to find that they were mounted and on the move, they +having no doubt gotten sight of us when we first saw them. We gave +chase but they had too far the start of us, and after running +about two miles we ended the pursuit. + +There was no more trouble until we got to where Wadsworth now +stands. Here, one morning about sunrise, as the herders were +bringing in the stock, five Indians rushed in and tried to +stampede the animals, but the herders happened to see them in time +to give the alarm. Jim and I having our horses tied near the camp, +were out after them quicker than I can tell it. We got two of +them, and I think the other three must have thought themselves +extremely lucky that they got away with their scalps. + +The only damage done by them was that they scared the herders out +of a year's growth, and just where those Indians came from I never +have been able to tell, for I made it a rule to circle the camp +every evening and look for Indians and Indian signs. + +This was the only time on the trip that I had an Indian steal a +march on me, and this was the last trouble we had with Indians on +this trip. Ten days travel brought us to the foot of the Sierra +Nevada Mountains at the head of Eagle Valley. + +Jim knowing that they wanted to lay over the next day, it being +Sunday, he selected a lovely camping ground in a pleasant pine +grove and went into camp about the middle of the afternoon. + +As soon as we had got into camp, Jim and I went to the committee +and told them they did not need our services any longer as there +would be no danger whatever from here on of Indians, they being +now out of the hostile country entirely. + +When the women folks learned that we were going to leave they +proposed giving a farewell party that night. Having musicians in +the train, they selected a nice level spot, and all who desired to +participate congregated there and had an enjoyable time. I think +they enjoyed that dance out in that lovely forest as much as +though they had been dancing in the finest hall in San Francisco; +and I think even the old people who were religious were so +overjoyed to know that they were once more safe from the much +dreaded and barbarous red men of the plains, that they almost felt +like dancing themselves. + +Although I had been with this train just two and one half months I +had been in company with the ladies but very little, for I had +never been in in daylight only just long enough to eat my meals +and change horses, consequently I was but slightly acquainted with +any of them. This was the first dance on the trip, and it was +surprising to me to see how sociable the ladies were with me, and +had it not been that I was so bashful, I might have had a pleasant +time. + +When the dance was over, about ten o'clock that night, one of the +committee got up and made us quite a speech in behalf of the +people in the train, telling us how much they appreciated the +interest we had taken in guarding their train through safely, and +after he was through talking he gave each of us a letter of +recommendation, which had been drawn up that evening while the +dance was going on. I think those letters were signed by every man +in the train, and a great many of the ladies had signed them too. +The speaker concluded his remarks by asking us to remain with the +train as long as we desired, and our provisions should not cost us +a cent, nor for having our horses herded with theirs. It being too +late in the fall to return to Fort Kearney, we accepted their kind +and liberal offer and concluded to travel with them a few days. + +We remained with them until near Sacramento, and here I met my old +friend Johnnie West. He was beginning to look very old, +considering his age. He told me he had quit drinking and was going +to lead a different life from this on; that he had taken up a +ranch five miles from Sacramento on the river and invited us home +with him. + +We accepted the invitation, and bidding the people that we had +been traveling with nearly three months, good-bye, we left them +and went with Johnnie to his ranch. + +When we were ready to leave, I think every person in the train +shook hands with us. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +BRIDGER AND WEST GIVE CHRISTMAS A HIGH OLD WELCOME IN SACRAMENTO. +--CALIFORNIA GULCH.--MEETING WITH BUFFALO BILL.--THIRTY-THREE +SCALPS WITH ONE KNIFE. + + +On our arrival at Johnnie West's ranch we found that he had quite +a comfortable house, considering that it had been built by an old +trapper. He had five acres under cultivation, and had raised a +promiscuous lot of very desirable produce, especially in the way +of vegetable truck. + +We remained with West two months, putting in our time hunting, +fishing and loafing. It being near Christmas now, the question +arose as to what we would do to celebrate that festive season. Jim +was for going to San Francisco and Johnnie wanted to go to +Sacramento. I told them it was immaterial to me where I went. But +all this time I was afraid that if John West got to town in +company with Jim Bridger that West would break his oft-repeated +resolutions and there would be a big run on the reddest kind of +paint. I told Jim my fears and proposed that we remain at home and +take our Christmas there. But Jim couldn't see it in that light, +and said one little spree wouldn't hurt Johnnie, so the day before +Christmas we pulled out for Sacramento. That same evening Jim and +Johnnie both got loads that they ought to have gone after about +nine times, if they just had to pack them, and the result was that +it was my busy day keeping them out of the calaboose. I promised +the police I would put them to bed and make them stay there until +morning. + +Next morning, the first thing after we had dressed, Jim said: +"Well boys, let's go and have a Christmas drink." I said: "Boys, I +will take one drink with you and then quit. Now if you fellows +want to make brutes of yourselves and get into the lock-up, just +go ahead, but I am going to go home as soon as I get my +breakfast." So we went down the street and into the first saloon +we came to and called for egg-nogg. I remained with them until +they were drinking their fifth drink. I could not do anything with +them, so I told them I was going to breakfast, and they could do +as they pleased. This was the first time in my life that I had +ever been placed in a position where I was actually ashamed of my +associates. I was so disgusted when I left them that morning to go +to my breakfast that I thought I would go home and leave them. But +after eating my breakfast, being, perhaps, in a better humor, I +started out to hunt for them. I do not wish to try for a moment to +lead the reader to believe that I do not like the taste of liquor, +for I am confident at that time I really liked it better than +either of my associates, but I always despise the effect, and that +seemed to be what they, like thousands of other, drink it for. It +always seemed to me that when a man is drunk he is more disposed +to show the brute that is in him than to act a gentleman. + +After looking around some little time I found Jim Bridger in a +saloon so drunk that he could scarcely walk. I asked him where +Johnny West was, and the bar-keeper told me that the police had +taken him to the station-house. I asked what for, and he said for +trying to shoot some one. + +I watched for an opportunity and took both of Jim's pistols and +knife away from him and gave them to the clerk at the hotel. +Afterwards I walked to the station-house to see what the charge +was against Johnny West. The man told me the charge was drunk and +disorderly and shooting a pistol inside of a house. I asked him if +he would let Johnny out if I would pay the fine. He said: "Yes. As +soon as he is sober to-morrow morning, you can come around. The +charges will be twenty dollars." + +If the reader ever had any experience with a drunken man, which to +me is the most disgusting thing on earth, he can realize something +of the time I had with those two men, for it took me all the next +day to get Johnny West home and get him reconciled. + +He was determined to return to Sacramento, and it took me two more +days hard work and coaxing to get Jim Bridger home. I have it by +good authority that this was the last drunken spree that Johnnie +West ever took. He remained on his ranch some six years longer and +having accumulated considerable wealth, sold out for a good price +and returned home to his relations in Texas, and there died a +short time afterwards; + +Jim Bridger and myself stayed at Johnny's until about the middle +of January. This now being 1861, we started for New Mexico, via +Los Angeles, with the intention of laying over in Los Angeles +until we could cross the Rocky Mountains. There was a good wagon +road from Sacramento to San Jose, and from San Jose to Los +Angeles. + +At this time the Indians were all peaceable through California, +the only trouble with them was their begging. At that I think, +beyond any doubt, that they could beat any class of people it has +ever been my misfortune to meet. + +We arrived at Los Angeles on the fifth of February. It being one +of the Spanish feast days, they were having a great time. The +Spanish population of this place having now become reconciled, we +were treated with due respect while we remained here, being about +one week, during which time we lived on fruit. For here were +fruits and flowers, world without end. Beyond any doubt, this is +the greatest place for flowers that I have ever seen. + +Soon we pulled out for New Mexico, keeping on the north side of +the Colorado river until above the head of the Grand Canyon, this +being pretty well up in the Rocky Mountains, and here near the +head of the Grand Canyon we began to see more or less Indian sign, +but we were undecided as to what tribe of Indians they belonged. + +The second day after crossing the Colorado river we ran on to a +band of Indians, but to our satisfaction they were of the Pima +tribe, and the same young Indian whose sister had assisted me in +rescuing the white girl Olive Oatman, was with them. + +As soon as he saw me, he ran to meet me and shouted "Kain, igo,"-- +meaning "Hello, friend,"--and shook hands with me. + +The Pimas were out on their annual hunt for that season, and we +had to remain with them two days. Being acquainted with them all, +and as I have said before, when one is out in a hostile Indian +country, sometimes the company of friendly Indians is quite +acceptable. + +After leaving here we would be compelled to pass over a small +portion of the Ute country, and game being plentiful at this time, +we feared they might be out on a hunt, and just at present we were +not hankering after sport of the Indian fighting kind. So I +proposed to Jim Bridger that we hire four of these young Pimas to +accompany us through the Ute country, knowing that the Pimas were +on good terms with all their neighboring tribes. Jim said that we +had nothing to give them, having neither jewelry or beads with us. + +I told him that I would spare them a horse if we could get them to +go, I had four horses with me, while Jim only had three. He told +me to go ahead and make any kind of a bargain with them I liked +and he would stand his portion. + +That night after supper while we were sitting around the camp +fire, smoking and cracking jokes--for an Indian enjoys a joke as +well as any one--I got up and told them that we would, after +leaving their country, have to travel over a small portion of the +Ute country, and they being hostile towards the white people, we +did not feel safe to try to cross their country alone, I told them +we were very poor, having no beads nor blankets to spare, but if +four of their men would accompany us for three days, I would give +them a good horse. + +The young Indian said: "You have been a good friend to me, and me +and my friend will go with you across the Ute country. We don't +want your horse, but when you come back you can bring us some +beads." + +This we agreed to do, and the next morning we started early, +accompanied by four young Pima Indians. + +During the first two days' travel from the Pima camp we saw not +less than two hundred Indians of the Ute tribe, camping the second +night within a quarter of a mile of a large village of them, but +having those Pimas with us they did not offer to molest us. + +When we were approaching a village two of the Pimas would ride +ahead and tell the Utes that we were their friends. They traveled +with us four days, when we concluded we were safe and they +returned to their crowd of hunters, and we proceeded on our +journey, crossing the main divide of the Rocky Mountains at the +head of the Blue river, striking the head of the Arkansas river as +soon as we were across the main divide. + +The day we crossed the divide we went into camp as soon as we were +out of the snow on the east side. That night when it was dark we +could see down the Arkansas river a great number of camp fires, +and what this all meant was a mystery to us. We knew that we were +then in the Comanche country, but we could not think that they +were up in that region so early in the season. We were both +somewhat restless that night, sleeping but very little, fearing +that these were camp-fires of the Utes, and if so we were sure to +have trouble with them before we could get out of this part of the +country. + +We were not in much of a hurry to start next morning, but I took +my glasses and selecting a high point for a general look, was +agreeably surprised to see that the camp was one of wagons and +tents. That made us feel considerably better. We packed up at once +and went down to see what it all meant. + +On arriving we found a company of miners. The gold in California +Gulch had just recently been discovered, and that was attracting +them. As soon as we learned the cause of the excitement, we struck +camp and walked up the canyon to where they were at work. They +were taking out gold in great quantities, but we only remained +until next morning, when we packed up and started for Taos, going +via the place where Colorado City now stands--a deserted +village near the present city of Colorado Springs. We were now in +a country where we were perfectly safe, so far as Indians were +concerned, and we could travel at our ease. + +On our first day's travel, after leaving the mining we passed +through the country where I did my first trapping in company with +Uncle Kit Carson and Mr. Hughes, and as we were riding along I +pointed out to Jim the place where I took my first Indian scalp. +This was the first time I had ever mentioned it to him and he said +that Uncle Kit had told him all about it a long time ago. + +On our arrival at Taos we found Uncle Kit suffering severely from +the effects of the arrow wound that has twice before been +mentioned in this history. He and his wife were glad to see us, +and Uncle Kit insisted on my remaining with him and taking charge +of his stock. He now had several bands of sheep and some four +hundred head of cattle, and not being able to ride and look after +the camps, he wanted me to ride from one camp to the other and +look after the business in general, for which he offered to pay me +well. I agreed to work for him at least two or three months and +perhaps longer, provided I liked the business. + +After I had been one month at work a wholesale butcher came over +from Denver to buy cattle and sheep. I went out and showed him +Uncle Kit's, after which we returned to Taos and he closed a trade +with Uncle Kit, agreeing to take one hundred head of cattle and +one thousand head of sheep. The price to be paid for them I never +knew, but he paid a certain portion down and the balance was to be +paid the coming October, in Denver City. + +I remained with Uncle Kit until the first of October, looking +after things in general, when he asked me to accompany him to +Denver City, which was one hundred and eighty miles from Taos. + +About the middle of the afternoon of the sixth day we rode into +Denver, from the southwest. When near where Cherry creek runs +through the city we saw an immense crowd of people in the streets, +so we pushed on to see what the excitement was. + +When near the crowd we met three or four men on horseback riding +up the street. We asked what was causing the excitement. One of +them replied: "Oh, nothing, only they are going to hang a man down +there in a few minutes." + +This being the first opportunity I had ever had to see a man hung, +we stayed and saw it through. We rode up to the edge of the crowd, +which was about forty yards from the scaffold where the hanging +was to take place, and had been there but a few moments when we +saw the sheriff coming with the prisoner, having a very strong +guard of some two hundred men all well armed. As soon as the +prisoner stepped on to the platform some one handed him a chair to +sit down in. + +The sheriff turned to the prisoner and said: "Mr. Gordon if you +have anything to say, now you have the opportunity. I will give +you all the time necessary to say what you wish." + +The prisoner rose to his feet and brushed his hair back, +apparently cool, but the moment he commenced to talk I could see +the tears begin to trickle down his cheeks. + +I thought it a most pitiful sight. He did not talk long, but +briefly thanked his friends for their kindness towards him during +his confinement, and said: "Gentlemen, I think you did very wrong +in holding out the idea to me that I would come clear, when you +knew very well that there was no show whatever for me," and took +his seat. + +A gospel minister then stepped upon the platform and engaged in +prayer. When he rose from praying the prisoner was weeping +bitterly. The sheriff then stepped up to him and said: "Come, Mr. +Gordon, your time is up," and he took him by one arm and another +man by the other, and when he raised to his feet they tied his +hands behind him, tied a cloth over his face, led him on to the +trap and the sheriff placed the rope around his neck and started +down the steps to spring the trap, when the prisoner sang out: +"Come back, Meadows, come back!" + +The sheriff turned and walked up to where the prisoner was, and he +said: + +"Meadows, fix the rope good so it will break my neck, for I want +to die quick." + +After the sheriff had fixed the rope he stepped down and sprung +the trap, and from where I was I could not see that Gordon made +the least struggle after he dropped. + +Just as we were ready to leave here who should step up but our old +friend Mr. Joe Favor, whom we had not seen for a long time. He +insisted on us going to his store, telling us where to put our +horses. So, after putting our horses up, we went around with him. + +On arriving at Favor's place we found that he had a number of his +St. Louis friends with him, who had only arrived a few days +previous to this. After introducing us all around, he said: "I +want you two men to come over and take supper with me. I have just +ordered supper at the Jefferson House." + +Uncle Kit tried to excuse himself on the grounds that we were not +dressed well enough to go into company, we having on our buckskin +suits. But his answer was: + +"I would not have you dressed otherwise if I could, so be sure and +come with your side arms on" having reference to our revolvers and +knives. He then addressed his conversation to me for a few moments +by asking what I would take to tell him the honest truth as to how +many Indians I had scalped with the knife that he gave me, seeing +that I still carried it. + +I said: "Mr. Favor, I could tell you just the number, but it would +be out of place for me to do so." He asked why, and I said: "Mr. +Favor, up to this time I don't think I have ever given you any +reason to doubt my word, but if I should tell you the honest truth +as to the number of Indians I have scalped with that knife I fear +you would doubt me." + +By this time a number of his St. Louis friends had flocked around +me, and it seemed as if they would look through me. Mr. Favor +assured me that he would not doubt my word for a moment, but I +told him his friends would. They assured me that they would not, +saying from what they had heard of me from Mr. Favor before seeing +me, they felt satisfied that I would tell them the truth. + +I said: "Gentlemen, if I had gotten one more scalp I would just +have even thirty-four, but as it is I have just taken thirty-three +scalps with this knife. I mean from Indians that I killed myself. +I have taken a number that were killed by others, but I did not +count them." + +The crowd then turned their attention to Uncle Kit Carson, and +while at the supper table those St. Louis parties asked him what +he would take to sit down and give them a true history of his life +and let them write it up and have it published. To this he would +not hear. They then came at him in a different manner by asking +what per cent, of the net proceeds he would take. To this he said: +"Gentlemen, if there is anything on earth that I do dislike it +surely is this thing called notoriety," and he continued by +saying, "There is a part of my life that I hate to think of +myself, and a book written without the whole of my life would not +amount to anything." + +After supper we returned to the store and those men talked with +Uncle Kit until near midnight about this matter. By this time he +had become impatient and said: "Gentlemen, there is no use +talking, for I will not submit to a thing of this kind, and you +will oblige me very much by not mentioning it any more." So that +ended the conversation concerning the matter, for the time being, +and Uncle Kit and I retired for the night. + +The morning following I walked down to the store and Mr. Favor +told me there had been some parties looking for me, and left word +for me to meet them at the store at ten o'clock. + +I sat down and waited until they came at the hour appointed. A +gentleman in the crowd named Green Campbell seemed to be their +spokesman. And, by the way, this same Mr. Campbell has since grown +to be very wealthy and now resides in Salt Lake City, and a few +years ago was nominated on the Gentile ticket for Governor, but +was defeated. + +Mr. Campbell said to me: "There are five of us that have been +mining here this summer and have done very well, but we are not +satisfied. We want to go on to the waters of the Gila river and +prospect this winter, and have been trying for several days to +find some one that could guide us to that country, and Mr. Favor +having recommended you to us very highly, we wish to make some +kind of a bargain with you if we can, to guide us to that part of +the country. Is it safe for a small party to go in there?" + +I said: "Mr. Campbell, it depends altogether in what part of the +country you want to go. I could take you on the waters of the Gila +river where you would be perfectly safe, but whether it would be +where you want to go or not is the question." I drew a diagram of +that part of the country as best I could, showing the different +tributaries to the river, pointing out the region where they would +be safe and also that which they would not dare enter on account +of the hostile Apache Indians. + +Mr. Campbell asked me if I would remain with them until spring. I +told him I would, and they made me a proposition, which I +accepted. They were to furnish all the pack animals necessary for +the outfit and to board me, I to furnish my own saddle-horses. I +advised them to go to Taos with a wagon and team, and buy their +pack animals there as they would be able to get them much cheaper +than in Denver. They proposed that I go to Taos and buy the pack +animals and have everything ready by the time they would arrive, +as they had business which would necessarily detain them for at +least two weeks. This I agreed to do. + +That afternoon I was walking down the street near the Planters +House when I met a policeman in great haste, making his way for +the hotel mentioned. As he approached me he said: "I deputize you +to assist me in making the arrest of those stage drivers in the +Planters' House." This was a crowd of men who were driving stage +at that time for the notorious Slade, of whom more will be said +later on. + +I had left my side arms at Mr. Favor's store, not thinking I would +have any occasion to use them, but at the request of the +policeman, I entered the hotel and found a general row proceeding. +As soon as we entered the door two or three of the crowd made for +me, I backed off and defended myself the best that I could, until +I had backed to the end of the hall. The door at the end of the +hall being shut, I could back no farther. Here I sparred with them +for some time, when one of them struck at me with all vengeance +and just grazed the side of my face. As I threw my head and +shoulders back to dodge the blow I knocked the whole upper portion +of the glass door out. Just at that instant Wm. F. Cody, better +known as Buffalo Bill, seeing the predicament I was in, and seeing +that I was unarmed, caught me by the shoulders and jerked me +through that window much quicker than I could tell it. He handed +me one of his pistols and said: "Come on pard, and we will take +them fellows or know the reason why." + +When we entered the door they had the policeman and bar-keeper +both cornered behind the bar, but seeing that we were prepared for +them, strange to say, not one of them drew his pistol, but all +surrendered at once, and the entire crowd, six in number, were +escorted to the cooler. + +The name of this policeman was William Deecy, and he is now living +in Boulder, Montana. I saw him less than one year ago, and we +enjoyed a good laugh as we rehearsed the affair of the Planters' +House. + +That afternoon after having his business attended to, Uncle Kit +went to Mr. Favor and said: "Joe, I want you and your friends from +St. Louis to come and take supper with me this evening at the same +hotel where we had supper last evening." + +When Uncle Kit spoke in this manner Mr. Favor felt sure that he +had changed his mind in regard to having his life written up, and +before going to supper, in the absence of Uncle Kit, Mr. Favor +asked me about it. I told him he had not. Whereupon he proposed +betting me a new hat that those parties would write up his, Kit +Carson's, life. I said; "Not by his consent." "Yes," said he, "by +his own consent." + +This bet I accepted, and that night Mr. Favor and all of his St. +Louis friends accompanied us from the store down to the hotel for +supper. There was one gentleman in the crowd who was a splendid +talker, and apparently an intelligent man, and when at the supper +table that night, he mentioned the matter to Uncle Kit again of +having his life published. On turning his eyes to the refined +gentleman, he said: "I would have you understand that when I say +anything I mean it. I told you in plain English last evening that +I would not submit to anything of that kind, and now don't compel +me to talk too harsh, but please drop the subject at once." + +Mr. Favor, who had been watching very close all this time, could +see at once there was no use in talking any more about the subject +and turned the conversation as quickly as possible and there was +no more said about it. + +That night while in a conversation with Buffalo Bill he told Uncle +Kit and I that he would be going out to Bent's Fort in a few days +and proposed that we join him there and have a buffalo hunt before +I went away. We promised that we would meet him. + +The next morning Uncle Kit and I mounted our horses to start on +our return trip to Taos, and when we rode up in front of the +store, Mr. Favor told me to come in and get my hat. I told him no, +that I would not take it now, but let it go until next spring when +I returned. He said to call and get it any time, saying: "You won +it fair." + +After we had ridden but a short distance I told Uncle Kit how I +came to win the hat, and he said: "I think them St. Louis men are +gentlemen, but I don't propose to have any one write up my life. I +have got plenty to keep me as long as I live and I do not like +notoriety." And just here I would say, that to a man that roughed +it out on the plains in those days as we old frontiersmen had to +do, they did not feel that a history of their lives would be fit +to go before the public, for as Uncle Kit said: "A man on the +frontier had to undergo many hardships, that if written up true, +just as they occurred, people in the civilized countries would not +believe them when they read it." + +On my arrival at Taos I bought ten Mexican jacks or burros to use +for pack animals on the trip that we were about to start upon. +After that we started for Bent's Fort where we joined Buffalo Bill +and Col. Bent and struck out for the "Picket Wire"--Purgatoire--on +a buffalo hunt. + +Here we found buffalo plenty and enjoyed two days successful +hunting, and I must say that a more jolly crowd I was never out +with than those three men were on a trip of this kind. Buffalo +Bill, who was as good-natured a man as a person would wish to +meet, was able to furnish amusement for the entire crowd. Col. +Bent himself was no mean Nimrod, and Uncle Kit did not take a back +seat on such occasions. + +This was the last hunting expedition that it was ever my pleasure +to go upon in company with Mr. Cody, and it was not my pleasure to +meet him again for a number of years afterwards. + +From here Uncle Kit and I returned to Taos, and I commenced making +preparations for the trip to the waters of the Gila. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +FACE TO FACE WITH A BAND OF APACHES.--THE DEATH OF PINTO.--THE +CLOSEST CALL I EVER HAD.--A NIGHT ESCAPE.--BACK AT FORT DOUGLAS. + + +On the arrival of Mr. Campbell and party we packed up and were off +to the waters of the Gila. Our crowd consisted of Green Campbell, +of Missouri; Thomas Freeman and David Roberts, of Illinois, and +Marlow Pease, of Massachusetts. + +I took three saddle horses with me and they each took a saddle +horse and three extra horses belonging to the company. We did not +lose any time getting across the main divide. Being late in the +fall we had great fear of becoming snow-bound on the trip. We left +the head of the Arkansas river some fifty miles to the north so as +to be able to cross the river without having the snow to +encounter. After we were across the main divide I told them there +would be no danger of being snowed in now. So they would stop +occasionally from half a day to three days in a place to prospect +what they called the most favorable looking places for the yellow +metal and most generally finding a little gold, but not as they +considered in paying quantities, and while they were prospecting +it was my business to scout all around the camp to prevent a +surprise party by the reds and to kill game to live on. + +We arrived at the Gila, striking the middle fork a little more +southwest than I had ever been before. I told them we were now in +the Apache country and that those were the worst Indians we had to +contend with. We found a nice place for a camp and Mr. Campbell +proposed to build a log cabin in order to protect ourselves +against the Indians, but I told them I thought they had better +prospect a week or ten days first, and if they found it to pay +them we could build a cabin, and in the mean time I would try and +locate the Indians and watch their movements. + +The first four or five days I didn't go very far away, but made an +entire circuit of the camp every day. After being here five or six +days, I struck out in a southwesterly direction, intending to go +about ten or fifteen miles from camp. + +Up to this time I had not seen any fresh Indian sign whatever, and +had about concluded that we would not have any trouble this winter +with them. After riding about ten miles or so I came to a nice +little brook, and there being fine grass, I stopped and let my +horse feed for an hour or more. I was riding my old Pinto that day +and he was also feeling fine. + +About one o'clock I mounted Pinto and started south, striking for +a high mountain, from which if I could once reach the top, I +could, with the aid of my glasses, see all over the entire +country. While climbing this mountain I ran on to a bear cub. +Seeing that he was very fat, I shot him and lashed him behind my +saddle, and was soon climbing the mountain again, which was, in +places, steep and very rocky, with scattering pine trees here and +there. After going about a half a mile and just as I came to the +top of a steep little pitch, I came face to face with a band of +Apache Indians. I did not take time to count them, but thought +there were about eighteen or twenty of them, I fired four shots in +quick succession. The first two shots I killed two Indians, but +the other two I could not tell whether I got my men or not, as I +was just in the act of turning my horse when I fired. They fired a +perfect shower of arrows at me. To run back down the mountain the +way I came was a matter of impossibility, as it was both steep and +rocky, so I took around the side of the mountain, thinking that I +would be able in a few moments' run to reach the top of the +mountain, where I could have a better show to defend myself. + +I had to ride all over my horse to avoid the arrows, first on one +side, hanging by one foot and one hand, then on the other side. + +I had not run more than one hundred yards until I knew there was +something wrong with my horse, for he had always before seemed to +know when I was in a tight place and seemed eager to carry me out +of danger. I gave him the spurs three or four times but he did not +increase his speed in the least, and then I knew well that he had +been shot, and it always seemed a miracle to me that I went +through all that and did not get shot also. + +It is quite useless for me to say I thought my time had come. On +looking ahead some fifty yards I saw a pile of rocks about four or +five feet high, which I made a bee line for. Getting to the rock +pile I dismounted and ran between two large rocks where poor old +Pinto tried to follow me, but he received two more arrows in his +hip and one in his flank. He fell to the ground, and after falling +raised his head, and looking toward me, whinnied. + +The poor faithful old fellow lay there and would whinny for me at +intervals as long as he lived, which was perhaps half an hour. The +reader can fancy my condition just at this time. Here I was almost +surrounded by hostile Indians and the only friend that I had with +me dead. I did not expect to ever get away from there, for I +expected that while a part of the Indians guarded me the balance +would go off and rally reinforcements. + +I had made up my mind to fight them to the last and kill as many +as I could before they got me. They made three desperate charges +for me before dark, but as luck would have it I was always loaded +for them. I piled up rocks as I could get them loose in a manner +to give me protection from every quarter, but expected they would +reinforce and attempt to starve me out. + +Just as it was getting dark, two of the Indians crawled up to +within thirty feet of my rock pen. I was watching them, and just +as they rose up to fire I fired and brought one of them to the +ground, thereby making another good Apache. The other one ran +away, and it being somewhat dark, I did not get him. + +This made the fifth Indian I had killed since I had been in my +little rock pen and I had fired eleven shots. After it was good +and dark I made up my mind that I would get out of there sometime +during the night, for to remain there till the morrow only meant +death, and I might as well lose my life in trying to get away that +night as to remain there and be killed the next day. I felt sure +they had a guard around me, but I made up my mind to make a +desperate effort to get away. I crawled to where my dead horse was +laying, which was only a few feet from my rock house, cut the +latigo, removed my saddle from the dead horse, lashed it to my +back, taking the mochilar or covering for a saddle, which I have +described heretofore, I took my knife and cut a hole in the front +portion of the mochila where the pommel of the saddle protrudes, +so that I was able to stick my head through. The mochila was good +as a shield, for an arrow would not go through it except at very +short range. I cut the reins off of the bridle, and as the bit was +a very heavy one, I thought it would answer pretty well as a sling +shot in close quarters. + +I had no idea of getting out without a desperate fight with +ninety-nine chances against me to one in my favor. After I had my +rig complete I started to crawl away flat on the ground like a +snake, I would crawl for a short distance, then stop and listen. +It was very dark, there being no moon in the fore part of the +night. I was expecting every minute to feel an arrow or a tomahawk +in my head. After working my way down the hill some hundred yards +or so, I came to a tree and raised up by the side of it. I stood +and listened for some time, but could not hear anything of the +Indians, so I struck out in the direction of camp, walking very +cautiously for some little distance. + +After traveling about six miles I felt comparatively safe, knowing +they could not do anything toward tracking me until morning and +did not think they would even be able to track me then. + +I passed over a great deal of rocky country where there was but +little vegetation. Finally I laid down to wait until morning, and +I must say that I never had been out in all my life when I +actually longed for daylight to come as I did that long and lonely +night, and I believe that I would freely have given five hundred +dollars to have had a man there with me that night; not that I was +afraid of Indians, for I considered that I had given them the +slip, and did not believe they would be able to overtake me before +I would reach camp even though they should be able to track me the +next morning. + +I thought of my dying horse who had been such a faithful servant +and carried me out of so many tight places, and when I would think +of him I could fancy that I could see him raise his head and +whinny at me as he had done that evening in his dying moments, +seemingly asking me for help, and I could not keep the tears from +my eyes. As soon as it was light I started for camp, arriving +there about ten o'clock that morning. The men in camp had given me +up and did not expect to ever see me any more, thinking that the +Apaches had got me. I told the men that we would have to leave +this part of the country now, and that too, just as soon as I +could get a bite to eat and get my saddle repaired. While the boys +pulled up and started to move camp I saddled up another horse and +took my back track, traveling very cautiously, thinking they would +try to follow me out, and I wanted to watch their movements and +see whether they had reinforced or not. I told the boys to move +northeast and where to camp, the place being ten miles from where +we were then, and not to build any fire that night, also that I +would be in camp some time before morning this time, I was very +cautious not to be surprised the second time. I rode back within a +mile of where my dead horse lay, but could not see any Indians, so +I finally concluded that it had been a small hunting party, and +seeing that they could not scare me out of my rock pen by their +ferocious charges, accompanied by a war-whoop that would make the +hair stand on the bravest mountaineer's head, they had abandoned +the idea altogether and had no doubt left the ground before I +started to crawl away from my rock pen, which had been the means +of saving me from falling their victim. + +I returned to camp, arriving shortly after dark. We moved north, +the men prospecting the country as we went and I scouting, keeping +a sharp lookout to prevent a surprise party, but we did not see +any more Indians during the entire winter. We struck the Colorado +river at the mouth of the Green river. + +Mr. Campbell concluded that he would go to southern Nevada; taking +a southwesterly course from Green river, I piloted them about one +hundred miles and they now being in a country where they were +perfectly safe as far as hostile Indians were concerned, I left +the party, and the most of them it has never been my pleasure to +meet since. I met one of the party by the name of Freeman in +Seattle in the year of 1889. At that time he was settled down in +his old neighborhood in Illinois and had a wife and five children. +I can truthfully say that I never met five better and more +agreeable men to travel with in all my career than those men were. +While with them I never saw one of them apparently out of humor +with his companions or heard one use any kind of language than +that of a gentleman. Leaving the party I struck for Salt Lake +City. I had no trouble in finding the way, or otherwise, and +arrived at Fort Douglas about the first of March. + +On arriving here I found General Connor just making preparations +to move with almost his entire force against the Ute Indians, who +at this time were concentrating their forces in Cash Valley, and +committing a great many depredations in that part of the country. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +THREE THOUSAND DEAD INDIANS.--A DETECTIVE FROM CHICAGO.--HE GOES +HOME WITH AN OLD MORMON'S YOUNGEST WIFE AND GETS INTO TROUBLE.-- +THE FLIGHT. + + +Gen. Connor offered me a position as scout, which I accepted, and +on the sixth day after my arrival at Fort Douglas, in company with +two other scouts, I struck out in advance of the command. In the +forenoon of the eighth day from the fort we found the Indians on a +tributary of Cash Valley in a deep canyon and fortified. They had +cut logs and rolled them down the hill, piling them on each side +of the canyon, several feet high and had intermingled them with +brush. This was the first fortification I had ever seen built by +Indians. + +We returned and met the command that night, and when we were +making our report to the General he asked me what the +fortifications looked like. I told him that I could not think of +anything to compare them to, but that I thought they could be +swept very easily by a Howitzer from above and below. He asked me +if I would accompany one of his commissioned officers that night +to see the fortifications, and I told him I would. After supper +that evening a Captain came to me, whose name I am sorry to say I +have forgotten, and asked me if I was the man that was to +accompany him to the Indian fortifications. I told him that I was, +and he asked what time we had better start. I told him we had +better start at once as there would be a moon in the fore part of +the night, but that the after part would be very dark. So we +mounted our horses and were off. + +We rode to within about three-quarters of a mile of the +fortifications and there we remained until it was light enough to +see, and then the Captain took out his glasses and scanned the +whole country as well as the fortifications. After looking about +half an hour the Captain asked me what I thought of it, and what +would be my plan of attack. I told him that I had no idea, as I +had never seen Indians fortified before. He said it would be a +bloody fight, I said yes, but I thought the blood would all be on +one side. "Yes," replied the Captain, "we ought to clean them out +without losing ten men." + +We went to our horses, mounted, and rode back to the command as +quick as we could, meeting it about four miles from the +fortifications, piloted by the two scouts that had been out with +me the day before. + +The Captain and Gen. Connor had a long conversation as we moved +along. When within a mile of the mouth of this canyon Gen. Connor +formed his men in line, one half to go on each side of the canyon +in which the Indians were fortified, and the cannon were placed at +the mouth of the canyon. + +I did not see any Indians of any account until the command to fire +was given. When the soldiers commenced to fire--there being about +twelve hundred--it frightened the Indians so that they came +running out from under those logs and brush like jack rabbits and +were shot down like sheep. In all my experience in the Western +wilds I never saw such a slaughtering as there. + +The Indians had been taught by the Mormons that if they would +fortify themselves in that way the whites could not harm them, +teaching them also, that the Lord would protect them, which was a +great thing for the white people, for it came so near cleaning the +Utes up that there was only a little remnant left, and they never +gave the white people any more trouble. Thus white people were +enabled to pass through that country unmolested. Heretofore it had +been one of the most dangerous parts of the country. For all this +I have ever since believed that the Mormons, unintentionally, did +the Gentiles a great favor. + +After the battle was over, and as scouts are at liberty to go +where they please, I rode over the battle-field in company with +the other scouts and I never in all my life saw such a mangled up +mass as was there. Men, women and children were actually lying in +heaps, and I think all that got away were a few that hid among the +logs and brush. + +I n this battle the Captain told me they did not lose a man, and +had only four wounded, while he counted over three thousand dead +Indians. + +When I returned to Salt Lake City I was astonished to see the +manner in which the Salt Lake papers abused Gen. Connor for +slaughtering the Indians in the manner he had, when they (the +Mormons) had planned the slaughter, although not meaning for it to +be a slaughter of Indians. + +Gen. Connor said that the Mormons had thought that the Indians +would fortify themselves, and when attacked by the soldiers, they +would wipe them (the soldiers) off the face of the earth. The idea +had been so thoroughly instilled into the minds of the Indians by +the Mormons that the Lord would protect them if only fortified in +this manner that they depended most altogether on the Lord to +protect them. + +The third day on our return trip we came to a little place called +Ogden. Here the General made preparations to leave the command and +go ahead, accompanied by one company, of cavalry. When they were +ready I was directed to accompany him, which I did. He and I rode +in the rear of the company. After riding some little distance Gen. +Connor said: "Drannan, I think I can put you on the track of a +good thing if it would suit you." I asked him in what way. He +asked me if I had not heard of the Mountain Meadow massacre in +Utah. I said: "Certainly, many times." He said: "Now be honest +with me and tell me who you think did that horrible work." I told +him the Mormons, and the Mormons alone. + +He then told me there was a man at the fort from Chicago trying to +work up the case and if possible to find out just by whose +authority the Mormons had massacred those emigrants, and he said: +"From what I have seen of you, I think you would be just the man +to help him work up the case." + +I said: "General, I think you are mistaken. I never did any +detective work among the white people, and I fear I am not good +enough a talker to obtain the desired information." The General +said: "All right, we'll see." + +We reached the Fort that night at dark, having ridden forty miles +that day. That evening the General told me to come to his quarters +the following day at ten o'clock and he would introduce me to the +gentleman referred to. + +I went to the General's quarters and the gentleman was present. +His name was Howard. By whose authority he was working up this +case I never learned, but, however, after questioning me for some +time as to what I knew of the Mormons, he asked me what I would +charge him per month to go along with him, play the hypocrite, and +try to help work up the case. I told him it was all new work to +me; that I knew nothing of detective work whatever. I said that if +it were a case of Indians it would be quite different, but I did +not think I would be of much service to him working among the +Mormons. + +He proposed that he would furnish me a suit of clothes suitable +for the part I was to play, furnish money to pay my expenses, such +as hotel bills, whiskey bills, ball-room bills, and pay me fifty +dollars per month, I to do as he told me, or as near as I could. +"And, at the end of one month," said he, "if your work does not +suit me, or if I don't suit you, I can pay you off and you can go +your way; or if you stay and we work up this case as I anticipate, +as soon as the work is completed I will pay you one hundred +dollars per month instead of fifty." + +Under these conditions I went to work for him, and the next two +days were spent in drilling me on Mormon phrases, their customs +And so on, he having been there some three months, had got pretty +well posted on the Mormon doctrine. + +When I got my new suit of clothes on and he got my hair fixed up +just to suit him I looked in the mirror, and I could hardly +believe that it was Will Drannan. + +The third day we mounted our horses and started across the country +to a little town called Provo, which is about forty miles from +Salt Lake, if I have not forgotten. Here, we are both Mormons, are +brothers, and our business buying cattle; looking around to see +who has cattle to sell. We arrived at Provo on Sunday evening and +made the acquaintance of two young men who were Mormons. They +asked us to go to church with them. "All right," said Mr. Howard, +"but where will my brother and I stay to-night?" The eldest of the +two young men said: "One of you can stay with me and the other can +stay with Jim," referring to his chum. So it fell to my lot to go +with Jim after church. + +On our way to church, naturally enough the boys asked our names, +and Howard spoke up and said: "My name is George Howard, and this +is my brother Frank." And I will tell you now with all candor I +did not feel right over this, for it was the first time in my life +that I had ever lived under an assumed name, but I had agreed to +do what I could, and although I would have given the best horse I +had to have been out of the scrape, yet I was into it and I was +determined to go through with it if possible. That evening when we +came out of church Jim gave me an introduction to his two sisters +and they asked me to walk home with them from church, and I did +so. + +After conversing with them for some time and getting a little +acquainted with them, I asked the girl on my left how old she was, +and she said she was seventeen. I asked her how long she had lived +in this country. She said: "My father was one of the first +settlers in this country. He came here among the first emigrants +and I was raised here in this country." + +"Is that so?" I asked. "Then you were here in this part of the +country at the time of the Mountain Meadow massacre?" "Yes," said +she, "but you know we must not talk about that." "Well," said I, +"you know they were all Gentiles that were killed and what's the +difference?" "Well," she said, "I think it was all wrong any way." + +I asked her if her father was in that fight and she said: "Let's +don't talk about that, please don't ask me any more questions +about it." + +By this time we had reached the gate, and the conversation stopped +for that time. The next day I tried to get a chance to talk to +her, but my efforts were all in vain. That afternoon I met Howard +and told him of the conversation I had with the young lady, and he +insisted on my working on her father if I could get a chance to +have a private conversation with her. + +On Wednesday night there was to be a big dance at the church, and +it being free to all, we attended it. In the mean time I had +engaged the company of those two young ladies for the dance. I +paid all due respect to the young lady, but did not mention the +affair of which I was desirous of obtaining information until we +were returning from supper to the church, when I again made +mention of the affair in such a manner that I did not think she +would suspect anything wrong. But she gave me to understand in +plain language that she would not converse on that subject under +any circumstances. + +I saw there was no use to waste any more time with her and did not +mention the subject again. + +We remained in this place ten days, during which time I formed the +acquaintance of an old man by the name of Snyder, who had five +wives, three of them living at his residence in the town and the +other two on his farm in the country. Being a brother Mormon, Mr. +Snyder one day during my stay there invited me home with him for +dinner, and on entering the dining room he introduced me to his +three wives, the youngest of the three being about twenty years +old, while Snyder was sixty-one years old. + +That afternoon Howard and myself were taking a walk, and by chance +met this young Mrs. Snyder, whom I introduced to my brother. He +asked to accompany her on her walk, to which proposition she +unhesitatingly assented, and he walked on home with him. + +Her husband was not at home, but before Howard left the gate he +heard one of Snyder's other wives say to her: "I'll tell on you, +and you will not get to go out again." + +This convinced him that there was a great deal of jealousy +existing between Mr. Snyder's wives. He said she was well posted +in everything pertaining to the Mormon doctrine, and at the same +time bitterly opposed to their proceedings. + +The afternoon following George Howard and I took a stroll down to +Salt Lake City, which was a distance of three miles. + +We had been in the city but a short time and were walking up Main +street, when on casting my eyes across the street I saw old man +Snyder standing talking to Porter Rockwell and Bill Hickman. They +were just across Main street immediately opposite us, and George +had not yet got sight of them. Those two men were supposed to be +Brigham Young's "destroying angels," and their business was to put +any one out of the way who had fallen under the ban of the Mormon +Church. + +These two men had been pointed out to me before, and as soon as I +got sight of them I said in a low tone: "There are the leaders of +the Danites." + +When he looked across at them old man Snyder was pointing his +finger direct at us, and Rockwell and Hickman seemed to be very +eager to get a good look at us. + +George said: "This is no place for us. Let's get back to the +Fort." And all the talking I could do I could not make him believe +that we were perfectly safe there in the city in broad daylight. +His very countenance showed uneasiness to extremity. He had been +there long enough to be thoroughly posted in all their laws, +customs, etc., and didn't seem to think it would be healthy for us +there from that time on. However, I can truthfully say that we +made the trip to the Fort in much less time than we did from the +Fort to town, notwithstanding it was all up grade. + +On our arrival at the Fort we went to Gen. Connor's quarters and +told him the whole story just as it occurred. The General said: +"The thing is up with you now Howard, you might as well quit and +go home. You can do no more good here now. You are perfectly safe +here in the Fort, but the moment you are out of sight of it you +are in danger of your life. But you will have one company of +cavalry to protect you when you go to leave the Fort." + +It was really laughable to see the way Howard would tremble and +shake while Gen. Connor was talking to him, and he was anxious to +get out of the country and wanted me to go with him, it being the +wrong time of year to catch a train going East. He thought if he +could get to Fort Bridger, which was one hundred miles east of +Fort Douglas, he would be safe from the Mormons, and would stand +equally as good a show to strike a train going eastward as he +would at Salt Lake. + +Before we were ready to start for Fort Bridger there came a man to +Fort Douglas who had been wagon boss for Maj. Russell the year +before. He had just received a letter from his former employer +requesting him to come at once to Fort Kearney. He was anxious to +find some one to travel with, as it was not safe for one to travel +alone in that country, and it was a long and tedious trip this +time of year. + +The Pony Express was then running, but outside of that we were not +likely to see any one on the trip. + +They insisted on me accompanying them, and being anxious to cross +over on the other side of the mountains, I agreed to join them. +Having two saddle horses myself I told them three horses between +them would be enough, for in case of emergency I would use one of +my horses for a pack animal. The next two days were spent in +getting ready for the trip, Mr. Damson, the wagon boss, having +procured three horses for himself and Howard, Mr. Howard thinking +it might not be conducive to his health to leave the Fort to look +for horses. + +Getting everything in readiness, we made the start just at dark, +going the Emigrant canyon route, striking Echo canyon fifty miles +from Salt Lake City, making the trip that far without stopping to +let our horses feed or even to eat anything ourselves. We did this +because we wished to get beyond the Mormon settlements without +being discovered by them. We reached Fort Bridget the third day +and there took in two more companions, John Scudder and John +Korigo, who had been at work at the Fort all winter hauling wood +for the Government. They had earned a little money and were +returning to their respective homes, one living in Missouri and +the other in Pennsylvania. We were now five in number and +calculated to make Fort Kearney in fifteen days, which, if I +remember rightly, is called six hundred miles from Fort Bridger. + +We crossed Green river and took the Bitter creek route, thinking +that would be the safest from hostile Indians; but when we got to +the head of Bitter creek the Pony Express rider informed us that +the Indians were very bad on the North Platte river, having killed +two express riders the week before. + +This frightened the boys badly, for not one of them had ever been +engaged in an Indian fight, and all were free to admit that they +were not hankering after experience of that kind. + +After we struck North Platte we saw considerable Indian sign every +day, but it was evident that the reds were in little bands. + +From now on we made a dry camp every night, always stopping in the +middle of the afternoon to let our horses graze while we did our +cooking to avoid building our fire after dark. Then we would mount +and ride until after dark and make a dry camp. This was done in +order to avoid an attack while in camp, but we made the entire +trip without seeing an Indian. + +On my arrival at Fort Kearney I met my old friend Jim Bridger, who +was waiting there for a man by the name of Jim Boseman, who was on +his way with a large train of emigrants to the eastern part of +Montana, the same country that Bridger, Kit Carson, Beckwith and I +passed through in 1856 when the Indians were so bad. + +Jim Bridger had met Boseman the fall before and had promised to +pilot him through to that part of Montana, for which he was to +receive five hundred dollars, it also being understood that, there +would be at least fifty men in the train and all well armed. + +Bridger was just in receipt of a letter from Boseman stating that +he would be there on or about a certain date with two hundred men, +most all of whom had families. + +Jim was very anxious to have me join him, offering to divide the +spoils. + +I told him it would be folly for me to accompany him, as he would +be able to handle the train alone and would then have the five +hundred dollars himself, and furthermore, I did not care for work +of that kind that summer, as I would rather return to Taos and buy +a band of sheep and settle down, for I thought I had enough money, +if properly handled, to make me a good living. + +At this Jim laughed heartily and said: "Yes, you'll settle down +with a band of sheep when you are too old to straddle a horse and +your eyes too dim to take in an Indian. I have often thought of +the same thing," he continued. "I have a place picked out now +about fifteen miles east of Fort Bridger on Black's Fork, near the +lone tree. There is where I am going to settle down after I make +this trip. I can then sit in my door and with a good glass I can +see Fort Bridger that was named for me and which I feel proud of +to-day." + +Jim Bridger made this trip north with Boseman's train into the +valley where the town of Boseman now stands, without the loss of a +man or beast on the entire trip, and returning to South Platte, +married an Indian woman of the Arappahoe tribe, went to Black's +Fork and took up a ranch within five miles of the lone pine tree. +Here he lived with his Indian wife for about five years, when she +died, leaving two children, a girl and a boy, which I have been +told he sent to school, gave them a good education, and they now +live, I think, in the state of Missouri. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +THROUGH TO BANNOCK.--A DANCE OF PEACE.--FRIGHT OF THE NEGROES.--A +FREIGHT TRAIN SNOWED IN AND A TRIP ON SNOW-SHOES.--SOME VERY TOUGH +ROAD AGENTS. + + +While I was at Fort Kearney another long train of emigrants came +along, en-route for Bannock, Montana. They did not know just where +Bannock was, and through the influence of Jim Bridger and Gen. +Kearney, I was offered employment in guiding them at seventy-five +dollars per month, with provisions. + +I told them I did not know where Bannock was, but that I could +take them to any portion of Montana they asked to go, I was not +long making the bargain and making preparations to get started. We +went back over the same road as far as Fort Bridger that I had +come only a short time before. There was not a person in the +entire train that had ever seen a hostile Indian, and very few of +them had ever traveled outside of their own state. The most of +them were from Indiana, and most of the men had families, and I +presume they were fleeing from the draft; that being the time of +the late war. + +I experienced a great deal of trouble in getting those people +organized and trained in a manner to enable us to protect +ourselves against the hostile Indians. + +In this train there were two negros, whose names were Joe and Bab. +Joe was driving a team for his grub and Bab was cooking for two +families for his grub. The people of the train fell into the habit +of calling me Captain, and every time I would ride along where +this Joe or Bab were, they would invariably salute me by lifting +their hats or by taking them off entirely and then they would say: +"Marse Capting, de ye see any Injuns?" + +One day my scouts came in from the south and reported seeing a +band of Indians, about ten or fifteen in number, two miles away +and coming direct for the train. I struck out alone at full speed +in that direction to ascertain what kind of Indians they were, +there being another man whose business it was to take charge of +the train at any time I was away, and in case of an attack or +danger of such, it was his business to corral the train and +prepare for battle. + +I had only gone a half mile when I met the Indians, and they +proved to be Arapahoes. I was personally acquainted with all of +them and asked them to go to the train with me, telling them it +was just over the ridge. This they agreed to do, saying: "We will +go to the train and then all will go out and kill some buffalo +this evening." + +We rode leisurely along until in sight of the train, and the +moment the people saw me riding with the Indians on each side of +me, they felt sure that I had been taken prisoner, and all the +hustling and bustling around to get those wagons corralled, beat +anything I had ever seen, and they were all so badly excited that +it was no use to try to hello at them. + +They were afraid to shoot at the Indians for fear they might shoot +me, or if they did not shoot me, they were afraid that if they +should shoot the Indians they would retaliate by shooting me down. + +The wagons being corralled, we rode around the entire train. I +left the Indians and rode inside of the corral and told the people +that these were peaceable Indians and were all friends of mine, +and that I wanted every man, woman and child to come out and shake +hands with them. Quite a number hesitated, believing that I had +been taken prisoner by the Indians and had been compelled to do +this in order to save my own life, and believing that those +Indians wanted to murder the entire train. + +But after reasoning with them for a while I succeeded in +convincing them that the Indians were peaceable. Then they all +went out and shook hands except the two darkies, who were not to +be found any where about the train at that time. I then told the +man whose duty it was to look after the train in my absence, to +drive about three miles and camp, describing the place, and that I +would go with the Indians and kill some buffalo, so that we might +have fresh meat, telling him to have each family cook a little +bread extra for the Indians, and that they would furnish meat +enough to do to-night and to-morrow, and was off for the buffalo +hunt. + +The Indians told me there was a band of buffalo about two or three +miles ahead of us near the road. + +We pushed on, on the main road, and sure enough right in the +little valley where I had told the captain to camp, we saw a band +of buffalo feeding. We all made a dash for them, and succeeded in +killing five fat buffalo, and on the ground, enough for the entire +train. + +As soon as the train was corralled and the stock turned loose, we +appointed four men, who claimed to know something of butchering, +to cut up and distribute the meat among the people of the train. +Up to this time the darkey cook had not been seen since I came +over the hill in company with those Indians. A certain lady in the +train said she thought that when he saw the Indians coming he had +run off and hid in the sage brush, but after the fires were +started he crawled out of one of the wagons where he had been hid, +and claimed that he had been asleep all this time and did not know +anything about any "Injuns," but it was a difficult matter to make +the people in the train believe this yarn. I had the Indians build +their fire outside of the corral, and while they were preparing +their meat I went around and collected bread enough of different +ones in the train for them, also a bowl of molasses. After all had +their supper over I proposed to the Indians that we have a dance. + +This dance is what they call a dance of peace, and is carried on +in a manner like this: They--or all that wish to participate in +the dance--form in a circle around the camp-fire, singing, or +rather humming, a certain tune. I went to the people of the train +and told them that the Indians and myself were going to have a +peace dance, and all that wished to see it could come to the camp- +fire and look on. I think every man, woman and child came out to +see the dance, which lasted about two hours. After the dance was +over one of the young Indians in the crowd came to me and said if +I would interpret for him he would be pleased to make a speech for +my friends, providing they were willing for him to do so. When he +told the other Indians he was going to make a speech they all sat +down in a circle around the camp-fire, seventeen in number, and +were perfectly silent. I told them that this young Indian wanted +to know if they would care to hear him make a speech. All were +anxious to hear him, which would be something new to them. I told +them that he would make the speech in his own language and I would +interpret it word for word as near as I knew how. + +When I told him they would be pleased to hear from him he walked +up to me, laid his hand on my shoulder, and said: + +"I have known this friend of mine a great many years. A long time +ago when he use to come to our village, we always killed a dog, +and after we would have a feast on dog meat, we always smoked the +pipe of peace, and all of the Arapahoes are his friends." + +He continued this manner of speaking about fifteen minutes, to the +amusement of the entire train, and when he took his seat he wanted +some one else to speak, but no one would attempt to respond to +him, thus winding up the amusements for the evening. + +In a conversation that evening with the Indians, they told me +their business out there, which was to keep the Sioux Indians off +of their hunting ground. + +The Sioux and they were on friendly terms, but sometimes the Sioux +would steal over on their hunting ground. They proposed to +accompany us through the dangerous part of the country. + +The morning following I told the men in the train of the generous +proposition which the Indians had made me, and told them if they +would furnish the Indians with bread they would keep them in meat. +I also told them that we were now in the most dangerous part of +the Sioux country, and that as long as those Indians were with us +we were in no danger whatever from the fact that when the Sioux +saw those Indians with us we were supposed to be their friends, +and they dare not trouble us in the least. + +This, however, was more than agreeable to the entire train, +relieving the scouts of their duty, also the night guards. I made +arrangements with the Indians to travel three days, and we then +pulled out. Just when we were almost ready to start, one young +lady in the crowd said to me; "Captain, I want to ask you one +question, and will you tell me the truth?" I said: "Most assuredly +I will." She said: "I want to know whether it was true that when +you visited those Indians they always killed a dog and ate the +meat?" + +I told her it was true as gospel, and said we always considered +dog meat the finest in the land, and only the chief and his most +intimate friends were able to afford dog meat. She said she was +astonished to hear me talk in such a manner. She said: "The most +laughable part of the proceedings the evening before was the +action of the darkey cook, Bab, who stood away back in the outer +edge of the crowd when you and those Indians were dancing. You +could have knocked his eyes off with a frying-pan and not have +touched his face." + +All went well. The Indians traveled with us three days as they had +agreed to, which brought us to the head of Bitter creek. We killed +a few buffalo all along the way, and when the Indians were ready +to leave us they had killed all the meat that the train could take +care of. + +This being as far as they had agreed to accompany us, they were to +start back the following morning and that night we had another +peace dance. The Indians invited all in the train to participate +in the dance, but none would take a part; so they and myself had +the dancing to ourselves again The next morning when they were +ready to leave us I told the people in the train to all come +outside of the corral, both old and young, and form in line so +those Indians could shake hands with all of them, telling them +that they had done us a great favor in escorting us through the +dangerous part of the country, and that this shaking hands they +considered a great token of friendship. + +This request was complied with, and the Indians all passed down +the line of people, shaking hands with each one. After they were +done shaking hands with all the train they all came and shook +hands with me, mounted their ponies, and rode away as fast as +their horses could run. + +We pulled on for Fort Bridger, all going smoothly, for we were in +the Bitter creek country and had no fear of Indians in that +section. The day we arrived at Fort Bridger we sent four men on +ahead to ascertain, if possible, where Bannock was. Here they met, +by chance, some men from what was then called East Bannock and +from them we learned just where Bannock was located, it being on a +west tributary of the Missouri river. We also learned from these +parties that there was a great excitement at this time over mines +that had been struck some eighty miles east of Bannock, on what +was known as Alder Gulch, or Stinking Water, but they were not +able to advise us as to whether or not we could get there with +wagons. + +Now I knew just where we wanted to go, and we took what was known +as the Landers cut-off, and pulled for Fort Hall, reaching the +fort without encountering any trouble with the Indians or +otherwise. The second day after passing Fort Hall, while we were +crossing Snake river, we met a crowd of miners just from Alder +Gulch, on their way to Denver, Colorado, for their families. From +them we learned where Alder Gulch was, and those miners spoke in +such high terms of the richness of that place that a great many in +the train wanted to go there instead of going to Bannock, while +others wanted to go to Bannock, that being where they had started. + +That night they took a vote to decide as to which place they +should go, which resulted in favor of Alder Gulch, so we pulled +for Alder Gulch instead of Bannock. + +We were now in the Bannock country. I did not hear of any +depredations being committed by the Indians, but I used all +precautions possible in order to prevent a surprise by the +redskins. + +Every few days we would meet a little squad of miners, all telling +exciting stories about the richness of Alder Gulch. They were +going home to their families with the expectation of moving them +out there the following spring; most of their families being in +Denver, Colorado. This all helped to create an anxiety among the +people to push on and get through as quick as possible. + +They moved somewhat faster now than before, reaching Virginia +City, Montana, about the last of September, this being the trading +point for Alder Gulch. Here we stopped and the train paid me off. + +I stayed around there about three weeks. One day while I was at +Virginia City two men, Boon and Bivian, who owned the only store +of any note in Virginia City at that time, came to me and said +that they had a train of twenty-two wagons some where on the road, +but just where they did not know, and they wished to employ me to +go and pilot it in, as their men with the train were all +inexperienced in that line of business, and not acquainted with +the road, not having been over any part of it before, and they +were afraid that through carelessness they might fall into the +hands of Indians. + +The train was loaded, principally, with flour, bacon, sugar, +coffee and tobacco. Flour was then worth twenty-five dollars per +hundred, bacon forty cents a pound, and other things in +proportion. On the twentieth of September I took two horses and +started off to meet the freight train. + +Three days from the time I left Virginia City I crossed the summit +of the Rocky Mountains and it was snowing hard. I thought it +doubtful whether or not they would be able to cross the mountains +this winter, but I went on, and met them between Fort Hall and +Soda Springs. I gave the wagon-boss a letter which Boon and Bivian +had sent him, and after reading the letter he asked me if I +thought they could cross the range this fall. I told him that it +was about one hundred and eighty miles from there to the summit, +and if he could make that distance in ten days he would be able to +get through, but if not, he could not cross the mountains this +fall. He said it would be impossible to make it in that length of +time, as the cattle were all getting very poor and weak and the +teams very heavily loaded. The next morning I struck out, taking +another man with me, to try and find if possible, another ford on +Snake river some thirty or forty miles above the old crossing, +knowing if I could do that it Would save us two or three days' +travel, and might be the means of our getting across the mountains +that fall. I told the wagon-boss that I would meet him at Fort +Hall, so in company with one other man, I struck straight across +the country for Snake river. The second day about noon we reached +the river, and that afternoon we succeeded in finding a good ford, +which we called the Island ford, there being a little island just +above. + +We camped on Snake river bottom that night, and the next morning +about daybreak we were on our journey for Fort Hall, reaching the +fort one day ahead of the train. Here we waited until the train +arrived. From Fort Hall we struck out for Snake river. This was +all an open country, with the exception of sagebrush. The first +night after leaving the fort snow fell four inches deep on the +valley, and I felt satisfied then that we would not be able to +cross the mountains that winter. The next day the snow all melted +in the valley, but hung low at the foot of the mountains. + +The third day after leaving Fort Hall we reached Snake river, and +were successful in getting across without any mishap whatever. +This new ford is near where Pocatello, Idaho, now stands. The +first night after crossing the river we camped on a little stream, +which I gave the name of Rock creek, and I am told that it is +still known by that name. That night the snow fell one foot deep. +I told the wagon-boss the next morning that he was at his +journey's end for the present fill. We unloaded one wagon and he +took one wagon to haul his camping outfit and provisions for the +winter, and returned to the river bottom for the purpose of +wintering his stock there. Another man and myself went to work to +make two pairs of snow shoes, for which we had to use the side- +boards of a wagon, there being no timber suitable in reach for +that purpose. We were three days preparing for this trip, by which +time the snow had settled. + +All being in readiness the morning of the fourth day in this camp +I, accompanied by two other men started on horseback, one man +going along to bring the horses back, and the other to accompany +me across the mountains. We rode to within ten miles of the summit +of the mountains. Here the snow was nearly two and a half inches +deep. Our horses were unable to get anything to eat except the +branches of quaking asp trees that we cut and carried to them. The +next morning we saddled our horses, one of my companions started +back again, and we mounted our snow shoes and started to climb the +mountain, this being my second attempt to travel on snow shoes. I +was somewhat awkward at this new undertaking, and you can rest +assured that I was tired when I reached the summit of the +mountains, which took the greater part of the day. Each had a pair +of blankets and enough provisions strapped on his back for the +trip. + +After reaching the summit of the mountain and starting down on the +other side we found it much easier traveling. We worked hard all +day and made what we thought to be twelve miles, camping that +night in the fir timber. It was a cold, disagreeable night, with +our one pair of blankets each, we consoled ourselves that it was +much pleasanter than to have been here afoot and alone, and no +blankets at all. The second day's travel after crossing the summit +of this mountain we met a freight train on its return to Salt Lake +City. This train was owned by a man named Goddard. It had been +across the mountains with a load of freight and was returning, +like our train on the opposite side and was unable to proceed +farther, having to return to the low lands for the purpose of +wintering the stock. We abandoned our snow shoes and procured +conveyance to Virginia City. Messrs. Boon and Bivian were glad to +know that their train was safe from the hands of the hostiles, but +they said they would lose ten thousand dollars by not getting it +across the mountains that fall. These men having a room at the +rear of their store where they slept and did their cooking, kindly +proposed that I should stop and winter with them, which hospitable +offer I accepted. + +At this time a stage ran from here to Bannock and from Bannock to +Boise and from Boise to Salt Lake City, and the news was coming in +every day of both stage and train robberies along this line, and +it actually got so bad that it was not at all safe for a man to +step outside of his own door after dark, if it was known that he +had any money. These robbers were known in those days as "road +agents." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +ORGANIZATION OF A VIGILANCE COMMITTEE.--END OF THE NOTORIOUS +SLADE--ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS FOR A "CROW-BAIT" HORSE.--FLOUR A +DOLLAR A POUND. + + +About this time what was known as a vigilance committee was +organized at Virginia City, and other points along the stage line, +for protection against desperadoes. During the winter I was not +out much, and all the news I could get was from persons who came +to the store to trade. + +One morning in the latter part of January I went out after a +bucket of water at daylight, and happening to cast my eyes up a +hillside I could see sentinels walking to and fro I could not +understand it. On returning to the house I mentioned the matter to +Messrs. Boon and Bivian. They smiled and said: "We understand all +that," and they explained the whole thing to me. One of them said: +"There will be some fun to-day," and the other replied: "Yes, a +little hemp-pulling." + +"Yes," responded the other, "that is what I meant." And then--in +our western vernacular--I "tumbled to the racket." + +By the time we had breakfast over people were beginning to come in +to trade, and happening to look down the street I saw forty or +fifty men all well armed come marching up the street in the +direction of the store They marched up to a large gambling house, +called the Shades. There they halted while some of them went in +and returned, bringing with them a man by the name of Jack +Gallagher. + +There was a log cabin immediately across the street with a +fireplace in it, and to this house they marched Gallagher and put +him inside. + +Leaving a strong guard around the cabin, the balance of them +started out as if hunting some one else. In a short time they came +marching another man to the cabin by the name of Boone Helm, who +had one hand tied up. It seemed to comfort Gallagher to know that +he was going to have company on the long trip by the short route, +and "misery likes company." + +The third man was brought in a few minutes later whose name was +Hank Parrish, the fourth and last that day being Clubfoot George. + +They were all placed in the log cabin under a strong guard. + +About the middle of the afternoon the crowd reassembled at the +cabin jail, took the prisoners out, and marched them up the +street. Mr. Boone and I walked down the street by the side of the +crowd, and after they had gone one block, for some reason they +came to a halt, when Boone Helm sang out in the most profane +language he could have uttered, saying: "Hang me if you intend to, +or I will have to go and warm my sore hand." + +They marched on up the street to where there was a new log house +that had been recently built and not yet covered. That had been +prepared for this neck-tie party by placing four dry goods boxes +in a row in the house. The four men were led in and placed on the +boxes and a rope placed around each of their necks thrown over a +joist above and made fast to a sleeper below. + +While they were tying the rope around Jack Gallagher's neck--his +hands already having been tied behind him--a perfect stream of +oaths was pouring from his lips, and about the last words he +uttered were: "I hope to meet you all in the bottomest pits of +hell." These words were uttered not more than a minute before the +box was kicked from under him. + +After this little hanging-bee everything was quiet until near +spring, when there came to town a man by the name of Slade, who +was full of noisy whiskey, and started in to paint the town red. +This man was the same Slade that used to be stage agent on the +Overland road. He was also the same man that in the year 1852 cut +an old man's ears off while he was tied to a snubbing post in a +horse corrall, where he had been taken by the cowardly curs that +were at that time in the employ of Slade simply because he, Jule, +would not vacate the ranch where Julesburg was afterward +established. After severing both ears from his head they shot him +down like a dog while he was tied and helpless. + +While in Virginia City this time Slade made threats against +several people, and during his spree did something, I never knew +just what, and a warrant was sworn out and placed in the hands of +a marshal for his arrest. The marshal found him in a gambling +house, and in some way managed to get him into the court-room +before he suspected anything, not reading the warrant to him until +they were in the court-room. + +When informed that he was under arrest, Slade did not wait to hear +the warrant read, but jerked it from the hands of the officer, +tore it in two, wadded it up in his hands and threw it on the +floor and stamped on it with his foot. Then he turned and walked +out, and was in no wise backward in telling the officer, as well +as the judge of the court, what his opinion was of such +proceedings. + +About the middle of that afternoon the Vigilantes, some twenty in +number, came to where Slade was standing, took him in charge, and +marched him off up the street. I happened to be standing near when +they took him in tow and followed close in the rear while they +were marching him off to the place of execution. I don't think +that he drew three breaths during that time but what he was +pleading for his life. + +He told them after he was on the dry goods box that if they would +release him he would leave the United States just as soon as he +could get away. I have seen men die in various ways, but I never +saw a man die as cowardly as this man Slade. When he found they +were determined he begged and plead for them to let him live until +he could see his wife; he said it was for a business affair. They +did not wait for anything, but as soon as they were ready they +kicked the box from under him, thus ending the life of another of +the worst men that ever lived. + +The awful life of this man is another story that would be too long +to give here. + +It seemed as though as soon as the arrest was made some of Slade's +friends had started to inform his wife, from the fact that just as +they were carrying the body from the gallows to the hotel she was +seen coming across the hill as fast as her horse could carry her. +I was told afterward that had she only got there before the +hanging took place he never would have hanged, for parties that +knew her said that before she would have seen him hanged she would +have shot him herself. I was standing in the hotel where the body +lay when she came in. She stood silently looking at the corpse for +a few minutes, and then turning to the crowd that was standing +around, said: "Will some one tell me who did this?" No one +answering her, she repeated the question, and finally the third +time she repeated the question at the top of her voice. At this I +turned and walked out, and that was the last time I ever saw her. +This was the last hanging we had that winter and spring. + +In the latter days of April Messrs. Boone and Bivian employed me +to cross the mountains and take letters to the wagon-master, and +also to assist him in crossing the Rockies, so taking one pair of +blankets, ten days provisions and a pair of snow shoes on my back +I started afoot and alone across the mountains. The fourth day +after leaving Virginia City I came to the foot of the main divide, +and up to this time I did not have to use my snow shoes. Where I +camped that night the snow was two feet deep, and the next morning +there was a crust on it strong enough to bear me up until I went +six or seven miles farther on, when I commenced to break through. + +Then I put on my snow-shoes, and in a short time I was at the +summit of the mountain. After reaching the top, the country being +open and all down hill, I had fine traveling while the snow +lasted, making a distance of about forty miles that day. Then I +abandoned my snowshoes, and in two days more I was in camp on the +river bottom where the stock had been wintered. + +The wagon-master informed me that he had lost about one-third of +the oxen, which had stampeded and ran off in a storm; also my two +saddle horses, and his one and only saddle horse had gone with the +cattle. He said they had been gone about six weeks, so I struck +out to Fort Hall to try and buy a horse to ride to hunt up the +lost stock. + +I succeeded in buying a very poor excuse of a horse for a hundred +dollars, that under any other circumstances I would not have +accepted as a gracious gift. But it was "Hopkins' choice," that or +none. Mounting my crow-bait, I struck out in a westerly direction +to look for the stock. + +Three days' ride from the fort I struck plenty of cattle sign. +They were apparently heading for Wood river, and after following +their trail about two miles, I discovered two horse tracks, which +convinced me it was the stock I was looking for. The next morning +I found them and the cattle were all there with the exception of +three. One of my horses was there, but the other one was missing, +the wagon-master's horse was also there. I succeeded in catching +my horse and turned loose the one I had bought and left him there +for wolf-bait, provided they would eat him, mounted my saddle +horse, and turned the stock in the direction of camp. It took me +five days to drive them to our camp on the river, making ten days +in all since I had started out. We stayed there three weeks +longer, and the grass being good, by that time the stock was +looking well. + +All this time we were expecting a Mormon train on the other side +would cross over and break the road as they were not loaded, but +not seeing any sign of them, the wagon-boss got tired of waiting, +and hitching up, pulled about twenty miles to the edge of the +snow. + +We were two days making this twenty miles. Here we stopped, but +the wagon-master and I started next morning on foot for the +summit. While we were on the mountain we could hear the other +train coming so we walked on to meet it and see if we could assist +them in any way. They were taking a very wise plan for it; two men +riding ahead on horseback, others were driving about forty head of +loose stock behind them, all followed by the wagons. + +They got to our camp that night about dark. This tram broke the +road in good shape for us, and the following morning the boss put +all of the oxen to half the wagons and pulled across. It took us +nearly all day to get out of the snow on the other side, thereby +taking us three days to cross the mountains. + +I traveled with the train three days after crossing the mountains, +and then I left and rode on to Virginia City, knowing that Boone +and Bivian would be anxious for information. + +This was the first train of the season, and when it arrived flour +was worth one dollar per pound, bacon fifty cents, and everything +else in proportion. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +TWENTY-TWO THOUSAND DOLLARS IN GOLD DUST.--A STAGE ROBBERY.-- +ANOTHER TRIP TO CALIFORNIA.--MEETING WITH GEN. CROOK.--CHIEF OF +SCOUTS AGAIN. + + +After the goods were unloaded and the stock rested up for a few +days, the train was started back to Salt Lake City to load with +flour and bacon. After it had been gone five days Mr. Boone and I +started to follow it, expecting to get to the Mormon city ahead of +the train and have the cargo purchased by the time it would +arrive. + +Mr. Boone took with him on this trip twenty-two thousand dollars +in gold dust, on pack-horses. But in order to get away from +Virginia City with it and not be suspected, we packed up three +horses one night, behind the store, and I started that night with +a pick and shovel tied to each pack, as if I were going +prospecting. I went to where I thought would make a good day's +ride for Boone, and camped. He overtook me the next night, and he +said he would not have had it known how much dust he had with him +for three times that amount. + +We made the trip to Salt Lake all right, however, but in a few +days after we learned that the stage-coach that left Virginia City +at the same time we did was robbed and every passenger killed. +These passengers were seven successful miners that had made all +the money they wanted, or rather what they considered a handsome +little stake, there being eighty thousand dollars in the crowd, +and they were on their way home somewhere in the East. + +The driver was the only one that escaped, he claiming to have +jumped off from the stage. I saw the stage when it came into Salt +Lake City, and it was riddled with bullets and blood spattered all +over the inside of the coach. + +There was a man by the name of Brown driving the stage at that +time, and many people believed, in fact it was the general +impression at the time, that the driver was in with the robbers. +This robbery and massacre occurred in what is known as Beaver +canyon. + +During my stay at Salt Lake there came in from Virginia City a +young man by the name of Richard Hyde, to buy cattle. Mr. Boone +recommended him to me as being a fine young man and very shrewd +for his age. After having some little acquaintance with him and he +had told me his business, also what profit there was in it, he and +I formed a co-partnership for the purpose of buying cattle and +driving them to Virginia City. We bought one hundred and ninety- +two head of all sizes, and by the help of two other men, we drove +them through, losing only five head, which was considered +excellent luck. + +We stopped about ten miles below town, and after setting a price +on our cattle, I remained with them while Mr. Hyde went to look +for buyers. He was gone nearly a week, and when he returned he had +sold nearly all the cattle. We were well pleased with the result +of our venture, and I am told Mr. Hyde kept the business up for +several years until he made an independent fortune, and I am told, +at this writing--1899--that he is somewhere in Iowa doing a large +banking business. + +As soon as the cattle were all delivered and we had settled up, +Mr. Hyde and I struck back for Salt Lake City, he to buy more +cattle, and I on my way to California. + +Near Ogden I fell in with an emigrant train of twenty-two wagons +bound for California. As soon as they learned who I was, having +heard of me back at Fort Kearney, they insisted on my traveling in +company with them, and there being some fine looking young ladies +in the train, I accepted the invitation and joined them. + +These families were from Illinois and Ohio, and I can truthfully +say that I never traveled with or saw a finer crowd of people than +these were, and I never was in a company that I regretted leaving +as I did those people, for they all seemed more like brothers and +sisters to me than strangers. + +The majority of them bought small farms in Solano county, +California, and settled down. I remained with them until after the +holidays, then left and struck out for San Francisco. This was the +beginning of the year 1865. + +After remaining in the city a few days I concluded one day to take +a ride out to the fort and see if any of my acquaintances were +there. I only found one person that I had been acquainted with +before, and that was Capt. Miller. He showed me a number of +letters from his brother officers out in Arizona, all saying they +were having a great deal of trouble with the Indians in that +country. I returned to the city, bought two more horses and +commenced making preparations to go to Fort Yuma by way of Los +Angeles. + +The day before I was to start I was walking down Sampson street +near the American Exchange Hotel, where I was stopping while in +the city, when I heard a voice across the street that sounded +familiar, say, "Hello chief." I looked around and who should I see +but George Jones, who was then coming on a run to me; and you can +rest assured that I was glad to see him, as it had been nine years +since I had met him. He told me of his trip back to Fort Klamath +the time that he accompanied me to San Francisco and returned with +the mail; of the hardships that he underwent on his way back, and +also his various speculations after leaving the service and said +that it seemed that everything he turned his hand to went against +him. + +I told him my intention was to go to Arizona and secure a position +as scout, and he at once made up his mind to go with me, and it is +useless to say that I was well pleased with his decision from the +fact that when he was with me I always knew just what to depend +on. + +It was in the fore part of February when we started on this long +and tedious trip, and we made up our minds to take our time to it. +From here we went to Los Angeles, and there we stayed four days to +let our horses rest, and while there we lived principally on +fruit. + +From Los Angeles to Fort Yuma it is called five hundred and fifty +miles and the greater part of the way it is over a desert country. +From Los Angeles we struck across the Mojave desert, crossing the +extreme south end of Death Valley to avoid the sand desert, and +made our way to the Colorado river without any mishap, but +sometimes having to ride as much as forty miles without water for +our horses. + +When we struck the river we traveled down on the north side until +just below the mouth of the Gila we crossed the Colorado, where +Jim Beckwith and I had crossed a number of years before. We had +not gone far after crossing the Colorado when we came to the Yuma +Indians, spoken of before as not wearing any clothing. Here George +Jones declared that he had gone far enough, saying he had found a +place that he had been looking for for a long time where people +did not have to wear clothing nor till the soil for a living. And +he added: "This is good enough for me." + +The next day at noon after crossing the river we reached Fort +Yuma. We rode up to the guard and asked if Lieut. Jackson was +stationed at this fort. The guard replied that he was, and +directed me to his quarters. I walked up to his door and rapped. +He came to the door, but did not recognize me as my hair had grown +out long and my beard was all over my face, but in his usual +kindly way he asked what he could do for us. I asked him if my +friend and I could get our dinner. + +By this time his wife had recognized my voice and came to the +door, and as she was approaching him he asked if she could let +those two gentlemen have their dinner. + +"Why, Lieutenant, don't you know who that is you are talking to?" +she said. "I do not," he replied. "Why," said she, "that is the +boy scout." + +It is useless to say that we were taken in to dinner and our +horses taken care of, and while at the dinner table I told the +Lieutenant our business there. I told him that I had come there +with the intention of getting a position as chief of scouts, and +that I would not accept a position unless my friend Mr. Jones +could get a place with me. He told me that he had no doubt but +that we would both be able to get a position, as they had lost +five scouts inside of the last month. + +After dinner Lieut. Jackson excused himself, and telling us to +remain at his quarters until he returned, he took a walk to the +General's quarters. He returned in about an hour, saying Gen. +Crook wished to see us both at once at his quarters, and we, in +company with the Lieutenant, walked over to the General's tent, +and to my astonishment, I was introduced as Capt. Drannan. + +The General's orderly and the officer of the day were both in his +room and he told them he wished to speak to us on private +business, and they at once withdrew. Then the General commenced to +question me in regard to fighting Indians, and I did nothing for +the next two hours but answer questions. + +Like all other successful officers, he did not want any dead-heads +around him, and I presume that is why Gen. Crook was such a +successful Indian fighter. + +He requested us to call at his quarters at nine o'clock the next +morning, after which he called his orderly and told him to show us +quarters for the night and also to care for our horses. That +evening while George was away looking after our horses I was +taking a stroll around the fort, when by chance I met Gen. Crook +taking his evening walk, and he asked me what I knew about this +friend of mine. I told how I had seen him tried on various +occasions and that I had never seen any signs of his weakening +yet. I also told him that if I accepted a position as scout, I +wanted George Jones with me, for I knew that I could depend on him +under any and all circumstances. The General told me that he had +been having very hard luck this summer, having lost all his best +scouts by their falling in the hands of the Apaches. He also told +me that he had one scout that fell into their hands and was burned +at the stake. The next morning at nine o'clock Jones and I were on +hand at the General's quarters. The first question he asked me was +on what conditions I wished to go to work and what I expected per +month. I told him that heretofore what scouting I had done I had +gone as an independent scout, and that I would go to work under no +other conditions. + +He asked me what I meant by an independent scout. I said I meant +so much per month, rations for myself and horse, and all horses I +captured from the Indians to be my own. If I don't suit you, you +can tell me so and I will quit, and when you don't suit me I will +call for my money and quit at once. + +He said that was fair enough, but I told him that I would not go +to work under any consideration unless my friend Mr. Jones could +have employment too. + +I hired to Gen. Crook for one hundred and twenty-five dollars per +month, to go to work the following morning. After the bargain was +made the General said to me: "You must bear in mind that you're in +a different country now to what you have been accustomed to +working in, and altogether a different climate as well." He +proposed sending a man with me that he said was thoroughly posted +in the country, knowing every watering place, as well as the +different runways of the Indians in the whole, country, and he +added that he would not expect any benefit from us for at least +ten days, as it would take this man that length of time to show us +over the country. + +At this I withdrew from the General's quarters, and he and George +soon made a bargain. George was to receive seventy-five dollars +per month. The balance of the day was spent in making preparations +for our prospecting tour, as we termed it. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +FIND SOME MURDERED EMIGRANTS.--WE BURY THE DEAD AND FOLLOW AND +SCALP THE INDIANS.--GEN. CROOK IS PLEASED WITH THE OUTCOME.--A +MOJAVE BLANKET. + + +The following morning I ordered ten days' rations for three of us. +When we were ready to start Gen. Crook called me aside and told me +the nature of the man who was to accompany us, saying that there +was not a watering place nor an Indian trail in the whole +territory that he did not know, and said he: "If you don't see any +Indians or fresh sign of Indians he will show you all over the +country. But he is the scariest man of Indians you ever saw in +your life." + +This man's name was Freeman. When we were ready to start Freeman +asked me what course I wished to take. I told him that I would +like to go in the direction that we would be the most likely to +find Apaches. I pointed in the direction of a range of mountains, +telling him that by ascending them he would be able to show me +where the different watering places were in the valley by land +marks, and we struck out southeast from the fort in the direction +of the middle fork of the Gila river. The first night we camped on +what was then called the Butterfield route, some thirty-five or +forty miles from the fort. This season there were a great many +emigrants passing over this route from Texas and Arkansas to +California, and Gen. Crook said the Apaches were giving them much +trouble on this part of the road, and if they continued to be so +bad he would have to send one or two companies of soldiers out +there for the protection of the emigrants. The second morning out +we passed a ranch owned by a man named Davis, who had lived there +two years. He told me that the Apaches had never given him any +trouble from the fact that he had gotten the good will of the +chief when he first went there by giving him numerous little +presents of different kinds. + +He told me that although isolated from the world, he was doing +well, from the fact that most all of the people passing there +patronized him. This family was from Indiana. After I had told him +who I was and what would be my business, he insisted on my staying +over night with him when convenient, saying that it would not cost +me a cent. Thanking him for his hospitable offer, we rode on, +keeping the Butterfield route. Late that afternoon we met a train +of sixteen wagons on the way to California. The people told us +that the day before they had seen where five wagons had just been +burned. I asked how far it was, and they thought it was twenty- +five miles from where we met them. When we heard of this we pushed +on, thinking there might be some dead bodies there and that we +could bury them. On arriving at the scene, sure enough we found +three dead bodies two hundred and fifty yards from the burned +wagons; one of them being that of an old man, and the others, two +boys twelve and fourteen years of age. The Indians had not +stripped the bodies nor mutilated them, only they were all filled +with arrows. The dead bodies were all dressed in home-made jeans. +We found a few pieces of wagon boxes that had not been burned and +dug as good a grave as we could in the sand, giving them as good a +burial as we could under the circumstances. This being done, we +took the trail of the Indians, which led off in a south-westerly +direction. I felt confident that it had been at least three days +since this depredation had been committed. My object in following +them up was to see if we could get any evidence of white prisoners +in their camp. For the first ten or fifteen miles they kept on the +roughest, rockiest ground they could find, all of which led me to +believe they had expected to be followed. The next morning we came +to where they had made their first camp. All the evidence we could +see of white prisoners in their charge was a few pieces of calico +torn up and scattered around their camp-ground. We followed the +trail until we came to where they had made their second camp, and +here we found the waists of two women's dresses, one being +somewhat larger than the other. The two dress waists we took along +with us. Here the Indians had changed their course somewhat, and +our guide said in the direction of their main village, but I did +not consider myself well enough posted to go too near their main +village. I told the guard to lead us off south of west from Fort +Yuma, which he did, and late that afternoon we saw six Indians +traveling east, and I told the boys that they were scouts for the +main band and that they were going out to look for emigrants. When +we first got sight of them they were traveling up an open valley. +I told the boys that we would keep a close watch of them, and if +they should camp alone we would have their scalps before morning; +but just one look from Freeman and I was convinced that he did not +approve of this scheme. George said to him: "You can take care of +the horses can't you, and if everything is favorable, Cap and I +can take care of the Indians." Late in the afternoon I told them +what course to travel, and taking advantage of the ground, I +pushed on to see the Indians go into camp. When I started the +guide told me there was water about a mile above where the Indians +were, and that they were pulling for it. He said there was a fine +spring of water in a little bunch of timber, and that the Indians +always camped there when they were going to and from their hunting +ground. Sure enough, when they came to this little grove they all +dismounted and turned their horses loose entirely, then commenced +to roast their antelope meat for supper. I hurried back to meet my +companions, and we succeeded in getting within a quarter of a mile +of the Indians. By this time it was getting dark. + +We picketed our horses and sat down to eat our cold lunch, after +which we started down to the camp, but were very cautious how we +traveled. When in sight of the camp-fire we could see them all +plainly sitting around it. We lay silent and watched them and +their movements. In a few minutes two of them got up and went out +to where their horses were and drove them all up together to less +than one hundred yards of where we lay. It was so dark we could +not see them, but could hear them talking very distinctly. After +having rounded their horses up together they returned to the fire. +Thinking they would lie down in a short time, for they did not +seem to suspect any trouble that night, we started to crawl down +to their camp, all abreast. After our guide, Freeman, found that I +was determined to attack them he seemed to muster up courage and +come right to the front like a man. My object in crawling near +their camp so soon was to see in just what position they lay +before the fire went out, and when the last one laid down we were +within fifty yards of them. I told the boys we had a soft thing of +it, for each of us had two revolvers and a good knife, and the +Indians were all lying close together with their feet towards the +fire. I told them we would wait two hours as near as we could +guess the time and then they would be asleep; that then we would +crawl up and send them to their happy hunting-ground. After +waiting until we thought they were asleep we crawled down to their +camp, again all three abreast, George on my right and Freeman on +my left; and so we drew near, their fire had not gone entirely +out, and a little breeze now and then would cause it to blaze up +just enough so that we were able to get their exact positions. I +told the boys to watch me and when I raised to my feet for both to +raise and draw both revolvers as we would then be right at their +heads, and for each man to stick the muzzle of each of his pistols +to an Indian's head and fire; George to take the two on my right +and Freeman the two on toy left, and I to take the two in the +middle, and after firing each man was to jump back two jumps, so +in case one of us should miss one of his men that we would be out +of their reach, thereby enabling us to get all of them without +taking any chances ourselves. + +George said that at the first click of his pistol one of his men +raised up in a sitting position, and he only got one the first +shot. Freeman and I each got our two Indians the first shot; but +George having both his eyes on one, the other rose to his feet. +George and I took two shots each at this other Indian before we +could get him down. It was mostly guess work, for it was so dark +that we could scarcely see him. + +As soon as we were satisfied that we had all of them we started +out to look for their horses, but it was so dark that we could not +find them, so we found our way back to where our own horses were. +Freeman and I laid down to rest, while George got on a horse and +kept circling the camp so as not to let any of the horses get away +during the night. He kept this up until the morning star arose, +and seeing that all the horses were there, laid down to rest. As +soon as it was beginning to get light Freeman and I arose, started +a fire, and sat around until after sun-up, when we got breakfast, +made some coffee and then called George, and all enjoyed a good +square meal once more. + +After breakfast we scalped our Indians and found that we had eight +good half-breed horses and a number of good horse-hair robes. I +asked our guide how far we were from Fort Yuma and he said +straight through it was one hundred and twenty miles, but the way +that we would have to go it would be at least one hundred and +fifty miles. I concluded we had better pull out for the fort so +Freeman and myself rode ahead and George followed up the rear, +driving the loose horses. We did not see any more Indian sign that +day. Late in the evening I was riding along when I ran on to a +young antelope. I shot him and we had fresh meat for supper for +the first time since we left the fort. The next day we crossed a +big Indian trail going east. The trail looked to be about two days +old, but as our rations were beginning to run short we did not +attempt to follow them, but pushed on to the fort, making as good +time as possible, returning on the eleventh day from the time we +started out. + +I reported our success to the General. He was well pleased with +the result of the trip, and when I reported the burying of the +dead bodies, he thought we had better return to the spot, taking +with us some good coffins, and give them a more decent burial, but +on consulting the doctor, concluded in that extraordinarily hot +climate it would be utterly impossible to bury them after so long +a time, and the idea was abandoned. + +I showed the two dress waists that I had found at the Apache camp +to the General, also to Mrs. Jackson, but we never got any +information of any white prisoners being taken there at that time. + +The General was pleased to see the Indian scalps, as he said they +were the first scalps that had been brought in for two months. + +Gen. Crook now made up his mind at once to send Lieut. Jackson out +on the road with two companies of cavalry, and George Jones and +myself were to accompany them as scouts. + +When we were ready to start Lieut. Jackson asked me if I didn't +want more scouts, but I told him that I thought we could get along +this trip with what we had. + +We took the Butterfield route and followed that road until we were +in the St. Louis mountains. This seemed to be at that time, a +favorite part of the country for the Apaches to commit their +depredations upon emigrants. We traveled very slowly as we had to +pack our entire outfit on burros, and our saddle horses having to +live altogether on grass, consequently we could not hurry. Early +in the morning of the sixth day of that trip George and I started +out in advance of the command, one to the right and the other to +the left of the road, and if neither of us should see any signs of +Indians we were to meet at the crossing of a certain stream only a +few miles ahead of the command; and in the event of either of us +arriving at the stream and waiting half an hour and the other did +not make his appearance, he was to return at once with his force +of scouts to the command. On arriving at the appointed spot and +finding that George and his assistants were not there, we waited +until we were convinced he was not coming and at once returned to +the command. + +On our return we learned that shortly after starting out that +morning George had run on to a big Indian trail. Supposing it to +be the same band of Indians whose trail we had crossed when +returning from our other trip, he had reported to the command at +once, and the trail being fresh, he, taking four other men, had +started in pursuit, leaving word with Lieut. Jackson for me not to +be uneasy about him nor attempt to follow him, but to remain with +the command until I heard from him again. + +While Lieut. Jackson was yet talking relative to the matter, I +received a message from George saying that he had the Indians +located some five miles from the road and wanted me to come and +look the ground over before the command should start. + +I at once mounted, and piloted by the man who had brought the +message to me, rode to where George was. On arriving there I found +the Indians so situated that it was impossible to ascertain the +number from the fact that in this extraordinarily warm climate the +Indians do not use any wick-i-ups or lodges, so that the only +method by which we could make an estimate of their number was by +counting the number of fires they had end calculate each fire to +represent a certain number of Indians, this being our method of +estimating them when in wick-i-ups, we reckoned their number to be +one hundred and fifty. + +Where these Indians were camped it would be utterly impossible to +make an attack without being discovered long before reaching them, +they being in a large valley. + +After a thorough examination of the camp and surroundings by +looking through a glass, we concluded that the best plan would be +to return to the command and have it move up to within two miles +of the Indians and remain there until after dark, then leave it to +the Lieutenant whether he should make the attack on foot or +horseback. + +I remained to watch the movements of the Indians and see whether +they were reinforced during the day and to report at dark, George +returning to the command. The soldiers moved up that evening to +within two miles of the Indian camp I remained at my post until it +was so dark that I could not see through my glasses any longer, +when I mounted my horse and rode to the command, having made no +new discoveries. After explaining the situation as nearly as I +could, the Lieutenant concluded to make the attack on foot some +time between midnight and daylight the next morning, and to attack +them from two sides at the same time. + +The Lieutenant taking half the men and making the long march, +which would be about one and a half miles farther than the others +would have to march, leaving his orderly sergeant in charge of the +other half of the command. I piloted the Lieutenant and George +piloted the orderly. Here Lieut. Jackson invented some new style +of signal to what I had seen before, by taking a tea cup and +pouring powder in it and when he was ready to make the charge he +was to set the powder on fire, which would make a flash, and in +case the orderly was ready, he was to signal the Lieutenant in the +same manner. + +We made the circuit and marched up to within one hundred yards of +the Indians, but could not make the attack until near daylight, +the Lieutenant thinking it was so dark that the soldiers were in +danger of killing each other, which was all perfectly true. + +When the time arrived for the attack, which was just at daybreak, +the Lieutenant gave his signal, which was answered at once by the +orderly, and the Lieutenant led the way by going in advance of the +force, and I think it was the quickest fight I ever saw. I did not +count the Indians that were killed myself, but was told that there +were between 190 and 200 found dead on the battlefield. They +seemed to raise up as fast as the soldiers would cut them down, +and I think there were two cut down with the sabres where one was +shot. As soon as the battle was over, or when we could not find +any more Indians to kill, George and I got our horses as quick as +we could and went out after our horses, but they had taken fright +at the firing and were scattered all over the country. That +evening the Lieutenant moved back to the road at the head of a +nice little valley where there were plenty of fine grass and good +water, saying that he would make this his headquarters as long as +he was out on this road. + +The Lieutenant having five men wounded in this engagement, he +wanted some one to carry a dispatch to headquarters requesting the +General to forward an ambulance, and George Jones being a light +man who could stand the ride better than any one in the crowd, the +Lieutenant chose him to make the ride. It took us five days to +come from Fort Yuma, and George took three horses and made the +round trip in seven and one-half days. We remained here in this +camp something like three months, but did not have another fight +of any consequence with the Indians during our stay in this place. +The Apaches quit their work in this portion of the country, thus +enabling the emigrants to pass unmolested. In about one week after +George Jones had returned from his trip to headquarters, Lieut. +Jackson, George and myself went out around the foot of the +mountain on a scouting tour. We were riding in sight of each +other, when the Lieutenant signaled us to come to where he was. +On arriving there he told us to keep our eyes on a certain ridge +and we would see a little band of Indians rise over the top of the +hill in a few minutes, saying he had just got sight of them while +crossing the ridge beyond but could not tell just how many there +were. + +We secreted ourselves in a little thicket of timber where we would +be concealed from their view, and in a few minutes they hove in +sight. We counted them and found that there were eleven of them. +Lieut. Jackson said to me: "Cap, shall we try them a whirl or +not?" I said: "Lieutenant, I will leave that with you. If you feel +like it we will give them a round." The Lieutenant said: "All +right. I want to try my mare anyway and see if she is any good or +not." + +He was riding a mare of fine breeding, as black as a coal and as +fleet an animal as there was in the whole command. By this time +the Indians had crossed over the ridge and were then traveling up +a little ravine, and by keeping ourselves secreted they would +cross the ridge near us. Just as they turned over the ridge +referred to, we were to make the charge. I was riding a roan horse +that I had bought in San Francisco that could run like a deer, for +when in this business I would not ride a horse that was not swift, +but I never had him in an engagement of this kind. Being very +hard-mouthed, I thought he was liable to run away with me, and I +did not know whether he would run in the opposite direction or +after the Indians. The Lieutenant and Geo. Jones said that if he +would only run after the Indians they would follow me up closely. + +As soon as the last Indian had passed over the ridge out of sight +we made a charge, and that black mare went like she was shot out +of a cannon. The Indians were all armed with bow and arrows, but +they did not attempt to use them. They did not suspect anything +wrong until they heard the clatter of our horses' feet within a +few yards of them and when they turned to look back we all had our +revolvers ready and turned loose to firing and yelling, and for +the next half mile we had a lively race. I had thought up to that +time that there wasn't a man on the plains or in the Rocky +Mountains that could beat me shooting with a pistol while on the +run, but I must confess that Lieut. Jackson on his black mare +could shoot more Indians in the same length of time than any +person I was ever out with, and it seemed that as fast as the +Lieutenant would shoot one Indian down his mare would turn and +take after the next nearest. The Lieutenant fired six shots and +killed five Indians and wounded the sixth one, while riding at +full speed, and in this country in places the sage brush is waist +high to a man. In this engagement I got four Indians, having to +shoot one Indian three times before I got him down, and George Jones +killed three. Not one of them escaped. Lieut. Jackson said he +could not see why it was that they did not offer to defend +themselves, when they had four to one to start with, for the +Apaches have always been considered the bravest tribe of Indians +in the entire West, and they had been known at different times to +fight soldiers man to man. The last Indian I killed was beyond +doubt the best horseman I had ever seen among the Indians, for he +was first on one side of his horse and then on the other. It +seemed as though he could almost turn under the horses belly while +on the dead run, and he would swing himself around under his +breast, rendering it almost impossible to deal him a fatal shot, +for he frisked around so fast that a person could not get a bead +on him. + +We arrived at camp that evening just at dark. During our absence a +train of emigrants consisting of twenty-one wagons had camped near +our quarters. They wanted an escort of twenty or twenty-five men +to accompany them to Fort Yuma, which they were willing to board +free of charge while on the trip. + +Those emigrants were from Dallas, Texas, and apparently well-to-do +people. On learning that the Lieutenant was out on a scouting +tour, they prepared a nice supper for the three of us. The +following morning the Lieutenant detailed twenty men in charge of +a sergeant, to escort the emigrants to Fort Yuma. George Jones +went along as a scout and I remained with the command. They were +ten days making the trip, as the emigrants having ox teams, +traveled slowly. On the return of the escort the Lieutenant +concluded to move some fifty miles south on this road, where we +made our headquarters while we remained in this section of +country, being on a tributary of the Grand river, which runs down +through the western part of New Mexico. + +One day while I was out on a scouting tour I ran on to a little +band of Navajo Indians on their way to the St. Louis Mountains for +a hunt. They had some blankets with them of their own manufacture, +and being confident that the Lieutenant had never seen a blanket +of that kind, I induced them to go with me to our quarters to show +their blankets to the Lieutenant and others as well. I told the +Lieutenant that he could carry water in one of those all day and +it would not leak through. We took one of them, he taking two +corners and I two, and the third man poured a bucket of water in +the center of it, and we carried it twenty rods and the water did +not leak through it. The Lieutenant asked how long it took to make +one of them, and the Indian said it took about six months. He +bought a blanket for five dollars, being about all the silver +dollars in the command. The blanket had a horse worked in each +corner, of various colors, also a man in the center with a spear +in his hand. How this could be done was a mystery to all of us, as +it contained many colors and showed identically the same on both +sides. + +By this time our three months' supply was running short, and +Lieut. Jackson commenced making preparations to return to +headquarters with his entire command. We pulled out for the fort, +and did not see an Indian or even a fresh track on our way. + +When we arrived at the fort and Lieut. Jackson made his report +Gen. Crook was more than pleased with the success we had met, and +I succeeded in getting George's wages raised from seventy-five to +one hundred dollars per month, unbeknown to him. + +It was now in the fall of the year, and the General decided to +send us back again with two companies of cavalry and one company +of infantry, calculated more for camp and guard duty than for +actual service. + +After we had rested up a month or such a matter the General had +six or eight mule teams rigged up, also fifty burros for pack +animals, and started Lieut. Jackson back again with three hundred +soldiers. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX. + +A WICKED LITTLE BATTLE.--CAPTURE OF ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTY-TWO +HORSES.--DISCOVERY OF BLACK CANYON.--FORT YUMA AND THE PAY MASTER. + + +We traveled very slowly and cautiously, and at the foot of the +mountains, one hundred and fifty miles from Fort Yuma, we met a +freight train from Santa Fe loaded with flour and bacon, +principally, bound for Tombstone, Arizona. This train was owned by +a man named Pritchett; but he was generally known as "Nick in the +Woods." His party had had a fight with the Indians in the +mountains the third day before we met him, and he had lost several +mules killed and two of his teamsters were wounded. He informed us +that the mountains were swarming with Indians, so the Lieutenant +sent one company ahead of the command, George Jones and I going as +scouts. + +The advance company was under command of an orderly sergeant, who +was instructed that if we met no Indians before reaching our old +quarters we were to stay there until the command came up. On the +third evening, just as our company was going into camp, and Jones +and I were taking a survey from the hill near by, we saw a band of +Indians coming leisurely along and evidently bound for the same +camp ground that the soldiers were. Jones hurried down to inform +the sergeant of the situation, I tarrying long enough to become +positively convinced that the reds might get their camp fixings +mixed with ours. So I put spurs to my horse and rode down to camp +as quickly as I could. During this time the sergeant was flying +around like a chicken with his head cut off to have his company +ready to meet the Indians, and he barely had time to get his men +all mounted when the reds came in sight, not forty rods away. +George and I had ridden our horses very hard all day, consequently +took no hand in this engagement, but rode to the top of a little +hill close by where we could see the whole affair. + +In this fight the Apaches showed their blood by standing their +ground better than any Indians I have ever seen in a battle. They +did not offer to retreat until the soldiers were right up among +them, there being some sixty Indians and one hundred soldiers. + +This was beyond doubt the wickedest little battle I had ever +witnessed, but it did not last long. In the engagement three +soldiers were killed and five wounded, and nine horses killed and +nine wounded. There were twenty-seven good Indians left on the +battle-field, and none of the Indian horses were captured. Those +that the Indians did not drive away took fight and ran after them. + +The soldiers followed until after dark, but did not find any more +dead Indians. We remained in this camp until the Lieutenant came +up with his command. He regretted that he did not come on himself +ahead of the command, thinking that had he been there the result +would have been quite different. + +On his arrival he made a detail of eight men to assist in +scouting, informing them that they were relieved of all guard +duties while serving in that capacity, which is a great relief to +a soldier, especially when in an Indian country. I was appointed +captain or chief of scouts and George my first assistant The +Lieutenant selected what he thought to be the best men he had in +his command and they afterwards proved themselves to be just what +he had expected. On starting out I did not make any reserve of +scouts, but sent four with George and took the other four with me. + +The fourth day after starting, about noon, I saw a band of Indians +in camp ten miles from the Lieutenant's quarters. I knew this to +be a new camp, as I had been over the same ground only two days +previous. The Indians were camped in a valley nearly a mile wide +that had not a stick of timber on it, except the few small willows +that grew along the little rill that ran through the valley, +consequently I could not get close enough to ascertain the number +of the Indians until after dark. In the meantime I telegraphed the +Lieutenant to hold his men in readiness or to move on at once as +he thought best. + +As soon as he received my message he mounted two companies of +cavalry and pushed on to the place where I had told the messenger +to meet me on his return. + +While the messenger went to headquarters, in company with one of +my scouts I went down near the Indian camp to try to ascertain if +possible their number, leaving the other two scouts in charge of +the horses. The only way we could get at the number was to count +the fires and make an estimate in that way. The Indians seemed to +be nervous and much disturbed that night from some cause; +continually little squads of them would walk from one fire to +another. After we had crawled around something like two hours and +made our estimate, we returned to our horses and comrades, and I +never was more surprised in my life than when I got back and met +Lieut. Jackson there with his command, for I did not think +sufficient time had passed for him to come that distance. I sat +down and explained the lay of the ground as best I could, nothing +being in the way except the little creek that carried the water +across the valley, and I told him that about one hundred and fifty +yards below the Indian camp the horses would be able to jump it. I +also told them that I estimated their number at two hundred. + +The Lieutenant said: "I think I will attack them at once," and +asked me if I had their horses located. I told him I had. He then +gave orders for all of the men to muffle their spurs, and he asked +me to take my four men and as soon as the charge was made to make +a dash for the horses, cut them off and stampede them. So we made +the start, my scouts and I on the extreme right of their entire +command. The Lieutenant had explained to the command that he would +give the word in an undertone, each corporal to take it up, and +they also had orders to hold their sabres up in a way that they +could not make any noise. Being good starlight that night, one +could see fairly well. We rode within less than one hundred yards +of the Indian camp before the word was given to charge. When we +were in sight of the horses we raised the yell and they all +started, and we did not let them stop until at headquarters the +next morning at daybreak. At this haul we got one hundred and +eighty-two horses. + +The Lieutenant returned with his command at ten o'clock the same +morning, and he told me that he didn't think a dozen Indians +escaped. + +In this engagement he did not lose a man, and only a few were +wounded, but five horses were hurt, and those he had killed after +returning to headquarters, claiming that in this warm climate, +where the flies were so bad, it took too much attention to cure +them. + +The two days following were days of rest with us, very little +being done in the way of scouting. On the morning of the third day +after the battle, George and his force went out to make a tour +around the camp, and Lieut. Jackson, myself and four scouts went +out to try to kill some deer, as we were getting very hungry for +fresh meat, having been so long on bacon that we were all sick and +tired of it. That day we killed four deer, and that night we +camped six miles from our quarters. The next morning the +Lieutenant sent to headquarters for ten pack animals, and we +remained to hunt. In two days we killed all the game we could pack +to camp on the ten animals. On our return the Lieutenant said to +me: "This part we will have to keep to ourselves, for if we tell +the General that we were out hunting and spent three days on the +trip he would swear until everything around would turn blue." + +After this we made two and three day scouting trips. While out on +one of these, I found where the Apache stronghold was; down in a +deep canyon, which since then has been known as Black canyon. From +all appearance the greater part of the tribe was there. This +canyon was tributary to the Colorado, and the hardest place to get +into I have ever seen in the Rocky Mountains. + +After making as good an investigation as the surroundings would +permit, I returned with my scouts to the command to report. In +making my report I said: "Lieutenant, I cannot half describe that +canyon to you, for it is beyond any doubt the blackest looking +place I have ever seen in all my travels." I told the Lieutenant +that I would like to have him go with me and view the place before +he moved his command. The canyon was fifty miles from our +quarters. That same night George Jones returned with his four +scouts, and the morning following we started out with the entire +scout force, taking four days' rations with us. On the morning of +the second day we came in sight of the canyon. The Lieutenant took +a good look at it through his glasses, after which he said: +"Captain, I think you named it well when you called it a Black +canyon, for it looks as if it would be impossible to enter it on +horseback." That day and the next was spent in trying to find +where the Indians entered the canyon, and we at last discovered +that they entered it from the east and west with horses, by +descending a very abrupt mountain, and they were strung up and +down the canyon for five miles. After the Lieutenant had made +examinations of the location we started back to headquarters. + +The Lieutenant and I fell back to the rear in order to have a +private conversation relative to the situation. He said: "To be +honest with you, I don't think it safe to go in there with less +than two thousand soldiers, especially at this time of the year. +If the Indians are as strong as they look to be, and have the +advantage of the ground that they seem to have, it would only be +sport for them to lie behind those rocks and shoot the soldiers +down as fast as they could enter the canyon. This is the first +time I ever went out hunting Indians, found them, and had to go +away and let them alone. To tell the truth, I don't know what to +do, for if I report to the General he will come at once with all +his forces and accomplish nothing when here." + +The Black canyon is in the northwest corner of Arizona, where it +joins on to California and Nevada. Since that time there have been +more soldiers killed in that place than in all the balance of +Arizona territory. + +After he had thought the matter over for a day or so he decided to +move the command up near Black canyon, catch small parties out +from there, and try in that manner to weaken them, or he might +succeed in drawing them out, and in that way be able to get a +fight out of them on something like fair ground. But in this the +Lieutenant was very much disappointed, for they were too smart to +come out. + +George Jones and myself, each with our company of scouts, started +out to locate some place suitable for headquarters, with +instructions that anywhere within twenty miles would be +satisfactory. I was out six days but did not find what I +considered a suitable location. Jones was more successful. Within +about ten miles of the canyon he found what he thought to be a +suitable location, but said it would be impossible to get to the +place with wagons. So the wagons were corralled and left at our +present location in charge of a sergeant, with thirty infantrymen. + +Loading the entire pack train, we started for Howard's Point, that +being the name George had given the new camp. + +Upon arrival at our new camp the Lieutenant put out pickets all +around camp one mile away, keeping them there day and night while +we remained. The scouts for the next six weeks were almost worked +to death, without accomplishing much of anything, from the fact +that we were too close to the main body of Indians to catch them +in small squads, for in going out to hunt they would not go into +camp until twenty or thirty miles from their headquarters, and our +plan was to catch them in camp and attack them either in the night +or just at daybreak in the morning. + +One morning after being here ten days, the whole scout force +started in two squads, with the understanding that we keep in +about one mile of each other, so that if one squad should +encounter a band of Indians the other could come to the relief. + +After traveling about ten miles we heard shots in the direction +where I knew George was with his four assistants, and turning in +that direction, we put our horses down to their best speed, and +were soon at the scene of action, but owing to the roughness of +the ground we could not make as good time as we desired. When in +sight of the contestants I saw that George was on foot, a comrade +on each side of him, and they were firing as fast as they could +load and shoot. He had run into those Indians, about twenty in +number, hid in the rocks, and they had opened fire on the scouts, +killing two of his men the first shot, and shooting George's horse +from under him, leaving him afoot. When we arrived I ordered my +men to dismount and take to the rocks, leaving the horses to take +care of themselves, as the Indians were on foot and we could make +better time in that immediate vicinity than we could on our +horses. We had a hot little fight, but succeeded in driving the +savages back. After the battle was over we tied our dead comrades +on one horse and packed them to camp, changing off with George and +the scout whose horse the dead bodies were tied on, letting them +ride our horses part of the time. That night we dug graves and +gave the two comrades as decent a burial as circumstances would +permit. George felt very sorry over losing the two scouts because +they were in his charge, but he was not to blame in the least. + +In this little battle we got six Indians, and they killed two of +our men and three horses. Lieut. Jackson thought it would now be +advisable to increase the number of scouts and have a sufficient +force together to be able to protect ourselves, for we were to +remain here a month longer, and if in that time we were not able +in some way to get at the Indians we would return to the fort and +wait until spring. + +Two weeks later I was out on a scouting tour when I saw a small +band of Indians coming out of Black canyon and making their way +westward. When they were within ten miles of our headquarters I +got to count them, finding there were forty in the band, all on +foot. I decided that they had started on a hunt and I would keep +my eye on them to see where they would camp for the night. By this +time I had all the water in this region located, and when I would +see a band of Indians late in the evening I could tell about where +they would camp. + +As soon as I had decided where those would camp I telegraphed to +Lieut. Jackson the situation. Where these Indians camped was +within six miles of our quarters, but a miserable place to enter +with horses, but I thought we could ride within a mile of the +place on horseback. + +The Lieutenant, however, was well acquainted with the ground, and +as soon as he read my message he mounted his cavalrymen and +started, and met me within a mile of the Indian camp. Dismounting, +he and his men started on foot to the camp, and he told the +soldiers to walk lightly, and when in sight of the camp to get +down and crawl, but to be very careful not to break a limb or +twig. I was very much disappointed in not getting to see this +fight, for after I had sent my message to headquarters my horse +fell with me and dislocated my right knee. + +Lieut. Jackson said that he had never seen Indians fight harder in +the dark than they did. He had three to their one, and said if it +had been daylight he thought they would have held the soldiers in +check for some little time. He did not think that he got all of +them. In this action he lost--two men killed and seven wounded, +two of whom died afterwards from their wounds. + +I was laid up for a month with my knee, having to go on crutches +most of the time, and it has given me more or less trouble since, +even up to the present time. After we had arrived at our +headquarters the Lieutenant concluded that as it was getting late, +we had better move in the direction of the fort, and we started, +making ten miles a day, and keeping out a strong force of scouts, +thinking they might be able while in the mountains to capture +small bands of hunting Apaches, but no more Indians were seen. + +When we were out of the mountains we doubled our distance, making +about twenty miles a day. Having no other way to travel than on +horseback, my knee swelled badly, and when we got to Mr. Davis' +ranch, which was forty miles from Fort Yuma, I had to stop and +rest a few days. This was, however, a very desirable place for an +unmarried man to stop, for Mr. Davis had some young daughters who +were very attractive. I remained there a week, until I got the +swelling reduced in my leg, and Mr. Davis hauled me to the fort in +a wagon, taking at the same time a load of watermelons and +tomatoes, which grew abundantly in that country. When I arrived at +Fort Yuma Gen. Crook told me to take good care of myself, also +saying he was highly pleased with the success of the past season, +and he said: "If I live until spring I am going to see that Black +canyon of yours that Lieut. Jackson has told me so much about." + +During this winter we got a weekly mail established from Fort Yuma +to Los Angeles, I had been here over eight months and had not seen +a newspaper since I came, and when this mail line was established +nearly every man subscribed for a paper of some kind, and the fort +for the first time was blessed with plenty of reading matter, and +we were able to gain a little knowledge as to what was going on in +the civilized parts of the United States. + +In the fore part of the month of December the officers put the men +to work cleaning and straightening things up in general about the +fort. We were all confident there was something up, but just what +was not known. After everything was in proper shape it was +whispered around that the paymaster would be in in a few days. On +hearing this I asked Lieut. Jackson if it was true, and he said it +was, and he also informed me that from this on we would have a +regular pay day; and this was not all either, but that we were to +have two more companies of cavalry and one of infantry, and said +he: "The General is talking of sending you and me to California to +buy horses, but that will not be decided upon until the paymaster +comes." + +It was the twentieth of December when the paymaster came, and also +the three companies of recruits spoken of by the Lieutenant. This +was the first pay day the soldiers had had for over a year, and +the boys all had plenty of money, but a-poor show to spend it, as +there were no saloons or gambling houses there, so they amused +themselves by gambling among themselves, and one could go all +around the fort and see all kinds of games running, and there was +money flying in the air. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +TO CALIFORNIA FOR HORSES.--MY BEAUTIFUL MARE, BLACK BESS.--WE GET +SIXTY-SIX SCALPS AND SEVENTY-EIGHT HORSES.--A CLEAN SWEEP. + + +It was about the first of January when Gen. Crook ordered Lieut. +Jackson and I to go to California to buy fifty head of cavalry +horses. With an escort of twelve men we headed for Los Angeles, +expecting to be able to procure the horses there, which we did, +and were back at Yuma in a little more than a month preparing to +give Apaches more of our warm social attention. In this campaign +Lieut. Jackson was to take the lead with two companies of cavalry +and one of infantry, and take the same route as the season before. +Gen. Crook was to follow in a month, taking no wagons, but a pack- +train of one hundred animals. Only Mexicans were employed this +time as packers, and the captain of our train was named Angel, but +he didn't look it. + +It was arranged between Gen. Crook and I that I was to have twelve +scouts and select them myself. The General sent a sergeant with me +to take the names of the men I wished to secure, and then he gave +me permission to go into the corrall and select two horses for +each of my men, taking anything that did not belong to a +commissioned officer. In the afternoon of the same day Lieut. +Jackson came to me and said: "Captain, I have a present for you if +you will accept it. I want to give you Black Bess." + +This was the beautiful mare that he rode the year before and of +which I spoke previously. + +It was a very acceptable present indeed, and I was surprised to +learn that he would part with her, but he walked down to the +stable and turned her over to me. He had never ridden her when +going into a fight except the time of which I made mention when +out on the scouting tour. He said to me: "She is too fine an +animal for me, and if you will train her a little she will be a +perfect companion to you." + +This black mare proved to be the most intelligent animal that I +had ever owned in my life, and there was nothing she seemed to +dislike so much as the sight or even the scent of an Indian. Often +when out scouting I have got off of her and let her feed at the +end of a picket rope while I would lie down and sleep, and the +moment she would see or scent anything strange she would come to +where I was lying and paw until I would raise up and look in the +direction of whatever object she had seen or heard, and in less +than three months she was the pet of the entire command. She would +follow me like a dog anywhere I would go. + +We pulled out for the mountains, and went something like one +hundred and fifty miles from Fort Yuma before making a halt for a +permanent camp-this being the fore part of February, 1866-and as +soon as we were fairly settled we began active work. + +We had only been there a few days when George Jones came in and +reported having seen the trail of a band of Indians coming from +the direction of Black canyon. George, myself and four other +scouts started out immediately to take the trail, which was ten +miles south of our quarters. We camped on their trail that night +on account of the country being too rough to travel after night, +but the next morning we were off early and followed the trail all +day. Just before sundown we halted on a high ridge, when I took a +look through my glasses over the country. About twelve miles away +I saw an Apache camp. The course they had traveled that day +brought them about as near our quarters as where we had struck +their trail, and from this I came to the conclusion that they were +either looking for the command or were expecting an attack. + +Now the country between us and the Indians was very rough, but I +told the boys that we must get there that night, and as quickly as +possible. + +I could see the country between the Indians and headquarters, and +they were not more than fifteen miles from there, although we were +about twelve miles away, and about the same distance from the +Indians. + +Knowing that Lieut. Jackson would be anxious to hear from me, I +sent one man back to camp to report to him, with instructions as +to the course to move, also for him to throw up a rocket every +mile or so, that I might know where to send my next messenger to +meet him. Myself and the other four scouts started for the Indian +camp, and it took two hours and a half the best we could do to +reach it. + +When we were within a quarter of a mile of them, that being as +near as we thought it safe to ride, we dismounted, and leaving two +men in charge of our horses, the other three of us started to +crawl down to their camp, at least near enough to find out about +their number. + +They had not lain down for the night nor had they any guards out +with their horses, but were sitting around the camp-fire smoking +and apparently enjoying themselves. + +No doubt if we could have understood their language they were then +laying plans to capture the first emigrant train that might come +that way. The moon was shining brightly, and we had a splendid +chance to have stampeded their stock, but I did not think it best +from the fact that it would put them on their guard, which would +be to the detriment of the cavalry when they should arrive. We +decided not to disturb them until the cavalry came up, knowing +that the command would lose no time in getting there, and that it +would be before daylight if it was possible. + +We counted the horses of the Indians as best we could by +moonlight, and made out eighty head of them. We could not make out +just the number of Indians, but estimated them at seventy-five, +After ascertaining as near as we could the lay of the ground and +the general situation, we returned to our horses, and all started +in the direction that we expected the command to come from. After +we had ridden about a half mile I stopped, and George Jones +started on with the other scouts to meet the command. After riding +five miles they met Lieut. Jackson coming with two companies of +cavalry and the entire scout force; and long before I expected +them Black Bess told me by her actions that they were coming. + +The Lieutenant formed his men in a triangle on the ridge, his +object being to pocket the Indians; in other words, to bunch them +up or prevent them from scattering. While he was forming his men +and giving instructions, I told my men where the horses were and +that we must get to them about the time the cavalry made the +attack on the Indians. I told them that no doubt the horses would +have ropes on them and the first one that I come to I would take +him and lead the way. "And when you hear the first shot, all raise +the yell, for by doing that we will be able to make the stampede, +and if nothing goes wrong we will keep the stock going until we +reach headquarters." When I got to the horses about the first one +I stumbled onto was a white one, with a long hair rope on; I +caught him and led the way, and he made a good leader for the +others to follow. + +We got to the horses a few moments before the soldiers got to the +Indian camp, and at the first shot we all raised the yell, and as +I led the white pony away all followed, and we did not halt until +we were five or six miles off. Here we came to a small stream that +meandered through a little valley. There we stopped awhile to let +our horses drink and rest, and while there we counted our horses +and found that we had seventy-eight. + +We reached camp about six o'clock the next morning, but the +soldiers did not get in until noon. When the fight was over the +Lieutenant put out a strong picket guard and remained there until +morning in order to catch the Apaches that might be secreted in +the sage-brush. + +When daylight came he succeed in jumping up eleven, which he +considered ample pay for staying there a few hours. In this fight +sixty-six Indians were killed, besides we got all their horses, +blankets, ropes and such other articles as they had. + +We did but little in the way of scouting for the next few days. +Lieut. Jackson said that we had made a good beginning and we did +not want to do much before Gen. Crook came. "For," said he, "we +will have all the fighting we want when the General gets here." + +The morning of the third day after the fight we started out with +the entire scout force in squads of four, there being three +squads, with the understanding that we were to keep in from one to +three miles of each other, and all to camp together at night. + +We took along with us four days' rations, but a scout is expected +to live on four days' rations for eight days if it becomes +necessary, for when he starts he never knows just where he is +going or when he will return. + +It was in the afternoon of the third day that I ran on to an +Indian trail that appeared from the number of horse-tracks to be +about twenty in the band. We could tell that they had passed there +that day, so we followed the trail; and it was not long until the +other two pulled in towards me, and we were soon near enough that +I could signal to them, or they to me, and shortly we all met on +the trail. + +We had not followed long before we came in sight of the Indians +riding leisurely along, and we then set it down that they were a +band of Apaches on their way to the Oscuro Mountains for a hunt. +They went into camp early that night on account of water, and +after supper they amused themselves by running foot-races. I was +tempted several times before dark to make a charge on them, but +knowing that we could accomplish our end better by waiting until +after dark, we held back until they had all turned in for the +night. They did not lie down until about nine o'clock, and by this +time the boys were all getting anxious for a fight. We waited +about an hour after they had all lain down and then we started to +crawl down to their camp. We agreed to use our knives and sabres, +George Jones and I each having a big knife, all the rest having +sabres. + +Our idea for this was to prevent any of our own party from being +shot accidently; but each man had his pistol in his left had with +instructions not to use it except in case of emergency. We crawled +into the camp undiscovered as the Indians had no dogs along to +give the alarm. + +Previous to this I had told the boys that I could crawl all over +an Indian and not wake him up, and I came near demonstrating it +that night. They were apparently asleep and badly scattered, two +in a place. + +I had told the boys not to strike until they saw that I was just +in the act of striking; that when they saw me raise up for each +man to spring to his feet and get his Indian the first lick if +possible, and not to let up as long as they could see one kick. + +It being bright moonlight we could see each other very plainly, +and we crawled right in among them, there being no order whatever +in their camp. When I came to where there were two lying with +their backs together, I made up my mind that that was too good a +chance for me to let pass; so I looked around to see if the boys +had their men selected, and seeing that they had, and that they +were all watching me and the Indians also, I raised to my feet, +and placing my right foot between the two Indians, I aimed to +sever the first one's head from his body, which I came near doing, +for he only just quivered after I struck him. At that they all +began the work of blood and death. + +The second one I attacked I had to deal the second blow, as I also +did the third one. Up to this time I had not heard a word from any +one of my companions, but there had been a continual ringing of +sabres all around me. Just as I had done up my last Indian George +sprang to my side and said: "Cap, we have got every one of them." +We counted them and found that we had killed twenty-two, and after +examining their blankets and other "traps," we knew that we had +got them all. + +They had killed a fine buck deer during the day and had only +cooked enough of it for their supper, so we had plenty of fresh +meat, for a while, at least; so while George and some of the other +scouts went for our horses, which were about a quarter of a mile +from camp, the remainder of us built a fire and began roasting +venison. This was the first fresh meat we had on the trip. + +The morning following we gathered up the horses and found we had +twenty-two, and we started two of the men to headquarters with +them, and also sent a message to Lieut. Jackson to the effect that +we were going in east of Black canyon to see what kind of a +country it was. We were out seven days longer, making ten days in +all, but we did not make any new discovery. + +When we returned to headquarters I learned that Lieut. Jackson had +received a dispatch from Gen. Crook, to the effect that he would +soon be on with more supplies and men. + +The Lieutenant advised me to work close to quarters, as the +General was likely to be on any day, and said it was hard to tell +what he would want to do when there. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +SOME MEN WHO WERE ANXIOUS FOR A FIGHT AND GOT IT.--GEN. CROOK AT +BLACK CANYON.--BAD MISTAKE OF A GOOD MAN.--THE VICTIMS. + + +After the events of the last chapter I remained in camp most of +the time, and sent my assistants out in different directions, with +orders to return the same day. + +In ten days Gen. Crook made his appearance, with two companies of +cavalry and one of infantry. + +The next day after his arrival after having talked the matter over +relative to Black canyon and the country surrounding it, he asked +me how far it was to the noted place. I told him it was what we +called fifty miles. The General said: "There is where I want to +go. Those men I brought out with me are anxious for a fight. I +brought them out here to fight, and I will see that they get it." +He told me that the day following he wished me to accompany him to +that country, saying: "You can take as many of your scouts along +as you like, and I will make a detail of twenty men to do camp +duty." + +We started out the following morning for Black canyon, taking +along my entire scout force. In the afternoon of the second day I +piloted Gen. Crook to a high ridge, where, with his glasses, he +could overlook the whole country. He could see Black canyon and +the perpendicular wall of rock on the opposite side for miles and +miles, in fact, as far as he could see with his glasses. After he +had looked the country all over he asked me where we could get +into the canyon. In answer to this question I said: "General it is +easy enough to get into it, but the question is where to get out." + +He said: "We surely can get out where we go in if we only have +sense enough to keep our eyes open." So I told him that I would +show him the next morning. We returned to camp and I started out +on foot to find some fresh meat, and had gone but a short distance +when I ran on to a band of wild turkeys, and killed two fat +gobblers. Turkeys seemed to keep fat in that country the year +around, as those that I killed were very fat. During the time I +was out hunting George Jones had taken two other scouts and had +made an entire circle of our camp, and not seeing any Indians or +fresh sign we felt safe from any attack that night. + +The next morning we did not move camp, but leaving the twenty men +detailed for camp duty in charge of the camp and stock, I took my +entire scout force to escort Gen. Crook to Black canyon. When we +came to where the trail started down the bluff, he asked me how +far I had been down. I told him about a mile, but did not let him +know that Lieut. Jackson was with me at the time, knowing that the +General wanted the glory of being the first officer to investigate +and take in the situation of Black canyon. He asked me if it was +safe for us to go down that far. I told him it was not at this +time of day as we could not go that far and back without being +seen by hundreds of Indians. + +He decided not to look any further, but we returned to our camp +and made preparations to start back to headquarters the next +morning. He did not say anything to me as to what he thought of +Black canyon that evening, but next day on our way back to +headquarters he asked me if I thought there would be grass enough +where we camped the night before for three or four hundred head of +stock for three or four days. This led me to believe that he +intended moving a part of his command to that place. + +As soon as we were back at headquarters he told me that if any of +the horses belonging to the scouts had shoes that needed resetting +to have it attended to at once, and also told me to have the +scouts pick out the very best horses for the trip. + +During the time that these preparations were in progress, Lieut. +Jackson in a private conversation told me that Gen. Crook was +going to move up with a portion of the command near Black canyon +and try to get into it. I told him that he could get in there easy +enough, but had my doubts whether or not he would be able to get +out with half the men he took in. + +After having completed our preparations we pulled out for the Camp +on the Mountain, this being the name given the camp by some of our +men when we were out before, and I am told that the springs where +we camped still go by that name. We started with two companies of +cavalry and one of infantry, taking a pack-train to carry the +supplies. + +The first night at Camp on the Mountain Gen. Crook threw out a +strong picket guard, and the next morning he told me to place my +men both above and below the trail that they were to travel in +descending the mountain into the canyon. I had examined this part +of the country and was thoroughly posted in all the ways and by- +ways of the Black canyon, which I knew the General was not, and I +told him that there was no danger from above, from the fact that +it was at least six miles to the next place where the Indians +could climb the bluff, but this didn't seem to satisfy him, so I +placed my scouts according to his directions. This, he said, was +to protect his rear. + +I took my stand farthest down the hill from any of the scouts, +being about half way down, and had my men scattered along on the +mountain side, both above and below. This I did so that in case +any of my men should see danger from above they would report to me +at once and I would report to Gen. Crook. + +After I had my men all placed and was at my stand I saw two +companies of cavalry coming down the bluff supported by one +company of infantry. When they got to where I was stationed, it +being what we termed a bench on the mountain, they halted, and +Crook and Jackson held a council in which Lieut. Jackson advised +Gen. Crook to send the infantry ahead as "feelers," but the +General thought just the reverse, saying: "I will feel my way with +the cavalry." So they started down the mountain single file. + +After they had been gone about two hours, or it seemed that long +to me at least, I heard the firing commence; but I could tell from +the direction that they were not yet down to the foot of the +mountain. The firing continued about an hour, but I could not get +to see any of the battle, for I dared not leave my post for fear +that some of the scouts might come to report to me, and in case I +was away he would not know what to do. + +At last I saw the cavalry coming back up the mountain, some on +foot, some leading their horses, and a very few riding. The +Indians were being held in check by the infantry in order to give +the cavalry a chance to get out of the canyon with their horses. + +As well as I can remember, in this fight Gen. Crook lost forty-two +men killed, twenty-one wounded, and sixty horses killed. + +That night I heard one sergeant ask another in the presence of +Gen. Crook when the dead would be buried, but the question was not +answered. The next morning the General told me to take as many men +as I wanted and see if I could recover the dead bodies. I said. +"General, if you will wait until night I will take my men and if +there are any dead bodies left on the battlefield I will try and +get them, but I do not propose to take my men and stick them up +for a target to be shot at by the Indians when they have no show +whatever, for I will not ask my men to go where I will not go +myself." + +He said: "Suit yourself about it," and turned and walked away. + +That night I took my entire scout force, besides twenty soldiers +that volunteered to go along, and descended the mountain. We +worked hard all night, and all that we could find was twenty-one +bodies, and that day they were buried, after which we commenced +making preparations to return to headquarters. + +Up to that time I had not had a chance to talk to Lieut. Jackson +concerning the battle in Black canyon, as we had both been busy +ever since. When on a march it was my custom to ride ahead of the +army, so the morning that we were ready to start back I had given +my orders to the scouts, had mounted, and was just ready to start, +when Lieut. Jackson said: "Wait a minute, Captain, and I will ride +with you." + +The reader will understand that by this time the Lieutenant and I +were as intimate friends as though we were brothers, and when he +told me anything I could rely upon it, and I had always made it a +rule to be punctual with him. If he would ask me a question I +would always answer it the best I could, and if I asked him for +any information, if he knew he would tell me. And here I would +like to say that while Gen. Crook bore the name of being a great +Indian fighter, I know for a fact that Lieut. Jackson planned more +victories two to one than Gen. Crook did himself, and had it been +in the Lieutenant's power to have kept those soldiers out of Black +canyon, they never would have entered it. + +That morning after we had ridden a short distance he mentioned the +fight and said: "Cap, that was a horrible affair." I said: +"Lieutenant it was not half as bad as I thought it would be, for +when I saw you go down there I did not expect to see half of the +boys come back." He said: "Had it not been for the infantry coming +to our rescue just when it did not a horse would have come out of +the canyon, and but very few soldiers." + +I asked him where the next move would be and he said that Gen. +Crook was going to return to the fort and we would go farther out +on the road to protect the emigrants, who would soon begin to move +toward California. For the next two or three days everything was +undergoing a change around camp; rigging up packs and fitting up +in general. + +The soldiers who had their horses killed were mounted on the +choice horses that we had captured from the Indians, which made +very fair cavalry horses. + +As soon as we had completed our arrangements Gen. Crook started +back for Fort Yuma, much wiser than he came, while we pushed +farther out on the Butterfield route, with two companies of +cavalry and fifty infantry-men. + +We traveled four days from our old camp before making a general +halt. The evening of the fourth day just a short time before we +were ready to go into camp the scouts came in and reported having +seen a small band of Indians only a short distance west of us, and +they said they had watched them go into camp. + +I reported to the Lieutenant and he started with one company of +cavalry after them, leaving orders for the command to go into camp +at the next water, which was about a mile ahead of us. This proved +to be a small hunting party, and they in some way discovered us +before we got to their camp. When we came in sight of them we were +about a quarter of a mile away from their camp and they had their +horses all packed and were beginning to mount. We gave chase, but +they had the start of us so that we only got two out of the band, +but we crowded them so close that they had to leave their pack- +horses, and we got all of them, there being twenty. + +I captured a fine American horse that showed good breeding. He was +a sorrel, with white hind feet and a white stripe on his face and +branded C on the left shoulder. I made the Lieutenant a present of +this horse, and he afterwards proved to be a very fast animal, as +the Lieutenant told me several years after, that during the winter +months he kept the soldiers nearly all broke with that horse. He +told me that he proved to be the fastest half mile horse he ever +saw. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE MASSACRE AT CHOKE CHERRY CANYON.--MIKE MALONEY GETS INTO A +MUSS.--RESCUE OF WHITE GIRLS.--MIKE GETS EVEN WITH THE APACHES. + + +The emigrants now begun to come along and we were kept busy night +and day looking after the small bands of Indians that were +continually making murderous forays in spite of all we could do to +prevent. + +With only three hundred soldiers and twelve scouts, and a country +over one hundred miles in extent to guard, the service was +exacting, and our lot was not altogether a happy one. + +One day in July, in company with George Jones and John Riley, I +started out in the direction of Black canyon to see if I could locate +any small band of Apaches that might be prowling around. We +traveled all day, and not seeing any Indians or sign of them, +concluded to return to camp and get some much needed rest, and did +so. It now seemed that there were no Apaches near us so I went to +Lieut. Jackson's tent to report to him, intending to then lie down +and rest for the day at least. He had just rolled out of bed, but +he looked worn and haggard as if he had had a bad night of it. He +asked me what news I had and I said good news, as we had seen no +Indians or any fresh sign, but that I was worn out, having been +almost constantly in the saddle for twenty-four hours. I asked him +if he had any news and he said he had, and bad news too. The +Indians had attacked a train in Choke Cherry canyon, burned all +the wagons, but how many persons they had murdered or how many had +escaped he could not tell me, as there were no scouts in camp at +the time. + +He wished so know if I could spare some men to go and bury the +dead and locate the Indians. I replied that George Jones and John +Riley were there, but that like myself, they were very much +fatigued. He said he wanted them for another purpose. Then I +offered two men, good and fresh, Jim Davis and Mike Maloney. But I +had some uneasiness as to Mike. Not that there was any doubt about +his bravery but he was so utterly incautious. However, I decided +to go with them myself, as tired as I was. So as soon as I could +get a bite to eat and a fresh horse saddled, we were off and on +the way to Choke Cherry canyon. + +Lieut. Jackson asked me when he could expect to hear from me. I +told him that if I succeeded in locating the Indians in a body I +would report to him at once, but if not he might not hear from me +until my return. So we shook hands and he retired to his tent. + +I directed Mike to go straight to the canyon and to keep on the +east side until he came to the trail leading to Agua Caliente, and +then take that trail direct for Sand Point; and when near the +point to signal me by barking like a cayote, and that I would +answer him by gobbling like a turkey; that he must meet me at Sand +Point at three o'clock sharp, and if he was not there at that time +I would know that something was wrong. I also told him to be +careful and not run into an ambuscade, but above all not to be +taken prisoner. Then I asked him if he could bark like a cayote. +His answer was: "Sure, Captain, it's mesilf that can make a bloody +cayote ashamed of himself bairking, and I belave ye's is afraid +for me, but O'ill tell ye now there's no bloody Apache in all +Arizony that's goin' to take this Irishman prisoner. I'm sure they +don't want me schalp anyway, for me hair is too short." + +I told Jim Davis to go to Wild Plum Ridge and then follow the +trail to Sand Point, for him to signal me the same manner as Mike +and I would answer him in the same manner. + +Everything being understood between us we separated, each taking +his appointed route, and I striking direct for the late emigrant +camp. Before I got there, however, I ran onto the trail of +apparently three Indians and concluded to follow them up. I had +not gone a great distance away until I espied them in a little +ravine a short distance away and they were having a scalp dance. I +tied my horse secure from observation and then commenced to crawl +upon them. They were circling two scalps that they had hung upon +sticks stuck in the ground, every now and then drawing their bows +as if going to shoot at them. I crept along cautiously, expecting +that the Indians would be so absorbed in their scalp dance that I +would get in close pistol shot before they discovered me; but in +this I was mistaken, for when yet a long rifle shot away they +espied me, and the moment I saw I was discovered I opened fire +with both pistols, which caused them to flee in hot haste, leaving +the two scalps hanging on the sticks. I went up to where they were +and found that one scalp was that of a woman and the other that of +a man. + +I was now certain that there had been some emigrants murdered, and +I soon made up my mind that about the first thing to do was to +locate the bodies and bury them; but on consulting my watch I saw +that I must hurry if I made Sand Point by three o'clock. Just as I +had turned and started back to my horse, who should come up but +Jim Davis. He had been trailing the Indians, which brought him +over in my direction, and when he heard the shots he had come with +all haste thinking that I was in trouble. We both turned and rode +on to Sand Point, arriving there about half past three, but no +Maloney was in sight, so after giving the signal agreed upon and +receiving no answer, we made up our minds that he was in trouble, +and we struck out to find his trail. + +While we were on our way to hunt Maloney's trail Davis said: +"Captain, I believe those Indians had two prisoners with them, and +I think they are both women, judging from their tracks and other +indications; see here what I found while I was trailing them." And +he showed me two pieces of calico of different color. He thought +that they had been dropped by the prisoners in the hope that some +white person might find them and follow. He also said that there +were small twigs broken off along the trail, which would indicate +that they expected a search for them. + +When Maloney left us he made direct for Sand Point, but before he +reached there as he was riding along he discovered a small shoe +track, he dismounted and tried to follow it, but it seemed that +the tracks extended no farther. This confused him greatly, and he +said to himself: "Be the loife of me it was only just there that I +saw the thrack, and it's sure I am that she could not have flew +away. Oh! here it is again, and begorra I belave it's the thrack +of a white woman, for sure I am that no dhurty spalpeen of an +Injun could iver make such a dainty thrack as that. Sure and I'll +look in that bunch of brush, perhaps it's there she is, the poor +crayther." + +He made his way up to the brush cautiously with a pistol in each +hand, and just as he peered in two Indians sprang upon him and +grabbed his arms, which caused his pistols both to be discharged +up in the air. They quickly bore poor Maloney to the ground and +soon had him bound hand and foot. They then drove a stake into the +ground and tied Mike to it, and began to gather brush for the +fire. This did not suit him a bit, but all he could do was to hurl +an avalanche of words at them, which, of course, they did not +understand and to which they paid no heed. + +"Ah, ye dhurty divils," said Mike. "Ye's have took me pistols both +away from me. Ye's know I can't hurt ye's without me guns, so +what's the use in ye's tyin' me like a hog, ye dhurty blackguards. +Let me loose and Oi'll be afther lavin' ye's. Oi'll do it be the +boots that hung on Chatham's Hill. I do belave they are goin' to +burn me alive. O, ye bloody haythens; let me loose and Oi'll fight +the pair of ye's if ye's have got me pistols." + +The Indians by this time had the fire started, but Mike still +retained his nerve, cussing the red fiends by all the powers in +the Irish vocabulary. + +Davis and I were pushing on with all possible speed in the +direction of the place we expected to find Maloney's trail, when +we heard two pistol shots in quick succession further up the +canyon, so we put our horses down to their utmost in the direction +from whence the sound of the shots came. + +After running about two miles we came in sight of a small fire a +short distance away that seemed to be but just kindled. We dashed +up at full speed and found Mike tied to a stake and two Apaches +piling brush on the fire. We fired at the Indians through the +gathering darkness, but only killed one, and the other one made +off about as fast as you ever saw an Indian go. Jim kicked the +fire away from Mike and cut his bonds before he was burned to +speak of. I asked him how he came to be taken prisoner by just two +Apaches, and his story ran like this: + +"Oi'll tell ye, Captain, it was on that sage-brush hill there +while I was ridin' along I saw a thrack in the sand and sure I was +that it was not the thrack of an Injun for it was a dainty little +thing and the hollow of the foot didn't make a hole in the ground +like an Apache's and Apaches niver wear shoes, aither. Well, I got +off me horse and stharted to follow the thrack, and whin I got to +that bunch of brush the dhurty rid divils sprang out on me like a +pair of hounds, tied me hands and fate, and was tryin' to burn me +aloive whin ye's came up." + +"Well, Mike," said I, holding up the scalp of the Indian we had +killed, "here is one Indian that will not bother you again, but be +more careful next time." + +We were all of the opinion that there was a woman alone somewhere +in those hills that had escaped from the Indians when they burned +the emigrant train, and we decided to keep up the search until +morning; so we agreed on the following search: To separate about a +quarter of a mile apart, and to commence circling a large hill or +knob close by covered by a dense growth of sagebrush that in some +places was as high as a man's head when he was on a horse, and +every few rods to hallow, that in case she was secreted around +there in hearing of us she would answer, and in case any one found +her he was to fire two shots in quick succession, when the other +two would go to him immediately. + +We made almost the entire circuit of the hill, hallowing every +little while, when I finally thought I heard a faint answer. I +called again and then listened intently, and I was sure I heard an +answer, after which I turned and rode in the direction from which +the answer came. After riding a few rods I called again, when I +heard the faint answer quite near, and I soon found a young girl +of about eighteen years. She was overjoyed at seeing me, but was +too weak to rise. I asked how she came there, and she said that +the train in which her family was traveling had been attacked by +the Indians. The people, or a part of them, had been murdered and +the wagons burned, she and her younger sister had been taken +prisoners, and when night came they were tied hand and foot and +staked to the ground, and all laid down for the night. + +"After we thought that the Indians were all asleep," she said, "I +made a desperate effort and freed one of my hands, although it +cost me a great deal of pain. After I was free I soon released my +sister and we then ran for our lives. We had got but a short +distance when the Indians discovered our absence, and raising the +yell, started after us. My sister outran me and I soon hid in a +little thicket and they missed me, but I fear they have overtaken +her." + +I asked her what her name was and she said it was Mary Gordon, and +her father's name was Henry Gordon. He was sheriff of their county +in Illinois for two years before starting west. I now fired the +two shots to call Jim and Mike, and they were not long in getting +there. + +As soon as Mike came up he said: "Sure, Captain, and wasn't I +after tellin's ye's that it was no bloody spalpeen of an Apache's +thrack that I be follerin' lasht avenin'?" + +Miss Gordon now seemed just to have realized that she was alone in +a wild country, for she wrung her hands and said: "Oh! what shall +I do in this desolate country without a relative or a friend; it +would have been better if I had been killed when my poor father +and mother were. O, kind sir, what will I do?" and she sobbed as +if her heart would break. + +I told her not to grieve, that we would protect her and see that +she got safely to civilization, and that we would also try to find +her sister. I asked her if she was not very hungry and she said +she was, as she had eaten nothing for almost thirty-six hours. At +that Mike said: "Sure, Captain, it's meself that has a pairt of me +rations lift, and Oi'll go and get it for the poor crayther, and +Oi'll bring the horses at the same toime," and he started off +muttering to himself, "Ah, them Apaches, the dhirty divils; I'd +like to kill ivery wan o' thim." + +He soon returned with the horses, and handing me his rations, he +said: "Sure, Captain, it's mesilf that thinks I'd better be afther +takin' a look around here-abouts, as thim durty haythens might be +afther playin' us the same game as they did me last evenin'." I +told him it was a good scheme, that we might go up to the top of +the hill and take a look as it was then most day, and if there +were any Indians around they would be astir and that he had better +let Jim Davis go with him, but he said no, for Jim to stay with me +and the young lady and see that no "bloody blackguard of an Apache +got her again," so I cautioned him to keep his ears and eyes open, +and he struck out. + +When Mike had gone Miss Gordon turned to me and asked my name. I +told her my name was William F. Drannan, but I was better known on +the plains as the Boy Scout. + +"Oh, kind sir," she said, "are you the Boy Scout? I have often +heard my father speak of you, and he said you were liable to put +in an appearance when one least expected it. I thought of you a +thousand times yesterday and to-night, but I had no idea that you +were in a thousand miles of here." + +I told her that I was at present scouting for Gen. Crook, who was +at Fort Yuma, but that Lieut. Jackson, with three companies of +soldiers, was stationed but a few miles west of us. + +We had been waiting for Mike Maloney's return about two hours and +were beginning to get uneasy about his delay and speculating as to +what caused his absence so long, when we heard two pistol shots. +This was always our signal to call a companion; so telling Jim to +look after the young lady, I swung myself into the saddle and was +off like the wind in the direction from whence the call, as I +supposed it to be, came. It was now getting daylight, and when I +got to the top of the hill I looked down to the south and I could +see a fire. I did not hesitate, but went down that slope through +the heavy sagebrush like smoke through the woods. As soon as I was +near enough to distinguish objects around the fire I saw Mike +bending over some object, and when I rode up to him, to my great +surprise and delight, I saw it was a young girl. Mike was beside +himself with excitement. + +It appeared from his story that upon reaching the top of the hill +after he had left us he came in sight of the fire and concluded to +investigate; so riding down as near as he thought safe he tied his +horse and commenced crawling. He soon saw that there were but two +Indians and to his horror he saw that they had a white girl tied +to a stake and were preparing to burn her. He crept up to within +about twenty yards of them and fired, killing one of the Apaches, +and as the other one turned to see what was up he fired again, +killing the other one; then brandishing his pistol over his head +he dashed up to the fire, exclaiming: "O, ye murtherin bastes, I'm +avin wid ye's now; Oi'll learn ye's how to stake a poor divil down +to the ground and thin try to burn him." Then he went up to the +girl, cut her loose from the stake, and she raised up in a sitting +posture, "Would ye's moind lettin' me help ye to yer fate, Miss?" +said Mike. "O, I'm so tired and weak I can't stand," said the +girl. "They have almost killed me dragging me over the cactus." + +Just as I came in sight Mike fired two shots as a signal for us to +come to him, but I was there almost before the echoes died away in +the mountains. When I rode up Mike was most beside himself with +glee; his tongue ran like a phonograph, and within five minutes he +had given me the history of the whole transaction and had invoked +a curse on the whole Apache tribe from all the saints in the +calendar. + +I told Mike that we had best get the girl on one of our horses at +once and be off to where Jim and the other girl were, and from +there on to headquarters, for there was no telling how many more +of the red devils there might be lurking around. "Faith, Captain, +and it's right ye are this toime, too," said Mike, "and it's me +own horse she can ride, the poor damsel." So saying he led his +horse up and we assisted the young lady to mount. + +As soon as we were fairly started I asked the girl her name and +she said it was Maggie Gordon. She also spoke of her sister having +been taken prisoner along with her, and when I told her that Mary +was safe, her joy knew no bounds. This news so revived her spirits +that she talked quite freely with us on the way over to where Jim +Davis and the other girl were. When we got to near where they were +Mary looked up and saw us and exclaimed, "Oh! there's Maggie!" and +when they met there was the most pathetic scene of greeting I ever +witnessed. + +As soon as they had a good cry in each others arms we gave Maggie +something to eat, after which we put the girls, one on Jim Davis' +horse and one on mine, and headed for camp, arriving there in the +afternoon. + +We did not go to the late emigrant camp, as we could do nothing +toward burying the dead, burdened as we were by the two young +women, so Lieut. Jackson sent a platoon of soldiers out to do that +last act of charity. + +There were four families besides the Gordon family murdered, and +those two young ladies were the only ones that escaped, so far as +we knew. When the next emigrant train came along we sent the +Misses Gordon on to Fort Yuma, and from there they drifted on into +California, and I never heard of them again. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +MASSACRE OF THE DAVIS FAMILY.--A HARD RIDE AND SWIFT RETRIBUTION. +--A PITIFUL STORY.--BURIAL OF THE DEAD.--I AM SICK OF THE BUSINESS. + + +We remained here for some weeks yet, piloting and escorting +emigrants through the mountains, but having very few scraps with +the Indians. When the emigrants quit coming and our provisions had +run very low, we made preparations to return to Fort Yuma. But to +make sure that no more of the crawling trains would be winding +along that way this season, myself and another scout, with two +days' rations, started on a little scurry eastward. But a tour of +four days developed no further sign of emigrants or Indians, so +the scout and I returned to find the command all ready to start. +We were just about taking up the line of march for Yuma when a +teamster on his way to Phoenix with a load of freight, drifted +into camp and informed us to our horror, that the Indians had +attacked the Davis ranch, killed the old man and his two sons, +treated the old mother and the two daughters shamefully, and then +pillaged the place and drove off all the stock. + +I had no sooner ridden into camp that night than an orderly came +and took my horse and said: "Lieut. Jackson wishes to see you at +his tent immediately." I knew that there was something very +unusual the matter or he would not have called me to his quarters +until I had had my supper. On approaching his tent I saw that he +was much excited. He told me what was up, and said it was strange +the Indians would come down there that season of the year and +commit such depredations as that. After he had laid the whole +matter before me just as he had it from the teamster, he said: +"Send the very best men you have on their trail." I told him I +would go myself and take George and two other men with me. + +I was convinced before finishing my talk with him that it was not +the Indians that had committed the depredation, but that I kept to +myself. + +Just as I walked out of the Lieutenant's tent I met George and +told him that we had a long night's ride before us, to pick out +two of the best men we had, also to take the best horses--we had, +and to change my saddle to Black Bess from the horse that I had +been riding that day. I also gave orders to have everything in +readiness by the time I was through supper, which did not take +long, although I was very hungry. The boys were all on hand by the +time I was through eating, and we mounted and rode away for the +Davis ranch. The way we had to go to reach the ranch was about +twenty miles down grade and inclined to be sandy all the way. We +were all well mounted and we scarcely broke a gallop until we +reached the Davis place. + +A pitiful sight was there. The old lady and her three daughters +had carried the old gentleman and two boys into the house and laid +them out on benches in the best manner possible, and to say that +it was a heart-rending scene does not begin to express it. + +When I stepped into the house Mrs. Davis pointed to the dead +bodies and said: "Captain, if you will avenge their death I will +be a friend to you as long as I live." I told her that I would do +all I could, that I was in a great hurry to get on the trail of +the perpetrators, and I would like her to give me all the +information she could relative to the matter. + +She then led the way into a private room and related the whole +circumstance, telling me how the Indians had come there, decoyed +her husband and two sons to the barn and there shot them down, +then rushed to the house, and before the inmate had time to shut +and bar the door, came into the house, caught and tied her to the +bed post, and then disgraced her three daughters in her presence. +Then they gathered up all the horses and cattle about the ranch +and drove them across the desert. + +In the direction she said they had started it was eighty-four +miles to water, but I did not believe for a moment that they would +attempt to cross the desert in that direction. + +After I had gained all the information I could, I said: "Mrs. +Davis, those were not Indians, but Greasers or Mexicans, and I +will capture them before twenty-four hours if I live." + +I started one man back to camp to tell Lieut. Jackson to take the +trail direct for Aw-wa-col-i-enthy, which in English means hot +water, (Agua Caliente). + +Lieut. Jackson had become over anxious as soon as we left and had +started after us with one company of cavalry. My messenger met him +five miles from the Davis ranch, and there he turned in the +direction of Agua Caliente. + +In starting out from the ranch I took the trail of the stock, and +after we had gone quite a distance I called George to my side and +told him it was not Indians we were following, but a crowd of cut- +throat Greasers, and we didn't want to have a fight with them +until the soldiers arrived if we could help it, but that we would +fight them before we would allow them to escape. + +I had never told George until now what all they had done, and when +I related to him the whole affair he said: "We will not allow one +of them to escape." We could see that they were turning in the +direction of Agua Caliente and had made this circuit merely to +throw any one off that might attempt to follow. + +This was what I thought when I dispatched the Lieutenant to come +to Hot Springs. + +It was twenty-seven miles straight through on the road from the +Davis ranch to Agua Caliente, but the way we went that night we +supposed it was about forty miles, making sixty miles that we had +to ride that night, while the soldiers if they started direct from +camp would only have to travel thirty-five miles. + +Finally the trail made a direct turn for Agua Caliente and I again +"telegraphed" the Lieutenant to hurry up with all possible speed +and try to reach the place before daylight, my object being to +catch them in camp, as our horses would be too tired to run them +down after they were mounted on fresh horses. + +My second messenger did not see the Lieutenant at all on the road, +for unbeknown to me he had started from headquarters soon after we +did, and after having met my first courier, had pushed on with all +possible haste. + +When George and I were within a mile and a half of Agua Caliente +we met some of the stock feeding leisurely along the direction of +their old range. We examined them closely and found that they were +the Davis stock. + +We had not gone much farther until Black Bess raised her head, +stuck her ears forward and commenced sniffing the air. I told +George to watch her, and he said: "We must be near them." So we +dismounted, took off our spurs, picketed our horses, and started +cautiously towards their camp. + +When we were within three hundred yards we could see the glimmer +of their fires that had not entirely gone out, evidence that they +had not gone to bed till late. We crawled so near that we could +see the outlines of the fiends lying around the few coals that +were yet smoldering. Now and then a chunk would blaze up as if to +show the exact positions of the murderers. + +After satisfying ourselves that this was the party we were in +pursuit of, we returned to our horses. + +I told Jones to mount his horse and not spare him until he met the +soldiers; and to hurry them up so we could catch the Greasers in +bed; and I said to him as he was mounting: "If you do not return +with the soldiers before daylight I will take chances of holding +them here with Black Bess until you do return." But he had not +gone more than two miles and a half when he met the soldiers +coming in a stiff gallop. + +George reported that we had the outlaws located, and the +Lieutenant gave orders for the soldiers to muffle their spurs and +sabres and to be quick about it. + +I did not have to wait long until Black Bess told me they were +coming, for when they got near me I could not keep her still. + +Upon the arrival of the soldiers I told Lieut. Jackson the +particulars of the murder as given to me by Mrs. Davis, and also +where the murderers were. He divided his men, sending fifty around +on the opposite side of the camp, giving them half and hour to +make the circuit, George piloting them, and I the other fifty. +When the time was up we rode down, both squads arriving almost at +the same time. Just one word from the Lieutenant and the Greasers +were surrounded, and us with our pistols drawn. + +The outlaws seemed to be sound asleep, but when we commenced to +close in on them they woke, and the first one that jumped to his +feet had his pistol in his hand, but when he looked around and saw +the situation he dropped his pistol before the Lieutenant had time +to tell him to drop it. + +It was not yet daylight, but their being a very bright moon, one +could see first rate. All the Mexicans were soon on their feet and +begging for their lives. Lieut. Jackson being able to speak +Mexican asked if any one in their crowd could speak English, but +they said they could not speak a word in that language. He then +asked them in Spanish who their Captain was, and a big, rough, +greasy looking fellow said he was the Captain. + +The Lieutenant then told him to form his men in line out on the +road, saying: "I will give you five minutes to prepare to die." He +then turned to his orderly and told him to relieve them of their +arms, and they gave them up without a word of protest. He then +told them all to stand in a line and when the five minutes were up +they must die. During all this time their Captain was pleading for +their lives and making all kinds of promises, but the Lieutenant +turned a deaf ear to them, not even answering them. + +When the five minutes were up the order was given, "Platoon No. 1, +front face. Make ready. Take aim. Fire." And all of the scoundrels +fell at the first round, although some of them had to be shot the +second time to get them out of their misery. + +This being done they were taken about a hundred yards away and +buried in the sand. + +By that time it was daylight and Lieut. Jackson made a detail of +twenty-four men to assist George and I in driving the stock back +to the Davis ranch. The rest of the company returned to, +headquarters, but went by way of the Davis ranch to assist in +burying the bodies of the old gentleman and the two sons. Lieut. +Jackson told me that when he arrived at the ranch and saw the dead +bodies and heard the sad story of the wife and mother and of her +daughters, he said it was more than he could stand. He made a +detail of six men to dig the graves and he returned to +headquarters and moved the entire command down there and they all +attended the funeral. + +After the funeral was over Mrs. Davis called me to one side and +said: "There is one more favor I wish to ask of you before you +leave." I asked her what it was. She said as she was keeping a +boarding-house she would have to keep travelers, and that she +would like to have us leave a man to look after the stock until +such time as she could get some one to work for her. I told her +that if the Lieutenant did not object I would leave a man with her +that would take as much interest in the stock as if they were his +own, and that she would find him a perfect gentleman at all times. + +I called Lieut. Jackson aside and mentioned the matter to him. He +told me to leave a man and that he would also detail a man to +stay, which he did then and there. I asked George Jones to stay, +which he was willing to do. + +Mrs. Davis asked us to send her a good, trusty man and she would +pay him good wages, and she said she would write to her brother, +who, when he came out, would close up her business there as +quickly as possible, and they would return to the East. + +Arriving at the fort and finding no idle men, Lieut. Jackson wrote +to San Francisco for a man, and in about three weeks he came, and +he proved to be a good one, as Mrs. Davis told me several years +afterwards. + +It was nearly a month after we arrived at the fort before George +Jones came. The next day after he arrived he told me that he had +just received a letter from his father, who was then living +somewhere in the state of Illinois, and had written him to come +home as he wanted to emigrate to Oregon the following spring, and +wanted George to pilot the train across the plains and over the +mountains to the country where big red apples and pretty girls +were said to grow in such abundance. + +George had made up his mind to accede to the wishes of his father, +and as we had been there twenty-two months and both were tired of +the business, and having made up my mind to quit the scouting +field, I talked the matter over with George for two days and +concluded to accompany him to San Francisco; so we went to Gen. +Crook and told him we were going to quit and go away. + +He asked what was the matter, if anything had gone wrong. We told +him there was nothing wrong at all, but we were tired of the +business and had made up our minds to quit. He said he was very +sorry to have us leave, but if we had made up our minds to that +effect there was no use saying any more. He asked me how many head +of horses George and I had. I told him that there had been over +one hundred head of horses captured, and that many of them had +been used by the soldiers all summer, but if he would let George +and I select thirty-five head from the band of captured horses he +could have the rest of them. This he agreed to, so there was no +falling out over that. + +Having settled up with Gen. Crook and everything arranged, in a +few days we were ready to start. + +The day before our departure for San Francisco we went around and +visited with all the boys in blue, telling them we were going to +leave, and that for good. They expressed their regrets, but bade +us bon-voyage and good luck for the future. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + +BLACK BESS BECOMES POPULAR IN SAN FRANCISCO.--A FAILURE AS +RANCHER.--BUYING HORSES IN OREGON. THE KLAMATH MARSH.--CAPTAIN +JACK THE MODOC + + +George Jones and I pulled out for San Francisco, via Los Angeles, +this being the regular mail line at this time, and we made the +trip to the City of the Golden Gate inside of a month. + +As soon as we arrived at San Francisco we commenced selling our +horses at private sale. We put up at what was known as the Fashion +Stable, which was kept by a man by the name of Kinnear, whom we +found to be a perfect gentleman, and who rendered us almost +invaluable assistance in disposing of our horses. This was the +first stable that was built on Market street. As soon as our +horses were sold Jones boarded the steamer for New York. When we +separated here, having been so intimately acquainted for so long, +the separation was almost like that of two brothers, and we had +not the least idea that we would ever meet again in this world. + +I remained in the city three months, not knowing what to do or +where to go. During this time I spent much of it in training Black +Bess, as I found her to be a very intelligent animal, and she +would follow me like a dog wherever I would go when she had the +saddle on, and during that winter I taught her to perform many +tricks, such as to lie down, kneel down, count ten, and tell her +age. I could throw my gloves or handkerchief down and leave her +for hours without tying her and she would stand there until I +would return, and no one could come near them or take them away, +nor would she allow a stranger to put his hand on her. One day I +came to the barn and Mr. Kinnear asked what I would take to saddle +Black Bess up and let her follow me to Wells, Fargo & Co.'s express +office and back to the stable again without touching her on the +way. + +I said: "Mr. Kinnear, if it will be any accommodation to you I +will have her follow me up there and back and it will not cost you +anything." + +"All right," he said, "about one o'clock come to the stable, for I +have made a bet of fifty dollars with a man from the country, that +you could make her follow you from the stable to Wells, Fargo & +Co.'s express office and back to the stable and not touch her." + +Wells, Fargo & Co.'s express office was a distance of eight blocks +from the stable, and on my return I found quite a crowd there +waiting to see the performance. I threw the saddle on the mare, +put the bridle on her just as though I was going to ride, took my +whip in my hand, and started down the sidewalk and the mare walked +down the street. Montgomery street was always full of teams at +this time of the day, and also the sidewalk crowded with people, +but I walked near the outer edge. She would pick her way along the +street among those teams as well, apparently as though I was on +her back and at the same time would keep her eyes on me all the +time. On arriving at the place mentioned, I took my handkerchief +from my pocket and threw it down at the edge of the sidewalk, +walked into the office and remained five minutes or more, and when +I came out she was still standing with her head over the +handkerchief as though she was tied. I picked the handkerchief up, +started back down the sidewalk, and she took the street, keeping +her eyes on me all the time until we reached the stable. The +farmer was somewhat wiser, but about fifty dollars short in actual +cash, but vowed he would not bet again on a man's own game. + +On my return several different men asked me what I would take for +her, but I informed them money would not buy her from me. Before +putting her in the stable I had her perform several tricks, and +then bow to the crowd, which by this time had grown to more than a +hundred people. + +I had now lain around so long that I had become restless, as it +never did suit me to loaf about a town, so I concluded that I +would try ranching. I had enough money to buy a good ranch and +stock it, not thinking that it required any great amount of skill. +So I started up the Sacramento river to look for one. After I was +out most a month, this now being the last of February, 1867, I +found stock looking well and found a man that wanted to sell out +his stock and ranch. He had three hundred and twenty acres of land +and one hundred and fifty head of cattle, some chickens, a few +hogs, and a very few farming implements. After I had ridden around +over the ranch several days and looked at his stock, and finding +the range good, I asked his price. He wanted nine thousand +dollars. I believed that this would be a nice quiet life, and +although I did not know anything about raising stock, yet I +thought I would soon catch on as the saying goes, so I made him an +offer of eight thousand dollars, which offer he accepted. He was +to leave everything on the ranch but his bed and clothing and a +few little keep-sakes that he had about the house. + +Now I started in to be an honest rancher, believing that all I +would have to do was to ride around over the range occasionally and +look after my stock, take things easy, and let my stock grow into +money, as I had heard it said that stock would while one was +asleep. + +I stayed on this place until the spring of 1872, ranching with +very poor success, by which time I had learned to a certainty that +this was not my line. + +When a man came along and wanted a cow I always sold him one. I +would take his note for the price and, as a rule, that was all I +ever got. + +In the spring of 1875 a man named Glen came into that country from +Jefferson county, Missouri, and to him I sold my entire +possessions. I got out of that scrape by losing my time and one +thousand dollars in money, but I had five years of almost +invaluable experience in ranching and stock-raising. + +In those days this was what we called a Mexican stand-off. I lost +my time and money, but had my life left. Nothing occurred during +this five years of my life more than the routine of business that +naturally belongs with this kind of life, so I will pass over it. +I had such poor success ranching that I don't like to think of it +myself, much less having it told in history. + +Leaving here I went to Virginia City, Nevada. This was in the +palmy days of the Comstock, and everything was high. After looking +around for a few days and seeing that horses were valuable, I +started for Jacksonville, Oregon, to buy horses for the Virginia +City market. On my arrival at Jacksonville I met a man by the name +of John T. Miller, who was a thorough horseman, and was said to be +a great salesman, which I knew I was not myself. I could buy, but +I could not sell to advantage like some other men. + +I formed a partnership with Miller, and we were not long in +gathering up eighty-five head of horses in Jackson county and +starting to market with them. + +I was back to Virginia City in a few days over two months from the +time I had left there, and Mr. Miller proving to be a thorough +salesman, we soon disposed of our entire band at a good figure, +and in less than one month from the time we arrived at Virginia +City we were on our way back to Oregon. + +After we returned to Jacksonville we settled up and had cleared +eleven hundred dollars each on the trip. That beat ranching all +hollow. Now Mr. Miller proposed to me that we go into horse +raising. He said he knew where there was a large tract of swamp- +land near Klamath Lake. Swamp and overflown land belonged to the +state, and this swamp-land could be bought for a dollar an acre by +paying twenty cents an acre down and twenty per cent yearly +thereafter until it was paid. + +Miller being a thorough horseman, I thought I might succeed better +in the horse business than in cattle. So in company with him, I +started over to look at the land, and being well pleased with the +tract, I made application for it at once. This land was located +just on the outer edge of the Modoc Indian reservation. Miller +being acquainted with all the Modocs, he and I, after I had +concluded to settle, rode down to Captain Jack's wick-i-up, which +was a distance of two miles from where I proposed settling. +Captain Jack was the chief of the Modoc tribe, and I found him to +be a very intelligent Indian, and he made a very good stagger +towards talking the English language. + +When Mr. Miller introduced me to Chief Jack--or Captain Jack as he +was called--and told him that I was going to be a neighbor to him, +he said, "All right, that's good, and we be friends, too." I told +him yes, and if the white men did not treat him well to let me +know and I would attend to it. Jack then asked Mr. Miller where +Mr. Applegate was, he being agent for the Modoc tribe, and lived +in the neighborhood of Jacksonville, Oregon. Miller told him that +he did not know. Jack said: "My people heap hungry and Applegate +no give us anything to eat, no let us leave reservation to hunt; I +don't know what I do." + +Mr. Miller told Jack that he would see Applegate and tell him of +their condition. The next morning Miller started back to +Jacksonville and I remained on the land selected to be my future +home. + +Every few days Jack would come to my place to ask my advice as to +what he should do, saying: "We no got anything to eat for three +moons (three months). He tell me he come bring beef. He no come, +no send beef." Finally Jack came to my camp one day and said: "I +don't know what I do, no meat, no flour, wocus nearly all gone." + +I told Jack that I would go home with him and see for myself, not +knowing but that his complaints might be without foundation. I +mounted my horse, and riding over with Captain Jack, my +investigation proved to a certainty that he had been telling me +the truth all this time, for they were almost destitute of +anything to eat, there being nothing in the entire village in the +line of provisions but a little wocus, or wild rice. + +Jack said: "Agent no come next week and bring something to eat, I +take all Injuns, go Tule Lake and catch fish. What you think?" + +I said: "Jack, I do not know what to say, but you come home with +me and I will give you one sack of flour and I have a deer there, +I will give you half of that, and by the time you eat that up +perhaps the agent may come with provisions." A few days later Jack +came to my house and said: "Agent no come to-morrow, I go Tule +Lake, take all Injuns. Plenty fish Tule Lake, easy catch them." To +this I did not reply. I dare not advise him to leave the +reservation, and at the same time I knew they were almost in a +starving condition and were compelled to do something or sit there +and starve; and here I would say that in this case Captain Jack +was not to blame for leaving the reservation. I just state these +few facts merely to show that while the Indians are as a general +rule treacherous and barbarous, at the same time, in many cases no +doubt similar to this one, they have been blamed more than was due +them. + +As the old adage goes, I believe in giving the devil his just +dues, and I do not believe that Jack would have left the +reservation at that time had he been supplied with provisions +sufficient to live on. + +I do not pretend to say whose fault this was, but merely state the +facts as I know them. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + +THE MODOC WAR--GEN. WHEATON IS HELD OFF BY THE INDIANS--GEN. CANBY +TAKES COMMAND AND GETS IT WORSE--MASSACRE OF THE PEACE COMMISSION. + + +Two weeks later I went out to Linkville to buy some groceries. +This place was fifteen miles from where I had settled, and the +nearest trading post or settlement to me, telling my two hired men +that I would be at home the next day or the day after at the +outside. + +The store was kept by a man named Nurse. He told me he had a band +of mares that he would sell cheap, and insisted on my staying over +night with him, saying that he would have them brought in the day +following, which I agreed to do, and the next morning he started +his men out to look for the mares. They did not get them gathered +up until the afternoon, and Mr. Nurse and I were in the corral +looking at them, when a man rode up at full speed, his horse +foaming all over, and said in a very excited tone that the Modoc +Indians had gone on the war-path and had murdered most all the +settlers on Lost River and Tule Lake, the latter being only twenty +miles south from Linkville. The courier that brought the news to +Linkville said that the soldiers had come down to Tule Lake and +fired on Captain Jack without any warning whatever, which we +learned later to be all too true. + +The Indians had scattered all over the country, and had killed +every white person they ran across for two days and then fled to +the lava beds. This put an end to the horse trading. Mr. Nurse +said that some one would have to go to Jacksonville and report at +once, for they were not strong enough there to protect themselves +against the Modocs, but no one seemed willing to tackle the trip, +and I told them that if no one else would go, I would go myself. +It was now near sundown, and it was called one hundred miles to +Jacksonville from there. I started at once, going part of the way +over the wagon road and the remainder of the way on the trail. + +I arrived at Jacksonville the next morning before sun-up. The +first man I met was the sheriff of the county, who was just coming +out to feed his horses. I related my story to him in as few words +as I could, and told him to raise all the men he could. I had my +horse taken care of and went to bed, for I was very tired; with +directions to wake me up in time to eat a bite before starting. At +four o'clock that afternoon they woke me, they having sixty men +then ready to start and one hundred ready to follow the next +morning. + +Among the balance who were ready to start was Mr. Miller. When I +led my horse out he asked if that was the horse I had ridden over +from Linkville. I told him I had nothing else to ride. He went to +the stable and got another horse and insisted on my changing my +saddle, but I told him I would ride my horse to the foot of the +mountains and then change, which I did. + +We reached Linkville the next morning at nine o'clock, and Mr. +Nurse gave us breakfast. That afternoon we went down to Tule Lake +and buried three dead bodies, being of the Brotherton family, the +father and two sons, and the next day we buried four more, after +which I left this squad and returned to my ranch to get my two +hired men away, which took me three days. By the time I had got +back to Linkville the news had spread all over the country of the +outbreak of Captain Jack and the Modoc tribe, and Gen. Wheaton had +moved his entire force down to the lava beds, where Captain Jack +had his forces concentrated. + +Gen. Ross and Col. Miller had moved in, but I do not know just the +exact number of men they had in their command. After this scare I +could not get any men to work on the ranch, so I abandoned it for +the time being and stayed around Linkville about a week, when I +received a message from Gen. Wheaton to come to his quarters +immediately. This message was carried by one of his orderlies. I +complied, the orderly returning with me. I was not acquainted with +Gen. Wheaton, nor had I ever seen him before. When I was introduced +to him he asked me if I knew Captain Jack, chief of the Modoc +tribe. I told him that I was well acquainted with him and all of +his men. "Now," said he, "I'll tell you what I wish to see you +about. Col. Miller recommends you very highly as a scout, and how +would it suit you to take charge of the entire scouting force, and +organize them to suit yourself and start in at once?" + +I said: "General, I have tried hard to quit that business. In the +first start I went at it for the glory in it, but having failed to +find that part of it, I have become tired. I will not answer you +now, but to-morrow morning at nine o'clock I will come to your +quarters, at which time I will have my mind thoroughly made up." I +left his quarters and went over to Col. Miller's. I told the +Colonel that the General had sent for me. He urged me in the +strongest terms to take hold of it, saying that there was not a +practical scout in the entire command. Finally I promised him that +I would again enter the scouting field. + +The next morning I was up early and had breakfast with Col. +Miller. After obtaining the pass-word I saddled Black Bess, and at +nine o'clock was at Gen. Wheaton's quarters. + +I left Black Bess standing about twenty paces from the General's +tent, took one of my gloves and stuck it on a bush, and went in to +see Gen. Wheaton. I told him that I had decided to start in +scouting for him, and I suppose I was in his tent about half an +hour talking matters over about the scouting business. All being +understood, I started out to get my mare, and saw quite a crowd +had gathered around her, and one man in particular was trying to +make up with her. Just as I stepped out of the door I heard him +say, "This must surely be Black Bess. I wonder who owns her now." +And until he called the mare's name I had not recognized him, and +it struck me that it must be George Jones, but not being sure, I +said: "Is that you, George?" He said: "Yes, and that's my old +friend Capt. Drannan." This was a surprise to us both. It was the +first time that we had met since we separated at San Francisco in +the fall of 1866, at which time we had both decided to quit +fighting Indians, but here we both were again in the field. After +a good square shake and giving a hasty synopsis of our experiences +during the time we had been separated, George asked if I was going +into the scouting field again. I told him that I had just accepted +a position as chief of scouts with Gen. Wheaton. I then asked him +what he was doing for a livelihood. He said that he had joined the +Oregon Volunteers, and asked me if I did not think I could get him +relieved. "For," said he, "I would rather work with you than any +one else. We have been together so much we understand each other." + +He told me his Captain's name and that he belonged to Col. +Miller's regiment. I did not lose any time in seeing Col. Miller +and telling him that I would like very much to have him relieve +George Jones from his command, as I must have him for my first +assistant. + +This was the first time that Col. Miller had heard of George Jones +being a scout, and he wrote out the release at once and went out +and had Gen. Ross sign it and gave it to me. + +George and I went to work at once to organize our scouting +company, drawing our men mostly from the volunteers. About the +time that we were thoroughly organized it was reported that the +Pah-Utes and the Klamaths were all coming to join Captain Jack. +This lava bed where Captain Jack was fortified, was sixty miles +from the Klamath reservation, but the Pah-Utes were one hundred +and fifty miles away, and it both surprised and amused me when +those old officers would tell me that they expected the Pah-Utes +any time. Being afraid of an attack from the rear, we had to scout +a strip of country about forty miles long every day, and all the +arguments that I could produce were of no avail. After going +through this routine for about a month Gen. Wheaton concluded to +take Captain Jack by storm. Captain Jack was there, and had been +all the time, in what was called his stronghold in the lava bed, +being nothing more or less than a cave in the rocks, sixty yards +long, and from ten to thirty feet wide, there being one place in +the east side where a man could ride a horse into it, and numerous +places where a man could enter with ease. Down on the east and +south sides are numerous holes in the rock just large enough to +shoot through. Captain Jack had his entire force in there, had +killed all of his horses and taken them in there for meat, and +through the Klamath Indians had got a good supply of ammunition. + +After Gen. Wheaton had made up his mind to take the stronghold by +storm, he asked if I could give a description of the place. Up to +this time there had not been a shot fired at the soldiers by the +Indians, and I had a number of times passed in gunshot of the main +entrance, and I know that the Indians had recognized me, but +because I had befriended them they would not shoot at me. + +I drew a diagram of the cave in the best style that I could, +showing the main entrance and the natural port holes, and when I +submitted it to the General, I said: "General, you can never take +Captain Jack as long as his ammunition lasts, for he has the same +kind of guns that you have, and the majority of his men have +pistols also, and all that he will have to do is to stand there +and shoot your men down as fast as they can come." + +But the General thought different. The day was set for the attack, +and on Wednesday morning the storm was to commence. The army had +its camp one mile from Jack's stronghold, so the soldiers did not +have far to march. About sunrise the whole command marched down +and turned loose on Jack, and were soon bombarding him in great +shape. This was kept up for three days and nights, when Gen. +Wheaton withdrew, having lost sixty men and something over twenty +wounded, as I was told by Col. Miller afterwards, but Jack did not +come out. + +A short time after this Gen. Canby came over and took the entire +command. He brought with him a minister by the name of Col. +Thomas. + +The second day after Gen. Canby arrived he asked Gen. Wheaton, in +the presence of quite a number of officers, how many men Captain +Jack had with him. + +Gen. Wheaton said; "My chief scout could tell just the number that +he has, but I think some sixty-three or sixty-four warriors." + +"And you had fifteen hundred men in that three days' fight?" + +Gen. Wheaton said he had. + +"And you got whipped? There was bad management somewhere," said +Canby; and he concluded he would take Captain Jack by storm, but +postponed it for a month, this bringing it into the foggy weather +in that country, and in that time of the year it is the foggiest +country I ever saw. I have seen it for a week at a time in the +lava bed that I could not tell an Indian from a rock when twenty +paces away. And this was the kind of weather Gen. Canby was +waiting for. He marched down to the lava bed and placed his +howitzer on the hill about a quarter of a mile from Jack's +stronghold and commenced playing the shell. This was done in order +to give the infantry a chance to march down to the main entrance +of the cave and there shoot the Indians down as fast as they came +out. + +Three days and nights this was kept up, but not an Indian came +out, and Gen. Canby drew off, losing over one hundred men killed, +but I never knew the exact number wounded. + +When Gen. Canby found he could not take the Modocs by storm, he +sent to Yreka, Cal., for a man named Berry, who was a particular +friend of Jack's, or rather Jack was a particular friend to him. +On Mr. Berry's arrival at headquarters Gen. Canby asked him if he +thought he dare go to Captain Jack's stronghold. Mr. Berry replied +that he would provided that he went alone. I never knew just what +Mr. Berry's instructions were, but, however, I accompanied him to +within two hundred paces of the main entrance to the cave, in +order to direct him to the proper place, and he chose his time to +go after dark. + +I remained there until after he returned, which was before +midnight. A few days later I learned that there was to be a +council meeting between Gen. Canby, Rev. Col. Thomas and Captain +Jack, and in a conversation with Col. Miller he asked me my +opinion in regard to the matter. I told him that I did not +understand all the particulars, as I had heard but little about +it. + +He then told me that Gen. Canby and Col. Thomas, with George Meeks +as interpreter for them, and Meek's squaw as interpreter for +Captain Jack, were to meet Jack next Sunday morning for the +purpose of effecting a treaty with the Modoc tribe, they to meet +Jack at a certain place, without escort or side arms. After the +Colonel had told me of the council and manner in which they were +to meet Captain Jack, I said: "Colonel, do you really believe they +will go?" + +"Go," he replied. "Gen. Canby will go if he lives till the time +appointed for the meeting." + +I could not think that Canby would do such a thing, and I told +Col. Miller that there was one thing he could depend upon, if they +went in that manner they would never return alive. I also told him +I did not consider Mr. Berry showed good judgement in letting +Captain Jack choose his own ground for the council and agreeing to +meet him without escort or side arms. + +That afternoon Gen. Wheaton sent for me, and I responded to the +call at once. When I arrived at the General's camp he opened the +conversation by saying: "Captain, have you heard of the meeting +that is to take place between Gen. Canby and Captain Jack?" + +I said: "No, General, I had heard nothing of it." This being a +little white lie, for it had been told me in confidence by Col. +Miller. I asked what the object of the meeting was, and when and +where it was to be. + +He said it was for the purpose of effecting a treaty with Captain +Jack, and was to be held in a little glade or opening on the other +side of Dry Lake canyon, this being about one mile south of +headquarters, and within a quarter of a mile of Captain Jack's +stronghold. Said he: "Gen. Canby and Rev. Col. Thomas, accompanied +by George Meeks and his squaw as interpreters, are to meet Captain +Jack there without escort or even side arms. Now, Captain, tell me +seriously, what you think of this affair." + +I said: "General, they may go, but they will never return." + +The General then asked me if I would have a talk with Gen. Canby. +I told him that if Gen. Canby asked for my opinion in the matter I +would give it just as frankly as I would to you, otherwise I had +nothing to say, for Gen. Canby was a man that seemed to feel too +much elevated to speak to a scout, except just to give orders. +Gen. Wheaton told me that he would see Gen. Canby himself and have +a talk with him. This was on Friday previous to the Sunday on +which they were to meet in council. + +In the afternoon of the same day it was reported that there had +been Indians seen along Tule Lake. I mounted my horse and started +with a platoon of soldiers and a sergeant, and when we had +advanced about twelve miles I was riding about two hundred yards +in advance I saw something dodge into a bunch of sarvis brush. +Beckoning to the sergeant, he dashed up to my side and said: +"What's up, Captain?" + +"I got a glimpse of something just as it ran into that patch of +brush, and I think it was an Indian." + +He had his men surround the brush and I went to scare the Indian +out. I searched that patch of brush thoroughly, but could find no +Indian or anything else, and the boys all enjoyed a hearty laugh +at my expense. + +The sergeant proposed that we all have a smoke, so we turned our +horses loose to graze. The sergeant lit his pipe, threw off his +overcoat and laid down to rest. As he cast his eyes heavenward in +the direction of the top of the only pine tree that stood in that +patch of brush, he exclaimed: "Captain, I have found your Indian." +Of course we all commenced looking for the Indian, and I asked +where he was, whereupon he told me to look up in the pine tree, +and on looking I beheld an Indian with whom I was well acquainted, +as he had been to my ranch several times in company with Captain +Jack. + +I asked him to come down, telling him that I would protect him if +he would, but he would not utter a word, nor would he come down. I +tried for at least a half hour to induce him to come down until I +had exhausted all the persuasive powers I possessed, but to no +avail. + +I told the sergeant that I had treed his Indian, and now he could +do as he pleased with him, and the sergeant ordered him shot down, +after which we returned to headquarters, this being the only +Indian seen on the trip. + +The next morning Gen. Wheaton sent for me to come to his quarters, +which I did, and in a conversation with him he asked me if I was +still of the same opinion concerning the council meeting as when I +talked with him before. I told him that I was, that I had not seen +or heard anything to change my mind in the least. He then said: "I +had a conversation with Gen. Canby and Rev. Col. Thomas, and Col. +Thomas scoffs at the idea you advance, claiming that they were +going in a good cause, and that the Lord would protect them." I +told the General that George Jones and I were going to see that +meeting. He said that would not do, for it was strictly forbidden. +I assured the General that I would not break any rules, but that I +would see the meeting. I had given my scouts their orders until +ten o'clock the next day, and when dark came Jones and I were +going to the bluff on this side of the canyon and there secrete +ourselves, where, with a glass, we could see the whole proceeding +and not be discovered by the Indians. + +The reader will understand that a scout is, in a certain measure, +a privileged character. + +As soon as it was dark Saturday evening George and I went to the +place mentioned and remained there until the time arrived for the +meeting. About nine o'clock that morning the fog raised and the +sun shone brightly, making it one of the most pleasant mornings we +had experienced for some time, thereby giving us a good view of +the grounds of the proposed meeting, and we could see Captain Jack +and another Indian there waiting. I could recognize Jack's +features through the glass, but the other Indian I could not. In a +short time we saw Gen. Canby, Col. Thomas, George Meeks and his +squaw coming. When they reached the lower end of the little +opening one hundred and fifty yards from where Captain Jack was +standing, they dismounted, tied their horses and walked slowly in +the direction where Captain Jack was standing, and every few steps +Gen. Canby would look back, apparently to see if any one was +following them. On arriving at the spot they shook hands with +Captain Jack and the other Indian, and probably fifteen minutes +elapsed when Captain Jack dropped his blanket from his shoulders +to the ground and suddenly turned and picked it up. This, I +believe, was a signal for an attack, for the next moment I saw +smoke from a number of guns from the rocks and could hear the +reports also. Col. Thomas, Meeks and his squaw started on the run, +but Gen. Canby fell in his tracks, a victim at the hands of +Captain Jack and his followers. Col. Thomas only ran about ten +steps, when he fell. Meeks ran nearly one hundred yards, when he +fell, and the squaw escaped unhurt, but badly scared, I presume. + +As soon as Gen. Canby had fallen George Jones asked if he had +better go to headquarters and give the alarm. I told him to go +with all possible speed. George reached camp twenty minutes ahead +of me. The other officers could not believe that he was telling +the truth, but when I arrived and told them that the entire crowd +had been killed, with the exception of the squaw, they were +thunderstruck, and by the time I was through telling them the +squaw was there. + +I do not know just how many soldiers were sent to recover the dead +bodies, but that day there was a general attack made on Captain +Jack, which was kept up from day to day almost as long as the war +lasted. + +When it was foggy, as it was nearly all the time, the Indians +almost invariably got the best of the soldiers, from the fact that +they would come out without any clothing on their bodies with a +bunch of sage-brush tied on their heads, and their skins being so +similar in color to that of the lava rocks, that when the fog was +thick, at a distance of thirty or forty yards, it was impossible +to distinguish an Indian from a rock. There were more or less +soldiers killed and wounded every day until the end of the war. + +One day only a short time after the assassination of Gen. Canby and +Col. Thomas, the soldiers were attacked in Dry Lake canyon by the +Modocs and were getting badly butchered up. + +As I rode along Gen. Wheaton dashed up by my side and said: "Where +can those Indians be and what kind of guns have they? I have been +losing men all day and there has not been an Indian seen." I told +the General I would try and locate them and let him know just +where they were. Taking George Jones and another man by the name +of Owens with me, I rode around on the opposite ridge, dismounted, +and leaving my horse with the other boys, I crawled down among the +rocks. I had on a buckskin suit and could not be seen much easier +than a Modoc when in the lava beds. They kept up a continual +firing, and now and then I could hear a bullet whiz near me. After +I had crawled about sixty yards as cautiously as I could I raised +on one knee and foot and my gun was resting across my leg while I +was peering through the fog to see if I could get sight of any +Indians, and listening to see if I could hear an Indian's voice. I +had remained in this position about five minutes when a ball +struck me on the shin-bone, just below the boot top. It appeared +to me that I could have heard it crack at a hundred yards. Never +before in my life had I experienced such a miserable feeling as at +that time. I thought that my leg was broken into atoms. I started +to crawl back up the hill, taking the same route that I had come +down, and when I had ascended the hill near enough to the boys so +they could see me, George Jones saw that I was hurt. + +He dropped his gun and ran to me at once and said: "Captain, are +you badly hurt?" But before I had time to answer him he had picked +me up bodily and was running up the hill with me. + +When he got to where our horses were he said: "Where are you +shot?" I said: "George, my left leg is shot off." "What shall we +do?" said George. I told him to put me on Johnny, that being the +name of my horse, and I would go to headquarters. He said: "Let me +pull your boot off," at the same time taking hold of my boot. I +caught my leg with both hands to hold the bones together while the +boot was being removed from the leg, thinking that the bone was +shattered into small pieces. As soon as George had succeeded in +removing my boot from my foot, he turned the top of the boot +downward to let the blood run out of it. "Why," said he, "your leg +is not bleeding at all." I then commenced feeling my leg, but could +not feel or hear any bones work, so by the assistance of George I +got my breeches-leg up and there the ball stuck just between the +skin and the bone of my leg, and the boys had a good laugh at my +expense. + +When I had learned that my leg was not broken, George and I +crawled down together into the canyon, and located the Indians. We +got so near that we could see the flash from their guns through +the fog. We then ascended the hill, mounted our horses, rode back +and reported to Gen. Wheaton. But the Indians had the advantage +over the soldiers from the fact that the soldiers' could be easily +distinguished from the rocks. + +About one week later, George Jones, a young man named Savage, and +myself, went on just such another trip. It was our custom when +going into the canyon to leave one man in charge of our horses +until we returned, and in this case we left Savage with three +saddle horses and instructions to remain there until we returned. +On our return we found poor Savage mortally wounded, and he only +lived a few minutes. He had two balls through his body. It seemed +that he had tied the horses and come to the top of the hill to +look for us or to warn us of danger, and while there had been shot +down by the Indians. + +This was the first scout I had lost since I had entered the +scouting field at this place. By the assistance of Jones I got the +body on my horse in front of me and carried it to headquarters and +reported to Gen. Ross, who was acquainted with Savage's family, +and he sent the body to Jacksonville for interment. A few days +later, George, myself and four assistants started out to meet a +pack-train that was coming in from Yreka, Cal., with supplies. We +met the train twelve miles from headquarters and told the man in +charge that he would either have to cross the lava beds or go +around forty miles. He decided to take chances in crossing the +lava beds in preference to going so far around. We told him that +he would be running a great risk, for we were satisfied that Jack +was running short of provisions and that he had men out all the +time foraging, and we knew that if the Indians happened to +discover this train they would make a desperate effort to capture +it, or at least a part of it. There were fifty animals in the +train and only three men. When we started across the lava beds I +took the lead, and George and our other men in the rear. In case +of an attack on either, he was to fire two shots in quick +succession as a signal for assistance, for the fog was almost +thick enough that day to cut in slices with a knife. The man in +charge of the train started a young man ahead with me to lead the +bell-horse, placing another young man about the center of the +train. + +It was a miserably rough country across these lava beds, and we +had to travel very slowly. + +The man in charge dropped back in the rear of the train, thinking +that if we were attacked it would be at the rear. + +The reader will understand that in crossing this hell-hearth it +was necessary for the pack-animals to string out single file. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. + +THE CRY OF A BABE.--CAPTURE OF A BEVY OF SQUAWS. TREACHERY OF GEN. +ROSS' MEN IN KILLING PRISONERS.--CAPTURE OF THE MODOC CHIEF. + + +When we were across the lava beds, or "Devil's Garden," as the +place was commonly called, I told the man who was leading the +bell-horse to stop and wait until the other animals had come up in +order to see whether we had lost any. This was within a mile of +headquarters. The man in charge, also Jones and the other scouts, +came up, but the young man who had been riding in the middle, also +four mules and their packs, as the saying is, "came up missing." + +The train went on to headquarters, but Jones and I returned along +the trail to see if we could find the missing man. One of us, +however, had to leave the trail and scout along on foot. + +After following the back-track two miles I found where the four +mules had left it. It was now late in the evening, and we were +within less than a mile and a half of Captain Jack's stronghold. +We tied our horses there and started out, caring but little about +the mules and their packs; it was the man that we were looking +after. We had not gone more than fifty yards from the trail when +we found the body. + +The poor fellow had been stoned to death, his head being beaten +out of shape. This the Indians had done to prevent an alarm. They +had evidently been hidden in the lava rocks and had managed to +turn those four mules from the trail, and the fog being so thick +that a person could not see any distance, the man did not notice +that he was off of the trail until too late; and when once off the +trail a few paces it was impossible for him to get back again. The +mules and packs were never seen again. The Indians, no doubt, took +them to the cave, used the provisions, killed and ate the mules +and saddle-horse which the man was riding. We took the body to +headquarters, and the next day it was started to Yreka, Cal. I do +not remember the name of this young man, but he lived near Yreka. + +Gen. Wheaton was now fighting, the Indians every day, and at night +kept a strong picket guard around the cave. About this time it was +reported that Gen. Wheaton had received orders to take Captain +Jack if he had to exterminate the entire tribe. + +The feeling was getting to be very strong against Captain Jack in +regard to the assassination of Gen. Canby, Col. Thomas and George +Meeks, the interpreter. One evening in a conversation with Gen. +Wheaton he asked me how long I thought it would take to starve +them out. I said: "General, if they took all their horses in the +cave, which I believe they did, and we know for a fact that they +got some cattle from the Klamath river, I think it will be May or +June before you will be able to starve them out." + +He said that every Indian that came out of the cave single-handed +or otherwise would not live to get through the picket line, saying +that he had a double picket line now around the entire cave, both +day and night. + +The next morning after this conversation with the General, one of +my scouts came in from Rattlesnake Point and reported having seen +the tracks of twenty Indians, where they had crossed the road on +the east side of the lake, and they were all small tracks. + +I reported this to the General, telling him that Jack was a pretty +smart Indian, for he was sending his women and children away so as +to make his provisions last as long as possible. + +George Jones and I started out, accompanied by two platoons of +soldiers, to capture the Indians. We had no trouble in finding +their trail, and in running them down. + +It so happened that our escort that day were all Gen. Ross' men +and were all friends to young Savage, who had recently been killed +by the Modocs. After following the trail about ten miles we came +in sight of the Indians on Lost river. We did not see them until +we were near them and had no trouble in capturing the whole +outfit. There were twenty-two, all squaws and little girls. I was +personally acquainted with all of those Indians, and knowing so +well the cause of all this trouble, and just what brought it +about, I could not help sympathizing with the women and children. +In fact, I had felt from the very start that this trouble was all +uncalled for. Among the crowd was one young squaw who spoke pretty +fair English for an Indian in those days. I was well acquainted +with her, and told her that we would have to take them all, but +that they would be treated as prisoners. She did not seem to +understand the meaning of "prisoners." + +I explained to her, and she in her own tongue explained it to the +rest of the crowd. I told her that we would have to take them back +to headquarters. + +She said: "We heap hungry, long time no eat much. Maby white man +no give us anything to eat. 'Spose no eat purty soon all die." I +assured her that they would have plenty to eat as long as they +behaved themselves and gave the soldiers no trouble. + +They all seemed to be perfectly willing to surrender and go back +to headquarters, so we started back via Tule Lake. When we reached +the mouth of Lost river I turned the prisoners over to the two +sergeants who had charge of the two platoons of soldiers. George +and I wanted to make a circuit around in the direction of Clear +Lake, thinking, of course, that the prisoners would be perfectly +safe in charge of the soldiers, especially those little girls. +George and I did not get to headquarters that night until ten +o'clock, and the first thing I heard when I got into camp was that +the Indians had tried to run off into the tules while coming down +Tule Lake, and they had all been shot down by the soldiers, I went +at once to see Gen. Ross relative to the matter, for I could not +believe it. The General confirmed the report by saying every one +of them had been shot. I said: "General, that is the most cowardly +piece of work I ever heard white men accused of in my life. Will +you please tell the men who did that cowardly piece of work, that +they had better never be caught out with me when I have the best +of it, for I would much prefer shooting such men down, to shooting +helpless women and children." + +This conversation caused a great deal of talk of a court-martial, +but it all blew over, I suppose, on account of Captain Jack +murdering Gen. Canby. The next conversation I had with Gen. +Wheaton, I asked why the picket guard let those Indians pass +through the picket line, and speaking as though I thought they had +passed boldly out through the line; he said: + +"I cannot see into it myself." + +I said: "General, that is the way the Indians will all get out of +there, and at the final surrender you will not have six warriors +in the cave. From this on you will find that they will gradually +desert Jack, for the squaws told me that they were getting very +hungry." + +It was reported around that Captain Jack and three other Indians +would be hung if caught alive, this being the orders from +headquarters. The other three were Schonchin, Scarfaced Charlie +and Shacknasty Jim, these being Jack's council or under chiefs. + +When this report came, Gen. Wheaton told me that if it was +necessary he would make another detail of scouts, for he would not +under any consideration have the Indians escape. I told the +General to give himself no uneasiness in regard to that part of +it, for we would run down all the Indians that crossed the picket +line, but I must know what I should promise a prisoner when I +captured him. I asked if I should promise them protection or not, +for if there was no protection, I would not bring them in. He +assured me that all prisoners caught after this would be protected +as prisoners of war until tried and proven guilty. + +What the General meant by that was those who might be proven +guilty of being directly interested in the murder of Gen. Canby +and Col. Thomas. + +I now put George Jones on the night shift. He had the entire +charge of night scouting, and he and his assistants rode all night +long. In the morning I started out with my assistants and rode all +day; so it was impossible for the Indians to get out and away +without our getting track of them, and if they left a track we +were sure to capture them. + +We kept this up for about three weeks, when I made a change; +George and I doing the night scouting alone, and leaving the day +scouting for the other scouts. + +One night we were out near Dry Lake, about five miles from +headquarters, and there came up a cold fog. We built a little fire +to warm by, and shortly after we had started it we heard what an +inexperienced man would have called two cayotes, but we knew they +were Indians and were in different directions and this was their +signal for meeting. + +We mounted our horses and rode in the opposite direction, but +before we left we gave a yelp in a laughing sort of manner to make +the Indians believe that we thought it was cayotes. We rode +quietly away about three hundred yards from the fire, dismounted, +tied our horses and crawled back near the fire. All this time the +Indians had kept up their cayote barking and were drawing near the +fire. It was some little time before they dared approach, but +after they had looked carefully around, I suppose they thought it +had been campers who had stopped, built a fire and then pulled +out, for it was not the custom of scouts to build a fire, which +the Indians well knew, they finally ventured up to the fire and +were warming themselves. Seeing that they were both armed with +rifles, and the chances were they both had pistols, we made up our +minds not to take any chances, so I proposed to George that we +should shoot them down, just as they would have done us if we had +not understood their signal. + +Of course if it had been daylight it would have been quite +different, but three jumps away from the fire and they would have +been safe from us. We were sitting side by side not more than +forty yards from them. I told George to take the one on the right +and I would take the one on the left, and when he gave the word I +would fire with him. We raised our guns, and when he gave the word +we both fired, and the two Indians fell to the ground. We waited +about five minutes to see whether they would rise or not, and +believing we had killed them both, we approached them. One of them +was dead and the other was just about dead, so we took their guns +and pistols and reported to Gen. Wheaton. + +The next morning he said it was a mystery how the Indians would +get out and the men on picket would not see them. He said: "I +cannot see through it." + +About a week or ten days later George and I were coming in just +before daylight, when we heard a baby cry on the hillside only a +short distance from us. We stopped and listed until we had located +it. George dismounted, and I held his horse while he crawled up to +see where it was, and found that there was quite a number of +squaws and children there. I told him that it would be a matter of +impossibility for them to get away from us and the grass so high, +for we could track them easily, so I left him there to keep watch +and see which way they moved so that we would know how to start +after them, and I would ride to headquarters, about two miles +away, for assistance to help capture them when it was daylight. I +rode slow until so far away that I knew they could not hear the +clatter of my horse's feet, and then I put spurs to my horse and +rode with all speed to headquarters. When I passed the camp guard +he challenged me and I gave my name. I could hear it carried down +the line from one to another, "There comes the Captain of the +Scouts, there is something up." Rather than wake up a commissioned +officer, I woke up my entire scout force, and was back to where +George Jones was just at daylight. He said that the squaws had +moved in the direction of Clear Lake. There was a heavy dew and we +had no trouble in finding their trail and following it; in fact, +at times we could ride almost at full speed and follow without +difficulty. We had only gone about four miles when we came in +sight of them, six squaws, a little boy, a little girl and a baby. +When they saw me coming they all stopped. I rode up and asked them +where they were going. They could all speak a little English. + +There was one in the crowd named Mary, with whom I was well +acquainted, who said: "We heap hungry, too much hungry, we go +Clear Lake catch fish." I told her that we would have to take them +prisoners and take them all back to headquarters and keep them +there until we got all the Modoc Indians and then they would have +to go on to the reservation. "No, too much hungry, you all time +fight Captain Jack, Injun no catch fish. All time eatem hoss. No +more hoss now; Injun eatem all up, eatem some cow too. No more +hoss, no more cow. Injun all heap hungry." + +It was some time before I could make them believe that they would +be fed when at headquarters, but they being acquainted with me and +knowing that I had been a friend to them in time of peace. I +finally succeeded in getting them to turn and go to headquarters. +These were the first prisoners that had been taken to the +General's quarters during the Modoc war. + +Gen. Wheaton was away from his quarters, so I left the prisoners +in charge of George Jones and the other scouts, with instructions +to let no one interfere with them while I went to hunt the +General. + +I soon found him and with him returned to where the Indians were. +The General asked me to question the one of them that talked the +best English and had done the most talking, concerning the number +of men that Captain Jack had in his stronghold. When I asked her +she said: "Some days twenty men, some days thirty men, no more, +some go away. No more come back, some shoot, by and by he die. Two +days now me not eat. Injun man, he no eat much." + +From this we inferred that they only had a little provisions left, +and the men that did the fighting did the eating also. They were +given something to eat at once, and I don't think I ever saw more +hungry mortals. I told the General that it would not be long until +they would all come out, but that I did not think they would come +in a body, but would slip out two or three at a time. The General +thought it so strange that they were stealing out through the +picket lines and the guards not seeing any of them. + +Some three weeks later than this, it being about the first of +June, 1873, George and I had been out all night and were coming +into quarters, being a little later this morning than common, and +when we were within about one and a half miles from quarters we +crossed the trail of three Indians. I got down and examined the +tracks closely; there was one track quite large and long, another +not quite so large and the third was quite small. I told George I +was not afraid to bet twenty dollars that they were the tracks of +Captain Jack, his wife and little girl. We pushed on to +headquarters with all possible speed and reported to Gen. Wheaton. +He asked my reason for thinking that it was Captain Jack. I told +him from the fact that it suited for his family. I was well +acquainted with both him and his squaw, and I told the General +that Jack himself had an unusually long foot. He asked how much of +an escort I wanted and if I would go at once. I told him I would, +and I wanted two platoons. He directed his orderlies to report as +soon as possible with two platoons of cavalry, and I gave my horse +to George, telling him to change our saddles to fresh horses at +once. As soon as it was noised around that we had got track of +Captain Jack, the scouts all wanted to accompany me, but I told +them that their services could not be dispensed with at camp for +one hour, for it was getting now where the thing must be watched +very closely. George rode up on a fresh horse and was leading +Black Bess with my saddle on her. I mounted and we were off again +in pursuit of Captain Jack, but as we rode away Gen. Wheaton +expressed himself as being doubtful as to its being Captain Jack. + +When we struck the trail of the three Indians, I had one platoon +to ride on each side of the trail, keeping about fifty yards away +from it, and in case we should miss it or get off, we would have a +chance to go back and pick it up again before it would become +obliterated. + +This was one of the prettiest mornings that we could have had for +the occasion. The fog disappeared with the rising of the sun, and +in many places we could look ahead and see the trail in the grass +for fifty yards. In those places we put our horses down to their +utmost. George and I were both very hungry, having had nothing to +eat since the evening before, and we had been in the saddle all +night, but an old scout forgets all this when he gets on a fresh +Indian trail and becomes somewhat excited. After we had gone about +six miles we came to a gravel country for a mile and a half, and +it was slow and tedious tracking across this, for many times we +had nothing to go by only as they might turn a little pebble over +with their feet or step on a little spear of grass and mash it +down, and this was very thin and scattering on the ridge. However, +as soon as we were across the gravelly ridge, we again struck +grass and we let our horses out almost at full speed, knowing very +well that as soon as the dew dried off it would be slow and +tedious tracking. After we had ridden about twelve miles, and just +as we raised the top of the hill, on looking across on the next +ridge we saw the three Indians, and sure enough, it was Captain +Jack, his squaw and little girl. About this time he turned and saw +us coming. He stood and looked at us for a moment or so and the +three all turned and started back to meet us. We both pulled our +pistols and dashed up to him at full speed. + +When we were close enough, I could see that he had a smile on his +face, and I knew that he had recognized me. When we rode up to him +he said: "Good mornin. Long time no see you," and at the same time +presented the gun with the breech foremost. + +As I took the gun, I said to him: "Jack, where are you going?" + +He replied: "O, heap hungry, guess go Clear Lake catch fish." + +I said: "No, Jack; you are my prisoner. I will have to take you +back to Gen. Wheaton." + +He replied: "No, me no want to go back, no more fight, too much +all time hungry, little girl nearly starve, no catch fish soon he +die." But when he saw that he had to go, he said: + +"All right, me go." + +So I took the little girl up behind me, and George took the squaw +up behind him and Jack walked. + +It was in the afternoon when we returned to headquarters with the +prisoners, and there was no little rejoicing among the soldiers +when they learned for a certainty that I had taken Captain Jack +prisoner. + +That afternoon a runner was started to Yreka with a dispatch to +headquarters to the effect that Gen. Wheaton had taken the +notorious Captain Jack prisoner. As a matter of fact, an old scout +is never known in such cases. They, as a general rule, do the +work, but the officers always get the praise. Although Gen. +Wheaton had the praise of capturing Captain Jack, he had but +little more to do with it than the President of the United States. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVIII. + +STORY OF THE CAPTURED BRAVES.--WHY CAPTAIN JACK DESERTED.-- +LOATHSOME CONDITION OF THE STRONGHOLD.--END OF THE WAR.--SOME +COMMENTS. + + +That evening I had a long conversation with Captain Jack, and from +him I learned the exact number of Indians in the cave. He said +there were twenty women, and maybe thirty children and twenty-two +warriors. He said they would not stay there long for they had +nothing to eat, and their ammunition was nearly gone. + +I must admit that when I learned Jack's story of the way that he +had been both driven and pulled into this war, which I knew to be +a fact myself, I was sorry for him. He said that after the Indian +agent would not send them anything to eat he was forced to go away +from the reservation to catch fish to keep his people from +starving, for which purpose he was at the mouth of Lost river when +the soldiers came there. One morning before the soldiers fired on +him without even telling him to return to the reservation or +giving him any warning whatever. He said that he did not give +orders for his men to kill any white men that morning, but they +all got very angry at the soldiers for shooting at them. "That +day," said he, "I go to lava bed, my men scout all over country, +kill all white men they see." + +After I was through talking with Jack, Gen. Wheaton sent for me to +come to his quarters, as he was anxious to learn what information +I had obtained. When I told him the number of Indians yet in the +cave and that they had nothing to eat, he asked me what would be +my plan for capturing the remainder. I told him that if I was +doing it, I would capture the entire outfit without losing a +single man, but that it would take a little time; that I would not +fire on them at all, but would double the picket line, and it +would not be many days until they would surrender, and in case +some of them did slip by the guards, we would pick them up before +they got twenty miles away. + +The following morning a council was held in camp, and all the +commissioned officers were present. Now Captain Jack had been +captured, and according to reports, the other Indians were nearly +starved out, so that morning they did not open out on them at all. + +The third day from this it was reported by a citizen who had +passed over the country that day, that he saw Indians up on Tule +Lake. It being late in the afternoon, nearly dark in fact, when I +heard the report and it not being from a scout, I questioned +closely the man who was said to have seen them, but did not get +much satisfaction from him, so naturally discredited the report. +But for fear there might be some truth in it, the next morning by +daybreak George Jones and I were scouring the country in the +vicinity of Tule Lake. After having ridden some little distance we +ran upon the trail of six Indians, who as we supposed had passed +the evening before, and were evidently plodding along in the +direction of Lost river. This was without doubt the trail of four +bucks and two squaws. After we had followed this trail a few miles +we found where they had stopped, built a fire, caught, cooked and +ate some fish. We knew they were not many miles ahead of us, in +fact, the fire had not entirely gone out. From here on we had +plain sailing, and the nearer an old scout gets when on the trail +of an Indian the more anxious he gets, so we sped along up the +lake four miles further, and were on them before they knew it; +they were all on the banks of the river fishing. + +In this outfit there were Scarfaced Charley and Black Jim, their +squaws, and two other Indians. The moment we saw them we both drew +our pistols, but concealed them from their view by hiding them +under our coats. When we approached them they all said, "Good +morning." + +I did not see any guns near them nor did either of them have +pistols. Scarfaced Charley said: "We like go reservation; too much +hungry, my squaw nearly dead, ketchem some fish her, purty soon +go." + +After I had informed him that I would have to take them all back +to Gen. Wheaton's quarters, Charley said: "What for?" I said: +"Charley, I will take you all back to headquarters, give you all +plenty to eat, and when we get all the Modoc Indians they will be +taken to the reservation." "All right, me go now," said Charley, +as he started, eager to be off on the journey for headquarters. + +I asked them where their guns and pistols were, and they said: "O, +me hide them in lava bed, too much heavy, no like carry." So +George Jones took the lead, the Indians followed him, and I +brought up the rear. I could see that they were very weak from +hunger, but they plodded along, encouraged by the thought of +getting something to eat at Gen. Wheaton's quarters. + +We arrived there at noon, and when I turned them over to the +General and told him their names, he said: "It is with the +greatest of pleasure that I receive them. Now if I only had just +one more I would be satisfied. That one is Schonchin. I would then +have all the ring leaders." + +Up to this time I had not learned what would be the fate of those +Indians directly interested in the assassination of Gen. Canby and +Col. Thomas, and I must admit that I was terribly surprised when +Gen. Wheaton informed me that they would all be hanged. From those +Indians I learned that Captain Jack and his council were not on +good terms, having had a falling out while in the cave, and they +would not speak to each other while at Gen. Wheaton's +headquarters. The cause of the trouble grew out of a proposition +by Captain Jack to surrender, and he had been talking surrender +for two weeks past, but the rest of them were in favor of fighting +to the last. Mary, the squaw, told me that they at one time came +near putting Jack to death for cowardice, and that was the reason +he had deserted them, knowing that his life was in danger in the +cave. + +From this on we captured one or two Modocs every day. The fourth +day after the last band referred to was captured, one of my scouts +reported having seen Indian tracks at the head of Tule Lake, but +could not make out the exact number, I had just lain down to take +a nap, it being early in the morning, and I had been riding all +night, but George and I saddled our horses and were off for the +head of Tule Lake, Gen. Wheaton promising to send a company of +soldiers after us at once. + +We struck the Indian trail about twelve miles from headquarters, +this being the first band that had escaped from the west side of +the cave. + +As soon as we discovered their trail we put spurs to our horses +and sped along up the river, for the trail was plain and we +experienced no trouble in following it, and just above the Natural +Bridge on Lost river, we came on to them. Some were fishing, some +were cooking the fish they had caught, and others were eating +fish. It seemed that each one of them caught, cooked and ate their +own fish. Seeing no arms we rode up to them. There were twelve of +them, and among them was Sconchin, the other councilman who the +General was so anxious to get hold of. Sconchin said: "Go Fort +Klamath, all Injun heap hungry, now ketchem fish, eat plenty, by +and by go to fort." + +I had George Jones turn and ride back to hurry the soldiers up, +for I did not deem it a safe plan for two of us to try to take the +whole crowd prisoners, for even though they had no arms they might +scatter all over the country and then we could not get them only +by killing them, and that I did not want to do. While I am in no +wise a friend to a hostile; I believe in giving even an Indian +that which is justly due him, and I must admit that all through +this Modoc war I could not help, in a measure, feeling sorry for +the Modocs, particularly Captain Jack, for I knew that through the +negligence of one agent and the outrageous attack upon Jack by the +squad of soldiers on Lost river, while there catching fish to keep +his people from starving, he had been driven and dragged into this +war, and I do not believe to-day, nor never did believe, that +Captain Jack ought to have been hanged. + +I have often been asked, since, what I thought of the arrangements +Mr. Berry made for the meeting of Gen. Canby, Col. Thomas and +Captain Jack, but I have always refrained from answering that +question any farther than that it seemed to me that a school boy +ten years of age should have known better than to have made such a +bargain as he did, knowing the nature of Indians as well as he +claimed to. + +But to my story--I stayed there and engaged the Indians in +conversation while George was making tracks back over the same +road that we had just come to hurry the cavalry up. I learned from +them that there were no more able-bodied men left in the cave, and +there were some twenty or thirty squaws and children, besides +several warriors that were wounded. In about an hour from the time +George started back, the soldiers made their appearance. + +I told the Indians that we would have to take them prisoners and +take them back to headquarters. This, however, was not pleasant +news to them. They objected to return with us until I had informed +them that they would be fed and protected until such time as we +could get them all, and they having been acquainted with me +before, we were successful in persuading them to return peacefully +to the General's quarters. + +It was late in the afternoon when we returned, and I at once +reported to the General the number of Indians, also that Schonchin +was in the gang, and that I had learned that there were no more +able-bodied men in the cave. I told him that from what I could +learn, I thought it perfectly safe for three or four men to enter +the cave and secure the few remaining Indians. The General said: +"I will think the matter over until morning." + +That evening the officers held a council and it was decided that +in case the following morning was fair, Col. Miller and the +Colonel from California whose name I do not remember, myself, and +two soldiers would make the attempt to enter the cave, I going as +a guide more than anything else. + +Next morning about ten o'clock when the fog had raised and the sun +came out most beautifully, we made the start for the cave. +Although I had never been inside of the cave, I had no serious +trouble in finding the main entrance to it, but we found it so +dark inside that we had to use lanterns. We had not proceeded far +until we could see the fire. I proposed to the others that as I +was acquainted with the Indians to let me advance alone, and I can +truthfully say that just such another sight I never saw before nor +since. There was a number of wounded Indians lying around; here +were the bones of their horses that they had killed and eaten, and +a smell so offensive that it was really a hard task for me to stay +there long enough to tell them what we wanted of them. As soon as +I commenced talking to them the squaws and children began making +their appearance from every direction. + +I told them my business, and if they would go with me they would +be fed. They were not only willing, but anxious to go. + +By this time the other men were there, and when they were all +gathered up Col. Miller sent two men back to camp for stretchers +to carry the wounded Indians to headquarters. They were all taken +out that day. I do not remember the number of wounded bucks that +were in the cave, but there were thirty-two squaws and forty +children. + +Now the bloody little Modoc war that had lasted so long at the +cost of many lives, was brought to an end. This was glorious news +to the surviving ones among the volunteers, and the next day they +were making preparations to return to their respective homes, or +rather Jacksonville, where they would be discharged, and they +again could say their lives were their own. This being the last +days of June and my services not needed any more, I asked the +General when the hanging would take place. He said that it would +be about the twentieth of July. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIX. + +AN INTERESTED BOY.--THE EXECUTION OF THE MODOC LEADERS.--NEWSPAPER +MESSENGERS.--A VERY SUDDEN DEPUTY SHERIFF.--A BAD MAN WOUND UP. + + +I went from there to Yreka to rest up a while. During my stay +there, one morning while I was waiting for my breakfast, I was +glancing over the morning paper, when a bright-eyed little boy +about nine years old, entered the restaurant, walked up in front +of me and said: "Is this Capt. Drannan, the scout?" I said: "Yes, +my little man. What can I do for you?" He said: "I am going to +school and I have to write a composition to read in school, and my +mother told me to see you and you might be able to assist me in +getting up a piece on the Modoc war." I asked the bright little +fellow his name. He said his name was Johnny Whitney. "Where is +your father and what does he follow for a living?" "My father is +dead, and my mother takes in washing to support herself and +children." + +That afternoon I spent in assisting the little fellow to prepare +his composition. I remained there at Yreka about ten days, during +which time I received a letter from George Jones, who was then at +Jacksonville, requesting me to meet him at Fort Klamath about four +or five days before the hanging was to take place, and also +requesting me to bring all my saddle horses. I succeeded in +getting up quite a party of business men and citizens of Yreka and +we started out across the Siskiyou Mountains. After the first +day's travel we found game plentiful and we had a pleasant trip. +We had all the game and fish we wanted, which afforded plenty of +amusement for the pleasure-seekers of the crowd, which was the +main object of this trip with a majority of them. We arrived at +Fort Klamath five days before the hanging was to take place. The +next day after we arrived a crowd came in from Jacksonville, and +among them were Gen. Ross, George Jones, J. N. T. Miller and three +newspaper reporters, one of whom represented the San Francisco +Chronicle, one the San Francisco Examiner, and one the Chicago +INTER-OCEAN. Col. Miller came to me and asked if I would like a +job of carrying dispatches from there, either to Jacksonville or +to Ashland, saying: "The Chronicle man has not found a man yet +that he could trust the dispatches with." + +The reporter had told Mr. Miller that he would pay one hundred +dollars for carrying the dispatch, and in case he was first to the +office, he would also pay one hundred dollars more in addition to +that. From there to Jacksonville it was one hundred miles and a +wagon road all the way, while to Ashland it was but eighty miles, +of which sixty miles was only a trail. This I had passed once in +company with J. N. T. Miller. I was introduced to the reporter by +Col. Miller, with whom I soon made arrangements to carry his +dispatches. He asked me how long it would take me to ride to +Ashland. I told him I thought it would take about eight hours with +my three horses. He said if I went to Ashland I would have no +competition on the trail as the other riders were both going to +Jacksonville. + +The day before the hanging was to take place I hired a young man +to take two of my horses and go out on the trail, instructing him +to leave one of them picketed out at Cold Springs, and the other +one to take to Bald Mountain, which was thirty miles from Ashland. +At this place I wanted Black Bess, and he was to stay there with +her until I came and to return, get my other horse, and meet me at +Jacksonville. + +When the time arrived for the hanging and the prisoners were led +to the scaffold, each dispatch carrier was mounted and standing on +the outer edge of the crowd, ready at the moment he received the +dispatch to be off at once. When the four Indians were led upon +the scaffold to meet their doom, each of them were asked, through +an interpreter, whether or not he wished to say anything before +being hung, but they all shook their heads with the exception of +Captain Jack, who informed them that he had something to say. + +He said: "I would like for my brother to take my place and let me +live so I can take care of my wife and little girl." + +The carrier for the Inter-Ocean was the first to get his dispatch, +the Examiner the second, I receiving mine just as the last Indian +was hung, and now for the race to see who gets there first. It was +eleven o'clock when we started. We all traveled together for the +first twenty miles, where I left the wagon road and took the trail +for Ashland. Now I had sixty miles to ride over a trail and they +had eighty miles over a wagon road. At this junction where the +trail left the wagon road I bade the other couriers good-day, +telling them that in case they beat me they must treat to the +oysters when we met at Jacksonville, and I sped away and lost no +time in getting from there to Cold Springs, where I found my other +horse picketed out as I had ordered. I dismounted, threw my saddle +on the other horse, which was apparently feeling fine, mounted him +and was off again, leaving the other horse picketed at the same +place, so my man could get him on his return. My horse took a long +sweeping gallop and kept it up for about twelve miles, by which +time he was beginning to sweat quite freely, and I commenced to +urge him and put him down to all I thought he would stand. When I +came in sight of Black Bess she raised her head and whinnied to +me. The young man was lying asleep and holding her rope, while she +was grazing near him. Again I changed my saddle from my other +horse to Black Bess, and gave the young man instructions to start +at once and lead my horse slowly so as to prevent him from cooling +off too fast. I mounted Black Bess and now I was on the +homestretch. I did not urge her any for the first few miles until +she commenced sweating freely, after which I commenced to increase +her speed, and fifteen minutes after six I rode up to the +telegraph office and handed my dispatch to the operator, who +started it on the wire at once. I led my mare up and down the +streets to prevent her from cooling off too quick, and when it was +known where I was from, everybody in town had about forty +questions to ask relative to the hanging of the four Modoc braves. + +On leaving the telegraph office I asked the operator to let me +know when the first dispatch started from Jacksonville, and while +at supper he came in and told me that the Examiner had just +started their dispatch over the wire, which was just one and +three-quarter hours behind me in getting to the office. The next +day I rode to Jacksonville, and the day following the balance of +the crowd came in from the fort. Among them were the three +reporters, all well pleased with the time their bearers had made +in carrying their dispatches, and that night we all had what in +those days we used to term "a-way-up time." + +The balance of the Indians who were taken prisoners in this Modoc +war were afterwards taken to Florida and placed on a small +reservation, which, I presume, was done on account of the bitter +feeling that existed among the people of that section of the +country toward this tribe on account of the assassination of Gen. +Canby, Col. Thomas and George Meeks, the interpreter, as well as +the many other people that were murdered on Lost river and Tule +Lake. + +While at Jacksonville a man came to me named Martin, who was a +merchant and resided in Oakland, Cal., who wanted to hire me to go +out in the mountains some twenty miles from Jacksonville and look +after a man named McMahon, saying: "There must be something wrong +with McMahon, for he is the most punctual man I ever dealt with; +he promised to be here three weeks ago to pay a certain party +fifty dollars, but has not been seen nor heard from since." + +McMahon owned a band of sheep and was ranging them out in the +mountains. Mr. Martin gave me directions, and the next morning I +started out for the sheep ranch. I had no trouble in finding the +place, but the cabin and surroundings showed that no one lived +there. I spent the balance of this day and the next in riding over +the sheep range, but could see no one, and only about twenty head +of sheep. + +On my return to Jacksonville I went by way of Bybee's ferry, on +Rogue river, and learned that about three weeks previous to that +time a band of two thousand head of sheep had crossed over the +ferry, driven by two men. Now it was almost a foregone conclusion +that some one had murdered McMahon and driven his band of sheep +away, and when I returned to Jacksonville there was no little +excitement about the city in regard to McMahon. Some of the +business men and citizens with whom I was well acquainted, +prevailed upon me to accept an appointment as deputy sheriff, and +start out and track the band of sheep up if possible and capture +the thieves and murderers, the sheriff himself being very busy +just at that time, it being near time for court to sit in that +county. After receiving my appointment and taking the oath of +office, I struck directly for Bybee's ferry, and for the first +twenty miles beyond the ferry I experienced no trouble whatever in +keeping track of the sheep, finding a number of people who had +seen them, and all gave the same description of the two men who +were driving them. + +Leaving the settlement, I went into the mountains, spent five days +tracking sheep here and there in every direction between Rogue +river and Umpqua. Finally they struck off on to the breaks of the +Umpqua and were soon in the settlement again, and I was able to +get the description of the two men, which coincided with the +description given by others. + +I found the sheep within about twelve miles of Canyonville, and a +young man was herding them who I soon learned to be what might be +called a half idiot. He told me that his name was Buckley. I had +quite a pleasant chat with him and spent about two hours with him, +lounging around, talking about his sheep. I asked if he had raised +his sheep, and where his winter range was. + +He said he had not owned the sheep but a short time. I asked him +if he had bought them here in this country. He said he had not, +but got them on the other side of the mountain in the Rogue river +country. I asked him if he owned them alone, whereupon he informed +me that he had a partner in the sheep business. I asked him what +his partner's name was, and he told me it was John Barton. I asked +where his partner lived, and he said that he lived down on the +Umpqua river and was running a ferry. + +Now I was satisfied that I had found the sheep and one of the men +and as good as got the other one where I could put my hand on him +at any time. I rode down to Canyonville and telegraphed Mr. +Manning, the sheriff, that I had found the sheep and one of the +men and had the other one located. He answered me by saying that I +would have help the following day from Roseburg, that being the +county seat of Douglas county, which is sixteen miles from +Canyonville, where I then was and which was in the same county. I +waited patiently the next day for assistance, but it did not come. +Late that evening I went to the constable of that precinct and +asked him to go with me and assist in making the arrest, but he +refused, saying: "That man Barton is a hard case. I don't want to +have anything to do with him." I did not tell him the particulars +of the case, and I must admit that I did not know enough of civil +law to know that it was necessary for me to be armed with a +warrant to go and make the arrest. On the refusal of the constable +to accompany me, I at once walked down to the stable and ordered +my horse saddled, and inquired the way to John Barton's place. The +proprietor of the stable told me how to go. + +So concluding to tackle him alone, I mounted my horse just after +dark and started for Barton's Ferry. I found the place without +difficulty, and although I rode very slowly, I got to the river +some time before daylight. I tied my horse in the brush and walked +the road until daylight. As soon as it was daylight I saw the +house on the other side of the river, and kept my eye on it until +just before sunrise, when I saw the smoke commence to curl up from +the chimney, and in about fifteen minutes I saw a man come out in +his shirt sleeves and bare-headed. I at once mounted my horse and +rode down to the river and halloed for him to bring the boat over +as I wished to cross the river. He answered by saying: "I'll be +there in a minute as soon as I get my hat and coat." He stepped +into the house, got his hat and coat and came across. When he +landed I walked on to the boat and asked if he was Mr. Barton. He +said that was his name, and in a second he was looking down the +muzzle of my pistol, and I informed him that he was my prisoner. +He asked me what for. I said for the murdering of McMahon. + +"Have they found the body?" were the first words that fell from +his lips, which he doubtless would not have uttered had I not +caught him off his guard. I told him they had, which was false. + +"You want to take me away with you and not let me see my wife and +bid her good-bye?" + +I informed him that I would, telling him that she could come to +see him if she liked. He offered all manner of excuses to get back +to his house. After I had listened awhile I gave him two minutes +to get off the boat and take the road, which he did at once. I did +not try to put the handcuffs on him alone, not wishing to give him +any drop on me whatever. + +I made him take the road ahead of me, and we started on our way +for Jacksonville. After we had gone some two miles in the +direction of Canyonville an old gentleman and his son overhauled +us with a wagon, and I had the old man put the handcuffs on him, +after which I allowed him to get into the wagon with the other two +men and ride to Canyonville. When I put him in the little lock-up +which they had there for such occasions and went and hunted up the +constable and asked him to look after Barton until I would return. +I could get no satisfaction from him, so I went to a merchant in +town and related the whole circumstance to him and asked him to +keep a watch or tell me of some one whom I could hire to look +after him that I could rely upon. He assured me that he would look +after a man, put him there to watch and then we would be sure that +he would be safe. I then mounted my horse and was off for Buckley, +who I found without difficulty, arrested him, and started on my +way back to Canyonville. + +He came so near admitting the crime that I was sure I had the two +guilty men. I got back with my prisoner just in time to take the +stage for Jacksonville. Leaving my horse at the livery stable, I +instructed the liveryman to send him at once to Jacksonville and I +would pay all charges. I handcuffed both prisoners and had them +shackled together, put them in the stage and started to +Jacksonville with them. I wired the sheriff that I had both of the +guilty parties and would be at Jacksonville on the stage, which +was due about six o'clock the next morning. + +The sheriff and his deputies met us that morning at the edge of +town. It had been noised around that I would be in and they were +somewhat afraid of a mob, but we succeeded in getting to the jail +all safe, and not until then had I the faintest idea that I had +stepped beyond my official duty in arresting those men without a +warrant and bringing them into another county. + +These were the first white prisoners that I had ever had any +experience with. I had taken so many Indian prisoners that never +required any red tape, I naturally supposed that the same rule +would be applicable in this case, but I got away with it just the +same. That afternoon we took the young man off to himself, and +when he was questioned by the district attorney and a certain +doctor, whose name has slipped my memory, he admitted the whole +affair, and told us just where to go to find McMahon's body. When +he told us this the doctor drew a diagram of the ground. Buckley +said we would find a tree a certain distance from the cabin that +had been blown out by the roots, and in that hole we would find +the body covered up with brush and chips thrown on top of the +brush. After giving this valuable information we at once started +out to hunt for the body. + +It was now late in August and a little snow had fallen on the +mountains in the fore part of the night. By the aid of the diagram +we went to the ground after night, built up a fire and waited till +morning. As soon as it was light enough to see, the doctor took +the diagram out of his pocket, looked at it and said: "It should +be near here." He then turned, and seeing a tree that had been +blown over, said: "There is a tree that answers to the +description." We walked to the tree and at once saw the toe of one +of the dead man's boots protruding through the brush. The doctor +when gathering wood the night before to build a fire, had walked +almost over the body and had picked up two or three chips of wood +from the brush which covered the body. We waited some time before +the crowd came with the wagon. After they arrived the body was +uncovered, loaded into the wagon and hauled to Jacksonville, +arriving in time for the coroner to hold the inquest that +afternoon, and the following day the body was buried. + +The time having been set for the preliminary examination, Barton's +wife and her father arrived in Jacksonville the day before the +time set for the trial, and his father-in-law employed an attorney +to conduct the case in court in his behalf. When Barton was +brought into court he waived examination, but it was quite +different with Buckley. When he was brought in for trial the judge +asked him if he had counsel. He said he did not, nor did he want +any, but the judge appointed a lawyer to take his case. + +The lawyer took the prisoner off into a room in company with the +deputy sheriff and they were gone about twenty minutes. When they +returned the lawyer stated that the prisoner wished to plead +guilty and receive his sentence so he could start in at once to +work it out. Barton never had a trial, for he starved himself to +death and died in jail. The jailor told me that for seventeen days +he did not eat or drink but one spoonful of soup. + + + + +CHAPTER XL. + +IN SOCIETY SOME MORE.--A VERY TIGHT PLACE.--TEN PAIRS OF YANKEE +EARS.--BLACK BESS SHAKES HERSELF AT THE RIGHT TIME.--A SOLEMN +COMPACT. + + +I remained in Jacksonville until about the first of December, +1874, when I received a letter from Lieut. Jackson, who was yet at +Fort Yuma, Ariz., stating that there was an opening for me there, +and asking me if I knew where George Jones was at that time, and +telling me if possible to have him accompany me, as he would +insure us both employment in the scouting field upon our arrival. + +George was now living twelve miles from Jacksonville. Being sick +and tired of idling away my time around town, I rode out to pay +George and his parents a friendly visit before taking my leave for +Arizona. I found them in rather good circumstances on a small farm +on Bear creek, near Phoenix, and a pleasant visit I had with them +at their beautiful little home, during which time I showed the +letter to George that I had received from Lieut. Jackson. He +expressed a desire to accompany me on the trip, but as his parents +were now getting old and childish, he did not like to leave +without their consent, he being their only son. + +Two days later George informed me that he had the consent of his +father and mother to go to Arizona, to be gone one year, after +which time he was going to quit the business for all time. But we +have quit the business before, and then I related the conversation +I had with Jim Bridger some years previous at the time I first +made up my mind to quit the scouting field. + +The time being set for the start, I returned to Jacksonville for +my other two horses, clothing, bedding and other traps such as +belong to an old scout. All being in readiness, we bade Mr. and +Mrs. Jones good-bye and started on our way for Arizona and aimed +to reach San Francisco by Christmas. We had five horses in our +outfit, I having three and George two. We arrived in San Francisco +on the twenty-first of December. + +The next morning we were walking up Kearney street near the Lick +House when we met the reporter for the Chronicle who I had ridden +for at the time of the hanging of Captain Jack and associates at +Fort Klamath. The reporter expressed himself as being very glad to +meet us, and insisted on our taking a stroll over to the Chronicle +office and meet the proprietors of the paper, whose names were +DeYoung, their being three brothers of them. + +As we had not changed our clothing, having our traveling suits on +I insisted on deferring the matter until the next day, but this he +would not hear to. As that would not work I tried another plan by +telling him that we had not yet had our breakfast, but he told us +that he had not yet been to breakfast, and proposed that the three +of us take breakfast together, or rather invited George and I to +take breakfast with him, which we did, seeing that there was no +chance to evade him. + +After breakfast we accompanied him to the CHRONICLE office, which +at that time was located on the corner of Kearney and Pine +streets, and here we met all three of the DeYoung brothers. After +being introduced to them and spending some two hours with them, +Charles DeYoung, the eldest of the three brothers, gave us a +cordial invitation to take dinner with him at his own residence, +saying that dinner would be ready at six o'clock. This, I think, +was the first time in my life that I had ever heard a six o'clock +meal called dinner. Thanking him for the kind offer I excused +myself as I was in my traveling suit, and the very thought of +entering the private residence of one of the popular men of the +city almost paralized me. But my excuses were all fruitless. He +would not even consider "No" as answer, and some of them were with +us until time for dinner, as he termed it, but what I would have +called supper. + +With as bold a front as possible we accompanied Mr. DeYoung to his +residence, which we found to be a fine mansion on California +street. On arriving at his residence we met there some ten or +twelve other guests, both ladies and gentlemen. Now the reader can +have a faint idea of the embarrassing position in which we were +both placed at that moment, and I can truthfully say that at the +moment I entered that mansion I would have given three months' +wages to have been away from there. George Jones had on buckskin +breeches and I had on a buckskin suit, while the guests were +dressed in style. I tried to offer some apology, but at every +attempt it seemed that I only made a bad matter worse. + +We were treated with the greatest respect while at this place, and +were asked many questions by the other guests relative to the +Modoc war, the capturing of Captain Jack, etc., and the following +morning quite an article came out in the Chronicle concerning +George Jones and myself relative to the position we held in the +Modoc war. + +We remained there until the last day of December, on which day we +started again on our journey for Arizona, via Salinas, Santa +Barbara and Los Angeles. Here we lay over and let our horses rest +four days, after which we proceeded on our journey via San Diego, +which at that time was a very small place. From there we struck +for the Colorado river and followed down the river to Fort Yuma. + +This route we took in order to avoid crossing any of those sand +deserts. We were about five weeks making the trip, and reached +Fort Yuma without any accident or mishap whatever, and learned +that the Indians were worse in Arizona than when we left them +several years before, as they were most all armed with rifles, +instead of bows and arrows, and many of them had pistols. + +Lieut. Jackson told me he had lost more men the last year out than +in any other two seasons since he had been in Arizona. He had +received orders to take four hundred cavalrymen and one hundred +infantrymen and go into the mountains and follow the Indians from +place to place the coming season. The Lieutenant told me that +there had been a settlement started the last year about ninety +miles from the line of Arizona and Sonora, Mexico, and they were +not only troubled with the Indians, but the Mexicans also came in +there and stole their stock and run it across the line. + +Gen. Crook was still in charge of the command, and wanted me to +accompany Lieut. Jackson, saying: "I do not expect you to do any +hard service yourself, but want you to take charge of the scout +force and handle it to suit yourself." + +If my memory serves me right, it was in the latter part of March, +1875, when we made the start for the mountains. For the first +hundred miles our supplies were hauled on wagons, but the balance +of the way they had to be packed on animals. + +On our way out we passed near Salt River Valley, that being +settled up now with Americans. I started to ride out to the +settlement to ascertain something of the nature of the +depredations committed there lately. I dressed in teamster's +clothing and tied a pair of blankets behind my saddle before +starting to the settlement. It was late in the evening, just about +sunset, and I was riding leisurely along, being within six or +seven miles of the settlement, when suddenly I came upon three +Mexicans, just cooking supper. They saw me as quick as I saw them, +and I thought I was in for it. I was too near them to attempt to +get away, so all that I could do was to make the best I could of +it, take my chances and trust to luck. When I rode up I spoke to +them in my own language and one big burley looking Mexican said: +"No indetenda English," meaning I don't understand English. They +then asked me in their tongue if I spoke Spanish, which I +understood as well as they did, but I shook my head as if I could +not understand a word they said. + +I dismounted, untied the blankets from behind my saddle, threw +them down near the fire on which they were cooking supper, but did +not unsaddle my mare. I was riding Black Bess, and one of them got +up and walked around her and examined her closely, and when he +returned to the fire he said: "Esta ismo muya wano cavia," meaning +that is a good horse. Another one in the crowd said he had in his +pocket just ten pairs of ears that he had taken from the heads of +Yankees, and this would make the eleventh pair. Now I thought my +time had come, but I had been in tight places before and had +always managed in some way to get out. + +While it looked very blue, still I made up my mind that when it +came to the worst I would get at least one or two of them while +they were doing me up. I did not pretend to pay any attention to +their conversation, yet at the same time I could understand all +that was uttered by them. I learned that there were ten in the +gang, and the other seven had gone that night to the settlement +for the purpose of stealing horses, and were liable to return at +any time. While I was lying there on my blankets I heard them lay +their plans to kill me in case I went to sleep, or if I got up and +started to my horse they were to shoot me before I got away. Now +the reader can rest assured that this was getting to be a serious +affair with me, for I knew that these Mexicans could handle a +pistol with good success, while they are as a rule experts with a +knife, the latter being a Mexican stand-by. This was a little the +closest place that I had ever been in. If I attempted to leave +they would kill me as sure as I made the start; if I stayed there +until the other seven returned, then I would not have a ghost of a +show for my life. + +I laid there by the fire as though I was worn out entirely, +listening to their talk, and more than once heard the big rough- +looking Mexican boast of a pair of Yankee ears that he would take +from my head. + +Their supper being ready, they sat down to eat, but did not invite +me to sup with them. They all three ate out of the same frying pan +and poured their coffee out in tin cups. Two of them had their +backs turned toward me, while the other one sat on the opposite +side of the frying pan that they were eating out of and facing me, +but they were paying but little attention to me. Black Bess was +feeding close by and on the opposite side of them from where I +lay. Now I made up my mind that I would make a desperate effort to +extricate myself from this trap, for to stay there I knew meant +death and I would rather take my chances with those three than +with the entire gang. They were all sitting flat on the ground, +each had a pistol on him and their guns all lay within a few feet +of them. My only show for escape was to kill two of them at the +first shot and then I would have an equal show with the other one, +but now was the particular part of the work. Just one false move +and the jig was up with me, but it was getting time that I should +be at work for the other seven were likely to be there at any +moment. I carefully reached around under my coat tail and got hold +of both of my pistols, and just as I did so, as good luck would +have it, Black Bess shook herself very hard and caused them to +turn their eyes toward her, and it could not have happened in a +better time. I was on my knees in an instant, and leveling a +pistol at each of the two with their backs towards me, I fired, +and being almost near enough to have touched either of them with +the point of the pistol, it was a sure thing that I would not miss +them. After firing the first two shots I was on my feet in an +instant, by which time the third man had taken a tumble to himself +and was on his knees and had his pistol about half out when I +fired both pistols at him and he fell back dead. By this time one +of the others had staggered to his feet and had his pistol out, +but, fortunately, he seemed to be blind, for he fired his pistol +in the opposite direction from where I stood. I turned and dealt +him his fatal dose. + +I tried to catch their pack horses but missed one of them, and as +time was precious, for I did not know what moment the seven would +come, I took their rifles, broke the stocks off of them, took +their pistols along with me, mounted Black Bess, rounded up their +horses and started for the train, and I lost no time in getting +there, and as I sped across the country on Black Bess after the +nine captured animals I felt that I could congratulate myself on +getting out of the tightest place I had ever been in, without even +a scratch. + +When I arrived at camp and reported to the Lieutenant he at once +started two companies of cavalry out to try and cut the other +seven off, instructing them to watch every trail and every +watering place within fifty miles, closely. + +I changed horses and started with George Jones and six other +scouts, and the last words that Lieut. Jackson said to me as I was +ready to ride away was: "Don't spare horse flesh, but run them +down Cap, if it is possible, and let us break up this thieving +band. I would rather kill one Mexican any time than two Apaches." + +Across the country we rode at a rapid rate, but were not able to +reach the spot until after daylight. The Mexicans had been there +ahead of us and removed everything but their dead comrades, those +they did not attempt to remove or even bury, leaving them for the +wolves that roved the country in search of food. + +We were soon on their trail, which was easily followed, as they +were driving a large band of stock. About the middle of the +afternoon we came in sight of them. When they first saw us we were +so near them that they deserted their band of stock and ran for +their lives. We gave chase, but could not get any nearer. We +followed them until dark, our horses being badly jaded, and I had +now been in the saddle for two days and one night in succession, +so we made camp for the night. The next morning a detail of six +men was made to drive the stolen stock back to the settlement +where it belonged, there being some forty head of horses and +mules. The balance of us returned to the trail, lay over and +rested one day. This put a stop to the Mexicans troubling the +settlement for some time. + +Pulling on for the mountains, the second day we saw the ruins of +two wagons that had been burned, but could get no trace of the +teamsters. The supposition prevailed that they were taken +prisoners by the Apaches. The Lieutenant established his +headquarters fifty miles from where he had his quarters when we +were out before, and now active work commenced, for there was +plenty of it to be done. + +We had only been there a few days when two of my scouts came in +one evening and reported having seen about twenty Indians ten +miles from camp and traveling west. The scouts all being in, +George Jones and I and four other scouts and one company of +cavalry started in pursuit. We had no trouble in striking their +trail, and there being a good starlight that night and the country +somewhat sandy, we were able to track them easily. We had not +followed the trail more than two miles when we passed over a +ridge, and I looked down the valley ahead of us and could see the +glimmer of their fire. Here the soldiers stopped, and I and my +scouts went on in the direction of the fires, which we supposed to +be about half a mile away but which proved to be nearer two miles. +When we were near the camp we dismounted and crawled up. We +located the horses, which were mostly standing still at the time +and two or three hundred yards from camp. I "telegraphed" the +soldiers to come at once. + +Taking the balance of the scouts we rode slowly and carefully +around, getting immediately between the Indian camp and their +horses, I telling George Jones that as soon as the soldiers +started to make their charge to follow me with the horses. But +this time the Indians were awake before the soldiers were on them +and opened fire on them, killing three horses and wounding two the +first round, but only one soldier was wounded, and the sergeant in +charge told me afterwards that he got eighteen Apaches out of the +crowd, and we got twenty-seven horses. We got back to headquarters +about noon the next day and learned that Lieut. Jackson had gone +in a different direction after another band of Apaches, which he +overhauled and got twelve scalps from their number. + +Now we started for a trip on the east side of Black canyon, six +scouts and one company of cavalry, with twenty-two pack animals, +calculating to be gone about ten days. On the fifth day of our +trip George Jones, myself and two other scouts were riding +leisurely along about one mile in advance of the command when just +as we raised to the top of a little rocky ridge we came face to +face with a band of Indians, making a surprise to both parties. I +could not tell which party fired first, but we gave them one round +and seeing that there were too many of them for us, we wheeled and +started back down the hill. As we did so George sang out: "My +horse is shot," and just at that time the horse fell. George threw +himself clear of the horse and when he struck the ground he lit +running, and at his best licks, too. The rest of us dropped behind +George to protect him until we were off the rocky ground. The +Indians held their distance all the way down the hill, not +stopping to reload their When we were at the foot of the hill the +three of us that were mounted, in order to give George Jones a +chance to ascend the hill, turned and gave them another volley. +Here I fired three shots and got two Indians and then spurred up +by the side of George and gave him a chance to jump on behind me, +which he did. Just as we raised to the top of the hill we met the +command, who had heard our firing and came to our relief, and they +met the Indians face to face. At this the Indians changed their +minds very suddenly, and it is useless to say that they were on +the back track much quicker than I could tell it. The soldiers +went in hot pursuit of them and got nine of their number. From +there we struck off in a south-westerly direction, thinking that +when we struck the main road we might run on to some emigrants en- +route for California. + +We struck the main road fifty miles south of the Lieutenant's +quarters. Here we laid over two days, thinking that there might be +an emigrant train come along that we could escort through to +headquarters, this part of the road being in the heart of the +Apache country, and the most dangerous for emigrants from the fact +that it is all a timber country and over mountains which, in +places, are very rocky, thereby giving the Indians all advantage +over the emigrants. + +The evening of the second day, just as we were sitting down to +supper, I received a message from Lieut. Jackson for George Jones +and myself to come to headquarters at once, but he did not state +why he required our presence there. As soon as supper was over we +started. The dispatch bearer thought it was at least sixty miles, +but we had supposed it was not more than fifty, each of us having +two saddle horses. + +At one place on the road the cayotes turned loose, and it sounded +as if there must have been a hundred, all barking at once, and +George Jones remarked: "Above all things that I have dreaded while +in this business is being shot down and left on the plains for my +bones to be picked up by those sneaking wolves, and now Cap, I +will make this agreement with you; in case that either of us +happen to be killed, which is liable to happen any day, the +surviving one is to see that the other is buried if in the bounds +of possibility." + +I said: "George, we will shake hands on that," which we did, and I +added: "You can also rest assured that if ever you are shot down +while in company with me, no Indian will ever scalp you as long as +I have the strength to stand over your body, nor shall the cayotes +ever pick your bones if I live long enough to see that you are +buried," and the reader will see later on that I kept my promise. + + + + +CHAPTER XLI. + +WE LOCATE A SMALL BAND OF RED BUTCHERS AND SEND THEM TO THE HAPPY +HUNTING GROUNDS.--EMIGRANTS MISTAKE US FOR INDIANS.--GEORGE JONES +WOUNDED. + + +Just at sunrise we made our appearance at the Lieutenant's +quarters, and he informed us that the Indians had made an attack +on the settlement on the east side of the San Antonio desert; had +killed two families, taken two little girls prisoner and captured +a lot of stock from the settlers. + +This report had first reached Gen. Crook at Fort Yuma, and he had +dispatched the news to Lieut. Jackson. This being a strange +country to the Lieutenant, having never been over it and knowing +that I had been through it twice, once with Uncle Kit Carson and +another time in company with Jim Beckwith, he insisted on my going +out in that section to investigate the matter and see whether or +not the report was true. + +The day following George and I started with four assistants for +the settlement. Each of us took two saddle horses and one pack +animal for each two men, with ten days' rations. From there to the +settlement was about seventy-five miles. + +Knowing just where the majority of the Apache force was +concentrated, we took rather a circuitous route in-stead of going +direct to the settlement in order to ascertain whether the +depredations were committed by Apaches or Pimas. + +The fifth day out we struck the settlement, but did not cross the +Indian trail, which led me to think that the work was done by +Pimas and not Apaches. + +When we arrived there no one could tell us how many Indians there +were nor what they looked like, but when I came to find out the +truth of the matter there had been no families massacred, nor had +the two girls been taken prisoners, but there had been two boys +killed that were herding stock. + +We remained there one day in order to learn what we could in +regard to the trouble and then struck the trail of the Indians and +followed it two days, but it was so old that we gave it up, as it +was then twelve days since the depredations were committed and we +knew that the Indians were a long ways off by that time. We took a +different route on our return, and the second day we saw a small +band of Indians traveling toward the settlement, which we had left +four days previous. We started in pursuit of them and struck their +trail before it was dark. I was confident that they would camp at +the first water they came to, which was about seven or eight miles +from there, so we staked our horses out on good grass, sat down +and ate our lunch while we waited for the clear moon to make its +appearance and light us across the country where we might find the +noble red men of the plains and entertain them for a while at +least. We thought that it would take us about all night to track +them up by the light of the moon, find their camp and play them +just one little tune of "How came you so?" + +About ten o'clock the moon arose, but we waited until it was two +hours high, giving our horses a chance to fill up, after which we +mounted and took the trail of the Pimas, which we had not great +trouble in finding. + +After we had followed the trail about seven miles we came to their +horses, but could see no signs of any camp, and we at once made up +our minds that the Indians were not far away, but that they had +either built no fire or the fire had gone entirely out, for we +could see no signs of any. + +Dismounting, George took one man with him and I took one with me, +leaving the other two with the horses, and started out in +different directions to look for their camp. After wandering +around about an hour I found where they were camped, and they were +sound asleep and lying in a row but each one separate. We then +returned to our horses and in a short time George came in. It was +now getting high time that we were at work, for it was beginning +to get daybreak, so after I had explained how they laid, five of +us started for them, leaving one man with the horses. They were +lying about two hundred and fifty yards from where we had stopped +with our horses. We crawled up abreast until within ten feet of +the Indians, and each scout drew both his revolvers, sprang to his +feet, and I need not say that we made quick work of those +redskins. Only one got to his feet, and he did not stand a second +until there were three or four bullets in his body, but not one of +us got a scratch in this fight. + +Now the fun was over and we were not afraid to speak out, so we +called out for the man that we left in charge of our horses to +bring them over, and we gathered some wood and built a fire. + +It had been several days since we had had fresh meat, but the +Pimas had been kind enough to kill an antelope that day, and as +they had only eaten of it once, we had a feast that morning, which +we enjoyed very much. + +We gathered up the guns and ammunition that belonged to the +Indians, which, by the way, was the best armed lot of Indians I +had ever seen. Each one of them had a good rifle and a Colt +revolver, and one of them had the handsomest knife I ever saw. Had +we not run on to them no doubt they would have done some devilment +in the white settlement the following day. We reached headquarters +in three days. + +It was now time for the emigrants to begin to travel over the +Butterfield route, and Lieut. Jackson started one company of +cavalry across to the opposite side of the mountain some sixty +miles away to protect the emigrants, and George Jones and I both +accompanied them. We established our quarters about a half mile +from the road at the foot of the mountains on the south side. + +The next day after we struck this place George and I started out +to scout over the country to see whether or not there were any +Indians in the country and also ride out on the road and look for +emigrants. + +The second day out we climbed to the top of a high ridge, and by +looking through the glass we could see a large emigrant train +coming, which we thought to be about twenty miles distant. We knew +very well where it would camp, and by riding briskly we would be +able to meet it by dark; so we rode on and reached the emigrants +about sunset. They were just corralling their wagons for the +night, and when they saw us coming they took us for Indians and +every man went for his gun. As soon as we saw them start for their +guns we both took off our hats and waved them over our heads, when +they saw that they were needlessly alarmed. This train was from +Texas, and the name of the captain was Sours, and it was beyond +doubt the best organized train I ever saw on the plains; +everything seemed to move like clock work. + +When I told Capt. Sours who we were and what our business was and +that as soon as they got to our quarters they would have an +escort, he said: "I am indeed very glad to know that there is some +protection out here for emigrants, but as for ourselves we do not +need it much, for every man in my train has seven shots, and some +of them three times that number." + +We stayed with them that night and the next morning pulled out for +our quarters. We remained there for a month, but did not see any +Indians during that time. + +At the end of the month there came along a large train from +Arkansas and Texas. We escorted it across the mountains expecting +that this would wind up the emigrant travel across there for the +season. When we arrived at Lieut. Jackson's quarters he started +George and I and two other scouts out towards the Salt river +valley settlement, telling me that he would move down near Mrs. +Davis' ranch and there he would wait until he should hear from me. +The third day out we made camp early on account of water, and +after deciding on the spot where we should pitch our camp for the +night George rode off to a high ridge near by to take a look over +the country. He was not gone long before he made his appearance +riding at full speed, and announced that there was a large band of +Indians coming direct for our camp, and would be on to us before +we could saddle up and get away. + +"Get your horses boys," were his first words, and every man made a +rush for his horse, but before we could get saddled the Indians +hove in sight, and not over half a mile away. + +"There they are," said George as he jumped on to his horse again, +"and there must be at least sixty of them." + +I was not long in making up my mind what to do. We all got our +horses saddled and were mounted just in the nick of time to get +away for we were not twenty yards from camp when they were close +on to us. + +Down the ravine we went with the Apaches in hot pursuit of us. I +yelled out to the boys to turn to the left across the ridge and +when we were over the turn we stopped and gave them a volley, and +picked off the leaders as they came in sight. I saw a number of +them fall, but it did not appear to check them in the least. They +were coming too thick and we wheeled and were off again with some +of them within at least thirty yards of us, but we gained on them +gradually. Finally George Jones sang out: "I am shot through the +arm." I reined my horse up by his side and asked if his arm was +broken. He said it was, and I could see it was hanging down and +the blood almost streaming off his fingers. I asked if he felt +sick, and he said he did not. + +Of course all the time this conversation was going on we were +putting our horses down to their utmost. George said; "I am all +right if I don't get another shot," so I told him to take the lead +and not to spare his horse. I also told the other boys to fall +back to the rear so we could protect him, as he was badly wounded +and the Indians were holding their own pretty well. + +On looking ahead I saw another little ridge and I told the boys +that when we were over that to all turn and give them two shots +each, and for each to be sure to get his Indian. This order was +carried into effect and they were so near us that I think each +shot did its work. This brought them to a halt and they did not +crowd us any more; it was soon dark and we escaped without any +further mishap. + +After we could hear no more of them we rode to the top of a ridge +where we would have a chance to protect ourselves in case of +another attack, and dismounted to ascertain the extent of George's +wound, and as the excitement died down he commenced feeling sick +at his stomach. I gave him a drink of whiskey from a bottle that I +had carried in my canteen at all seasons, and this was the second +time the cork had been drawn from the flask. When we got his coat +off and examined his wound we found that the arm was broken just +below the elbow. Using our handkerchiefs for bandages, we dressed +the hurt as best we could, corded his arm to stop the flow of +blood and then pulled out for headquarters, arriving there just at +daybreak. + +I took George to the surgeon, who set the bone and dressed the arm +up "ship shape," after which he gave him something to make him +sleep. + +After seeing George in bed I at once repaired to the Lieutenant's +quarters and found him just arising. He asked me if I was too +tired to make another chase, and I told him I would be ready as +soon as I could eat my breakfast. He said in one hour's time he +would have two companies of cavalry ready to start. + +After breakfast I changed horses, and taking four other scouts, +started out to pilot the cavalry to where we could take the trail +of the Indians. On this trip each scout took four days' rations, +and about one o'clock that afternoon we struck a plain trail that +we followed at a lively gait until nearly dark; the scout force +riding from one to two miles ahead so in case we should get in +sight of the reds we could telegraph back to the command, or +should the Indians attempt to give us another chase we might be +able to run them up against the soldiers, where they would find +amusement for a while. + +We followed them for two days but never got sight of them. They +had turned and made their way back in the direction of Black +canyon and we gave up the chase, but we were sure that in the +running fight we had with them that evening we had killed at least +thirteen, as we found that many newly made graves when we went +back to take their trail. + +We returned to headquarters and I found George doing splendidly, +and the next day we all pulled out for Fort Yuma. The first day's +travel took us to Mrs. Davis' This was the first time I had seen +her or any of her family since the next day after the funeral of +her husband and two sons in the fall of 1866. + +Mrs. Davis insisted on George staying there with them until his +arm was well, which kind and hospitable offer he accepted, +remaining two months. We put in our time that winter as usual when +wintering at the fort, doing nothing. + + + + +CHAPTER XLII. + +"WE ARE ALL SURROUNDED."--A BOLD DASH AND A BAD WOUND--MRS. DAVIS +SHOWS HER GRATITUDE.--THE MOST OF MY WORK NOW DONE ON CRUTCHES. + + +It was the last of February or first of March, 1876, that we +started for St. Louis Valley. I had visited this valley twice, but +had come in both times from the opposite direction to which we +would have to enter the valley in going from camp, consequently I +was at a loss to know just which direction to go from camp to +strike the valley where we wanted to enter it, but we struck out +southeast, taking twenty days' provisions with us. The ninth day +out we came in sight of the valley from the west side. It being +about noon, water being handy and no end to the grass, we stopped +there for dinner and to let our horses graze After I had taken a +squint through my glasses, I called the Lieutenant to me and +handed them to him. + +He sat and looked for a long time, and when he took the glasses +from his eyes he said: "That is beyond any doubt the prettiest +sight I ever saw in my life." There were small bands of bison +scattered here and there all over the valley, elk by the hundreds +and deer too numerous to mention, but not an Indian nor even a +sign of one could be seen in this lovely valley. + +"I have made this trip unnecessarily," said he, "for I had +expected to find many little bands of Indians in this valley +hunting, but in that I am disappointed." We then turned back for +headquarters as quick as possible, making the entire trip without +seeing an Indian or even a sign of one. + +Some time in June the Lieutenant started out in command of two +companies of cavalry to cross the mountains to protect the +emigrants, George Jones and I ahead with four assistants. + +The Lieutenant having told us where he would camp that night, it +was the duty of the scouts to make a circuit of the camp before +dark. On arriving at the appointed place, George and I started to +make a tour of the camp, leaving the other scouts at the camping +place. It was about sunset when we saw a band of Indians as we +supposed about four miles from where we were to camp that night, +and about one mile and a half from where we then were. We put +spurs to our horses and headed for the Indian camp, as we were +desirous of ascertaining about their number and getting the +location of the ground before it was too dark. When we were within +about a quarter of a mile, it being nearly dark, we were just in +the act of tying our horses, intending to crawl up near their +camp, we heard a rumbling noise back in the direction from which +we had just come. I crawled quickly around the hill and saw +another band of Indians coming directly toward us, who were making +their way as we supposed to where the other Indians were camped. I +got back to my horse in less time than it took me to crawl away +from him, then we mounted and got away as we supposed, +undiscovered, and rode up a ravine and in a direction that we +would not be seen by the Indians. Not thinking ourselves in any +immediate danger, we did not hurry. After riding up the ravine +only a short distance, just as we rounded a curve, we were brought +face to face with another band of Indians. This was, I think, a +small band that had left the main band to hunt for game and were +just getting into camp, but we did not make any inquiries as to +what success they had in hunting, nor did we ask whether they had +been hunting at all. + +The moment we saw them we drew our pistols and commenced firing, +and they returned the fire. We were almost entirely surrounded by +Indians, and I saw that it was no place for me, so I sang out to +George: "Let's breakthrough their ranks." "All right," said he, +and we drove the spurs into our horses with all vengeance, riding +about fifteen feet apart and succeeding in getting through unhurt, +and away we rode for quarters, closely followed by the redskins +Now we thought we were safe, and each in his own mind was +congratulating himself, when a ball struck me in the left hip +which paralyzed my whole side and wrecked my whole nervous system. +I sang out to George to drop behind and whip my horse, for now I +had no use whatever of my left leg, and it took all the strength +in my right leg to hang on to the horse. No quicker said than he +was behind my horse and doing all in his power to urge him, and +telling me for God's sake to hang on a little longer. + +The soldiers had just rode into camp and were dismounting when +they heard our firing, and remounted and started in that +direction, but as it was getting dark and the country strange to +them they could not make very good time. They met us about half +way between the camp and the Indians, the reds still in hot +pursuit of us. The Lieutenant ordered a charge, and he had his men +so trained that when he said charge they did not stop shooting as +long as there was an Indian to shoot at. + +By this time I was so sick that George had to help me off my +horse, and leaving two men with me, he went on after, and +overhauled the command before they got to the Indian camp, where +they found the Indians ready for battle, and here I think the +Lieutenant got the worst of the fight, for when he made the attack +the Indians attacked him in the rear. The men had to carry me in +their arms to camp, as they had no stretchers in the outfit, and +there I lay four weeks before an ambulance came. I was then +removed to Fort Yuma. George Jones took charge of the scout force +after I was wounded. + +I told George then that if I should be fortunate enough to get +over my wound I would quit the business for all time. After +remaining in the hospital at the fort about two months I was able +to get around on crutches. Mrs. Davis having heard of my +misfortune, came over in company with her brother to see how I was +getting along, and insisted on my going home with them and +remaining until such time as I could ride on horseback, which kind +offer I accepted, with the consent of the doctor, he giving me a +supply of medicine sufficient to last me several weeks. + +I remained there until after Christmas, when George came after me, +and by this time I was able to walk with a cane. I then returned +to Fort Yuma, having made up my mind to draw my pay and quit the +business. + +George also being tired of this kind of life, had concluded to +return to his home in Oregon. When I made our intentions known to +Gen. Crook he asked me how I would ever be able to get to +civilization, for the mail was yet carried on horseback and I was +not able to ride in that way. He insisted on my remaining with him +the coming season, and if I should not be able to ride I could +stay in camp and give orders to the other scouts. I asked George +what he thought of the matter, and he said: "I will leave the +matter with you, if you stay another season I will, or if you say +leave I will quit also." However, we decided after talking matters +over to stay there one more season, and that would end our +scouting career, both vowing that we would quit after that, and in +our contract this time with the General we agreed to stay until the +coming January, and George and I were to have two-thirds of all +the property captured during this campaign. + + + + +CHAPTER XLIII. + +POOR JONES MAKES HIS LAST FIGHT.--HE DIED AMONG A LOT OF THE +DEVILS HE HAD SLAIN.--END OF THIRTY-ONE YEARS OF HUNTING, TRAPPING +AND SCOUTING. + + +About the first day in March, 1877, we started out on our summer's +campaign. I was now able to mount a horse by being assisted, but +had to be very careful and only ride a short distance, and very +slow at that. The third day on our trip from the fort George +reported having seen the trail of quite a large band of Indians +traveling westward almost parallel with the road, but said they +had passed about two days before. I asked the Lieutenant to give +me his camping places that night and the next one, which he did. I +then told George to select four men from the scout force, take two +days' rations and see if he could run down the Indians and to +telegraph me when they changed their course or when he had them +located. + +George was on their trail before noon and before sunset he had +them located, only a short distance from the place where I had +been wounded the year before. I got a dispatch from him just as I +was ready to turn in for the night, and by one o'clock I received +another dispatch stating that there were about eighty in the band, +and well armed, and among them about twenty squaws and their +children. This was something we had never seen among the Apaches +before. Lieut. Jackson asked my opinion of their having their +families with them. I told him I thought they must be on their way +to Sonora to trade, as at that time the Apaches had never traded +but very little with the whites. + +They might be out for a hunt, but it was not customary when on +such a trip to have their families with them. Upon the receipt of +the second dispatch from George, Lieut. Jackson started out with +three companies of cavalry, and arrived at the spot near daybreak. +I was told afterwards that George had been crawling around all +night getting the location of the Indians, the general lay of the +ground and to ascertain the best plan of attack, knowing it would +be so late by the time the Lieutenant would arrive that he himself +would have no time to spare, and he had a diagram drawn on a piece +of envelope of the camp and surroundings, also had their horses +located. When the Lieutenant was ready to make the attack George +took four of the scouts and started to cut the horses off and +prevent the Indians from getting to them, but it seemed as though +when the cavalry started to make the charge the Indians' dogs had +given the alarm and a part of the Indians had made for their +horses. At any rate when daylight came George was found some two +hundred yards from the Indian encampment, with both legs broken +and a bullet through his neck, which had broken it and four +Indians lying near him dead, which he no doubt had killed, and his +horse lay dead about a rod from where he lay. No one had seen him +fall nor had heard a word from him after he gave the order to +charge for the horses. About the middle of that afternoon they +returned to camp with George's body and seven others that were +killed, and nineteen wounded soldiers. They had killed thirty- +seven Indians and had taken all the squaws and children prisoners. +After I had looked at the body of that once noble and brave form, +but now a lifeless corpse, I told the Lieutenant that I was ready +to leave the field, for there was not a man in the entire army +that could fill his place, and without at least one reliable man +in the field it would be impossible to accomplish anything. + +The dead were buried about two hundred yards north of the spring +where we had camped, and I saw that George Jones was put away in +the best and most respectable manner possible considering the +circumstances by which we were governed at that time. We buried +him entirely alone, near a yellow pine tree, and at his head we +placed a rude pine board, dressed in as good a shape as could be +done with such tools as were accessible to our use. On this board +his name was engraved, also his age and the manner in which he +came to his death, and the same is also to be seen on the yellow +pine tree that stands near the grave of this once noble friend and +hero of the plains. + + My brave and noble comrade, + You have served your country true, + Your trials and troubles are ended + And you have bade this world adieu. + + You have been a noble companion, + Once so trusty, true and brave; + But now your cold and lifeless form + Lies silent in the grave. + + While your form remains here with us + In this wicked dismal land, + Your soul has crossed the river + And joined the angel band. + +The prisoners that were taken here Lieut. Jackson sent to Fort +Yuma and placed under guard, as Gen. Crook had made up his mind to +capture all the Apaches he could and try in that way to civilize +them, but he made a total failure in regard to this particular +tribe of Indians. + +I informed George's father and mother of his death as soon as I +could get a letter to them, telling them as soon as I returned to +the fort I would draw his pay and send it to them, which I did. +When I talked to Lieut. Jackson of quitting he said he could not +spare me until the summer's campaign was over, so I remained with +him. + +We moved on and established our quarters at the same place as the +year before, and a more lonesome summer I never put in anywhere +than there. I was not able to do anything more than stay in camp +and give orders until late in the season. Lieut. Jackson had two +more engagements that season, but I was not able to be in either +of them. + +The first one the soldiers killed nine Indians, and the other time +the Indians made an attack on him while he, with twenty of his +men, were escorting an emigrant train across the mountains. In +this engagement the Lieutenant did not lose a man, and only three +horses, and killed twenty-three Indians and gave them a chase of +about ten miles. + +It was now getting late in the fall and Lieut. Jackson pulled out +for the fort, and by that time I was just able to climb on my +horse without assistance. We arrived at Fort Yuma about the first +of November, and there I remained till the first of June, 1878. + +Before I left I made Mrs. Davis and her family a farewell visit. +Two of her daughters were then married and lived near their +mother, and all seemed to be in a prosperous condition. After a +pleasant visit with the Davis folks I returned to the fort and +commenced making preparations to leave, but was delayed in +starting at least a month on account of some soldiers who had +served their time out and were going to return with me. I told my +old friend Lieut. Jackson the day before starting that I did not +think that there was another white man in the United States that +had seen less of civilization or more of Indian warfare than I +had, it now being just thirty-one years since I started out with +Uncle Kit Carson onto the plains and into the mountains. + +When I left the fort this time it was with the determination that +I would not go into the scouting field again, and I have kept my +word so far, and think I shall thus continue. I started out from +the fort with twenty-three head of horses, and I packed the +baggage of the four discharged soldiers in order to get them to +help me with my loose horses. + + + + +CHAPTER XLIV. + +A GRIZZLEY HUNTS THE HUNTER.--SHOOTING SEALS IN ALASKAN WATERS.--I +BECOME A SEATTLE HOTEL KEEPER AND THE BIG FIRE CLOSES ME OUT.-- +SOME REST. + + +On my arrival at San Francisco the first thing was to get rid of +my surplus horses. During the time I was selling them I made the +acquaintance of a man named Walter Fiske, who was engaged in +raising Angora goats, about one hundred and twenty miles north +from San Francisco, and who was something of a hunter also. Mr. +Fiske invited me to go home with him and have a bear hunt. + +Being tired of the city, I accompanied Mr. Fiske to his ranch. He +said he knew where there was a patch of wild clover on which the +grizzlies fed, so we were off for a bear hunt. We soon found where +they fed and watered. They had a plain trail from their feeding +place to the water. Mr. Fiske being hard of hearing proposed that +I stop on the feeding ground and he would take his stand down on +the trail, and in case I should get into trouble I could run down +the trail, and if he were to get into a tight place he would run +up the trail to where I was. I took my stand and had not been +there long until I saw, just behind, in about twenty feet of me, a +huge grizzly bear coming for me on his hind feet. I did not see a +tree that I could get behind or climb, so I took out along the +trail as fast as I could, the grizzly after me. For the first +fifty yards I had to run up grade and then I turned down hill. +When I reached the top of the hill I commenced to hallo at the top +of my voice, "Look out Walter, we are coming!" Walter was sitting +only a few steps from the trail and the moment I passed him I +heard the report of his gun. I jumped to one side and gave the +bear a shot. I got in two shots and Fiske four. After receiving +this amount of lead the bear ran but a short distance and dropped +dead. All of the shots were near the bear's heart. We dressed him +and started home and we had bear meat enough to last for some time +to come. In the mean time Mr. Fiske had told me about a man four +miles from, his place who had a ranch for sale, consisting of +three hundred and twenty acres of deeded land, one hundred acres +in cultivation, eighty bearing fruit trees and two acres of a +vineyard. He said the place could be bought cheap, and he also +told me that there was a vacant quarter section adjoining this +land that I could take up, and I would have the finest goat ranch +in the country. Mr. Fiske and I took a trip down and found the +owner very anxious to sell. After looking the ranch over and +getting his figures, I made him an offer of four thousand dollars +for everything, which offer he accepted, he reserving nothing but +one span of horses, his bed and clothing. We then went to Santa +Rosa, the county seat, to get an abstract of title and a deed to +the property, and now I am once more an honest rancher. While in +Santa Rosa I hired a man and his wife by the name of Benson, by +the year. Mr. Benson proved to be a good man and his wife a +splendid housekeeper. All went well for about five months, and +having filed on the quarter of vacant land adjoining me, of course +I had to move over there. I had noticed a change in Benson's +appearance, but had not thought much about it till one Saturday I +sent him to haul some pickets over to my preemption claim. That +night, having company, I did not go to the cabin on the claim, but +stayed on the other place. Benson was not at supper that evening, +but I paid no attention to it nor thought it strange, supposing he +was just a little late getting home. The next morning I noticed +that he was not at the breakfast table, and I asked Mrs. Benson +why Mr. Bensen didn't come to his breakfast. She asked if I had +not told him to stay on the preemption claim that night. I told +her that I had not and that I had the key and he could not get +into the house, and besides there was no feed there for the mules. +She commenced to feel uneasy then. So as soon as breakfast was +over I took one of my hired men and started out to hunt for him. +We struck the wagon trail and tracked him around for some time. He +had traveled in a terribly round about way. We finally came to him +where he had run his team against a tree, and when we came upon +him he was down in front of the mules whipping them around the +fore legs trying to make them get down and pray. He did not notice +us until I spoke to him and told him to quit whipping the mules. +When he looked at me I could see that he was perfectly wild. It +took us both three hours to get him back to the house. I sent for +the constable, who took him to Santa Rosa and from there he was +taken to the insane asylum. His wife went East to her folks, and I +was told afterwards that he got all right. + +I next tried a Chinese housekeeper, but John Chinaman had too many +relations in the country. There would be two or three Chinamen +there almost every week to see my cook and would stay one or two +nights. It was not what they ate that I cared for, but what they +carried off. + +I tried ranching there for three years and during that time I had +three different men with their wives, but there was always +something wrong, too far from church or too far from neighbors, so +I came to the conclusion that a man had no use with a ranch unless +he had a wife. In the mean time I had proved up on my preemption, +and had all my land fenced in with a picket fence made of red wood +pickets. I had also got sick and tired of ranching, not but what I +had done fairly well, but it was too much bother for a man that +had been raised as I had. I went to San Francisco and placed my +land in the hands of a real estate agent for sale, and it was but +a short time when he sent two men out to look at it. This was the +fall of the year when my fruit was just beautiful and the grapes +ripe in the vineyard, and we were not long in making a trade. + +In less than one month I was without a house or home, so I placed +my money in the bank and arranged to get my interest semi- +annually, and made up my mind to take things easy the balance of +my days. + +About one year from that time I succeeded in getting up a hunting +party, and we went up into the mountains in Mendocino county, +where we found game in abundance, deer, elk and bear. I stayed out +in the mountains nearly three months, during which time I killed +the largest grizzly bear I have ever seen, weighing net, eight +hundred and sixty pounds. This bear I killed at one shot, and it +is the only grizzly that I ever killed at one shot in all my +hunting. We also killed ten large elk. One man in the party killed +an elk that the horns measured from tip to tip, five feet and four +inches, and those horns can be seen at the Lick House in San +Francisco. He sold them for fifty dollars. + +I remained in San Francisco until in the spring of 1886, when +there was a party fitting up a schooner to go sealing on the coast +of Alaska, and I was offered a job as shooter. I agreed to go with +them and they were to pay me two dollars for each seal that I +killed. The first of April we started, and were twenty-two days +getting to where there was seal. + +Now this was a new business to me, and my first seal hunting was +near the mouth of the Yukon river. The captain anchored about +twenty miles from land. There were six sealing boats with the +schooner, the shooter had charge of his boat, and there were two +or three other men to accompany him. One of my boatmen was a +Frenchman and the other a German; they were both stout and willing +to work. While I received two dollars a piece for all the seals +killed, they only got one dollar each, making in all four dollars +each that the seals cost the company. + +In the morning the captain gives each man his course and +instructions to return at once when the signal cannon is fired. +The first morning that we started out we went about four miles +before we saw any seal, when we ran on to a school sleeping on the +water. The two boatmen pulled up among them and I turned loose to +shooting them and got six out of the outfit before they got away +from us. Shooting seal out of a boat reminded me very much of +shooting Indians when on a bucking cayuse, as the boat is always +in motion, and it is all that a person can do to stand up in it +when the sea is any ways rough. That day I killed nine seal and we +were called in at two o'clock, as there was fog coming up, and we +just got in ahead of it. We had fair success sealing until the +last of August, when my crew ventured a little too far and the +wind changed so that we did not hear the cannon and the fog caught +us. Each crew when starting out in the morning always took +supplies along sufficient to last twenty-four hours. This time +when we got caught in the fog the wind had changed on us, so we +tried to remain as near the same place as possible, but this time +we had to guess at it as we could not always tell just which way +the tide was going. This was beyond any doubt the worst trip that +I ever experienced, the fog was very cold and our clothing wet. We +were out three days and nights and then were picked up by another +schooner. The captain of the schooner that picked us up heard the +firing of our cannon that morning and we were picked up about +noon. He at once set sail for our schooner, firing the signal +cannon every half hour, reaching our schooner just as it was +growing dark, and the captain and crew had given us up for lost. +We stayed out until the last of September, when we sailed for San +Francisco, and this wound up my seal hunting. + +There was only one other man in the crew that killed more seal +than I did during the season, but I made the largest day's killing +of any one in the crew, that being twenty seven. But one season +was enough for me in that line of business. I concluded that I +would much rather take my chances on dry land. + +In the spring of 1887 I took a trip to the Puget Sound country and +found Seattle a very lively place; in fact, as much so as any +place I had ever seen in my life. After remaining in Seattle about +two months I concluded that I would try my hand at the hotel +business, as that was something I had not tried, so I bought out a +man named Smith, who owned a big hotel on the corner of South +second and Washington streets, just opposite John Court's Theatre +Building, paying Mr. Smith sixteen thousand dollars for the +property, and besides this I spent one thousand two hundred +dollars in repairing and fitting it up in shape. I gave it the +name of "Riverside House." Here I built up a good business in the +hotel line. In fact, inside of six months from the time I opened +up I had all that I could accommodate all the time, and this was +the first time in my life that I had been perfectly satisfied. + +I had all the business I could attend to, and was making money, +and as fast as I could accumulate a little money I invested it in +different parts of the city in good property. + +In the month of May, 1889, two brothers named Clark, from Chicago, +came to my hotel for the purpose of buying me out, but I told them +my property was not for sale, as I was satisfied and liked the +business and did not think I could find a place that would suit me +better; but about the first of June they returned and made me an +offer of twenty thousand dollars. I told them that I would not +sell at any price, as I was satisfied and intended to remain there +as long as I lived. On the morning of the sixth of June, 1889, my +clerk came to my room and woke me up, saying that there was a fire +in the northern part of town and that the wind was blowing strong +from that direction. I dressed at once, and when I got out on the +street I could see the fire about a half mile from my property, +but had not the faintest idea that it would ever reach me, +although the excitement was running high on the street. I returned +to the hotel, washed, and was just eating my breakfast when one of +the waiters came and told me that he could see the fire from the +door. I told him he must be mistaken, but he went and looked again +and came back and told me that the fire was getting very close. I +ran to the door and saw that it was then within one block of my +hotel. Now I saw that my property was sure to be burnt, so I sent +my clerk up stairs to see whether or not there were any lodgers in +the rooms, and I made a rush for the safe and only just had time +to get it unlocked and the contents out when the fire was on us. + +That fire wiped me out slick and clean as I did not have a +dollar's worth of insurance on the property. Any business man +would have known enough at least to have a few thousand dollars of +insurance on that amount of property, but I had never seen a fire +before in a city and thought it folly to insure, and did not find +out my mistake until it was too late. During the next six months I +had a number of offers of money to build a brick hotel on my lots, +but I could not think for a moment of borrowing the money for that +purpose. + +I remained in Seattle for nine months, during which time there was +a great decrease in the value of property, and I sold my lots +where my hotel had stood at a very reduced price. I tried various +speculations on a small scale during this time, but with very poor +success. + +By this time I had spent and lost in speculation about all the +money that I had realized for my property, and the outside +property that I owned I could not sell at any price. Since that +time I have wandered around from pillar to post, catching a little +job here and there, and at this writing I am temporarily located +at Moscow, Idaho, which is situated in the heart of the famous +Palouse country, one of the greatest countries on the globe for +the growing of wheat, oats, barley, rye, flax and vegetables of +all kinds. + +And now kind reader, begging your pardon, I would say that I have +been two years making up my mind to allow my life to go down in +history to be read by the public, as notoriety is something I +never cared for. One reason, perhaps, is that I was brought up by +noble and generous-hearted Kit Carson, who very much disliked +notoriety, and I do not believe that there ever was a son who +thought more of his father than I did of that high-minded and +excellent man. + +I have had many opportunities to have the history of my life +written up, but would never consent to anything of the kind. +Finally, however, I decided to write it myself, and while it is +written in very rude and unpolished language, by an old +frontiersman who never went to school a day in his life, all he +knows he picked up himself, yet it is the true history of the most +striking events, trials, troubles, tribulations, hardships, +pleasures and satisfactions of a long life of strange adventure +among wild scenes and wilder people, and in telling the story I +hope I have interested the reader. + +It is not strange that in the wilderness, where all nature sings, +from the fairy tinkle of the falling snow to the boom of a storm- +swept canyon; and from the warbling of the birds to the roaring +growl of mad grizzlies; and from the whispers of lost breezes to +thunder of thousands of stampeding hoofs--it is not strange that +among all that, even a worn and illiterate old hunter should try +to sing, if nothing more than the same sort of a song that the +dying sachem sings. So I beg you bear with + +THE OLD SCOUT'S LAMENT. + + Come all of you, my brother scouts, + And join me in my song; + Come, let us sing together, + Though the shadows fall so long. + + Of all the old frontiersmen, + That used to scour the plain, + There are but very few of them + That with us yet remain. + + Day after day, they're dropping off; + They are going, one by one; + Our clan is fast decreasing; + Our race is almost run. + + There were many of our number + That never wore the blue, + But, faithfully, they did their part, + As brave men, tried and true. + + They never joined the army, + But had other work to do + In piloting the coming folks, + To help them safely through. + + But brothers, we are failing; + Our race is almost run; + The days of elk and buffalo, + And beaver traps, are gone. + + Oh, the days of elk and buffalo, + It fills my heart with pain + To know those days are passed and gone, + To never come again. + + We fought the red-skin rascals + Over valley, hill and plain, + We fought him in the mountain top, + And fought him down again. + + Those fighting days are over; + The Indian yell resounds + No more along the border, + Peace sends far sweeter sounds + + But we found great joy, old comrades, + To hear and make it die, + We won bright homes for gentle ones, + And now, our West, good-bye + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, THIRTY-ONE YEARS ON THE PLAINS AND IN THE MOUNTAINS *** + +This file should be named 5337.txt or 5337.zip + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +https://gutenberg.org or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04 + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/5337.zip b/5337.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9dd1e08 --- /dev/null +++ b/5337.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..848ee80 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #5337 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/5337) |